KICKS
OWNER'S MANUAL
Air bag warning
label:
GUID-F996AD4C-EBB1-43FF-A082-07E8EDDB9F39
WAB0022X
“NEVER use a rearward facing child restraint on
a seat protected by an ACTIVE AIRBAG in front
of it, DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD
can occur.”
Be sure to read “Air bag warning label” (P.1-22).
© 2018 NISSAN MOTOR CO., LTD.
OWNER’S MANUAL
0
Nissan Connect
1
Table of
Contents
Illustrated table of contents
0
Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental
restraint system
1
Instruments and controls
2
Pre-driving checks and adjustments
3
Monitor, heater and air conditioner, and audio
system
4
Starting and driving
5
In case of emergency
6
Appearance and care
7
Maintenance and do-it-yourself
8
Technical information
9
Index
10
0 Illustrated table of contents
Seats, seat belts and Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) .....................................................................................................
....
Exterior front ....................................................................................................
....
Exterior rear ......................................................................................................
....
Passenger compartment .......................................................................
....
Cockpit ..................................................................................................................
....
0-2
0-3
0-4
0-5
0-6
Instrument panel .........................................................................................
....
0-7
Meters and gauges ....................................................................................
....
0-8
Engine compartment ...............................................................................
....
0-9
H4K engine model .............................................................................
....
0-9
K9K engine model ..........................................................................
....
0-10
SEATS, SEAT BELTS AND SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
D15A1-76E60A74-1E1B-476F-90A1-42B5B849DFED
WAA0019X
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
0-2
Supplemental front-impact air bags
(P.1-19)
Front seats (P.1-2)
Seat belts (P.1-6)
Head restraints (P.1-4)
Child restraint anchor points (for top
tether strap child restraint) (P.1-15)
Pre-tensioner seat belt system (P.1-26)
Supplemental side-impact air bags*
(P.1-19)
Illustrated table of contents
8.
9.
10.
*:
Rear seats (P.1-3)
— Child restraints (P.1-10)
ISOFIX child restraint system (P.1-14)
Rear armrest* (P.1-4)
if equipped
EXTERIOR FRONT
D15A1-06F61144-5F27-4193-87C5-E0950EF9F755
12.
*:
Doors
— Keys (P.3-2)
— Door locks (P.3-3)
— Intelligent Key system* (P.3-5)
— Remote keyless entry system* (P.3-4)
if equipped
WAA0020X
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Engine hood (P.3-12)
Windshield wiper and washer
— Switch operation (P.2-17)
— Blade replacement (P.8-14)
— Window washer fluid (P.8-16)
Power windows (P.2-20)
Roof rack* (P.2-24)
Recovery hook (P.6-12)
Front view camera* (P.4-7)
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Fog lights* (P.2-17)
Headlights and turn signal lights (P.2-15)
Tires
— Tires and wheels (P.8-26, P.9-5)
— Flat tire (P.6-2)
— Tire placard (P.9-7)
Outside rearview mirrors (P.3-16)
— Side view camera* (P.4-7)
Side turn signal light (P.2-16)
Illustrated table of contents
0-3
EXTERIOR REAR
D15A1-10450723-4493-45CA-A86B-3B40EB43FB48
WAA0021X
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
0-4
Rear window wiper and washer*
— Switch operation (P.2-19)
— Window washer fluid (P.8-16)
Back door (P.3-13)
— Remote keyless entry system* (P.3-4)
— Intelligent Key system* (P.3-5)
High-mounted stop light (P.8-22)
Rear window defogger (P.2-19)
Antenna (P.4-23)
Illustrated table of contents
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
*:
Fuel-filler lid (P.3-15)
Child safety rear door lock (P.3-4)
Parking sensor (sonar) system (P.5-18)
Rear fog light* (P.2-17)
Rearview camera* (P.4-3, P.4-7)
Recovery hook (P.6-12)
Rear combination lights (P.8-22)
if equipped
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
D15A1-3844A1CD-2A53-4021-8085-335984792A5A
WAA0022X
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Inside rearview mirror (P.3-16)
Front room light (P.2-26)
Sun visors (P.2-25, P.3-17)
Door armrest
— Power window switch (P.2-20)
— Outside rearview mirror remote control
switch (driver’s side) (P.3-16)
Rear room light (P.2-26)
Fuel-filler lid opener lever (P.3-15)
7.
8.
9.
10.
*:
Parking brake (P.3-17)
Power outlet (P.2-21)
Rear armrest* (P.1-4)
— Rear cup holders (P.2-23)
Luggage room
— Luggage hooks (P.2-24)
— Cargo cover (P.2-23)
if equipped
Illustrated table of contents
0-5
COCKPIT
D15A1-21C9CF01-F584-434D-ACE0-A11CD1E3350D
*:
**:
WAA0023X
1.
2.
3.
4.
Headlight and turn signal switch (P.2-15)/
Fog light switch* (P.2-17)
Steering wheel
— Power steering (P.5-19)
— Horn (P.2-19)
— Driver’s supplemental front-impact air
bag (P.1-19)
Wiper and washer switch (P.2-17)/Trip
computer mode switch (P.2-13)
Shift lever (P.5-9)
0-6 Illustrated table of contents
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Push-button ignition switch (models with
Intelligent Key system) (P.5-5)
Steering column switches**
Ignition switch (models without Intelligent
Key system) (P.5-4)
Headlight aiming control switch (P.2-16)
Instrument brightness control switch
(P.2-5)
ECO mode switch* (P.5-10)
Cruise control MAIN switch* (P.5-14)/
Speed limiter MAIN switch* (P.5-12)
if equipped
Refer to the NissanConnect Owner’s Manual (if equipped).
INSTRUMENT PANEL
D15A1-B2422D38-5A4E-4112-BB5F-FE5D8EEF62E6
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
*:
**:
— Key card port* (P.5-6)
Defogger switch (P.2-19)
Power outlet (P.2-21)
USB (Universal Serial Bus) connection
port/AUX (auxiliary) input jack (P.4-28 or
NissanConnect**)
Shift lever (P.5-9)
Push-button ignition switch (models with
Intelligent Key system) (P.5-5)
Tilting steering wheel lock lever (P.3-15)
Ignition switch (models without Intelligent
Key system) (P.5-4)
Hood lock release handle (P.3-13)
if equipped
Refer to the NissanConnect Owner’s Manual (if equipped).
WAA0024X
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Side ventilator (P.4-14)
Passenger’s front-impact air bag (P.1-19)
Center ventilator (P.4-14)
Hazard indicator flasher switch (P.6-2)
Power door lock switch (P.3-3)
Audio system* (P.4-17 or **)
— Rear view monitor* (P.4-3)
— Around View Monitor* (P.4-7)
Heater and air conditioner control (P.4-14)
8.
9.
10.
11.
Steering-wheel-mounted controls (left
side)*
— Cruise control switches (P.5-14)
— Speed limiter switches (P.5-12)
Meters and gauges (P.2-4)
Steering-wheel-mounted controls (right
side)*
— Cruise control switches (P.5-14)
— Speed limiter switches (P.5-12)
Glove box (P.2-22)
— Fuse box (P.8-20)
Illustrated table of contents
0-7
METERS AND GAUGES
D15A1-088E5EE4-8597-421B-8873-FE92AA3F5ABE
WAA0025X
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Tachometer (P.2-4)
Vehicle information display (P.2-11)
— Trip computer (P.2-13)
— Clock and outside air temperature
(P.2-14)
— Warnings and indicators (P.2-11)
Speedometer (P.2-4)/Gear shift indicator*
(P.2-5)
Fuel gauge (P.2-5)
Warning and indicator lights (P.2-6)
0-8 Illustrated table of contents
6.
*:
Turn signals/hazard indicator lights
(P.2-10)
if equipped
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
D15A1-43A12B5B-1EC5-4B57-AF49-1F11888695D0
H4K ENGINE MODEL
GUID-BEB53876-54E7-4F9D-AADA-033FBD655EB7
WAA0027X
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Engine coolant reservoir (P.8-6)
Brake and clutch fluid reservoir (P.8-12,
P.8-13)
Engine oil filler cap (P.8-7)
Air cleaner (P.8-14)
Window washer fluid reservoir (P.8-16)
Fuse/fusible link holders (P.8-19)
Engine drive belt location (P.8-10)
8.
9.
10.
Engine oil dipstick (P.8-7)
Battery (P.8-17)
Power steering fluid reservoir (P.8-13)
Illustrated table of contents
0-9
K9K ENGINE MODEL
D15A1-DCE84F59-875A-4CF0-84D3-EDA6A831E16D
WAA0026X
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Engine coolant reservoir (P.8-6)
Brake and clutch fluid reservoir (P.8-12,
P.8-13)
Air cleaner (P.8-14)
Window washer fluid reservoir (P.8-16)
Engine drive belt location (P.8-10)
Engine oil filler cap/Engine oil dipstick
(P.8-7)
0-10
Illustrated table of contents
7.
8.
9.
Battery (P.8-17)
Power steering fluid reservoir (P.8-13)
Fuse/fusible link holders (P.8-19)
1 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental
restraint system
Seats .......................................................................................................................
....
Front seats .................................................................................................
....
Rear seats ...................................................................................................
....
Armrest (if equipped) .........................................................................
....
Head restraints ...............................................................................................
....
Adjustable head restraint components ..............................
....
Non-adjustable head restraint components ..................
....
Remove .........................................................................................................
....
Install ...............................................................................................................
....
Adjust ..............................................................................................................
....
Seat belts ............................................................................................................
....
Precautions on seat belt usage ................................................
....
Child safety ................................................................................................
....
Pregnant women ..................................................................................
....
Injured persons .......................................................................................
....
Center mark on seat belts ............................................................
....
Three-point type seat belts ..........................................................
....
1-2
1-2
1-3
1-4
1-4
1-4
1-4
1-5
1-5
1-5
1-6
1-6
1-8
1-8
1-9
1-9
1-9
Two-point type seat belts ........................................................
....
Seat belt maintenance ...............................................................
....
Child restraints ...........................................................................................
....
Precautions on child restraint usage ..............................
....
Universal child restraints for front seat and
rear seats ...............................................................................................
....
ISOFIX child restraint system .................................................
....
Child restraint anchorage ........................................................
....
Child restraint installation using ISOFIX .......................
....
Child restraint installation using three-point type
seat belt ..................................................................................................
....
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) .....................................
....
Precautions on Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) .......................................................................................
....
Supplemental air bag systems .............................................
....
SRS air bag deployment conditions ................................
....
Pre-tensioner seat belt system ............................................
....
Repair and replacement procedure .................................
....
1-10
1-10
1-10
1-10
1-11
1-14
1-15
1-15
1-17
1-19
1-19
1-23
1-24
1-26
1-27
SEATS
D15A1-65E1CF4D-248A-4E0E-B80E-0E67876FCCD6
Manual seatD15A1-E5A26E75-3DD6-4E76-AA24-3DBFA97F9F4B
adjustment
WARNING:
After adjusting a seat, gently shake the seat
to confirm that the seat is locked securely. If
the seat is not locked securely, it may move
suddenly and could cause the loss of control
of the vehicle.
SSS0133A
WARNING:
.
.
.
.
1-2
Do not drive and/or ride in the vehicle
with the seatback reclined. This can be
dangerous. The shoulder belt will not be
properly against the body. In an accident,
you and your passengers could be
thrown into the shoulder belt and receive
neck or other serious injuries. You and
your passengers could also slide under
the lap belt and receive serious injuries.
For the most effective protection while
the vehicle is in motion, the seatback
should be upright. Always sit well back
and upright in the seat and adjust the
seat belt properly. (See “Seat belts” (P.16).)
Do not leave children unattended inside
the vehicle. They could unknowingly activate switches or controls. Unattended
children could become involved in serious accidents.
To help avoid risk of injury or death
through unintended operation of the
vehicle and/or its systems, do not leave
children, people who require the assis-
tance of others or pets unattended in
your vehicle. Additionally, the temperature inside a closed vehicle on a warm
day can quickly become high enough to
cause a significant risk of injury or death
to people and pets.
CAUTION:
When adjusting the seat positions, be sure
not to contact any moving parts to avoid
possible injuries and/or damages.
FRONT SEATS
D15A1-EA19C552-8EF1-470D-8CB3-CAABA9F21446
WARNING:
Do not adjust the driver’s seat while driving
so that full attention may be given to vehicle
operation.
Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
ways replace and adjust them properly
if they have been removed for any
reason.
WAB0012X
Forward and backward:
GUID-F996AD4C-EBB1-43FF-A082-07E8EDDB9F39
1. Pull up the adjusting lever .
2. Slide the seat to the desired position.
3. Release the adjusting lever to lock the seat
in position.
Reclining:
GUID-F996AD4C-EBB1-43FF-A082-07E8EDDB9F39
1. Pull up the adjusting lever .
2. Tilt the seatback to the desired position.
3. Release the adjusting lever to lock the
seatback in position.
The reclining feature allows the adjustment of
the seatback for occupants of different sizes to
help obtain the proper seat belt fit. (See “Seat
belts” (P.1-6).)
The seatback may be reclined to allow occupants to rest when the vehicle is parked.
REAR SEATS
D15A1-0B6BB7B4-CDF3-4675-A850-65CBB6C319C8
Folding
WARNING:
.
.
.
.
Seat lifter (if equipped):
GUID-F996AD4C-EBB1-43FF-A082-07E8EDDB9F39
Pull up or push down the adjusting lever
to
adjust the seat height until the desired position
is achieved.
.
WAB0001X
D15A1-3EE22A4D-7601-41EF-A543-670C2C26F34B
Never allow anyone to ride in the luggage
area or on the rear seats when they are in
the fold-down position. Use of these
areas by passengers without proper restraints could result in serious injury in an
accident or sudden stop.
Do not fold down the rear seats when
occupants are in the rear seat area or any
luggage is on the rear seats.
Properly secure all luggage to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. Do not
place luggage higher than the seatbacks.
When returning the seatbacks to the
upright position, be certain they are
completely secured in the latched position. If they are not completely secured,
passengers may be injured in an accident
or sudden stop.
Head restraints should be adjusted properly as they may provide significant
protection against whiplash injury. Al-
To fold the seatback, pull the knob .
To return the seatback to the seating position,
lift up the seatback and push it to the upright
position until it is latched.
CAUTION:
.
.
When loading the luggage in the luggage
area, be careful not to scratch or damage
the seat belt.
When operating the seatback, be careful
not to scratch or damage the seat belt.
Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
1-3
HEAD RESTRAINTS
D15A1-1D2DB560-F0D1-4E17-A618-221460107213
ARMREST (if GUID-0F10669B-14DD-4151-AF42-00AAFCC1F6A9
equipped)
Rear
GUID-DFD22A94-99BD-460F-AD8A-8D64EF44F708
WAB0005X
Pull the armrest down as shown.
Head restraints supplement the other vehicle
safety systems. They may provide additional
protection against injury in certain rear end
collisions. Adjustable head restraints must be
adjusted properly, as specified in this section.
Check the adjustment after someone else
uses the seat. Do not attach anything to the
head restraint stalks or remove the head
restraint. Do not use the seat if the head
restraint has been removed. If the head
restraint was removed, reinstall and properly
adjust the head restraint before an occupant
uses the seating position. Failure to follow
these instructions can reduce the effectiveness of the head restraint. This may increase
the risk of serious injury or death in a
collision.
.
.
.
.
.
1-4
seating position.
WARNING:
Your vehicle is equipped with a head
restraint that may be integrated, adjustable
or non-adjustable.
Adjustable head restraints have multiple
notches along the stalk to lock them in a
desired adjustment position.
The non-adjustable head restraints have a
single locking notch to secure them to the
seat frame.
Proper Adjustment:
— For the adjustable type, align the head
restraint so the center of your ear is
approximately level with the center of
the head restraint.
— If your ear position is still higher than the
recommended alignment, place the
head restraint at the highest position.
If the head restraint has been removed,
ensure that it is reinstalled and locked in
place before riding in that designated
Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
ADJUSTABLE HEAD RESTRAINT COMPONENTS D15A1-F89D903A-0FED-4CCE-B4EF-23A633657456
SSS0992
1.
2.
3.
4.
Removable head restraint
Multiple notches
Lock knob
Stalks
NON-ADJUSTABLE HEAD RESTRAINT
COMPONENTS
D15A1-D34535EC-DF0C-4269-8380-2934FADC6FFC
JVR0203X
1.
Removable head restraint
2.
3.
4.
Single notch
Lock knob
Stalks
REMOVE
INSTALL
D15A1-B3A99A97-928E-47FE-884F-0D175DFBAB62
D15A1-B053D940-2B1F-4FFC-8D26-917A6987E0CA
For adjustable head restraint
Adjust the head restraint so the center is level
with the center of your ears. If your ear position
is still higher than the recommended alignment, place the head restraint at the highest
position.
SSS1038
1.
SSS1037
Use the following procedure to remove the
head restraint.
1. Pull the head restraint up to the highest
position.
2. Push and hold the lock knob.
3. Remove the head restraint from the seat.
4. Store the head restraint properly in a
secure place so it is not loose in the vehicle.
5. Reinstall and properly adjust the head
restraint before an occupant uses the
seating position.
2.
3.
Align the head restraint stalks with the
holes in the seat. Make sure that the head
restraint is facing the correct direction. The
stalk with the adjustment notch
must be
installed in the hole with the lock knob .
Push and hold the lock knob and push the
head restraint down.
Properly adjust the head restraint before an
occupant uses the seating position.
ADJUST
D15A1-DC2EB261-1F70-47A9-B8C3-77BA84D8A42B
JVR0259X
For non-adjustable head restraint
Make sure the head restraint is positioned from
the stored position or any non-latch position so
the lock knob is engaged in the notch before
riding in that designated seating position.
Raise
D15A1-964B95EB-865D-456B-8684-E0B99AE6516B
SSS0997
SSS1035
To raise the head restraint, pull it up.
Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
1-5
SEAT BELTS
Make sure the head restraint is positioned from
the stored position or any non-latch position so
the lock knob is engaged in the notch before
riding in that designated seating position.
Lower
D15A1-F2026C46-45A9-4299-92E9-871E9D547B34
D15A1-B24797EF-9596-4C08-A632-05BD45FC2BE9
PRECAUTIONS
ON SEAT BELT USAGE
D15A1-7E5A0FD7-D295-4EFD-A08C-C72A17D14624
If you are wearing the seat belt properly
adjusted and sitting upright and well back in
the seat, chances of being injured or killed in an
accident and/or the severity of injury may be
greatly reduced. NISSAN strongly encourages
you and all of your passengers to buckle up
every time you drive, even if your seating
position includes the supplemental air bag
systems.
SSS1036
To lower, push and hold the lock knob and
push the head restraint down.
Make sure the head restraint is positioned so
the lock knob is engaged in the notch before
riding in that designated seating position.
1-6 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
WARNING:
.
SSS0134A
.
.
.
.
SSS0136A
.
.
SSS0014
SSS0016
.
Seatbelts are designed to bear upon the
bony structure of the body, and should be
worn low across the front of the pelvis or
the pelvis, chest and shoulders, as applicable; wearing the lap section of the belt
across the abdominal area must be
avoided. Serious injury may occur if a
seat belt is not worn properly.
Position the lap belt as low and snug as
possible around the hips, not the waist. A
lap belt worn too high could increase the
risk of internal injuries in an accident.
Do not allow more than one person to use
the same seat belt. Each belt assembly
must only be used by one occupant; it is
dangerous to put a belt around a child
being carried on the occupant’s lap.
Never carry more people in the vehicle
than there are seat belts.
Never wear seat belts inside out. Belts
should not be worn with straps twisted.
Doing so may reduce their effectiveness.
Seatbelts should be adjusted as firmly as
possible, consistent with comfort, to provide the protection for which they have
been designed. A slack belt will greatly
reduce the protection afforded to the
wearer.
Every person who drives or rides in this
vehicle should use a seat belt at all times.
Children should be properly restrained in
the rear seat and, if appropriate, in a child
restraint system.
Do not put the belt behind your back or
under your arm. Always route the
shoulder belt over your shoulder and
across your chest. The belt should be
Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
1-7
.
.
.
.
.
.
away from your face and neck, but not
falling off your shoulder. Serious injury
may occur if a seat belt is not worn
properly.
No modifications or additions should be
made by the user which will either prevent the seat belt adjusting devices from
operating to remove slack, or prevent the
seat belt assembly from being adjusted
to remove slack.
Care should be taken to avoid contamination of the webbing with polishes, oils
and chemicals, and particularly battery
acid. Cleaning may safely be carried out
using mild soap and water. The belt
should be replaced if webbing becomes
frayed, contaminated or damaged.
All seat belt assemblies including retractors and attaching hardware should be
inspected after any collision by a NISSAN
dealer. NISSAN recommends that all seat
belt assemblies in use during a collision
be replaced unless the collision was
minor and the belts show no damage
and continue to operate properly. Seat
belt assemblies not in use during a
collision should also be inspected and,
when necessary, replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted.
It is essential to replace the entire assembly after it has been worn in a severe
impact even if damage to the assembly is
not obvious.
Once the pre-tensioner seat belt has
activated, it cannot be reused. It must
be replaced together with the retractor.
Contact a NISSAN dealer.
Removal and installation of the pre-tensioner seat belt system components
should be done by a NISSAN dealer.
CHILD SAFETY
D15A1-50FE0FCD-DBC6-4BF8-A13A-E3AFA74EB719
WARNING:
.
.
Large children
D15A1-7EC09A67-00D1-4A31-9107-8BC52BC8A5CE
WARNING:
.
Infants and children need special protection. The vehicle’s seat belts may not fit
them properly. The shoulder belt may
come too close to the face or neck. The
lap belt may not fit over their small
hipbones. In an accident, an improperly
fitted seat belt could cause serious or
fatal injury.
Always use an appropriate child restraint
system.
Children need adults to help protect them.
They need to be properly restrained. The
proper restraint depends on the child’s size.
Infants and D15A1-9EA9FF02-4615-4E08-8998-8897493078B8
small children
.
Never allow children to stand or kneel on
any seats.
Never allow children in the luggage area
while the vehicle is moving. A child could
be seriously injured in an accident or
sudden stop.
Children who are too large for a child restraint
system should be seated and restrained by the
seat belts that are provided.
If the child’s seating position has a shoulder
belt that fits close to the face or neck, the use
of a booster seat (commercially available) may
help overcome this. The booster seat should
raise the child so that the shoulder belt is
properly positioned across the top, middle
portion of the shoulder and the lap belt is low
on the hips. The booster seat should also fit the
vehicle seat. Once the child has grown so that
the shoulder belt is no longer on or near the
face or neck of the child, use the shoulder belt
without the booster seat. In addition, there are
many types of child restraint systems available
for larger children that should be used for
maximum protection.
PREGNANT WOMEN
D15A1-EB362D86-544D-4564-AF14-2AA962BFFC63
SSS0099
NISSAN recommends that infants and small
children be seated in a child restraint system.
You should choose a child restraint system that
fits your vehicle and the child, and always
follow the manufacturer’s instructions for installation and use.
1-8 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
NISSAN recommends that pregnant women
use seat belts. The seat belt should be worn
snug, and always position the lap belt as low as
possible around the hips, not the waist. Place
the shoulder belt over your shoulder and
across your chest. Never run the lap/shoulder
belt over your abdominal area. Contact your
doctor for specific recommendations.
INJURED PERSONS
D15A1-11687DB4-061D-4F49-9F66-C8C24C9C8A28
THREE-POINT
TYPE SEAT BELTS
D15A1-0BC1986B-C5D8-4503-B446-845D468C8DFE
NISSAN recommends that injured persons use
seat belts. Contact your doctor for specific
recommendations.
Fastening seat
belts
D15A1-89F085F0-308A-481D-A480-9ED347F5EEA1
CENTER MARK
ON SEAT BELTS
D15A1-4379FCB6-A0FC-49F8-B357-9DDABA29EF87
Selecting correct
set of seat belts
D15A1-D44FE812-A107-4F66-B3D5-9588A17259FA
SSS0467
3.
SSS0292
WARNING:
SSS0671
The center seat belt buckle is identified by the
CENTER mark. The center seat belt tongue can
be fastened only into the center seat belt
buckle.
The seatback should not be in a reclined
position any more than needed for comfort.
Seat belts are most effective when the
passenger sits well back and straight up in
the seat.
1.
2.
Adjust the seat. (See “Seats” (P.1-2).)
Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retractor
and insert the tongue into the buckle until
you hear and feel the latch engage.
. The retractor is designed to lock during
a sudden stop or on impact. A slow
pulling motion permits the belt to
move, and allows you some freedom
of movement in the seat.
. If the seat belt cannot be pulled from
its fully retracted position, firmly pull
the belt and release it. Then smoothly
pull the belt out of the retractor.
4.
Position the lap belt portion low and snug
on the hips as shown.
Pull the shoulder belt portion toward the
retractor to take up extra slack. Be sure the
shoulder belt is routed over your shoulder
and is snug across your chest.
UnfasteningD15A1-B9FD6826-2EEF-4B6A-BBB2-8DA9DC9A114C
seat belts
Push the button on the buckle. The seat belt
automatically retracts.
Checking seat
belt operation
D15A1-403EE7BD-2595-4C9C-B3EC-2256E3EF91C8
Seat belt retractors are designed to lock seat
belt movement:
. When the seat belt is pulled quickly from
the retractor.
. When the vehicle slows down rapidly.
To increase your confidence in the seat belts,
check the operation by grasping the shoulder
belt and pulling forward quickly. The retractor
should lock and restrict further belt movement.
If the retractor does not lock during this check,
contact a NISSAN dealer immediately.
Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
1-9
CHILD RESTRAINTS
D15A1-F2068D73-379A-46BC-9200-AB7FD98E9DCB
TWO-POINT GUID-E952EA08-F709-4D4A-99C5-844A1548DA94
TYPE SEAT BELTS
PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD RESTRAINT
USAGE
D15A1-843A7C9C-1266-4B11-9B92-C7AD768A370E
Fastening seat
belts
GUID-C22E60FF-2921-4350-8C15-D91E7BB1501C
JVR0037X
3.
Position the lap belt portion low and snug
on the hips as shown.
SSS0099
JVR0035X
1.
Insert the tongue into the buckle until you
hear and feel the latch engage.
Unfastening GUID-857F01C1-9F77-406A-A3D7-286A71B492F0
seat belts
Push the button on the buckle.
SEAT BELT D15A1-1C0BBCBB-C6A2-4E79-BD2C-4BF0F58A6E61
MAINTENANCE
JVR0036X
2.
Adjust the seat belt length. To shorten, hold
the tongue and pull the upper belt as
illustrated . To lengthen, hold the tongue
and pull the under belt as illustrated .
Periodically check that the seat belt and all the
metal components, such as buckles, tongues,
retractors, flexible wires and anchors, work
properly. If loose parts, deterioration, cuts or
other damage on the seat belt webbing is
found, the entire seat belt assembly should be
replaced.
If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt guide of the
seat belt anchors, the seat belts may retract
slowly. Wipe the shoulder belt guide with a
clean, dry cloth.
To clean the seat belt webbing, apply a mild
soap solution or any solution recommended
for cleaning upholstery or carpet. Then wipe
with a cloth and allow the seat belts to dry in
the shade. Do not allow the seat belts to retract
until they are completely dry.
WARNING:
.
.
.
.
1-10
Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Infants and small children should always
be placed in an appropriate child restraint while riding in the vehicle. Failure
to use a child restraint can result in
serious injury or death.
Infants and small children should never
be carried on your lap. It is not possible
for even the strongest adult to resist the
forces of a severe accident. The child
could be crushed between the adult and
parts of the vehicle. Also, do not put the
same seat belt around both your child
and yourself.
NISSAN recommends that the child restraints be installed in the rear seat.
According to accident statistics, children
are safer when properly restrained in the
rear seat than in the front seat.
Improper use or improper installation of
a child restraint can increase the risk or
severity of injury for both the child and
other occupants of the vehicle and can
.
.
.
.
.
.
lead to serious injury or death in an
accident.
Follow all of the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions for installation and
use. When purchasing a child restraint, be
sure to select one which will fit your child
and vehicle. It may not be possible to
properly install some types of child restraint in your vehicle.
The direction of the child restraint, either
front-facing or rear-facing, depends on
the type of the child restraint and the size
of the child. Refer to the child restraint
manufacturer’s instructions for details.
Adjustable seatbacks should be positioned to ensure full contact between
child restraint and seatback.
After attaching a child restraint, test it
before you place the child in it. Push it
from side to side and tug it forward to
make sure that is held securely in place.
The child restraint should not move more
than 25 mm (1 in). If the restraint is not
secure, tighten the belt as necessary, or
install the restraint in another seat and
test it again.
When the child restraint is not in use,
keep it secured with the ISOFIX child
restraint system or a seat belt to prevent
it from being thrown around in case of a
sudden stop or accident.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint
on the front passenger’s seat when the
front passenger’s air bag is available.
Supplemental front-impact air bags inflate with great force. A rear-facing child
restraint could be struck by the supplemental front-impact air bags in an accident and could seriously injure or kill your
child.
.
If the seat belt in the position where a
child restraint is installed requires a locking device and if it is not used, injuries
could result from a child restraint tipping
over during normal vehicle braking or
cornering.
vehicle.
CAUTION:
Remember that a child restraint left in a
closed vehicle can become very hot. Check
the seating surface and buckles before placing your child in a child restraint.
NISSAN recommends that infants and small
children be seated in a child restraint. You
should choose a child restraint that fits your
vehicle and always follow the manufacturer’s
instructions for installation and use. In addition,
there are many types of child restraints available for larger children that should be used for
maximum protection.
UNIVERSAL CHILD RESTRAINTS FOR
FRONT SEAT
AND REAR SEATS
D15A1-8B3DDE3B-9EF7-4AD7-8EE8-F4DD67F0B46E
When selecting any child restraint, keep the
following points in mind:
. Choose a child restraint that complies with
AIS 072-2009.
. Place your child in the child restraint and
check the various adjustments to be sure
the child restraint is compatible with your
child. Always follow all of the recommended
procedures.
. Check the child restraint in your vehicle to
be sure it is compatible with vehicle’s seat
belt system.
. Refer to the tables later in this section for a
list of the recommended fitment positions
and the approved child restraints for your
Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
1-11
Approved child restraint positions (without ISOFIX)
D15A1-99C05CBF-D133-451D-AEF8-7EEDE61066E9
The following restriction is applied when using child restraints varying by infants weight and
installation position (without ISOFIX child restraint).
Seating position
Type of child seat
Weight group
Front passenger
seat
Rear outboard
seat
Rear center seat
Carrycot fitted
across the vehicle
0 (<10 kg)
X
X
X
Rear-facing shell
seat
0 or 0+ (<10 kg
and <13 kg)
X
U (1)
X
Shell seat/rearfacing seat
0+ and I (<13 kg
and 9 - 18 kg)
X
U (1)
X
Forward-facing
seat
I (9 - 18 kg)
X
U (1)
X
Booster seat
II and III (15 - 25 kg
and 22 - 36 kg)
X
U (1)
X
X:
U:
(1):
Seat position not suitable for children in this mass group.
Suitable for universal category child restraint systems, forward and rearward facing,
approved for use in this mass group.
If you install a child restraint system in the rear seat, remove and store the rear seat head
restraint.
1-12 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Approved child restraint positions (with ISOFIX)
D15A1-1F2E008A-6D1F-42E8-AF1A-FBD3FE4AAF4F
The following restriction is applied when using child restraints varying by infants weight and
installation position (ISOFIX child restraint).
Seating position
Type of child Weight
seat
group
Front passenger
Rear outboard
seat
Rear center seat
F
ISO/L1
X
X
X
G
ISO/L2
X
X
X
E
ISO/R1
X
IL (1)
X
0+ (<13 kg)
and I (9-18
kg)
D
ISO/R2
X
IL (1)
X
C
ISO/R3
X
IL (1)
X
B
ISO/F2
X
IUF, IL (2)
X
Forward-facing seat
I (9 - 18 kg)
B1 ISO/F2X
X
IUF, IL (2)
X
A
X
IUF, IL (2)
X
Booster seat
II (15-25 kg) and
III (22-36 kg)
X
IUF, IL (2)
X
Carrycot
fitted across
the vehicle
0 (<10 kg)
Rear-facing
shell seat
0 (<10 kg)
and 0+ (<13
kg)
Shell seat/
rear-facing
seat
ISO/F3
X:
Not suitable for installation of ISOFIX child restraint system (CRS) in these seating position.
IUF: Suitable for ISOFIX forward-facing CRS of universal category approved for this mass group.
IL: Suitable for the particular ISOFIX CRS given in the following list. These ISOFIX CRS are those of
the “CRS manufacturer vehicle list (online)” or “Semi-universal” categories.
(1)
If you install a child restraint system in the rear seat, remove the rear seat head restraint.
(2) If you install a child restraint system in the rear seat, set the front seat slide position for
clearance to the rear seat child restraint/child’s legs.
Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
1-13
List of recommended ISOFIX child restraints
GUID-772CFE66-359F-4154-9F20-239285A4F57E
Front passenger
seat
0 (<10 kg)
Rear outboard seat
Rear center seat
—
—
—
—
RÖMER/Britax
Babysafe
plus ISOFIX Base
Belted & Support
leg
Rearward facing
—
—
Maxi Cosi Cabrio
Fix plus
Easy Fix
Belted & Support
leg
Rearward facing
—
—
0+ (<13 kg)
SSS0637
ISOFIX lower anchor location
I (9 - 18 kg)
—
Maxi Cosi pearl
plus family fix
Belted & Support
leg
Forward facing
II (15 - 25 kg)
—
RÖMER/Britax Kid
fix XP
Belted & ISOFIX
Forward facing
—
—
RÖMER/Britax Kid
fix XP
Belted & ISOFIX
Forward facing
—
III (22 - 36 kg)
ISOFIX CHILD
RESTRAINT SYSTEM
D15A1-6235B8DC-F8F3-4AAD-96C5-9B6862339F0B
The ISOFIX anchors are located as shown. A
label is attached to the seatback to help you
locate the ISOFIX anchors.
ISOFIX child restraint
anchor attachments
D15A1-21A69F60-3CFE-4D54-86EC-70A15FEE5A82
ISOFIX lower
anchor point locations
D15A1-CD41505C-570B-4FC7-869D-A0B887BF5409
The ISOFIX anchor points are provided to install
child restraints in the rear outboard seating
positions only. Do not attempt to install a
child restraint in the center seating position
using the ISOFIX anchors.
SSS0644
Anchor attachment
WAB0023X
ISOFIX label location
Your vehicle is equipped with special anchor
points that are used with ISOFIX child restraint
systems.
1-14 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
ISOFIX child restraints include two rigid attachments that can be connected to two anchors
located in the seat. With this system, you do not
have to use a vehicle seat belt to secure the
child restraint. Check your child restraint for a
label stating that it is compatible with the
ISOFIX child restraints. This information may
also be in the instructions provided by the child
restraint manufacturer.
ISOFIX child restraints generally require the use
of a top tether strap or other anti-rotation
devices such as support legs. When installing
ISOFIX child restraints, carefully read and follow
the instructions in this manual and those
supplied with the child restraints. (See “Child
restraint installation using ISOFIX” (P.1-15).)
Anchorage D15A1-75D98DA1-7089-4FFA-B05D-ED75C185A0FA
location
.
CHILD RESTRAINT
ANCHORAGE
D15A1-2F353EF7-3CA5-4306-8442-8A5AC7700782
Your vehicle is designed to accommodate a
child restraint system on the rear seat. When
installing a child restraint system, carefully read
and follow the instructions in this manual and
those supplied with the child restraint system.
WARNING:
.
.
Child restraint anchorages are designed
to withstand only those loads imposed
by correctly fitted child restraints. Under
no circumstances are they to be used for
adult seat belts, harnesses or for attaching other items or equipment to the
vehicle. Doing so could damage the child
restraint anchorages. The child restraint
will not be properly installed using the
damaged anchorage, and a child could be
seriously injured or killed in a collision.
The child restraint top tether strap may
be damaged by contact with the cargo
cover or items in the luggage area.
Remove the cargo cover from the vehicle
or secure it and any luggage. Your child
could be seriously injured or killed in a
collision if the top tether strap is damaged.
WAB0002X
The anchor points are located as illustrated.
CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING
ISOFIX
D15A1-0993CDD3-0AB3-475E-8CE1-A5BFE9FAB88B
WARNING:
.
.
.
.
Attach ISOFIX child restraints only at the
specified locations. For the ISOFIX lower
anchor locations, see “ISOFIX child restraint system” (P.1-14). If a child restraint
is not secured properly, your child could
be seriously injured or killed in an accident.
Do not install child restraints that require
the use of a top tether strap to seating
positions that do not have a top tether
anchor.
Do not secure a child restraint in the
center rear seating position using the
ISOFIX lower anchors. The child restraint
will not be secured properly.
Inspect the lower anchors by inserting
your fingers into the lower anchor area
and feeling to make sure there are no
obstructions over the ISOFIX anchors,
such as seat belt webbing or seat cushion
material. The child restraint will not be
secured properly if the ISOFIX anchors
are obstructed.
Child restraint anchorages are designed
to withstand only those loads imposed
by correctly fitted child restraints. Under
no circumstances are they to be used for
adult seat belts, harnesses or for attaching other items or equipment to the
vehicle. Doing so could damage the child
restraint anchorages. The child restraint
will not be properly installed using the
damaged anchorage, and a child could be
seriously injured or killed in a collision.
Installation D15A1-4B0957C2-34AE-47ED-B909-321CC891FA8E
on rear outboard seats
Front-facing: GUID-F996AD4C-EBB1-43FF-A082-07E8EDDB9F39
Be sure to follow the manufacturer’s instructions for the proper use of your child restraint.
Follow these steps to install a front-facing child
restraint on the rear outboard seats using
ISOFIX:
SSS0646A
Front-facing: Steps 1 and 2
1.
Position the child restraint on the seat
Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
.
1-15
2.
3.
Secure the child restraint anchor attachments to the ISOFIX lower anchors .
The back of the child restraint should be
secured against the vehicle seat back. If
necessary, remove the head restraint to
obtain the correct child restraint fit. (See
“Head restraints” (P.1-4).) If the head restraint is removed, store it in a secure place.
Be sure to install the head restraint when
the child restraint is removed. If the seating
position does not have an adjustable head
restraint and it is interfering with the
proper child restraint fit, try another seating position or a different child restraint.
6.
If the child restraint is equipped with other
anti-rotation devices such as support legs,
use them instead of the top tether strap
following the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions.
SSS0649A
Rear-facing: Steps 1 and 2
1.
2.
Position the child restraint on the seat .
Secure the child restraint anchor attachments to the ISOFIX lower anchors .
SSS0755A
Front-facing: Step 7
7.
8.
SSS0754A
Front-facing: Step 4
4.
5.
Shorten the rigid attachment to have the
child restraint firmly tightened; press downward and rearward firmly in the center
of the child restraint with your knee to
compress the vehicle seat cushion and
seatback.
If the child restraint is equipped with a top
tether strap, route the top tether strap and
secure the tether strap to the tether
anchor point. (See “Child restraint anchorage” (P.1-15).)
1-16
Test the child restraint before you place the
child in it . Push the child restraint from
side to side and tug it forward to make sure
that it is held securely in place.
Check to make sure that the child restraint
is properly secured prior to each use. If the
child restraint is loose, repeat steps 3
through 7.
Rear-facing: GUID-F996AD4C-EBB1-43FF-A082-07E8EDDB9F39
Be sure to follow the manufacturer’s instructions for the proper use of your child restraint.
Follow these steps to install a rear-facing child
restraint on the rear outboard seats using
ISOFIX:
Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
SSS0756A
Rear-facing: Step 3
3.
4.
Shorten the rigid attachment to have the
child restraint firmly tightened; press downward and rearward firmly in the center
of the child restraint with your hand to
compress the vehicle seat cushion and
seatback.
If the child restraint is equipped with a top
tether strap, route the top tether strap and
secure the tether strap to the tether
anchor point. (See “Child restraint anchorage” (P.1-15).)
5.
If the child restraint is equipped with other
anti-rotation devices such as support legs,
use them instead of the top tether strap
following the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions.
SSS0758A
SSS0647A
Front-facing: Step 1
1.
Front-facing: Step 4
Position the child restraint on the seat
.
4.
SSS0757A
Rear-facing: Step 6
6.
7.
Test the child restraint before you place the
child in it . Push the child restraint from
side to side and tug it forward to make sure
that it is held securely in place.
Check to make sure that the child restraint
is properly secured prior to each use. If the
child restraint is loose, repeat steps 3
through 6.
CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING
THREE-POINT
TYPE SEAT BELT
D15A1-88B65913-C497-4813-85DA-387E04EA1320
Installation on
rear seats
D15A1-BD49434F-1329-4217-B13F-291E826C3ED4
Front-facing: GUID-F996AD4C-EBB1-43FF-A082-07E8EDDB9F39
Be sure to follow the manufacturer’s instructions for the proper use of your child restraint.
Follow these steps to install a front-facing child
restraint on the rear seats using three-point
type seat belt:
Remove any additional slack from the seat
belt; press downward
and rearward
firmly in the center of the child restraint
with your knee to compress the vehicle
seat cushion and seatback while pulling up
on the seat belt.
SSS0493A
Front-facing: Step 2
2.
3.
Route the seat belt tongue through the
child restraint and insert it into the buckle
until you hear and feel the latch engage.
To prevent slack in the seat belt webbing, it
is necessary to secure the seat belt in place
with locking devices attached to the child
restraint.
SSS0638A
Front-facing: Step 5
5.
6.
Test the child restraint before you place the
child in it . Push the child restraint from
side to side and tug it forward to make sure
that it is held securely in place.
Check to make sure that the child restraint
is properly secured prior to each use. If the
child restraint is loose, repeat steps 3
through 5.
Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
1-17
Rear-facing:
child restraint is loose, repeat steps 3
through 5.
restraint.
GUID-F996AD4C-EBB1-43FF-A082-07E8EDDB9F39
SSS0639A
SSS0759A
Rear-facing: Step 4
Rear-facing: Step 1
Be sure to follow the manufacturer’s instructions for the proper use of your child restraint.
Follow these steps to install a rear-facing child
restraint on the rear seats using three-point
type seat belt:
1. Position the child restraint on the seat .
4.
Remove any additional slack from the seat
belt; press downward
and rearward
firmly in the center of the child restraint
with your hand to compress the vehicle
seat cushion and seatback while pulling up
on the seat belt.
SSS0658A
SSS0654A
Rear-facing: Step 2
2.
3.
Route the seat belt tongue through the
child restraint and insert it into the buckle
until you hear and feel the latch engage.
To prevent slack in the seat belt webbing, it
is necessary to secure the seat belt in place
with locking devices attached to the child
1-18
Rear-facing: Step 5
5.
6.
Test the child restraint before you place the
child in it . Push the child restraint from
side to side and tug it forward to make sure
that it is held securely in place.
Check to make sure that the child restraint
is properly secured prior to each use. If the
Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
D15A1-33C3B6B4-4C4F-4C02-B8D3-E13829BAF5BB
PRECAUTIONS ON SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
(SRS)
D15A1-17232207-DAB5-4C49-986F-9CACB2FAA6F8
This Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) section contains important information concerning the driver’s and passenger’s supplemental
front-impact air bags, supplemental side-impact air bags and pre-tensioner seat belts.
Supplemental
front-impact air bag system
D15A1-5ED4D143-8D8A-4A77-BB38-6650BD18322C
This system can help cushion the impact force
to the head and chest area of the driver and/or
front passenger in certain frontal collisions. The
supplemental front-impact air bag is designed
to inflate on the front where the vehicle is
impacted.
are too close to, or are against, the air bag
modules during inflation.
The air bags will deflate quickly after deployment.
The SRS operates only when the ignition
switch is in the “ON” position.
When the ignition switch is in the “ON”
position, the SRS air bag warning light
illuminates for about 7 seconds and then
turns off. This indicates that the SRS is
operational. (See “SRS air bag warning light”
(P.1-22).)
Supplemental side-impact air bag system (if equipped)
D15A1-931BDBE2-9985-41F3-A607-F67C072B2A98
This system can help cushion the impact force
to the chest and pelvis areas of the driver and
front passenger in certain side-impact collisions. The supplemental side-impact air bag is
designed to inflate on the side where the
vehicle is impacted.
The SRS is designed to supplement the accident protection provided by the driver’s and/or
front passenger’s seat belts and is not designed to substitute for them. The SRS can
help save lives and reduce serious injuries.
However, inflating air bags may cause abrasions or other injuries. Air bags do not provide
protection to the lower body. Seat belts should
always be correctly worn and occupants
should always be seated a suitable distance
away from the steering wheel and the instrument panel. (See “Seat belts” (P.1-6).) The air
bags inflate quickly in order to help protect the
occupants. The force of the air bags inflating
can increase the risk of injury if the occupants
Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
1-19
WARNING:
.
.
The supplemental front-impact air bags
ordinarily will not inflate in the event of a
side impact, rear impact, rollover, or lower severity frontal collision. Always wear
the seat belts to help reduce the risk or
severity of injury in accidents.
The seat belts and the supplemental
front-impact air bags are most effective
when you are sitting well back and upright in the seat. The front-impact air
bags inflate with great force. If you are
unrestrained, leaning forward, sitting
sideways, or out of position in any way,
.
SSS0131A
SSS0006
SSS0132A
SSS0007
you and your passengers are at greater
risk of injury or death in an accident. You
and your passengers may also receive
serious or fatal injuries from the supplemental front-impact air bag if you are up
against it when it inflates. Always sit back
against the seatback and as far away as
practical from the steering wheel or
instrument panel. Always use the seat
belts.
Keep hands on the outside of the steering
wheel. Placing them inside the steering
wheel rim could increase the risk of injury
if the supplemental front air bag inflates.
1-20 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
SSS0008
WARNING:
.
.
SSS0009
.
Never let children ride unrestrained or
extend their hands or face out of the
window. Do not attempt to hold them in
your lap or arms. Some examples of
dangerous riding positions are shown in
the illustrations.
Children may be severely injured or killed
when the air bags inflate if they are not
properly restrained.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint
system in the front seat. An inflating
supplemental front-impact air bag could
seriously injure or kill your child. (See
“Child restraints” (P.1-10).)
SSS0099
SSS0140
SSS0159
SSS0059A
SSS0100
SSS0162
Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
1-21
WARNING:
.
.
.
.
.
The supplemental side-impact air bags
ordinarily will not inflate in the event of a
front impact, rear impact, rollover, or
lower severity side collision. Always wear
the seat belts to help reduce the risk or
severity of injury in accidents.
The seat belts and the supplemental
side-impact air bags are most effective
when you are sitting well back and upright in the seat. The supplemental sideimpact air bags inflate with great force. If
you and your passengers are unrestrained, leaning forward, sitting sideways,
or out of position in any way, you and
your passengers are at greater risk of
injury or death in an accident.
Do not allow anyone to place their hands,
legs, or face near the supplemental sideimpact air bags on the sides of the
seatback of the front seats. Do not allow
anyone sitting in the front seats to
extend their hands out of the windows
or lean against the doors. Some examples of dangerous riding positions are
shown in the illustrations.
When sitting in the rear seats, do not hold
onto the seatback of the front seats. If
the supplemental side-impact air bags
inflate, you may be seriously injured. Be
especially careful with children, who
should always be properly restrained.
Do not use seat covers on the front
seatbacks. They may interfere with the
supplemental side-impact air bag inflations.
Pre-tensionerD15A1-E2914870-5B9F-4197-A582-116AE23B0B69
seat belt system
The pre-tensioner system may activate with
the supplemental air bag system in certain
types of collisions. Working with the seat belt
retractors, it helps tighten the seat belt when
the vehicle becomes involved in certain types
of collisions, helping to restrain front seat
occupants. (See “Pre-tensioner seat belt system” (P.1-26).)
Air bag warning
label
D15A1-4E4CA60F-08F0-4F36-959A-A1C0F36A8F77
WAB0003X
Warning labels about the supplemental air bag
system are placed in the vehicle as shown in
the illustration.
SRS air bag: GUID-F996AD4C-EBB1-43FF-A082-07E8EDDB9F39
The warning label
is located on the surface
of the passenger’s sun visor.
WAB0022X
The label warns:
“NEVER use a rearward facing child restraint on
a seat protected by an ACTIVE AIRBAG in front
of it, DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD
can occur.”
In vehicles equipped with a front-impact passenger air bag system, use a rear-facing child
restraint system only on the rear seats.
When installing a child restraint system in your
vehicle, always follow the child restraint system
manufacturer’s instructions for installation. For
additional information, see “Child restraints”
(P.1-10).
SRS air bag D15A1-E1046484-BC1B-4375-8935-AFDC18A208A0
warning light
SPA1097
1-22
Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
The supplemental air bag warning light, displaying
in the instrument panel, monitors
the circuits for the air bag systems, pretensioners and all related wiring.
When the ignition switch is in the “ON”, the SRS
air bag warning light illuminates for about 3
seconds and then turns off. This indicates that
the SRS air bag systems are operational.
If any of the following conditions occur, the air
bag and/or pre-tensioner seat belt systems
need servicing:
. The SRS air bag warning light remains on
after approximately 3 seconds.
. The SRS air bag warning light does not
illuminate at all.
Under these conditions, the air bag and/or pretensioner seat belt systems may not operate
properly. They must be checked and repaired.
Contact a NISSAN dealer immediately.
SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG SYSTEMS
D15A1-91381D58-02AD-4301-98FF-DA7420D15AD9
WAB0025X
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Supplemental front-impact air bag modules
Supplemental side-impact air bag modules (if equipped)
Pre-tensioner seat belt retractors
Satellite sensors (if equipped)
Air bag Control Unit (ACU)
WARNING:
.
Do not place any objects on the steering
wheel pad, on the instrument panel, and
near the front door finishers and the
front seats. Do not place any objects
between any occupants and the steering
wheel pad, on the instrument panel, and
near the front door finishers and the
front seats. Such objects may become
dangerous projectiles and cause injury if
Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
1-23
.
.
.
.
.
.
a supplemental air bag inflates.
Immediately after inflation, several supplemental air bag system components
will be hot. Do not touch them: you may
severely burn yourself.
No unauthorized changes should be
made to any components or wiring of
the supplemental air bag systems. This is
to prevent accidental inflation of the
supplemental air bags or damage to the
supplemental air bag systems.
Do not make unauthorized changes to
your vehicle’s electrical system, suspension system, front end structure, and side
panels. This could affect proper operation
of the supplemental air bag systems.
Tampering with the supplemental air bag
systems may result in serious personal
injury. Tampering includes changes to
the steering wheel and the instrument
panel by placing materials over the steering wheel pad and above, around or on
the instrument panel or by installing
additional trim materials around the
supplemental air bag systems.
Work around and on the supplemental air
bag systems should be done by a NISSAN
dealer. The SRS wiring should not be
modified or disconnected. Unauthorized
electrical test equipment and probing
devices should not be used on the supplemental air bag systems.
The SRS wiring harness connectors are
yellow and/or orange for easy identification.
When the air bags inflate, a fairly loud noise
may be heard, followed by the release of
smoke. This smoke is not harmful and does
not indicate a fire. Care should be taken not to
1-24
inhale it, as it may cause irritation and choking.
Those with a history of a breathing condition
should get fresh air promptly.
Supplemental
front-impact air bag system
D15A1-9460E8D6-2EA9-49DC-B8FB-A6C61A3E2E24
The driver’s supplemental front-impact air bag
is located at the center of the steering wheel.
The passenger’s supplemental front-impact air
bag is located at the instrument panel above
the glove box.
The supplemental front-impact air bag system
is designed to inflate in higher severity frontal
collisions, although it may inflate if the forces in
another type of collision are similar to those of
a higher severity frontal impact. It may not
inflate in certain frontal collisions. Vehicle
damage (or lack of it) is not always an indication of proper supplemental front-impact air
bag system operation.
Supplemental side-impact air bag system (if equipped)
D15A1-AD090687-948D-4A34-990A-4EDF7903C334
collisions, although it may inflate if the forces in
another type of collision are similar to those of
a higher severity side impact. It may not inflate
in certain side collisions. Vehicle damage (or
lack of it) is not always an indication of proper
supplemental side-impact air bag system operation.
SRS AIR BAG DEPLOYMENT CONDITIONS
D15A1-764CFAD8-CDC2-477D-A472-22D29E4C3717
The SRS air bags activate in the event of a front
or side impact in which the vehicle occupants
may be severely injured even if they are
wearing the seat belts properly.
They may not activate when the crash energy
is absorbed and/or distributed by the vehicle
body. Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not
always an indication of proper SRS air bag
system operation.
When the SRS
air bag will deploy
D15A1-38789F47-3340-42B6-8543-4073E65DE420
Supplemental GUID-F996AD4C-EBB1-43FF-A082-07E8EDDB9F39
front-impact air bags:
The supplemental front-impact air bag system
is designed to inflate in higher severity frontal
collisions. Some examples are shown in the
following illustrations.
WAB0013X
The supplemental side-impact air bag is located at the outside of the front seats’ seatbacks.
The supplemental side-impact air bag system
is designed to inflate in higher severity side
Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
JVR0151X
The supplemental front-impact air bag system
will deploy in the event of an impact which
exceeds a 25 km/h (16 MPH) frontal collision
with a solid wall that does not move or deform.
The supplemental front-impact air bag system
may also deploy when the vehicle receives
severe damage to the undercarriage.
Supplemental side-impact air bags (if
equipped):
GUID-F996AD4C-EBB1-43FF-A082-07E8EDDB9F39
The supplemental side-impact air bag system
is designed to inflate in higher severity side
collisions. An example is shown in the following
illustrations.
Supplemental GUID-F996AD4C-EBB1-43FF-A082-07E8EDDB9F39
front-impact air bags:
JVR0154X
.
.
Striking a vehicle of the same class that is
parked
Crashing into a solid utility pole
JVR0161X
The supplemental side-impact air bag will
deploy in the event of a side impact with a
normal passenger vehicle that exceeds at a
speed of 25 km/h (16 MPH).
When the SRS
air bag is unlikely to deploy
D15A1-222B165C-E652-477A-840F-04ED9E673374
JVR0152X
.
.
.
The SRS air bags may not deploy in cases
where the impact is not forceful enough to
inflate the SRS air bags.
For example, if the vehicle strikes an object,
such as a parked vehicle or sign pole, which can
move or deform on impact, the SRS air bags are
unlikely to deploy.
JVR0155X
.
.
Running under the tail gate of a truck
A frontal offset impact to the guard rails
Hitting a curb, pavement edge or hard
surface at high speed
Falling into a deep hole or ditch
Landing hard on the ground after jumping
Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
1-25
Supplemental side-impact air bags (if
equipped):
GUID-F996AD4C-EBB1-43FF-A082-07E8EDDB9F39
Supplemental side-impact air bags (if
equipped):
GUID-F996AD4C-EBB1-43FF-A082-07E8EDDB9F39
JVR0163X
JVR0156X
.
.
A collision from the side at an angle
A side impact with a two-wheeled vehicle
.
.
A frontal offset impact to the guard rails
A collision with a pole
When the SRS
air bag will not deploy
D15A1-901941C8-072C-4BCB-B71E-6FE59544884A
Once the SRS air bag has inflated, the air bag
module will not function again if your vehicle
collides with another vehicle or an object.
Other examples where the SRS air bag will not
deploy are shown in the following illustrations.
Supplemental GUID-F996AD4C-EBB1-43FF-A082-07E8EDDB9F39
front-impact air bags:
JVR0160X
.
.
PRE-TENSIONER
SEAT BELT SYSTEM
D15A1-DB266FAA-0FF0-4D08-8D8B-A4F08BB31581
WARNING:
.
.
JVR0157X
.
.
A collision from the side impacting the
vehicle engine room (luggage room)
Vehicle rollover
.
JVR0159X
.
.
A collision from the side or rear
Vehicle rollover
1-26 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
A frontal collision with a parked or moving
vehicle
A rear collision
The pre-tensioner seat belt cannot be
reused after activation. It must be replaced together with the retractor and
buckle as a unit.
If the vehicle becomes involved in a
collision but the pre-tensioner is not
activated, be sure to have the pre-tensioner system checked and, if necessary,
replaced by a NISSAN dealer.
No unauthorized changes should be
made to any components or wiring of
the pre-tensioner seat belt system. This
is to prevent accidental activation of the
pre-tensioner seat belt or damage to the
pre-tensioner seat belt system.
.
.
Work around or on the pre-tensioner seat
belt system should be done by a NISSAN
dealer. The SRS wiring should not be
modified or disconnected. Unauthorized
electrical test equipment and probing
devices should not be used on the pretensioner seat belt system.
If you need to dispose of the pre-tensioner seat belt system, or scrap the
vehicle, contact a NISSAN dealer. Correct
pre-tensioner disposal procedures are
set forth in the appropriate NISSAN Service Manual. Incorrect disposal procedures could cause personal injury.
The pre-tensioner system may activate with
the supplemental air bag system in certain
types of collisions. Working with the seat belt
retractor, it helps tighten the seat belt when
the vehicle becomes involved in certain types
of collisions, helping to restrain front and rear
seat occupants.
The pre-tensioner is encased with the front
seat belt’s retractor and anchor. These seat
belts are used the same as conventional seat
belts.
When the pre-tensioner seat belt activates, a
fairly loud noise may be heard, followed by the
release of smoke. This smoke is not harmful
and does not indicate a fire. Care should be
taken not to inhale it, as it may cause irritation
and choking. Those with a history of a breathing condition should get fresh air promptly.
REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE
D15A1-D0639600-4BF7-43B2-8895-BCE9B314674E
WARNING:
.
.
.
Once the air bags have been inflated, the
air bag modules will not function and
must be replaced. The air bag modules
must be replaced by a NISSAN dealer. The
inflated air bag modules cannot be repaired.
The air bag systems should be inspected
by a NISSAN dealer if there is any damage
to the front end portion of the vehicle.
If you need to dispose of the SRS or scrap
the vehicle, contact a NISSAN dealer.
Correct disposal procedures are set forth
in the appropriate NISSAN Service Manual. Incorrect disposal procedures could
cause personal injury.
The air bags and pre-tensioner seat belts are
designed to activate on a one-time-only basis.
As a reminder, unless the SRS air bag warning
light is damaged, the SRS air bag warning light
remains illuminated after inflation has occurred. The repair and replacement of the SRS
should be done only by a NISSAN dealer.
When maintenance work is required on the
vehicle, information about the air bags, pretensioner seat belts and related parts should
be pointed out to the person performing the
maintenance. The ignition switch should always be in the “LOCK” position when working
under the hood or inside the vehicle.
Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
1-27
MEMO
1-28 Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
2 Instruments and controls
Cockpit ..................................................................................................................
....
2-2
Instrument panel ..........................................................................................
....
2-3
Meters and gauges .....................................................................................
....
2-4
Speedometer ............................................................................................
....
2-4
Tachometer ...............................................................................................
....
2-4
Fuel gauge ..................................................................................................
....
2-5
Gear shift indicator (if equipped) ..............................................
....
2-5
Instrument brightness control ...................................................
....
2-5
Warning lights, indicator lights and
audible reminders ........................................................................................
....
2-6
Checking lights .......................................................................................
....
2-7
Warning lights ..........................................................................................
....
2-7
Indicator lights ........................................................................................
....
2-9
Audible reminders .............................................................................
....
2-10
Vehicle information display ...............................................................
....
2-11
Vehicle information display warnings
and indicators .......................................................................................
....
2-11
Trip computer .......................................................................................
....
2-13
Clock and outside air temperature .....................................
....
2-14
Headlight and turn signal switch .................................................
....
2-15
Headlight switch .................................................................................
....
2-15
Headlight aiming control .............................................................
....
2-16
Turn signal switch .............................................................................
....
2-16
Fog light switch (if equipped) .........................................................
....
Front fog lights .................................................................................
....
Rear fog light (if equipped) ......................................................
....
Wiper and washer switch ...................................................................
....
Windshield wiper and washer switch .............................
....
Rain-sensing auto wiper system (if equipped) ........
....
Rear window wiper and washer switch
(if equipped) .........................................................................................
....
Defogger switch ........................................................................................
....
Horn .....................................................................................................................
....
Windows ...........................................................................................................
....
Power windows ................................................................................
....
Power outlet ...............................................................................................
....
Storage ..............................................................................................................
....
Glove box ...............................................................................................
....
Card holder ..........................................................................................
....
Cup holders (if equipped) .........................................................
....
Cargo cover .........................................................................................
....
Luggage hooks .................................................................................
....
Roof rack (if equipped) .........................................................................
....
Sun visors ........................................................................................................
....
Interior lights ................................................................................................
....
Front and rear room light ........................................................
....
Front map lights ..............................................................................
....
Cargo room light .............................................................................
....
2-17
2-17
2-17
2-17
2-17
2-18
2-19
2-19
2-19
2-20
2-20
2-21
2-22
2-22
2-22
2-23
2-23
2-24
2-24
2-25
2-25
2-26
2-26
2-26
>
COCKPIT
D15A1-DB2CDFE4-737A-458C-98A4-5563E736AFB8
*:
**:
WAA0023X
1.
2.
3.
4.
Headlight and turn signal switch/Fog light
switch*
Steering wheel
— Power steering
— Horn
— Driver’s supplemental front-impact air
bag
Wiper and washer switch/Trip computer
mode switch
Shift lever
2-2 Instruments and controls
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Push-button ignition switch (models with
Intelligent Key system)
Steering column switches**
Ignition switch (models without Intelligent
Key system)
Headlight aiming control switch
Instrument brightness control switch
ECO mode switch*
Cruise control MAIN switch*/Speed limiter
MAIN switch*
if equipped
Refer to the NissanConnect Owner’s Manual (if equipped).
INSTRUMENT PANEL
D15A1-B51AE9EA-84C8-43CB-88D9-8B6EF86658ED
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
*:
**:
— Key card port*
Defogger switch
Power outlet
USB (Universal Serial Bus) connection
port/AUX (auxiliary) input jack
Shift lever
Push-button ignition switch (models with
Intelligent Key system)
Tilting steering wheel lock lever
Ignition switch (models without Intelligent
Key system)
Hood lock release handle
if equipped
Refer to the NissanConnect Owner’s Manual (if equipped).
WAA0024X
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Side ventilator
Passenger’s front-impact air bag
Center ventilator
Hazard indicator flasher switch
Power door lock switch
Audio system**
— Rear view monitor*
— Around View Monitor*
Heater and air conditioner control
8.
9.
10.
11.
Steering-wheel-mounted controls (left
side)*
— Cruise control switches
— Speed limiter switches
Meters and gauges
Steering-wheel-mounted controls (right
side)*
— Cruise control switches
— Speed limiter switches
Glove box
— Fuse box
Instruments and controls
2-3
METERS AND GAUGES
D15A1-B1AEB184-BF62-47CF-A091-1C760F46DBDC
SPEEDOMETER
D15A1-AAC83075-E89F-4F94-BE1E-626249B91257
WAC0011X
The speedometer indicates the vehicle speed.
TACHOMETER
D15A1-91A61FD5-DD5D-4219-8890-60FFEBD2E80E
WAA0025X
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Tachometer
Vehicle information display
- Trip computer
- Clock and outside air temperature
- Warnings and indicators
Speedometer/Gear shift indicator*
Fuel gauge
Warning and indicator lights
Turn signals/hazard indicator lights
2-4 Instruments and controls
*:
if equipped
The needle indicators may move slightly
after the ignition switch is placed in the
“OFF” or “LOCK” position. This is not a malfunction.
WAC0012X
Example
The tachometer indicates the engine speed in
revolutions per minute (rpm). Do not rev the
engine into the red zone .
The red zone varies with models.
FUEL GAUGED15A1-1C712BA5-30E9-4629-B9C3-BDF27E432243
GEAR SHIFT GUID-ED2C7E51-1764-456D-B0C0-4BC69EA17C5B
INDICATOR (if equipped)
The indicator appears when upshifting or
downshifting is recommended. The up or down
arrow indicates the recommended shifting. See
“Gear shift indicator” (P.5-10).
INSTRUMENT
BRIGHTNESS CONTROL
D15A1-75CDE4F1-AB71-481F-BB36-AA0AA8DD3195
WAC0013X
The fuel gauge indicates the approximate fuel
level in the tank when the ignition switch is in
the “ON” position.
The gauge may move slightly during braking,
turning, accelerating, or going up and down
hills due to movement of fuel in the tank.
The low fuel warning light
illuminates on
the meter when the fuel level in the tank is
getting low. Refuel as soon as it is convenient,
preferably before the gauge reads the empty
(0) position.
The arrow,
, indicates that the fuel-filler lid
is located on the right side of the vehicle.
WAC0014X
The instrument brightness control can be
operated when the ignition switch is in the
“ON” position and the headlight switch is on.
Turn the control up to brighten the meter panel
lights. Turn the control down to dim the lights.
CAUTION:
Refuel before the gauge reads 0 (empty).
There is a small reserve of fuel in the tank when
the fuel gauge reads 0 (empty).
Instruments and controls
2-5
WARNING LIGHTS, INDICATOR
LIGHTS AND AUDIBLE REMINDERS
D15A1-01AE4331-D28E-4FB3-8861-DB744FC3C608
2-6
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning light
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) warning light*
Rear fog light indicator light*
Brake warning light
Cruise control on indicator light*
Service indicator light
Charge warning light
ECO mode indicator light*
Small light indicator light
Door open warning light
Front fog light indicator light*
Speed limiter indicator light*
Engine oil pressure warning light*
Glow plug indicator light (diesel engine
model)
STOP indicator light
High temperature warning light (red)*
High beam indicator light
Turn signals/hazard indicator lights
Low fuel warning light
Low beam indicator light
Seat belt warning light
Low temperature indicator light (blue)
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
air bag warning light
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
Instruments and controls
*: if equipped
CHECKING LIGHTS
D15A1-04BA1C14-FC42-4D3B-8694-F7C4E5ED5BCB
With all doors closed, apply the parking brake,
fasten the seat belts and place the ignition
switch in the “ON” position without starting the
engine. The following lights (if equipped) will
come on:
,
.
The following lights (if equipped) will come on
briefly and then go off:
,
,
,
,
,
,
(red),
,
,
.
If any light does not come on or operates in a
way other than described, it may indicate a
burned-out bulb and/or a system malfunction.
Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer.
WARNING LIGHTS
D15A1-828072D2-26BC-4788-ACD5-53E300A07CD5
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)
warning light
D15A1-E5BB8BF0-4438-4F1D-9AAB-502959EB89E9
When the ignition switch is in the “ON” position,
the Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning
light illuminates and then turns off. This indicates the ABS is operational.
If the ABS warning light illuminates while the
engine is running, or while driving, it may
indicate the ABS is not functioning properly.
Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer
promptly.
If an ABS malfunction occurs, the anti-lock
function is turned off. The brake system then
operates normally, but without anti-lock assistance. (See “Brake system” (P.5-19).)
Brake warning light
D15A1-4B36ABF6-BAC4-4E80-8EC1-73BF6F892FA9
WARNING:
.
.
.
If the brake fluid level is below the
minimum mark on the brake fluid reservoir, do not drive the vehicle until the
brake system has been checked by a
NISSAN dealer.
Even if you judge it to be safe, have your
vehicle towed because driving it could be
dangerous.
Depressing the brake pedal without the
engine running and/or with a low brake
fluid level could increase the stopping
distance and require greater pedal travel
distance and effort.
The brake warning light indicates the parking
brake system operation, a low brake fluid level
of the brake system and an Anti-lock Braking
System (ABS) malfunction.
Parking brakeGUID-F996AD4C-EBB1-43FF-A082-07E8EDDB9F39
warning indicator:
When the ignition switch is placed in the “ON”
position, the brake warning light illuminates.
When the parking brake is released, the brake
warning light turns off.
If the parking brake is not fully released, the
brake warning light remains on. Be sure that
the brake warning light has turned off before
driving. (See “Parking brake” (P.3-17).)
Low brake fluid
warning indicator:
GUID-F996AD4C-EBB1-43FF-A082-07E8EDDB9F39
If the brake warning light illuminates during
braking with the STOP indicator light and a
beep, it indicates that the fluid level in the brake
system is low or that there is a braking system
malfunction. Stop the vehicle safely as soon as
possible. Do not drive the vehicle and contact a
NISSAN dealer.
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning indicator:
GUID-F996AD4C-EBB1-43FF-A082-07E8EDDB9F39
When the parking brake is released and the
brake fluid level is sufficient, if both the brake
warning light and the Anti-lock Braking System
(ABS) warning light illuminate, it may indicate
the ABS is not functioning properly. Have the
brake system checked, and if necessary repaired, by a NISSAN dealer promptly. (See “Antilock Braking System (ABS) warning light” (P.27).)
Charge warning light
D15A1-19785261-65C1-4F82-BDA4-38E8C7729252
When the ignition switch is in the “ON” position,
the charge warning light illuminates and then
turns off. This indicates the charging system is
operational.
If charge warning light illuminates with the
STOP indicator light and a beep, this indicates
an overload or discharge in the electrical
circuit. Stop the vehicle safely as soon as
possible. Do not drive the vehicle and contact
a NISSAN dealer.
CAUTION:
Do not continue driving if the alternator belt
is loose, broken or missing.
Door open warning light
D15A1-6F4B9363-DAD6-4029-A500-D94DBCB6DA4C
When the ignition switch is in the “ON” position,
the door open warning light illuminates if any
of the doors are open or not closed securely.
Instruments and controls
2-7
Engine oil pressure warning light
(if equipped)
D15A1-137A2C03-1DCD-4BF7-8B54-5CC4C35C5078
When the ignition switch is in the “ON” position,
the engine oil pressure warning light illuminates and then turns off. This indicates that the
oil pressure sensors in the engine are operational.
If the engine oil pressure warning light and
STOP indicator light illuminate and a beep
sounds while the engine is running, it may
indicate that the engine oil pressure is low.
Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible.
Stop the engine immediately and contact a
NISSAN dealer.
CAUTION:
.
.
.
If the high temperature warning light
illuminates while the engine is running,
it may indicate the engine temperature is
extremely high.
Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible.
If the vehicle is overheated, continuing
vehicle operation may seriously damage
the engine. (See “If your vehicle overheats” (P.6-10) for the immediate action
required.)
Low fuel warning light
D15A1-F00C0D4D-F559-4E48-AF25-9C3A3C131684
CAUTION:
.
.
Running the engine with the engine oil
pressure warning light illuminated could
cause serious damage to the engine.
The engine oil pressure warning light is
not designed to indicate a low oil level.
The oil level should be checked using the
dipstick. (See “Engine oil” (P.8-7).)
High temperature warning light
(red) (if equipped)
When the ignition switch is in the “ON” position,
the low fuel warning light illuminates and then
turns off.
The low fuel warning light illuminates when the
fuel level in the tank is getting low. Refuel as
soon as it is convenient, preferably before the
fuel gauge reaches 0 (empty).
There will be a small reserve of fuel remaining in the tank when the fuel gauge reaches 0
(empty).
Seat belt warning light
D15A1-ABDFAF7A-0C6C-4F57-9094-E436D8BFBCB3
D15A1-EF41BDB8-529D-47B8-9A07-90DF4FDB29A5
When the ignition switch is in the “ON” position,
the high temperature warning light illuminates
and then turns off. This indicates that the high
temperature sensor in the engine coolant
system is operational.
When the ignition switch is in the “ON” position,
the seat belt warning light illuminates. The light
will continue to illuminate until the front seat
belts are fastened. (See “Seat belts” (P.1-6).)
When the vehicle speed exceeds 20 km/h (12
MPH), the light will blink and the chime will
sound unless the front seat belts are securely
fastened. The chime will continue to sound for
about 95 seconds until the seat belt is fastened.
2-8
Instruments and controls
Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) air bag warning light
D15A1-F1363489-8AB6-4015-98F5-89FCF479FF09
When the ignition switch is in the “ON” position,
the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) air
bag warning light illuminates for about 3
seconds and then turns off. This indicates the
SRS air bag system is operational.
If any of the following conditions occur, the SRS
air bag system and pre-tensioner seat belt
need servicing. Have the system checked, and if
necessary repaired, by a NISSAN dealer
promptly.
. The SRS air bag warning light remains
illuminated after about 3 seconds.
. The SRS air bag warning light does not
come on at all.
Unless checked and repaired, the SRS air bag
system and/or pre-tensioner seat belt may not
function properly. (See “Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS)” (P.1-19).)
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)
warning light (if equipped)
D15A1-7AF51C03-4C9E-49D6-A350-D83A811B4072
When the ignition switch is in the “ON” position,
the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) warning
light illuminates and then turns off. This indicates the VDC system is operational.
The warning light blinks when the VDC system
is operating.
When the warning light blinks while driving, the
driving condition is slippery and the vehicle’s
traction limit is about to be exceeded.
If the warning light illuminates when the
ignition switch is placed in the “ON” position, it
may indicate that the VDC system is not
functioning properly and may need servicing.
Have the system checked, and if necessary
repaired, by a NISSAN dealer promptly.
If a malfunction occurs in the system, the VDC
system function will be cancelled but the
vehicle is still driveable. (See “Vehicle Dynamic
Control (VDC) system” (P.5-11).)
High beam indicator light
D15A1-08BB04C3-4AA4-419A-95B6-834C32C5DC45
The high beam indicator light illuminates when
the headlight high beam is on. The indicator
light turns off when the low beam is selected.
(See “Headlight and turn signal switch” (P.2-15).)
INDICATOR LIGHTS
D15A1-A942E46D-BE5A-4311-98CA-37727E15A3F2
Cruise control on indicator light (if
equipped)
GUID-190BA66B-6DE0-4EDC-B641-835A23B01AFF
The cruise control on indicator light indicates
the activation of the cruise control system. (See
“Cruise control” (P.5-14).)
ECO mode indicator light (if equipped)
GUID-2A59DC79-53E4-45BF-B0BD-875100AE0090
The ECO mode indicator light appears when
the ECO mode system is turned on. (See “Eco
mode” (P.5-10).)
Front fog light indicator light (if equipped)
D15A1-6833F4F8-CA74-4BC0-8700-9FD6EB13F77E
The front fog light indicator light illuminates
when the front fog lights are on. (See “Fog light
switch” (P.2-17).)
Low beam indicator light
GUID-9A5DEF9C-F5F2-421F-974A-C7EB46F93183
The low beam indicator light illuminates when
the headlight low beam is on. The indicator
light turns off when either the
position or
the high beam is selected. (See “Headlight and
turn signal switch” (P.2-15).)
Low temperature indicator light (blue)
GUID-304C1E98-E55A-467C-89A9-1D3A9BA22F71
The low temperature indicator light illuminates
when the engine coolant temperature is low.
If the low temperature indicator light stays
illuminated after the engine has sufficiently
warmed up, it may indicate the low temperature sensor in the engine coolant system is not
functioning properly and may need servicing.
Have the system checked, and if necessary
repaired, by a NISSAN dealer promptly.
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
Glow plug indicator light (diesel
engine model)
D15A1-93F8D878-1F8B-425E-BEEE-AB5D336BF8EF
CAUTION:
GUID-8D744142-4286-492C-9B5C-24B3445C0820
When the ignition switch is in the “ON” position,
the glow plug indicator light illuminates and
turns off after the glow plugs have warmed up.
If the glow plugs have already warmed up, the
glow plug indicator flashes briefly and then
turns off.
.
Continuing vehicle operation without
proper servicing of the emission control
system could lead to poor driveability,
reduced fuel economy, and damage to
the emission control system, which may
affect the vehicle’s warranty coverage.
.
Incorrect setting of the emission control
system may lead to non-compliance of
local and national emission laws and
regulations.
When the ignition switch is in the “ON” position,
the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) illuminates. After starting the engine, the MIL turns
off. This indicates that the emission control
system is operational.
If the MIL illuminates or blinks while the engine
is running, it may indicate a potential emission
control system malfunction. In this case, the
emission control system may not function
properly and may need servicing. Have the
system checked, and if necessary repaired, by
an authorized dealer promptly.
To reduce or avoid possible damage to the
engine control system when the MIL illuminates or blinks:
. Avoid driving at speeds above 70 km/h (43
MPH).
. Avoid sudden acceleration or deceleration.
. Avoid going up steep uphill grades.
. Avoid carrying or towing unnecessary
loads.
Rear fog light indicator light (if equipped)
D15A1-586AD187-4BDA-404F-810A-A7D2BEF0254F
The rear fog light indicator light illuminates
when the rear fog light is on. (See “Fog light
switch” (P.2-17).)
Instruments and controls
2-9
Service indicator light
Turn signals/hazard indicator lights
GUID-D27E827A-F941-4F7B-8D84-BFC768276BC7
D15A1-8926BE53-8209-46F4-9BD5-1D6B20E861AF
The service indicator light illuminates when the
ignition is switched “ON” and turns off after few
seconds. It can illuminate in conjunction with
other indicator lights and/or messages on the
instrument panel. It means you should drive
very carefully to a NISSAN dealer as soon as
possible. If you fail to follow this recommendation, you risk damaging your vehicle.
The turn signals/hazard indicator lights blink
when the turn signal switch or hazard indicator
flasher switch is turned on. (See “Headlight and
turn signal switch” (P.2-15) or “Hazard indicator
flasher switch” (P.6-2).)
Small light indicator light
D15A1-379BC1A5-E2E0-4DC5-B305-D5DD6A0BAB83
The small light indicator light illuminates when
the front clearance lights, instrument panel
lights, rear combination lights and license plate
lights are on. The indicator light turns off when
these lights are turned off.
Speed limiter indicator light (if equipped)
GUID-A38D774F-67A0-4B23-971D-05AC57689D22
The speed limiter indicator light illuminates in
orange when the speed limiter MAIN switch is
pushed. This indicator light will also illuminate
in green when the cruise control MAIN switch is
pushed. (See “Speed limiter” (P.5-12) and “Cruise
control” (P.5-14).)
STOP indicator light
GUID-B41EB71F-6FAB-4D21-9F9E-7B1D10BC969C
The STOP indicator light illuminates when the
ignition is switched “ON” and turns off after few
seconds. It comes on with other warning lights
and/or messages, and is accompanied by a
beep. It requires you to stop the vehicle
immediately, for your own safety, as soon as
traffic conditions allow. Turn off the engine and
do not restart. Contact a NISSAN dealer.
2-10 Instruments and controls
AUDIBLE REMINDERS
D15A1-A009E3DB-9992-46A0-B722-3C434A39BFD9
Brake pad wear
warning
D15A1-E1AA219C-991B-4EE8-A33B-9D393A40B30D
The disc brake pads have audible wear warnings. When a brake pad requires replacement, it
will make a high pitched scraping sound when
the vehicle is in motion. This scraping sound
will first occur only when the brake pedal is
depressed. After more wear of the brake pad,
the sound will always be heard even if the
brake pedal is not depressed. Have the brakes
checked as soon as possible if the wear
warning sound is heard.
Have the system checked, and if necessary
repaired, by a NISSAN dealer promptly. (See
“Brakes” (P.8-11).)
Door open reminder
chime
GUID-57105F44-A1C3-4BE5-8831-5D3AFE282915
When vehicle speed exceeds 20 km/h (12 MPH),
the door open reminder chime will sound
intermittently until the vehicle is stopped and
the door is closed properly.
Light reminder
chime
D15A1-11FC7780-F5D6-4D67-94A5-F9A260C5936B
The light reminder chime will sound if the
driver’s side door is opened and the headlight
switch is in either the
or
position, and
the ignition switch is in the “OFF” or “LOCK”
position.
Be sure to turn the headlight switch to the
“OFF” or “AUTO” (if equipped) position when you
leave the vehicle.
Parking brake
reminder chime
D15A1-8D3EA4C7-8401-46EB-8174-95B595152ADE
The parking brake reminder chime will sound if
the vehicle is driven at speeds more than 7
km/h (4 MPH) with the parking brake applied.
Stop the vehicle and release the parking brake.
Speed warning
chime (if equipped)
GUID-27EC39AC-360A-4CFA-B189-659DD0973CF3
Primary warning:
When vehicle speed exceeds 80 km/h (50 MPH),
a chime will sound intermittently until the
driver reduces the speed to less than 80
km/h (50 MPH).
Secondary warning:
When vehicle speed exceeds 120 km/h (75
MPH), a chime will sound continuously until
the driver reduces the speed to less than 120
km/h (75 MPH), after which it will switch to the
primary warning.
VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY
GUID-C724ED78-DCD2-4D5D-9385-1BEF75B0B6D1
When the ignition switch is placed in the “ON”
position, the vehicle information display shows
the warnings and informations.
The following items are also displayed:
. Trip computer
. Clock and outside air temperature
VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY
WARNINGS AND
INDICATORS
GUID-9876BF69-E942-4C03-BD73-D5B4954BF89F
The display message may vary depending on
the vehicle’s equipment.
Display message
Possible cause, reason or action to take for the message
BATTERY
CHARGING FAULT
Charge battery alert
BOOT
OPEN
CHECK
SPEED LIMITER
Back door open while driving alert (vehicle speed exceeds 20 km/h)
Speed limiter: failure
CRUISE CONTROL
XXX
Cruise control: waiting for the target speed (speed in km/h)
CRUISE CONTROL
XXX
DOOR
OPEN
Cruise control: set (speed in km/h)
KEYCARD
BATTERY LOW
KEYCARD
NOT RECOGNISED
KEYCARD
NOT DETECTED
MEMORISED
---PARKING BRAKE
ON
Doors open while driving alert (vehicle speed exceeds 20 km/h)
Charge level of the Intelligent Key battery alert
The Intelligent Key inserted in the port not identified
The Intelligent Key removed from the port with closed doors
Speed limiter: suspended (speed in km/h)
Parking brake applied while driving
Instruments and controls
2-11
PRESS BRAKE
+START
PRESS CLUTCH
+START
2-12
Press brake pedal to start the engine
Failed start due to engaged gear
Quick start assistance after stall, transmission in gear (without defect)
start assistance: Request to start while declutching
PLEASE
INSERT KEYCARD
The Intelligent Key is not in the vehicle or the vehicle could not detect the intelligent key due to
the flat battery, etc.
POWER STEERING
FAULT
The hydraulic pump electric power steering is not functioning properly and may need servicing.
Have the hydraulic pump electric power steering checked by an NISSAN dealer.
SPEED LIMITER
XXX
Speed limiter: waiting for the target speed
TURN STEERING
WHEEL + START
Push the ignition switch while lightly turning the steering wheel to release the steering lock
Instruments and controls
TRIP COMPUTER
GUID-D936A7EF-177F-4385-91AC-E491547C2204
WAC0204X
Type A
WAC0024X
Type B
WAC0049X
The trip computer display can be changed
using the trip computer mode switch
or
(if equipped) located on the wiper and washer
switch.
Navigate through the items in the vehicle
information display.
Push the switch
to change the display as
follows:
1?2?3?4?5?6?7?8?1
Push the switch
(if equipped) to change the
display as follows:
8?7?6?5?4?3?2?1?8
Instruments and controls
2-13
1. OdometerGUID-6C6B9C0B-2B57-4BEA-8485-31BBBC0E6DD4
and trip odometer
6. Distance travelled
since last reset (km)
GUID-E685759F-8124-4E21-9E54-B882AA8E4F7E
The odometer (upper digits) displays the total
distance the vehicle has been driven. The trip
odometer (lower digits) displays the distance of
individual trips.
The distance traveled since last reset mode
shows the mileage from the last reset.
7. Average speed
since last reset (km/h)
GUID-472A07AA-51EC-426E-A286-12FBAC7ADCB4
2. Fuel usedGUID-DC9F4D5B-E329-4ABA-9067-5FC62C2E9841
(L)
The average speed mode shows the average
vehicle speed since the last reset.
The fuel used mode shows the amount of the
fuel consumed since the last reset.
8. Clock andGUID-C7472B42-9D1F-4DDB-B87E-D77EB1E30D48
outside air temperature
3. Average fuel
consumption (AVG. km/l)
GUID-CD1A5043-65CC-4123-91EA-3EC1593064B0
The average fuel consumption mode shows
the average fuel consumption since the last
reset. Resetting is done by pushing the trip
computer mode switch or (if equipped) for
longer than 1 second.
The display is updated every 30 seconds. At
about the first 500 m (1/3 miles) after a reset,
the display shows “----”.
4. Current fuel
consumption (km/l)
GUID-87E4CA5E-A8E7-4045-AFAE-D758A2F2E9F6
The current fuel consumption mode shows the
current fuel consumption.
5. Distance to
empty (dte - km)
GUID-EA08CAC5-6357-46DB-A1FF-2D72D13C5A71
The distance to empty (dte) mode provides you
with an estimation of the distance that can be
driven before refueling. The dte is constantly
being calculated, based on the amount of fuel
in the fuel tank and the actual fuel consumption.
The display is updated every 30 seconds.
See “Clock and outside air temperature” (P.2-14).
Resetting trip
computer
GUID-09756996-6D82-4D9B-A21B-BF1A78283E97
displayed when the ignition switch is in the
“ON” position.
Outside air temperature
(°C)
D15A1-F8DE6152-6F1C-4557-8A75-BC02A7CC1DF9
The outside air temperature is displayed in °C in
the range of −40 to 60°C (−40 to 140°F ).
Clock
D15A1-73BBB080-5D5B-4282-B839-918F43E1BE59
If the battery cable is disconnected, the clock
will reset its time and the correct time will not
be indicated. Readjust the time.
Adjusting time: GUID-1295725F-1AF3-4AA4-9B71-2C636F81A13F
Resetting trip GUID-F996AD4C-EBB1-43FF-A082-07E8EDDB9F39
odometer:
When the trip odometer is displayed, push the
trip computer mode switch
or
(if
equipped) until the trip odometer will be reset
to zero.
Resetting other
trip computer items:
GUID-F996AD4C-EBB1-43FF-A082-07E8EDDB9F39
To reset other trip computer items, select an
item and push and hold the trip computer
mode switch
or
(if equipped) until the
relevant item will be reset to zero.
CLOCK AND OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE
D15A1-067E4995-3A8D-4629-961F-BC7A523A703A
WAC0023X
Type A
WAC0105X
WAC0025X
The outside air temperature
2-14
Instruments and controls
and clock
are
Type B
To start the clock adjustment, push and hold
HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL SWITCH
D15A1-218B17C5-422C-4FAE-99C4-AA3A74107073
the trip computer mode switch
or
(if
equipped), while the clock is displayed, until the
clock display begins to flash.
To adjust the time, perform the following
procedure.
(if equipped) to move the
Push the switch
time forward.
Push the switch
to move the time backward.
If equipped, push and hold each adjusting
switch to move the time forward or backward
continuously.
automatically.
CAUTION:
Do not leave the lights on when the engine is
not running for extended periods of time to
prevent the battery from being discharged.
HEADLIGHT D15A1-A8314E0E-EC8C-4483-813A-B5EB9E8CFC25
SWITCH
WAC0039X
CAUTION:
WAC0026X
NISSAN recommends that you consult the local
regulations concerning the use of lights.
Do not cover the sensor . The sensor senses
the brightness level. If the sensor is covered,
it reacts as if it is dark, and the headlights will
illuminate.
Headlight beam
D15A1-C6912DCE-BB64-407E-9032-4B82D05D2D81
positionD15A1-F69BE745-A75E-4F65-8BE6-CB953D195A14
The
position turns on the front clearance,
instrument panel, tail and license plate lights.
positionD15A1-E87178D3-B8DB-448C-9D82-DD49492DD1E4
The
position turns on the headlights in
addition to the other lights.
AUTO position
(if equipped)
D15A1-43979C43-DB62-4B72-896A-EF451DB304CF
When the ignition switch is in the “ON” position
and the headlight switch is in the “AUTO”
position, the headlights, front clearance lights,
instrument panel lights, rear combination lights
and other lights turn on automatically depending on the brightness of the surroundings.
When the ignition switch is placed in the “OFF”
or “LOCK” position, the lights will turn off
WAC0028X
To turn on the high beam, push the lever
towards the front position .
To turn off the high beam, return the lever to
the neutral position .
Instruments and controls
2-15
To flash the headlights, pull the lever towards
the rearmost position . The headlights can be
flashed even when the headlights are not on.
If equipped, when the lever is pulled towards
the rearmost position
after the ignition
switch is placed in the “OFF” or “LOCK” position,
the headlight will turn on and stay on for 30
seconds. The lever can be pulled 4 times for up
to 2 minutes.
windshield of an oncoming vehicle, which may
obscure other drivers’ vision.
To adjust to the proper aiming height, turn the
switch accordingly. The higher the number,
designated on the switch, the lower the headlight axis.
Select the switch position by referring to the
following samples.
HEADLIGHTD15A1-7B9E4C3F-A2CC-4ED2-A956-5B9A455030CF
AIMING CONTROL
Switch position
Number of front
seat occupants
Number of rear
seat occupants
Weight of load in luggage compartment
Manual typeD15A1-05B5057D-F8A6-49B3-964B-B510110B44BF
0
1 or 2
No occupants
No load
1
2
3
No load
1
2
3
Full load
2
1
No occupants
Full load
TURN SIGNAL
SWITCH
D15A1-0284C232-D661-4199-8319-76842A7F3BCE
Turn signal D15A1-F637B70F-8620-480C-9A5E-83FADC7CBE15
To turn on the turn signals, move the lever up
or down
to the point where the lever
latches. When the turn is completed, the turn
signal cancels automatically.
Lane changeD15A1-26238332-8E1D-45A4-841A-29B1AD258990
signal
WAC0030X
The headlight aiming control operates when
the ignition switch is in the “ON” position and
the headlight is on to allow the headlight axis
to be adjusted according to the driving condition.
When driving with no heavy load/luggage or
driving on a flat road, select the normal position
“0”.
If the number of occupants and load/luggage
in the vehicle changes, the headlight axis may
become higher than normal.
If the vehicle is traveling on a hilly road, the
headlights may directly shine on the rearview
and outside mirrors of a vehicle ahead or the
2-16 Instruments and controls
WAC0029X
CAUTION:
The turn signal switch will not be cancelled
automatically if the steering wheel turning
angle does not exceed the preset amount.
After a turn or lane change, make sure that
the turn signal switch is returned to its
original position.
To turn on the lane change signals, move the
lever up
or down
to the point where the
light begins to flash.
If the lever is moved back right after moving up
or down , the light will flash 3 times.
To cancel the flashing, move the lever to the
opposite direction.
FOG LIGHT SWITCH (if equipped)
WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH
D15A1-4252B883-9406-48ED-9F33-1EF3F1027A14
D15A1-F6B8205F-DF3D-4522-92F0-97114EEC2749
NOTE:
. If the headlight switch is turned to the 0
position, the front fog lights will turn off
automatically.
Cornering fogGUID-427ED9D4-27B0-4B94-9D62-E81A1C17E8B6
light function (if equipped)
WAC0201X
With front fog lights
When taking a corner with the low beam
headlights on, under certain conditions (at
speed, the steering wheel at an angle, in
forward gear, the indicator lights on, etc.), one
of the front fog lights will come on to light the
inside of the corner.
WARNING:
In freezing temperatures, the washer fluid
may freeze on the windshield and obscure
your vision. Warm the windshield with the
defogger before you wash the windshield.
CAUTION:
.
.
REAR FOG LIGHT
(if equipped)
D15A1-C719C699-B0A3-4FAB-A8F9-318C55281E00
WAC0032X
With front and rear fog lights
FRONT FOGD15A1-94ACA168-7F97-45B0-95E6-F8AC40E833D2
LIGHTS
To turn on the front fog lights, turn the headlight switch to the
or
or AUTO (if
equipped) position, then turn the fog light
switch to the
position. The front fog lights
and the
indicator light on the instrument
panel illuminate. For models with rear fog light,
the fog light switch will return to the center
position automatically.
To turn the front fog lights off, turn the fog light
switch to the 0 position (models without rear
fog light), or turn the switch to the
position
again (models with rear fog light).
The rear fog light should be used only when
visibility is seriously reduced [generally, to less
than 100 m (328 ft)].
To turn on the rear fog light, turn the headlight
switch to the
or AUTO (if equipped)
position, then turn the fog light switch to the
position. The rear fog light and
indicator light on the instrument panel illuminate. The fog light switch will return to the
position automatically.
If the front fog lights are already turned on with
the headlight switch in the
position, you
can turn on the rear fog light without first
turning the headlight switch to the
or
AUTO (if equipped) position.
To turn the rear fog light off, turn the fog light
switch to the
position again.
.
Do not operate the washer continuously
for longer than 30 seconds.
Do not operate the washer if the window
washer fluid reservoir is empty.
If the wiper operation is interrupted by
snow or ice, the wiper may stop moving
to protect its motor. If this occurs, turn
the wiper switch to the “OFF” position and
remove the snow or ice on and around
the wiper arms. In approximately 1 minute, turn the switch on again to operate
the wiper.
WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER
SWITCH
D15A1-B502F95A-B041-40B6-93BF-96CD4CBD3C3C
NOTE:
. If the headlight switch is turned to the 0
position, the rear fog light will turn off
automatically.
WAC0202X
Type A
Instruments and controls
2-17
Wiper drip wipeGUID-1295725F-1AF3-4AA4-9B71-2C636F81A13F
system:
The wiper will also operate once about 3
seconds after the washer and wiper are
operated. This operation is to wipe washer
fluid that has dripped on the windshield.
RAIN-SENSING AUTO WIPER SYSTEM (if
equipped) GUID-472D7B1C-E97E-4FDD-A0CA-77FB605A6A3F
CAUTION:
.
.
WAC0203X
Type B
The windshield wiper and washer operate
when the ignition switch is in the “ON” position.
Wiper operation
D15A1-09A5032E-B4FF-4FFF-AC03-6433AEEED0C7
The lever position “
” (Type A) operates the
wiper intermittently.
The lever position “AUTO” (Type B) operates the
rain sensing auto wiper system. (See “Rainsensing auto wiper system” (P.2-18).)
The lever position “1”
operates the wiper at
low speed.
The lever position “2”
operates the wiper at
high speed.
To stop the wiper operation, move the lever up
to the “0” position.
Washer operation
D15A1-FCA4580E-6687-43A6-B1FF-107489CBCCA6
To operate the washer, pull the lever toward
the back of the vehicle
until the desired
amount of washer fluid is spread on the windshield. The wiper will automatically operate one
time or several times.
2-18 Instruments and controls
.
WAC0016X
The rain-sensing auto wiper system can automatically turn on the wipers and adjust the
wiper speed depending on the rainfall and the
vehicle speed by using the rain sensor located
on the upper part of the windshield.
To set the rain-sensing auto wiper system,
push the lever down to the “AUTO” position .
The wiper will sweep once while the ignition
switch is in the “ON” position.
The rain sensor sensitivity level can be adjusted
by turning the knob toward the front
(High)
or toward the rear
(Low).
. High — High sensitive operation
. Low — Low sensitive operation
To turn the rain-sensing auto wiper system off,
push up the lever to the “0” position, or pull
down the lever to the “1” or “2” position.
.
.
Do not touch the rain sensor and around
it when the wiper switch is in the “AUTO”
position and the ignition switch is in the
“ON” position. The wipers may operate
unexpectedly and cause an injury or may
damage a wiper.
The rain-sensing auto wipers are intended for use during rain. If the switch
is left in the “AUTO” position, the wipers
may operate unexpectedly when dirt,
fingerprints, oil film or insects are stuck
on or around the sensor. The wipers may
also operate when exhaust gas or moisture affects the rain sensor.
When the windshield glass is coated with
water repellent, the speed of the rainsensing auto wipers may be higher even
though the amount of the rainfall is
small.
Be sure to turn off the rain-sensing auto
wiper system when you use a car wash.
The rain-sensing auto wipers may not
operate if rain does not hit the rain
sensor even if it is raining.
DEFOGGER SWITCH
HORN
D15A1-903DF46F-C343-47BC-B18A-DBDB39ABA97A
D15A1-740A59C9-9303-49AF-A0E6-055033D41508
REAR WINDOW WIPER AND WASHER
SWITCH (if equipped)
D15A1-8A1C5C32-AC5D-4DBE-9460-8F3B8188AA2A
WAC0036X
WAC0035X
The rear window wiper and washer operates
when the ignition switch is in the “ON” position.
Wiper operation
D15A1-56427801-C9FE-41F7-8875-828459029DB8
The switch position “
” operates the wiper
intermittently.
If the rear window wiper operation is interrupted by snow or ice, the wiper may stop
moving to protect its motor. If this occurs,
turn the wiper switch to the “OFF” position
and remove the snow or ice on and around
the wiper arms. In approximately 1 minute,
turn the switch on again to operate the
wiper.
The defogger switch operates when the ignition switch is in the “ON” position.
The defogger is used to reduce the moisture,
fog or frost on the rear window surface to
improve the rear views.
When the defogger switch
is pushed, the
indicator light
illuminates and the defogger
operates for approximately 15 minutes. After
the preset time has passed, the defogger will
turn off automatically.
To turn off manually, push the defogger switch
again.
CAUTION:
.
Washer operation
D15A1-D6DDB7E0-B0BD-4012-A924-5CD172D46963
To operate the washer, turn the switch to the
position “
”
until the desired amount of
washer fluid is spread on the windshield. The
wiper will automatically operate several times.
JVI1569X
The horn switch operates regardless of the
ignition switch position except when the battery is discharged.
When the horn switch is pushed and held, the
horn will sound. Releasing the horn switch will
cease the horn sound.
.
When operating the defogger continuously, be sure to start the engine. Otherwise, it may cause the battery to
discharge.
When cleaning the inner side of the
window, be careful not to scratch or
damage the electrical conductors on the
surface of the window.
Instruments and controls
2-19
WINDOWS
D15A1-AE250EC0-8AE3-46C6-AB26-5B554B58D2DD
POWER WINDOWS
D15A1-4C28181D-15C4-4E83-B77C-CAC4827419BF
WARNING:
.
.
Make sure that all passengers have their
hands, etc. inside the vehicle before
operating the power windows.
To help avoid risk of injury or death
through unintended operation of the
vehicle and or its systems, including
entrapment in windows or inadvertent
door lock activation, do not leave children, people who require the assistance
of others or pets unattended in your
vehicle. Additionally, the temperature inside a closed vehicle on a warm day can
quickly become high enough to cause a
significant risk of injury or death to
people and pets.
The power windows operate when the ignition
switch is in the “ON” position.
To open a window, push down the power
window switch.
To close a window, pull up the power window
switch.
Driver’s window
switch
D15A1-406320B7-4EEF-4ABF-A50F-CAA6EA59AD49
The driver’s switch, the main switch, can
control all windows.
Automatic function
D15A1-9B742A93-33F3-4843-852E-7713CEADD5D1
Locking rear passengers’
windows:
GUID-1295725F-1AF3-4AA4-9B71-2C636F81A13F
When the lock button
is pushed in, the rear
passengers’ windows cannot be operated.
To cancel the rear passengers’ windows lock,
push the lock button
again.
Passenger’sD15A1-9445E300-8AEF-4C87-B23A-82DB696E7584
window switch
WAC0080X
WAC0038X
The passenger’s switch can control its corresponding window.
When the rear passengers’ windows lock button on the driver’s switch is pushed in, the rear
passenger’s switch cannot be operated.
The automatic function is available for the
switch that has an AUTO mark on its surface.
The automatic function enables a window to
fully open or close without holding the switch
down or up.
To fully open the window, push the power
window switch down to the second detent and
release the switch. To fully close the window,
pull the power window switch up to the second
detent and release the switch. The switch does
not have to be held during window operation.
To stop the window open/close operation
during the automatic function, push down or
pull up the switch in opposite directions.
Window timer: GUID-1295725F-1AF3-4AA4-9B71-2C636F81A13F
The window timer allows the window switch to
be operated for a period of time even if the
ignition switch is placed in the “OFF” or “LOCK”
position. The window timer will be canceled
when the driver’s door is opened or the preset
time has expired.
WAC0037X
2-20 Instruments and controls
POWER OUTLET
D15A1-C8F9E2BB-D6BA-4FC3-8E0B-BB43F8EBDE5E
Auto-reverse function:
GUID-1295725F-1AF3-4AA4-9B71-2C636F81A13F
WARNING:
not operate properly after performing the
procedure above, have your vehicle checked
by a NISSAN dealer.
There is a small distance just before the
closed position which cannot be detected.
Make sure that all passengers have their
hands, etc. inside the vehicle before closing
the windows.
The auto-reverse function enables a window to
automatically reverse when something is
caught in the window as it is closing by the
automatic function. When the control unit
detects an obstacle, the window will be lowered immediately.
Depending on the environment or driving
conditions, the auto-reverse function may
activate if an impact or load similar to something being caught in the window occurs.
WAC0040X
Front
If the window
does not close automatically
D15A1-89E9016B-82D8-47EC-9036-B6A63D9DF2B5
If the power window automatic function (closing only) does not operate properly, perform
the following procedure to initialize the power
window system.
1. Start the engine.
2. Close the door.
3. After starting the engine, open the window
completely by operating the power window
switch.
4. Pull the power window switch and hold it to
close the window, and then hold the switch
more than 3 seconds after the window is
closed completely.
5. Release the power window switch. Operate
the window by the automatic function to
confirm the initialization is complete.
If the power window automatic function does
WAC0072X
Rear
To use the power outlet, pull up the cover as
illustrated.
CAUTION:
.
.
.
The outlet and plug may be hot during or
immediately after use.
This power outlet is not designed for use
with a cigarette lighter unit.
Do not use with accessories that exceed a
12 volt, 120W (10A) power draw. Do not
use double adapters or more than one
electrical accessory.
Instruments and controls
2-21
STORAGE
D15A1-7505B926-4D14-4901-9E16-595CE0845367
.
.
.
.
.
.
Use power outlet with the engine running
to avoid discharging the vehicle battery.
Avoid using power outlet when the air
conditioner, headlights or rear window
defogger is on.
Before inserting or disconnecting a plug,
be sure to turn off the power switch of
the electrical accessory being used and
the ignition switch.
Push the plug in as far as it will go. If good
contact is not made, the plug may overheat or the internal temperature fuse
may blow.
Do not allow water to contact the outlet.
When not in use, be sure to close the cap.
WARNING:
.
.
The storages should not be used while
driving so that the full attention may be
given to vehicle operation.
Keep the storage lids closed while driving
to help prevent injury in an accident or
sudden stop.
GLOVE BOXD15A1-C5079549-DB0E-425B-ADCC-892780E9CA4D
JVI0287X
To open the glove box, pull the handle.
To close, push the lid in until the lock latches.
The glove box can be used as a cool box.
To use the cooling function:
1. Start the engine.
2. Turn the air conditioner on.
3. Open the glove box lid from the front
passenger’s seat.
4. Push the lever down to enable the cooling
air inside the glove box, pull the lever up to
disable the cooling air inside the glove box.
5. Put items in the box and close the lid.
The cooling function only activates when
the air conditioner is on.
. The airflow coming from the glove box
ventilator is the same temperature as the
air conditioner. The temperature cannot be
set independently.
. When the heater or the air conditioner is
working in high temperature, the cooling
function will not work even if the glove box
ventilator is opened.
CARD HOLDER
D15A1-BD938770-CACB-47F7-A490-52C9BD2307B1
Cool box function
GUID-03B29583-06DA-48F5-8449-83B93C81BCBE
WAC0042X
Driver’s side
WAC0041X
2-22
Instruments and controls
The card holder is located on the driver’s sun
visor.
To use the card holder, slide a card in the card
holder.
Soft bottle holder
GUID-85F223BF-17D9-442F-AE1D-C40FA95D5B8C
CARGO COVER
D15A1-67291F55-417E-4331-AB85-34A17ED454BC
CUP HOLDERS
(if equipped)
D15A1-F1D72A33-91A5-4902-86FC-7439878ED485
WARNING:
WARNING:
.
The driver must not remove or insert cups
into the cup holder while driving so that full
attention may be given to vehicle operation.
.
CAUTION:
.
Avoid abrupt starting and braking especially
when the cup holder is being used to prevent
spilling the contents. If the contents are hot,
they could scald you or your passengers.
Rear
WAC0043X
Front
D15A1-E80F2716-7269-4828-8FA8-097AFEB8510C
JVI1628X
Rear
WAC0048X
Soft bottle holders are located on the front and
rear doors.
Pull the armrest down as shown.
CAUTION:
.
.
Do not use bottle holder for any other
objects that could be thrown about in the
vehicle and possibly injure people during
sudden braking or an accident.
Do not use bottle holder for open liquid
containers.
Never put anything on the cargo cover,
no matter how small. Any object on it
could cause an injury in an accident or
sudden stop.
Do not leave the cargo cover in the
vehicle with it disengaged from the
holder.
The child restraint top tether strap may
be damaged by contact with the cargo
cover or items in the luggage area.
Remove the cargo cover from the vehicle
or secure it and any luggage. Your child
could be seriously injured or killed in a
collision if the top tether strap is damaged.
— If the cargo cover contacts the top
tether strap when it is attached to the
top tether anchor, remove the cargo
cover from the vehicle or secure it on
the cargo floor below its attachment
location. If the cargo cover is not
removed, it may damage the top
tether strap during a collision.
— Do not allow cargo to contact the top
tether strap when it is attached to the
top tether anchor. Properly secure
the cargo so it does not contact the
top tether strap. Cargo that is not
properly secured or that contacts the
top tether strap may damage the top
tether strap during a collision.
The cargo cover keeps the luggage compartment contents hidden from the outside.
Instruments and controls
2-23
ROOF RACK (if equipped)
D15A1-46CF5866-F415-4751-8F62-E33848ABC306
LUGGAGE HOOKS
D15A1-1B6B03B1-967B-46CD-A5CF-A2D7E72963DD
WAC0046X
WAC0045X
The luggage hooks
luggage area.
are located in the
CAUTION:
.
.
JVI0292X
To remove the cargo cover:
1. Remove the straps
from the back door.
2. Remove the outer cargo cover from the
holders . Then remove the inner cargo
cover from the holders, if necessary.
.
Always make sure that the luggage is
properly secured. Use the suitable ropes
and hooks.
Unsecured luggage can become dangerous in an accident or sudden stop.
Do not apply a total load of more than 3
kg (7 lb) to a single hook .
Do not apply any load directly to the roof side
rails. Cross bars must be installed before
applying load/cargo/luggage to the roof of
the vehicle.
Concerning cross bars, it is recommended that
you visit a NISSAN dealer for additional information.
The service load capacity for the roof side rails
is 30 kg (65 lb), however do not exceed the
accessory cross bars load capacity.
WARNING:
.
.
.
2-24
Instruments and controls
Always install the cross bars onto the
roof side rails before loading cargo of any
kind. Loading cargo directly onto the roof
side rails or the vehicle’s roof may cause
vehicle damage.
Drive extra carefully when the vehicle is
loaded at or near the cargo carrying
capacity, especially if the significant portion of that load is carried on the roof
rack.
Heavy loading of the roof rack has the
potential to affect the vehicle stability
and handling during sudden or unusual
handling maneuvers.
SUN VISORS
INTERIOR LIGHTS
D15A1-DE6C9486-A891-4CE9-85EA-4990109A028C
.
.
.
Roof rack load should be evenly distributed.
Do not exceed maximum roof rack load
weight capacity.
Properly secure all cargo with ropes or
straps to help prevent it from sliding or
shifting. In a sudden stop or collision,
unsecured cargo could cause personal
injury.
D15A1-B2421D01-116A-4BF7-A7F6-3E979908B4FE
CAUTION:
.
.
Do not leave the light switch on when the
engine is not running for extended periods of time to prevent the battery from
being discharged.
Turn off the lights when you leave the
vehicle.
WAC0047X
Front
SIC2872
1.
2.
To block out glare from the front, swing
down the sun visor .
To block glare from the side, remove the
sun visor from the center mount and swing
it to the side .
WAC0070X
Rear
Instruments and controls
2-25
FRONT ANDD15A1-D3E36197-23C8-4842-80EB-9065C29B9D01
REAR ROOM LIGHT
The room light has a three-position switch .
When the switch is in the “ON” position , the
room light illuminates.
When the switch is in the “DOOR” position ,
the room light illuminates when a door is
opened.
The interior light timer will keep the room light
on for a period of time when:
. The key is removed from the ignition switch
with the driver’s door closed. (model without Intelligent Key system)
. The ignition switch is placed in the “LOCK”
position. (model with Intelligent Key system)
. The doors are unlocked by pushing the
“UNLOCK”
button (on the remote
controller or Intelligent Key) or the request
switch (Intelligent Key system equipped
models), with the ignition switch in the
“LOCK” position.
. Any door is opened and then closed with
the ignition switch in the “LOCK” position
and without the key in the ignition switch.
(model without Intelligent Key system)
. Any door is opened and then closed with
the ignition switch in the “LOCK” position.
(model with Intelligent Key system)
The interior light timer will be cancelled when:
. The driver’s door is locked.
. The ignition switch is placed in the “ON”
position.
When the switch is in the “OFF” position , the
room light does not illuminate, regardless of
any condition.
2-26 Instruments and controls
Lead me to GUID-E974E440-7E0D-434D-8CE5-1DA83031DF9C
car function (if equipped)
WAC0096X
When the “
” button
on the Intelligent Key
is pushed with the ignition switch is in the
“LOCK” position, the room light will turn on and
stay on for a period of time. Pushing the “
”
button
again to turn of the room light.
NOTE:
The lead me to car function can be cancelled
” button .
by pushing the “
FRONT MAP GUID-CCB171EC-7446-4C47-AA3D-A96E9686535F
LIGHTS
To turn on the front map light , push the on
switch , and the light illuminates. To turn off,
push the off switch .
CARGO ROOM
LIGHT
D15A1-E6D9139D-714D-4C69-9FE0-0EF26402759B
The cargo room light illuminates when the
back door is opened. When the back door is
closed, the light will turn off.
3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Keys .........................................................................................................................
....
3-2
NISSAN Anti-Theft System (NATS) key
(if equipped) ...............................................................................................
....
3-2
Intelligent Key (if equipped) ..........................................................
....
3-2
Doors ......................................................................................................................
....
3-3
Locking with key ....................................................................................
....
3-3
Locking with power door lock switch ..................................
....
3-3
Vehicle speed sensing door lock mechanism ...............
....
3-4
Impact sensing door lock releasing mechanism ........
.... 3-4
Child safety rear door lock ............................................................
....
3-4
Remote keyless entry system (if equipped) ............................
....
3-4
Using remote keyless entry system .......................................
....
3-5
Intelligent Key system (if equipped) ..............................................
....
3-5
Operating range ....................................................................................
....
3-7
Using Intelligent Key system ........................................................
....
3-7
Troubleshooting guide .....................................................................
....
3-9
Using remote keyless entry function .................................
....
3-10
Hazard indicator operation ........................................................
....
3-10
Security system ..........................................................................................
....
NISSAN Anti-Theft System (NATS) ......................................
....
Hood ....................................................................................................................
....
Opening hood ....................................................................................
....
Closing hood .......................................................................................
....
Back door ........................................................................................................
....
Opening back door ........................................................................
....
Closing back door ...........................................................................
....
Back door release lever ..............................................................
....
Fuel-filler lid ...................................................................................................
....
Opening fuel-filler lid ....................................................................
....
Fuel-filler cap ......................................................................................
....
Steering wheel ............................................................................................
....
Tilt operation ......................................................................................
....
Mirrors ................................................................................................................
....
Inside rearview mirror .................................................................
....
Outside rearview mirrors ..........................................................
....
Vanity mirror .......................................................................................
....
Parking brake ...............................................................................................
....
3-12
3-12
3-12
3-13
3-13
3-13
3-14
3-14
3-14
3-15
3-15
3-15
3-15
3-15
3-16
3-16
3-16
3-17
3-17
KEYS
D15A1-26997D54-98E9-47F6-A30B-EB8B80EB4A7F
Your vehicle can only be driven with the keys
specific to your vehicle. A key number plate is
supplied with your key. Record the key number
and keep the key number plate in a safe place,
except in the vehicle, in case of the need to
duplicate the keys.
The key can only be duplicated using an
original key or the original key number. The
key number is required when you have lost all
of the keys and do not have the original key to
duplicate from. If the key is lost, or you need
extra keys, provide an original key or the key
number to a NISSAN dealer.
CAUTION:
Do not leave the keys inside the vehicle when
leaving the vehicle.
The new keys must be registered by a NISSAN
dealer prior to use with the NATS of your
vehicle. Since the registration process requires
erasing all memory in the NATS components
when registering new keys, be sure to take all
NATS keys that you have to the NISSAN dealer.
CAUTION:
.
*: Immobilizer
.
INTELLIGENT
KEY (if equipped)
D15A1-6B940429-FDF2-41D1-8475-8D7DD9A87880
WAD0004X
1.
2.
WAD0003X
3-2
Pre-driving checks and adjustments
CAUTION:
Do not allow the NATS key, which contains an
electrical transponder, to come into contact
with water or salt water. This could affect the
system function.
NISSAN ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM (NATS*)
KEY (if equipped)
D15A1-8626FF76-DCA1-4147-9AB5-E06C301084B2
1
NATS key (2)
2
Key number plate
Your vehicle can only be driven with the NATS
keys, which are registered to your vehicle’s
NATS components. As many as 4 NATS keys
can be registered and used with one vehicle.
prior to use with the Intelligent Key system and
NATS of your vehicle. Since the registration
process requires erasing all memory in the
Intelligent Key components when registering
new keys, be sure to take all Intelligent Keys
that you have to the NISSAN dealer.
*: Immobilizer
Intelligent Key (2)
Mechanical key (inside the Intelligent Key)
(2)
3.
Key number plate
Your vehicle can only be driven with the
Intelligent Keys, which are registered to your
vehicle’s Intelligent Key system components
and NISSAN Anti-Theft System (NATS*) components. As many as 4 Intelligent Keys can be
registered and used with one vehicle. The new
keys must be registered by a NISSAN dealer
Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with
you. Do not leave the vehicle with the
Intelligent Key inside.
Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with
you when driving. The Intelligent Key is a
precision device with a built-in transmitter. To avoid damaging it, please note the
following.
— The Intelligent Key is water resistant;
however, wetting may damage the
Intelligent Key. If the Intelligent Key
gets wet, immediately wipe until it is
completely dry.
— Do not bend, drop or strike it against
another object.
— If the outside temperature is below
−10°C (14 °F), the battery of the Intelligent Key may not function properly.
— Do not place the Intelligent Key for an
extended period in a place where
temperatures exceed 60°C (140°F).
— Do not change or modify the Intelligent Key.
— Do not use a magnet key holder.
— Do not place the Intelligent Key near
equipment that produces a magnetic
field such as a TV, audio equipment
and personal computers.
DOORS
D15A1-EB526B21-C49A-4D84-977C-6731136A3558
.
— Do not allow the Intelligent Key to
come into contact with water or salt
water, and do not wash it in a washing machine. This could affect the
system function.
If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen,
NISSAN recommends erasing the ID code
of that Intelligent Key. This will prevent
the Intelligent Key from unauthorized use
to unlock the vehicle. For information
regarding the erasing procedure, please
contact a NISSAN dealer.
Mechanical D15A1-679F262F-4F4A-4C2A-B9F3-B1282A58EFB6
key
WARNING:
.
.
Always look before opening any doors, to
avoid an accident with oncoming traffic.
To help avoid risk of injury or death
through unintended operation of the
vehicle and or its systems, including
entrapment in windows or inadvertent
door lock activation, do not leave children, people who require the assistance
of others or pets unattended in your
vehicle. Additionally, the temperature inside a closed vehicle on a warm day can
quickly become high enough to cause a
significant risk of injury or death to
people and pets.
LOCKING WITH
KEY
D15A1-EABFEFD4-C9D9-4513-ABEB-6674D6999B8D
LOCKING WITH POWER DOOR LOCK
SWITCH
D15A1-C7EADB00-4DE8-4897-9B93-CF6FBD217578
WAD0019X
Operating the power door lock switch, located
on the instrument panel., will lock or unlock all
the doors.
To lock the doors, push the power door lock
switch
with all doors closed.
CAUTION:
.
WAD0005X
To remove the mechanical key, push the lock
knob at the side of the Intelligent Key.
To install the mechanical key, firmly insert it
into the Intelligent Key until the lock knob
returns to the lock position.
Use the mechanical key to lock or unlock the
doors. (See “Doors” (P.3-3).)
.
WAE0242X
To lock the front passenger’s door, insert the
key to the door cylinder and turn the key
counterclockwise .
To unlock the door, turn the key clockwise .
To lock or unlock the other doors, use the
power door lock switch, the remote controller
(if equipped) or the Intelligent Key (if equipped).
When locking the doors using the power
door lock switch, be sure not to leave the
key in the vehicle.
When the Intelligent Key (if equipped) is
left in the vehicle while the driver’s door is
opened and you try to lock the door using
the power door lock switch after getting
out of the vehicle, all the doors will unlock
automatically after the power door lock
switch is operated.
To unlock, push the power door lock switch
again.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments
3-3
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
(if equipped)
D15A1-4D5AD9DB-0062-48F5-8791-69286B9F5A81
VEHICLE SPEED SENSING DOOR LOCK
MECHANISM
D15A1-38C279BF-202D-47CF-9BC4-049AA289C352
CHILD SAFETY
REAR DOOR LOCK
D15A1-ADD70D42-8303-42F0-A0E3-3C53E818F4E7
All doors will be locked automatically when the
vehicle speed reaches 7 km/h (4 MPH). Once
the lock has been unlocked, while driving, the
vehicle speed sensing door lock mechanism
will not lock the door again unless one of the
following is performed.
. Opening any doors.
. Placing the ignition switch in the “LOCK”
position.
To activate or deactivate vehicle speed
sensing door
lock mechanism
D15A1-CCC27185-B93A-44AF-8619-F966A78CF5B3
To activate or deactivate the door lock mechanism, perform the following procedures.
1. With the engine running, push and hold the
power door lock switch for 4 seconds.
2. The message will appear as follows in the
vehicle information display if the switching
operation is successful:
. AUTO DOOR LOCK ON — activated
. AUTO DOOR LOCK OFF — deactivated
WAD0007X
The child safety rear door locks help prevent
rear doors from being opened accidentally,
especially when small children are in the
vehicle.
When the levers are in the lock position , the
child safety rear door locks engage and the
rear doors can only be opened by the outside
door handles.
To disengage, move the levers to the unlock
position .
The remote keyless entry system can operate
all door locks using the remote controller. The
remote controller can operate at a distance of
approximately 1 m (3.3 ft) away from the
vehicle. The operating distance depends upon
the conditions around the vehicle.
As many as 4 remote controllers can be used
with one vehicle. For information about the
purchase and use of additional remote controllers, contact a NISSAN dealer.
The remote controller will not function under
the following conditions:
. When the distance between the remote
controller and vehicle is more than approximately 1 m (3.3 ft).
. When the remote controller battery is
discharged.
. When the key is in the ignition switch.
CAUTION:
.
.
IMPACT SENSING DOOR LOCK RELEASING MECHANISM
D15A1-4008906F-C98A-4425-A3EA-C456FB5028FB
All doors will be unlocked automatically when
the impact sensors sense an impact while the
ignition switch is in the “ON” position.
.
.
.
.
When locking the doors using the remote
controller, be sure not to leave the key in
the vehicle.
Do not allow the remote controller, which
contains electrical components, to come
into contact with water or salt water. This
could affect the system function.
Do not drop the remote controller.
Do not strike the remote controller sharply against another object.
If the outside temperature is below −10°C
(14°F), the battery of the remote controller may not function properly.
Do not place the remote controller for an
extended period in an area where temperatures exceed 60°C (140°F).
If a remote controller is lost or stolen, NISSAN
3-4
Pre-driving checks and adjustments
INTELLIGENT KEY SYSTEM (if equipped)
D15A1-FC296357-4B62-4F10-8E84-9DD2A3C8C3B6
recommends erasing the ID code of that
remote controller from the vehicle. This may
prevent the unauthorized use of the remote
controller to unlock the vehicle. For information
regarding the erasing procedure, contact a
NISSAN dealer.
For information regarding the replacement of a
battery, see “Remote controller battery” (P.8-17).
USING REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
D15A1-D46DA053-8288-43B1-99DB-019797F653AD
CAUTION:
After locking the doors using the remote
controller, be sure that the doors have been
securely locked by operating the door handles.
Unlocking doors
D15A1-CBDCE4B1-1D60-4751-AE87-CB506FCCEB50
1.
Push the “UNLOCK”
button
on the
remote controller.
2. All doors will be unlocked.
All doors will be locked automatically unless
one of the following operations is performed
within 30 seconds after pushing the “UNLOCK”
button .
. Opening any doors.
. Inserting the key into the ignition switch.
Hazard indicator
operation
D15A1-F7798145-F60E-4341-805A-2A6DFF918831
WAD0008X
UNLOCK button
LOCK button
Locking doors
D15A1-2BFC8BDE-3B87-4A39-8FC9-5702C38812D3
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Remove the key from the ignition switch.
Close all doors.
Push the “LOCK”
button
on the
remote controller.
All doors will be locked.
Operate door handles to confirm that the
doors have been securely locked.
When you lock or unlock the doors, the hazard
indicator will flash as a confirmation.
. “LOCK”: The hazard indicator flashes twice.
. “UNLOCK”: The hazard indicator flashes
once.
WAD0004X
1.
2.
3.
Intelligent Key (2)
Mechanical key (inside the Intelligent Key)
(2)
Key number plate
WARNING:
.
.
Radio waves could adversely affect electric medical equipment. Those who use a
pacemaker should contact the electric
medical equipment manufacturer for
the possible influences before use.
The Intelligent Key transmits radio waves
when the buttons are pushed. The radio
waves may affect aircraft navigation and
communication systems. Do not operate
the Intelligent Key while on an airplane.
Make sure the buttons are not operated
unintentionally when the unit is stored
during a flight.
The Intelligent Key system can be used to
operate all the doors (including the back door)
with the remote controller function or by
pushing the request switch on the vehicle
without taking the key out from a pocket or
purse. The operating environment and/or conditions may affect the Intelligent Key system
Pre-driving checks and adjustments
3-5
operation.
Be sure to read the following before using the
Intelligent Key system.
CAUTION:
.
.
Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with
you when operating the vehicle.
Never leave the Intelligent Key in the
vehicle when you leave the vehicle.
The Intelligent Key is always communicating
with the vehicle as it receives radio waves. The
Intelligent Key system transmits weak radio
waves. Environmental conditions may interfere
with the operation of the Intelligent Key system
under the following operating conditions.
. When operating near a location where
strong radio waves are transmitted, such
as a TV tower, power station and broadcasting station.
. When in possession of wireless equipment,
such as a cellular telephone, transceiver,
and CB radio.
. When the Intelligent Key is in contact with
or covered by metallic materials.
. When any type of radio wave remote
control is used nearby.
. When the Intelligent Key is placed near an
electric appliance such as a personal computer.
In such cases, correct the operating conditions
before using the Intelligent Key function or use
the mechanical key.
Although the life of the battery varies depending on the operating conditions, the battery’s
life is approximately 2 years. If the battery is
discharged, replace it with a new one.
When the Intelligent Key battery is almost
discharged, see “Intelligent Key battery dis-
3-6 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
charge” (P.5-6) to start the engine.
Since the Intelligent Key is continuously receiving radio waves, if the key is left near equipment which transmits strong radio waves, such
as signals from a TV and personal computer,
the battery life may become shorter.
For information regarding replacement of a
battery, see “Intelligent Key battery” (P.8-18).
Because the steering wheel is locked electrically, unlocking the steering wheel is impossible
when the vehicle battery is completely discharged. Pay special attention that the vehicle
battery is not completely discharged.
As many as 4 Intelligent Keys can be used with
one vehicle. For information about the purchase and use of additional Intelligent Keys,
contact a NISSAN dealer.
CAUTION:
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Do not allow the Intelligent Key, which
contains electrical components, to come
into contact with water or salt water. This
could affect the system function.
Do not drop the Intelligent Key.
Do not strike the Intelligent Key sharply
against another object.
Do not change or modify the Intelligent
Key.
Wetting may damage the Intelligent Key.
If the Intelligent Key gets wet, immediately wipe until it is completely dry.
If the outside temperature is below −10°C
(14°F), the battery of the Intelligent Key
may not function properly.
Do not place the Intelligent Key for an
extended period in an area where temperatures exceed 60°C (140°F).
.
.
Do not attach the Intelligent Key with a
key holder that contains a magnet.
Do not place the Intelligent Key near
equipment that produces a magnetic
field, such as a TV, audio equipment and
personal computers.
If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen, NISSAN
recommends erasing the ID code of that
Intelligent Key from the vehicle. This may
prevent the unauthorized use of the Intelligent
Key to operate the vehicle. For information
regarding the erasing procedure, contact a
NISSAN dealer.
The Intelligent Key function can be disabled.
For information about disabling the Intelligent
Key function, contact a NISSAN dealer.
.
OPERATING RANGE
D15A1-79523823-E89F-4B5D-A69F-959FBA7C1E24
SPA2074
The Intelligent Key functions can only be used
when the Intelligent Key is within the specified
operating range from the request switch .
When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged
or strong radio waves are present near the
operating location, the Intelligent Key system’s
operating range becomes narrower, and the
Intelligent Key may not function properly.
The operating range is within 80 cm (31.50 in)
from each request switch .
If the Intelligent Key is too close to the door
glass, handle or rear bumper, the request
switches may not function.
When the Intelligent Key is within the operating
range, it is possible for anyone, even someone
who does not carry the Intelligent Key, to push
the request switch and lock/unlock the doors.
USING INTELLIGENT
KEY SYSTEM
D15A1-617CCC55-66D7-433D-B927-62447BC311CC
WAD0010X
.
.
.
SPA2408
The request switch will not function under the
following conditions:
. When the Intelligent Key is left inside the
vehicle
. When the Intelligent Key is not within the
operational range
. When any door is open or not closed
securely
. When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged
When the ignition switch is in the “ON”
position
.
.
Do not push the door handle request
switch with the Intelligent Key held in your
hand as illustrated. The close distance to
the door handle will cause the Intelligent
Key system to have difficulty recognizing
that the Intelligent Key is outside the
vehicle.
After locking the doors using the door
handle request switch, make sure that the
doors have been securely locked by operating the door handles.
When locking the doors using the door
handle request switch, make sure to have
the Intelligent Key in your possession
before operating the door handle request
switch to prevent the Intelligent Key from
being left in the vehicle.
The door handle request switch is operational only when the Intelligent Key has
been detected by the Intelligent Key system.
To prevent the Intelligent Key from being
left inside the vehicle or the luggage room,
make sure you are carrying the key with
you and then lock the doors.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments
3-7
.
Do not pull the door handle before pushing
the door handle request switch. The door
will be unlocked but will not open. Release
the door handle once and pull it again to
open the door.
Lockout protection:
GUID-1295725F-1AF3-4AA4-9B71-2C636F81A13F
To prevent the Intelligent Key from being
accidentally locked in the vehicle, lockout
protection is equipped with the Intelligent Key
system.
. When the Intelligent Key is left in the vehicle
while the driver’s door is opened and you
try to lock the door using the power door
lock switch after getting out of the vehicle,
all the doors will unlock automatically after
the door is closed.
CAUTION:
The lockout protection may not function
under the following conditions:
WAD0011X
When you carry the Intelligent Key with you,
you can lock or unlock all doors and the back
door by pushing the door handle request
switch (driver’s or front passenger’s)
within
the range of operation.
When you lock or unlock the doors, the hazard
indicator will flash as a confirmation. For details, see “Hazard indicator operation” (P.3-10).
Locking doors
D15A1-46A34B66-C7EC-44ED-B6E4-34709BCF1EB0
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Push the ignition switch to the “LOCK”
position.
Carry the Intelligent Key with you.
Close all doors.
Push the door handle request switch .
All doors and the back door will be locked.
Operate door handles to confirm that the
doors have been securely locked.
3-8 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
When the Intelligent Key is placed on top
of the instrument panel.
. When the Intelligent Key is placed on the
cargo cover.
. When the Intelligent Key is placed inside
of the glove box.
. When the Intelligent Key is placed inside
of the door pockets.
The lockout protection may function when
the Intelligent Key is outside the vehicle but
is too close to the vehicle.
.
Unlocking doors
D15A1-4C06CE36-CA33-4E53-96FA-D9242916BE3F
1.
2.
3.
Carry the Intelligent Key with you.
Push the door handle request switch .
All doors and the back door will be unlocked.
If a door handle is pulled while unlocking the
doors, that door may not be unlocked. Returning the door handle to its original position will
unlock the door. If the door does not unlock,
after returning the door handle, push the door
handle request switch to unlock the door.
Automatic relock:
GUID-1295725F-1AF3-4AA4-9B71-2C636F81A13F
All doors will be locked automatically unless
one of the following operations is performed
within 30 seconds after pushing the request
switch while the doors are locked.
. Opening any doors.
. Pushing the ignition switch.
If during the preset time period the “UNLOCK”
button on the Intelligent Key is pushed, all
doors will be locked automatically after the
next preset time.
TROUBLESHOOTING
GUIDE
D15A1-5A1782C3-C48A-416C-BE3D-7DD3A7E9F25E
Symptom
When pushing the request switch or
the “LOCK”
button on the Intelligent Key to lock the door
When pushing the ignition switch to
start the engine
Possible cause
Action to take
All the doors unlock.
The Intelligent Key is inside the
vehicle or the luggage room.
Carry the Intelligent Key with you.
The “KEYCARD BATTERY LOW”
message appears in the vehicle
information display.
The battery charge is low.
Replace the battery with a new
one. (See “Intelligent Key battery”
(P.8-18).)
The “PLEASE INSERT KEYCARD”
message appears in the vehicle
information display.
The Intelligent Key is not in the
vehicle or the vehicle could not
detect the intelligent key due to
the flat battery, etc.
Carry the Intelligent Key with you.
To start the engine, insert the
Intelligent Key into the Intelligent
Key port. (See “Intelligent Key battery discharge” (P.5-6).)
Pre-driving checks and adjustments
3-9
USING REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION
D15A1-2AE42741-EBE2-4FE8-BF1B-689F0094ACB4
Locking doors
D15A1-7ABF6AB4-A10F-45F7-A6A2-FD87D2681DAF
Opening back
door
GUID-6C979846-0A2B-4876-B091-7941DE2C0E05
1.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Place the ignition switch in the “LOCK”
position and carry the Intelligent Key.
Close all doors (including the back door).
Push the “LOCK”
button
on the
Intelligent Key.
All doors will be locked.
Operate the door handles to confirm that
the doors have been securely locked.
CAUTION:
WAD0013X
UNLOCK button
LOCK button
BACK DOOR button
button
Operating range
D15A1-D3BB5654-7185-45AE-9C12-C3962F5F9FD5
The remote keyless entry system allows you to
lock/unlock all doors and opening the back
door. The operating distance depends upon
the conditions around the vehicle. To securely
operate the buttons, approach the vehicle to
about 1 m (3.3 ft) from the door.
The remote keyless entry system will not
function under the following conditions:
. When the Intelligent Key is not within the
operational range.
. When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged.
For information regarding the replacement of a
battery, see “Intelligent Key battery” (P.8-18).
3-10
Pre-driving checks and adjustments
After locking the doors using the Intelligent
Key, be sure that the doors have been
securely locked by operating the door handles.
Unlocking doors
D15A1-68632249-BE76-4075-AE4E-73EE90E081B8
1.
2.
Push the “UNLOCK”
button
on the
Intelligent Key.
All doors (including the back door) will be
unlocked.
Automatic relock:
GUID-1295725F-1AF3-4AA4-9B71-2C636F81A13F
All doors will be locked automatically unless
one of the following operations is performed
within 30 seconds after pushing the “UNLOCK”
button
on the Intelligent Key while the
doors are locked. If during this 30-second time
period, the “UNLOCK”
button
on the
Intelligent Key is pushed, all doors will be locked
automatically after another 30 seconds.
. Opening any doors.
. Pushing the ignition switch.
2.
3.
Push the “BACK DOOR”
button on the
Intelligent Key.
The back door will be unlatched.
Push the back door opener switch and
raise the back door to open the back door.
Using lead me
to car function
GUID-25A9D490-AB48-4DD7-9334-4BAA28983272
By pushing the
button , you can turn on
the room light for a period of time from the
outside of the vehicle. For more details, see
“Lead me to car function” (P.2-26).
HAZARD INDICATOR
OPERATION
D15A1-84D278A3-8EED-4771-B809-191F06531A2A
When you lock or unlock the doors or the back
door with the request switch or the remote
keyless entry function, the hazard indicator will
flash as a confirmation.
The following descriptions show how the
hazard indicator will activate when locking or
unlocking the doors.
Operation
DOOR LOCK
Intelligent Key system (using
HAZARD - twice
the door handle request switch)
Remote keyless entry system
HAZARD - twice
(using
or
button)
DOOR UNLOCK
HAZARD - once
HAZARD - once
Pre-driving checks and adjustments
3-11
SECURITY SYSTEM
D15A1-7B1EF700-8F89-453A-A5ED-684B6DD7FA0A
WARNING:
.
.
Do not change or modify the security
system. Doing so could affect the proper
operation of the system.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Your vehicle is equipped with the NISSAN AntiTheft System (NATS)*.
(* immobilizer)
NISSAN ANTI-THEFT
SYSTEM (NATS)
D15A1-CE126D33-5A0C-473D-8436-217F28732C07
The NISSAN Anti-Theft System (NATS) will not
allow the engine to start without the use of the
registered NATS key.
If the engine does not start using the registered
NATS key, it may be due to interference caused
by:
. Another NATS key.
. Automated toll road device.
. Automated payment device.
. Other devices that transmit similar signals.
Start the engine using the following procedure:
1. Remove any items that may be causing the
interference away from the NATS key.
2. Leave the ignition switch in the “ON” position for approximately 5 seconds.
3. Place the ignition switch in the “OFF” or
“LOCK” position, and wait approximately 10
seconds.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 again.
5. Start the engine.
3-12 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
HOOD
D15A1-84DFC8CD-2300-48BD-B6F0-707623C404FF
6.
Repeat the steps above until all possible
interferences are eliminated.
If this procedure allows the engine to start,
NISSAN recommends placing the registered
NATS key separate from other devices to avoid
interference.
WARNING:
.
.
The hood must be closed and latched
securely before driving. Failure to do so
could cause the hood to fly open and
result in an accident.
Never open the hood if steam or smoke is
coming from the engine compartment to
avoid injury.
BACK DOOR
D15A1-6261B980-8664-4D3E-85BF-F32BFEEBD787
OPENING HOOD
WARNING:
D15A1-E2773E78-51C8-45B7-B6C8-B152AF808F99
.
.
Make sure the back door has been closed
securely to prevent it from opening while
driving.
Do not drive with the back door open.
This could allow dangerous exhaust
gases to be drawn into the vehicle.
CAUTION:
.
WAD0014X
1.
Pull the hood lock release handle located
below the instrument panel until the hood
springs up.
2. Locate the lever
in between the hood
and grille and push the lever sideways with
your fingertips.
3. Raise the hood .
4. Remove the support rod and insert it into
the slot.
Hold the coated parts when removing or
resetting the support rod. Avoid direct contact with the metal parts, as they may be hot
immediately after the engine has been
stopped.
CLOSING HOOD
D15A1-BF1C1017-F13A-42F0-BA94-57D4BCDCA2AC
1.
2.
3.
While supporting the hood, return the
support rod to its original position.
Slowly lower the hood to about 20 to 30 cm
(8 to 12 in) above the hood lock, then let it
drop.
Make sure it is securely latched.
.
.
Before opening the back door, be sure to
clear away snow, ice or dust that may be
stuck to the back door. If the back door is
opened while materials are still stuck to
it, it may suddenly close again due to the
weight of these materials.
Always be sure to fully open the back
door. If it is not fully opened, it may
suddenly shut.
Be especially careful when opening the
back door in strong wind. The door could
be caught by a gust of wind and may
close suddenly.
JVP0059X
Pre-driving checks and adjustments
3-13
.
CAUTION:
.
.
The back door gas stays are installed in
order to support the weight of the back
door. In order to prevent the gas stays
being damaged or not operating properly, be sure to observe the following
points.
— Do not insert hands or cords into the
gas stays
or apply any force to
them laterally.
— Do not attach any adhesive foreign
materials such as pieces of plastic or
stickers to the rod
portion.
Do not close the back door while holding
the gas stays or hang anything on them.
Doing so may lead to hands or arms
becoming trapped in the back door and
could result in an injury.
.
.
.
Push the “UNLOCK” button on the Intelligent Key (if equipped). (See “Intelligent Key
system” (P.3-5).)
Push the BACK DOOR button on the
Intelligent Key (if equipped). (See “Intelligent
Key system” (P.3-5).)
Push the “UNLOCK” button on the remote
controller (if equipped). (See “Remote keyless entry system” (P.3-4).)
Push the power door lock switch to unlock
all doors.
the back door opens while the vehicle is
being driven, this could result in a serious
accident.
to pull
To close the back door, hold the grip
down the back door and then push it down
securely.
BACK DOORD15A1-47D9369B-E0BC-4FE6-B69A-3C23868228C7
RELEASE LEVER
CLOSING BACK
DOOR
D15A1-0637295E-9782-4874-93A0-00D89892635C
JVP0519X
OPENING BACK
DOOR
D15A1-8000B562-E416-4F4B-951D-06F220A9B387
JVP0634X
WARNING:
.
WAD0020X
To open the back door, unlock it with one of
the following operations, then pull the handle.
. Push the back door opener switch.
3-14 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
.
.
Do not shut the back door with one hand
and the other hand remaining on the
back door or vehicle body. Doing so may
lead to your hand becoming trapped and
could result in an injury.
When closing the back door, do not place
your hands near the edge of the back
door. Always be sure to close the back
door from the outside.
After closing the back door, be sure to
check that it has been closed securely. If
If the back door cannot be unlocked due to a
discharged battery, follow these steps.
1. Fold the rear seats down. (See “Rear seats”
(P.1-3).)
2. Move the release lever to the left as
illustrated to open the back door.
Contact a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible for
repair.
FUEL-FILLER LID
STEERING WHEEL
D15A1-33A73EC6-E3E9-4C09-B87E-45FC8F7A7C4B
WARNING:
.
.
.
D15A1-155DD79C-F9FA-4446-9C3C-658401D47962
FUEL-FILLERD15A1-4371145D-372C-44F1-B5AD-399F351B8DDD
CAP
Fuel is extremely flammable and highly
explosive under certain conditions. You
could be burned or seriously injured if it is
misused or mishandled. Always stop the
engine and do not smoke or allow open
flames or sparks near the vehicle when
refueling.
Fuel may be under pressure. Turn the cap
a half of a turn, and wait for any “hissing”
sound to stop to prevent fuel from
spraying out and possibly causing personal injury. Then remove the cap.
Use only an original equipment type fuelfiller cap as a replacement. It has a builtin safety valve needed for proper operation of the fuel system and emission
control system. An incorrect cap can
result in a serious malfunction and possible injury.
OPENING FUEL-FILLER
LID
D15A1-70C53833-21DD-49A2-889E-5A3565B4D0C7
WARNING:
Never adjust the steering wheel while driving
so that full attention may be given to vehicle
operation.
TILT OPERATION
GUID-F8DA7D90-E581-40B0-8B1F-E5E57F59FFAD
WAD0016X
Turn the fuel-filler cap counterclockwise
to
remove. To tighten, turn the fuel-filler cap
clockwise .
Put the fuel-filler cap on the cap holder while
refueling.
CAUTION:
If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body, flush it
away with water to avoid paint damage.
WAD0039X
While pulling the lock lever up , adjust the
steering wheel up or down
until the desired
position is achieved.
Push the lock lever down
firmly to lock the
steering wheel in place.
WAD0015X
To open the fuel-filler lid, pull the fuel-filler lid
opener lever.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments
3-15
MIRRORS
D15A1-D5C9F9CE-0CC3-414E-BAB0-ACDD06428BD1
WARNING:
Adjust the position of all mirrors before
driving. Do not adjust the mirror positions
while driving so that full attention may be
given to vehicle operation.
during the day for
Push the adjusting lever
the best rearward visibility.
2.
OUTSIDE REARVIEW
MIRRORS
D15A1-1CA29965-E808-4DBC-8766-482221B11AAC
Folding
INSIDE REARVIEW
MIRROR
D15A1-70428961-428B-4E74-8FDB-B4B0BBD3C4C9
.
.
.
SPA2447
D15A1-BBB8FF8A-9D63-44A6-A8B6-55D4B0278A07
Remote controlGUID-1295725F-1AF3-4AA4-9B71-2C636F81A13F
type (if equipped):
WARNING:
.
Adjust each mirror until the desired position is achieved .
Never touch the outside rearview mirrors
while they are in motion. Doing so may
pinch your fingers or damage the mirror.
Never drive the vehicle with the outside
rearview mirrors folded. This reduces rear
view visibility and may lead to an accident.
Objects viewed in the outside mirror are
closer than they appear (if equipped).
The picture dimensions and distance in
the outside mirrors are not real.
Adjusting
D15A1-BA772B9A-BDEB-4A66-8B11-44E022F0FD05
While holding the inside rearview mirror, adjust
the mirror angles until the desired position is
achieved.
WAD0028X
The outside rearview mirror remote control
operates when the ignition switch is in the “ON”
position.
The outside rearview mirrors automatically fold
when the outside rearview mirror folding
switch is turn to the
position. To unfold, turn
the switch from position to another position.
CAUTION:
.
WAD0018X
.
SPA2143
Pull the adjusting lever
when the glare from
the headlights of the vehicle behind you
obstructs your vision at night.
3-16 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
The outside rearview mirror remote control,
located on the driver’s door armrest, can be
operated when the ignition switch is in the “ON”
position.
1. Move the switch to select the right or left
mirror .
.
.
Continuously performing the fold/unfold
operation of the outside rearview mirror
may cause the switch to stop the operation.
Do not touch the mirrors while they are
moving. Your hand may be pinched, and
the mirror may malfunction.
Do not drive with the mirrors stored. You
will be unable to see behind the vehicle.
If the mirrors were folded or unfolded by
hand, there is a chance that the mirror
PARKING BRAKE
D15A1-ABB97913-7F76-4D46-BF6E-5E27714E1F2C
will move forward or backward during
driving. If the mirrors were folded or
unfolded by hand, be sure to adjust them
again electrically before driving.
WARNING:
.
Manual control GUID-1295725F-1AF3-4AA4-9B71-2C636F81A13F
type (if equipped):
.
.
.
JVP0588X
Fold the outside rearview mirror by pushing it
toward the rear of the vehicle.
Unfold the outside rearview mirror by pushing
it towards the front of the vehicle.
Never drive the vehicle with the parking
brake applied. The brake will overheat
and fail to operate and will lead to an
accident.
Never release the parking brake from
outside the vehicle. If the vehicle moves,
it will be impossible to push the foot
brake pedal and will lead to an accident.
Never use the shift lever in place of the
parking brake. When parking, be sure the
parking brake is fully applied.
To help avoid risk of injury or death
through unintended operation of the
vehicle and/or its systems, do not leave
children, people who require the assistance of others or pets unattended in
your vehicle. Additionally, the temperature inside a closed vehicle on a warm
day can quickly become high enough to
cause a significant risk of injury or death
to people and pets.
and hold the foot brake pedal. Pull up the
parking brake lever slightly, push the button
and lower the lever completely .
Before driving, be sure that the brake warning
light has turned off.
VANITY MIRROR
D15A1-3BBC66EB-AB23-4A75-833B-9562E91FEDD9
SPA2110
SPA2192
To use the front vanity mirror, pull down the
sun visor and pull up the cover.
To apply the parking brake, pull the parking
brake lever up .
To release the parking brake, firmly depress
Pre-driving checks and adjustments
3-17
MEMO
3-18
Pre-driving checks and adjustments
4 Monitor, heater and air conditioner, and
audio system
NissanConnect Owner’s Manual (if equipped) ......................
....
4-2
Safety precautions .......................................................................................
....
4-2
Rear view monitor (if equipped) .......................................................
....
4-3
Rear view monitor system operation ...................................
....
4-3
How to read the displayed lines ...............................................
....
4-4
Difference between predictive and
actual distances .....................................................................................
....
4-4
Adjusting the screen ..........................................................................
....
4-5
Rear view monitor system limitations .................................
....
4-6
System maintenance .........................................................................
....
4-6
Around View Monitor (if equipped) ................................................
....
4-7
Around View Monitor system operation ............................
....
4-8
Difference between predictive and
actual distances .....................................................................................
....
4-9
How to park with predictive course lines .....................
....
4-11
How to switch the display ..........................................................
....
4-12
Adjusting the screen .......................................................................
....
4-12
Around View Monitor system limitations .......................
....
4-12
System maintenance ......................................................................
....
4-13
Ventilators ......................................................................................................
....
Center ventilators ...........................................................................
....
Side ventilators .................................................................................
....
Rear ventilators ................................................................................
....
Heater and air conditioner ................................................................
....
Operating tips ....................................................................................
....
Automatic air conditioner and heater ...........................
....
Servicing air conditioner ...........................................................
....
Audio system (if equipped) ...............................................................
....
Audio operation precautions .................................................
....
Antenna ...................................................................................................
....
FM-AM radio with Compact Disc (CD) player ...........
....
USB (Universal Serial Bus) connection port/AUX
(auxiliary) input jack ......................................................................
....
CD/USB memory device care and cleaning ..............
....
Car phone or CB radio .........................................................................
....
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System
(if equipped) ..................................................................................................
....
Regulatory information ..............................................................
....
Control buttons and microphone .....................................
....
Bluetooth® settings .......................................................................
....
Using the system .............................................................................
....
4-14
4-14
4-14
4-14
4-14
4-15
4-16
4-17
4-17
4-17
4-23
4-23
4-28
4-29
4-30
4-30
4-31
4-31
4-31
4-33
NISSANCONNECT OWNER’S
MANUAL (if equipped)
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
D15A1-EB68331A-AB52-4043-829E-CC3572EDA3B3
GUID-14EAAD61-640D-4AC5-8514-155AD40BC14A
For models with NissanConnect System, refer
to the NissanConnect Owner’s Manual regarding the following information.
. Audio
. Hands-free phone
. Apple CarPlay
. Android Auto
. Voice recognition
. Information and settings viewable on NissanConnect
WARNING:
.
.
.
Do not adjust the heater and air conditioner controls or audio controls while
driving so that full attention may be given
to vehicle operation.
If you noticed any foreign objects entering the system hardware, spilled liquid on
the system, or noticed smoke or fumes
coming out from the system, or any other
unusual operation is observed, stop using
the system immediately and contact the
nearest NISSAN dealer. Ignoring such
conditions may lead to an accident, fire
or electric shock.
Do not disassemble or modify this system. If you do, it may lead to an accident,
fire, or electric shock.
CAUTION:
Do not use the system when the engine is not
running for extended periods of time to
prevent battery discharge.
4-2 Monitor, heater and air conditioner, and audio system
REAR VIEW MONITOR (if equipped)
D15A1-8E5DDF09-0509-4B14-BD0C-951041A8EA4C
jects.
CAUTION:
Do not scratch the camera lens when cleaning dirt or snow from the front of the camera.
The rear view monitor system automatically
shows a rear view of the vehicle when the shift
lever is shifted into the “R” (Reverse) position.
The radio can still be heard while the rear view
monitor is active.
WAE0009X
WAE0008X
1. CAMERA button
WARNING:
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the rear view monitor
could result in serious injury or death.
.
The rear view monitor is a convenience
but it is not a substitute for proper
backing. Always turn and look out the
windows, and check mirrors to be sure
that it is safe to move before operating
.
.
the vehicle. Always back up slowly.
The system is designed as an aid to the
driver in showing large stationary objects
directly behind the vehicle, to help avoid
damaging the vehicle.
The distance guide lines and the vehicle
width lines should be used as a reference
only when the vehicle is on a level paved
surface. The distance viewed on the
monitor is for reference only and may
be different than the actual distance
between the vehicle and displayed ob-
To display the rear view, the rear view monitor
system uses a camera located just above the
vehicle’s license plate.
REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM OPERATION
D15A1-78C76090-1566-4898-9121-AD1CBCB0BE35
With the ignition switch in the “ON” position,
move the shift lever to the “R” (Reverse) position
to operate the rear view monitor.
Monitor, heater and air conditioner, and audio system
4-3
HOW TO READ
THE DISPLAYED LINES
D15A1-BAB72C89-1CD4-4297-972B-B9A50E7A635A
and exit the vehicle to view the positioning of
objects behind the vehicle.
Backing upD15A1-840192C0-A6A0-4678-8D38-779D9C643B03
on a steep downhill
Backing up D15A1-74C1AC9A-F2AE-4DBE-BCF2-E219DA0E79FD
on a steep uphill
SAA2776
Guiding lines which indicate the vehicle width
and distances to objects with reference to the
bumper line
are displayed on the monitor.
Distance guide lines:
Indicate distances from the vehicle body.
. Red line : approximately 0.5 m (1.5 ft)
. Yellow line : approximately 1 m (3 ft)
. Green line : approximately 2 m (7 ft)
. Green line : approximately 3 m (10 ft)
Vehicle width guide lines :
Indicate the vehicle width when backing up.
The vehicle width guide lines are wider than the
actual width.
DIFFERENCE BETWEEN PREDICTIVE AND
ACTUAL DISTANCES
D15A1-77243345-0079-45F4-92B2-787AF9BDDB97
The displayed guidelines and their locations on
the ground are for approximate reference only.
Objects on uphill or downhill surfaces or
projecting objects will be actually located at
distances different from those displayed in the
monitor relative to the guidelines (refer to
illustrations). When in doubt, turn around and
view the objects as you are backing up, or park
JVH1160X
JVH1159X
When backing up the vehicle up a hill, the
distance guide lines and the vehicle width
guide lines are shown closer than the actual
distance. Note that any object on steep uphill is
farther than it appears on the monitor.
4-4 Monitor, heater and air conditioner, and audio system
When backing up the vehicle down a hill, the
distance guide lines and the vehicle width
guide lines are shown farther than the actual
distance. Note that any object on steep downhill is closer than it appears on the monitor.
Backing up near
a projecting object
D15A1-3315AD77-7EAF-4835-A620-4C5F3C52E001
Backing up D15A1-AA7DF86D-31C9-4ED4-9AD6-6246706ED1D6
behind a projecting object
ADJUSTING D15A1-E7C1CAEA-53B4-4A01-825F-BAE3028280FD
THE SCREEN
Operation with touch screen
1. Push the CAMERA button.
2. Select the “Display Settings” key.
3. Select the item you wish to adjust.
. Brightness:
Adjusts the brightness of the display.
. Contrast:
Adjusts the level of contrast.
. Tint:
Adjusts the level of tint.
. Colour:
Adjusts the level of the color.
. Black Level:
Adjusts the black level.
Operation with buttons
SAA3440
The vehicle may seem to nearly clear the object
in the display. However, the vehicle may hit the
object if it projects over the actual backing up
course.
SAA3475
The position
is shown farther than the
position
in the display. However, the position
is actually at the same distance as the
position
. The vehicle may hit the object
when backing up to the position if the object
projects over the actual backing up course.
WAE0010X
To adjust the screen brightness when the rear
view monitor is displayed, push the brightness
control/display on·off
button .
Adjust brightness to the preferred setting using
the TUNE·SCROLL/SOUND dial .
Monitor, heater and air conditioner, and audio system
4-5
REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
D15A1-626E42A2-C455-4B45-AF3C-2604C97D5032
.
WARNING:
Listed below are the system limitations for
rear view monitor. Failure to operate the
vehicle in accordance with these system
limitations could result in serious injury or
death.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
The system cannot completely eliminate
blind spots and may not show every
object.
Underneath the bumper and the corner
areas of the bumper cannot be viewed on
the rear view monitor because of its
monitoring range limitation. The system
will not show small objects below the
bumper, and may not show objects close
to the bumper or on the ground.
Objects viewed in the rear view monitor
differ from actual distance because a
wide-angle lens is used.
Objects in the rear view of the vehicle will
appear visually opposite compared to
when viewed in the inside rearview mirror, the outside rearview mirrors and the
rear view monitor.
Use the displayed lines as a reference.
The lines are highly affected by the
number of occupants, fuel level, vehicle
position, road conditions and road grade.
Make sure that the back door is securely
closed when backing up.
Do not put anything on the rear view
camera. The rear view camera is installed
above the license plate.
4-6
.
When washing the vehicle with highpressure water, be sure not to spray it
around the camera. Otherwise, water
may enter the camera unit causing water
condensation on the lens, a malfunction,
fire or an electric shock.
Do not strike the camera. It is a precision
instrument. Otherwise, it may malfunction or cause damage resulting in a fire or
an electric shock.
The following are operating limitations and do
not represent a system malfunction:
. When the temperature is extremely high or
low, the screen may not clearly display
objects.
. When strong light directly shines on the
camera, objects may not be displayed
clearly.
. Vertical lines may be seen in objects on the
screen. This is due to strong reflected light
from the bumper.
. The screen may flicker under fluorescent
light.
. The colors of objects on the rear view
monitor may differ somewhat from the
actual color of objects.
. Objects on the monitor may not be clear in
a dark environment.
. There may be a delay when switching to
the rear view monitor.
. If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on the
camera, the rear view monitor may not
display object clearly. Clean the camera.
. Do not use wax on the camera lens. Wipe
off any wax with a clean cloth dampened
with a diluted mild cleaning agent, then
wipe with a dry cloth.
Monitor, heater and air conditioner, and audio system
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
D15A1-AC5B10CB-72B5-4D4C-8C26-430FB3C3B70A
WAE0009X
CAUTION:
.
.
Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner to
clean the camera. This will cause discoloration.
Do not damage the camera as the monitor screen may be adversely affected.
If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on the camera
, the rear view monitor may not display
objects clearly. Clean the camera by wiping it
with a cloth dampened with a diluted mild
cleaning agent and then wiping it with a dry
cloth.
AROUND VIEW MONITOR (if equipped)
GUID-56DF0974-2002-4244-B558-BBB3BA62B3E2
vers.
CAUTION:
Do not scratch the lens when cleaning dirt or
snow from the front of the camera.
The Around View Monitor system is designed
as an aid to the driver in situations such as slot
parking or parallel parking.
The monitor displays various views of the
position of the vehicle in a split screen format.
Not all views are available at all times.
Available views:
. Front view
The view to the front of the vehicle.
. Rear view
The view to the rear of the vehicle.
. Bird’s-eye view
The surrounding view of the vehicle from
above.
. Front-side view
The view around and ahead of the front
passenger’s side wheel.
WAE0008X
1. CAMERA button
WARNING:
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for the proper use of the Around View
Monitor system could result in serious injury
or death.
.
The Around View Monitor is a convenient
feature but it is not a substitute for
proper vehicle operation because it has
areas where objects cannot be viewed.
.
The four corners of the vehicle in particular, are areas where objects do not
always appear in the bird’s-eye, front, or
rear views. Always check your surroundings to be sure that it is safe to move
before operating the vehicle. Always operate the vehicle slowly. Always look out
the windows and check mirrors to be
sure that it is safe to move.
The driver is always responsible for
safety during parking and other maneu-
WAE0006X
To display the multiple views, the Around View
Monitor system uses cameras
located in the
front grill, on the vehicle’s outside mirrors and
Monitor, heater and air conditioner, and audio system
4-7
one just above the vehicle’s license plate.
.
AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM OPERATION GUID-7BBFCA2F-90FC-4262-A5C3-584D62FB5FD9
With the ignition switch in the “ON” position,
move the shift lever to the “R” (Reverse) position
or push the CAMERA button to operate the
Around View Monitor.
When the camera is first activated with the
bird’s-eye view in the display, a red icon will
flash on the screen.
The screen displayed on the Around View
Monitor will automatically return to the previous screen 3 minutes after the CAMERA
button has been pushed with the shift lever in
a position other than the “R” (Reverse) position.
Available views
GUID-2B3A04A3-658B-4330-B698-D841C3BF4FFA
WARNING:
.
.
.
The distance guide lines and the vehicle
width guide line should be used as a
reference only when the vehicle is on a
paved, level surface. The distance viewed
on the monitor is for reference only and
may be different than the actual distance
between the vehicle and displayed objects.
Use the displayed lines and the bird’s-eye
view as a reference. The lines and the
bird’s-eye view are greatly affected by
the number of occupants, fuel level,
vehicle position, road condition and road
grade.
If the tires are replaced with different
sized tires, the predictive course line and
the bird’s-eye view may be displayed
incorrectly.
4-8
.
.
.
.
.
When driving the vehicle up a hill, objects
viewed in the monitor are further than
they appear. When driving the vehicle
down a hill, objects viewed in the monitor
are closer than they appear.
Objects in the rear view of the vehicle will
appear visually opposite compared to
when viewed in the inside rearview mirror, the outside rearview mirrors and the
Around View Monitor.
Use the mirrors or actually look to properly judge distances to other objects.
On a snow-covered or slippery road,
there may be a difference between the
predictive course line and the actual
course line.
The vehicle width and predictive course
lines are wider than the actual width and
course.
The displayed lines on the rear view will
appear slightly off to the right because
the rear view camera is not installed in
the rear center of the vehicle.
Front and rear view:
GUID-1295725F-1AF3-4AA4-9B71-2C636F81A13F
Monitor, heater and air conditioner, and audio system
SAA1840
Front view
SAA1896
Rear view
Guiding lines that indicate the approximate
vehicle width and distances to objects with
reference to the vehicle body line
, are
displayed on the monitor.
Distance guide lines:
Indicate distances from the vehicle body.
. Red line : approximately 0.5 m (1.5 ft)
. Yellow line : approximately 1 m (3 ft)
. Green line : approximately 2 m (7 ft)
. Green line : approximately 3 m (10 ft)
Vehicle width guide lines :
Indicate the vehicle width when backing up.
The vehicle width guide lines are wider than the
actual width.
Predictive course lines :
Indicate the predictive course when operating
the vehicle. The predictive course lines will be
displayed on the monitor when the steering
wheel is turned. The predictive course lines will
move depending on how much the steering
wheel is turned. The predictive course lines in
the rear view will not be displayed while the
steering wheel is in the straight ahead position.
The Around View Monitor screen will not be
displayed when the vehicle speed is above 10
km/h (6 MPH).
NOTE:
When the monitor displays the front view and
the steering wheel turns about 90 degrees or
less from the straight ahead position, both
the right and left predictive course lines
are displayed. When the steering wheel turns
about 90 degrees or more, a line is displayed
only on the opposite side of the turn.
Bird’s-eye view:GUID-1295725F-1AF3-4AA4-9B71-2C636F81A13F
After the ignition switch is placed in the “ON”
will be
position, the non-viewable corners
displayed in red (blink for the first few seconds)
to remind the driver to be cautious.
WARNING:
.
.
.
.
.
Objects in the bird’s-eye view will appear
further than the actual distance.
Tall objects, such as a curb or vehicle,
may be misaligned or not displayed at
the seam of the views.
Objects that are above the camera cannot be displayed.
The view for the bird’s-eye view may be
misaligned when the camera position
alters.
A line on the ground may be misaligned
and is not seen as being straight at the
seam of the views. The misalignment will
increase as the line proceeds away from
the vehicle.
displayed on the monitor.
The front-of-vehicle line shows the front part
of the vehicle.
shows the approxThe side-of-vehicle line
imate vehicle width including the outside
mirrors.
The extensions
of both the front
and side
lines are shown with a green dotted line.
DIFFERENCE BETWEEN PREDICTIVE AND
ACTUAL DISTANCES
GUID-9EE92C4D-DF86-43BC-8582-F10E277C994C
The displayed guidelines and their locations on
the ground are for approximate reference only.
Objects on uphill or downhill surfaces or
projecting objects will be actually located at
distances different from those displayed in the
monitor relative to the guidelines (refer to
illustrations). When in doubt, turn around and
view the objects as you are backing up, or park
and exit the vehicle to view the positioning of
objects behind the vehicle.
SAA3570
The bird’s-eye view shows the overhead view of
the vehicle which helps confirm the vehicle
position and the predictive course to a parking
space.
The vehicle icon
shows the position of the
vehicle. Note that the distance between objects
viewed in the bird’s-eye view may differ somewhat from the actual distance to the vehicle.
The areas that the cameras cannot cover are
indicated in black.
The non-viewable area
is highlighted in
yellow for several seconds after the bird’s eye
view is displayed. It will be shown only the first
time after the ignition switch is placed in the
“ON” position.
Front-side view:GUID-1295725F-1AF3-4AA4-9B71-2C636F81A13F
JVH0659X
Guiding lines:
Guiding lines that indicate the approximate
width and the front end of the vehicle are
Monitor, heater and air conditioner, and audio system
4-9
Backing up on
a steep uphill
GUID-02C3FB49-1B78-4295-96D3-F11700022173
Backing up GUID-67B8EB99-2EE9-47EE-BF55-8002664394BC
on a steep downhill
JVH1159X
When backing up the vehicle up a hill, the
distance guide lines and the vehicle width
guide lines are shown closer than the actual
distance. Note that any object on steep uphill is
farther than it appears on the monitor.
JVH1160X
When backing up the vehicle down a hill, the
distance guide lines and the vehicle width
guide lines are shown farther than the actual
distance. Note that any object on steep downhill is closer than it appears on the monitor.
4-10 Monitor, heater and air conditioner, and audio system
Backing up GUID-B3A97E42-5F56-4F14-B53C-C9B050ECE3E0
near a projecting object
SAA1923
The predictive course lines
do not touch the
object in the display. However, the vehicle may
hit the object if it projects over the actual
backing up course.
Backing up behind
a projecting object
GUID-6ED3AA15-3F24-432F-A185-DF2A54616A08
HOW TO PARK WITH PREDICTIVE
COURSE LINES
GUID-9EE2B9D2-B5A2-488D-9D78-CDFDBC9AD712
1.
2.
WARNING:
.
.
If the tires are replaced with different
sized tires, the predictive course lines
may be displayed incorrectly.
On a snow-covered or slippery road,
there may be a difference between the
predictive course line and the actual
course line.
Visually check that the parking space is
safe before parking your vehicle.
The rear view of the vehicle is displayed on
the screen
when the shift lever is moved
to the “R” (Reverse) position.
SAA3475
The position
is shown farther than the
position
in the display. However, the position
is actually at the same distance as the
position
. The vehicle may hit the object
when backing up to the position if the object
projects over the actual backing up course.
SAA1898
3.
4.
SAA1897
Slowly back up the vehicle adjusting the
steering wheel so that the predictive
course lines
enter the parking space .
Maneuver the steering wheel to make the
parallel to the
vehicle width guide lines
parking space
while referring to the
predictive course lines.
Monitor, heater and air conditioner, and audio system
4-11
5.
When the vehicle is located in the space
completely, park the vehicle in the correct
procedure.
ADJUSTING GUID-DA809961-DF05-43D6-AC84-CAA86D67EC58
THE SCREEN
AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM LIMITATIONS GUID-29F98E33-C209-499B-8DBA-1E46F15286B8
HOW TO SWITCH
THE DISPLAY
GUID-C607928A-80F0-4BB2-9BDC-BA09614E4FD0
With the ignition switch in the “ON” position,
push the CAMERA button or move the shift
lever to the “R” (Reverse) position to operate the
Around View Monitor.
The Around View Monitor displays different
split screen views depending on the position
of the shift lever. Push the CAMERA button to
switch between the available views.
If the shift lever is in the “R” (Reverse) position,
the available views are:
. Rear view/bird’s-eye view split screen
. Rear view/front-side view split screen
If the shift lever is not in the “R” (Reverse)
position, the available views are:
. Front view/bird’s-eye view split screen
. Front view/front-side view split screen
The display will switch from the Around View
Monitor screen when:
. The shift lever is out of the “R” (Reverse)
position and the vehicle speed increases
above approximately 10 km/h (6 MPH).
. A different screen is selected (when the
shift lever is not in the “R” (Reverse) position).
WAE0034X
1.
2.
3.
4.
Push the MENU button and touch the
“Settings” key.
Touch the “Camera” key and then touch the
“Display Settings” key.
Touch the “Brightness”, “Contrast”, “Tint”,
“Colour” or “Black Level” key.
Adjust the item by touching the “+” or “—”
key on the touch screen display.
NOTE:
Do not adjust any of the display settings of
the Around View Monitor while the vehicle is
moving. Make sure the parking brake is
firmly applied.
WAE0007X
WARNING:
Listed below are the system limitations for
Around View Monitor. Failure to operate the
vehicle in accordance with these system
limitations could result in serious injury or
death.
.
.
4-12
Monitor, heater and air conditioner, and audio system
Do not use the Around View Monitor with
the outside mirrors in the stored position,
and make sure that the back door is
securely closed when operating the vehicle using the Around View Monitor.
The apparent distance between objects
viewed on the Around View Monitor
differs from the actual distance.
.
.
.
The cameras are installed on the front
grille, the outside mirrors and above the
rear license plate. Do not put anything on
the vehicle that covers the cameras.
When washing the vehicle with high
pressure water, be sure not to spray it
around the cameras. Otherwise, water
may enter the camera unit causing water
condensation on the lens, a malfunction,
fire or an electric shock.
Do not strike the cameras. They are
precision instruments. Doing so could
cause a malfunction or cause damage
resulting in a fire or an electric shock.
There are some areas where the system will
not show objects. When in the front or rear view
display, an object below the bumper or on the
ground may not be viewed
. When in the
bird’s-eye view, a tall object near the seam of
the camera viewing areas will not appear in the
monitor .
The following are operating limitations and do
not represent a system malfunction:
. There may be a delay when switching
between views.
. When the temperature is extremely high or
low, the screen may not display objects
clearly.
. When strong light directly shines on the
camera, objects may not be displayed
clearly.
. The screen may flicker under fluorescent
light.
. The colors of objects on the Around View
Monitor may differ somewhat from the
actual color of objects.
. Objects on the Around View Monitor may
not be clear and the color of the object may
differ in a dark environment.
.
.
There may be differences in sharpness
between each camera view of the bird’seye view.
Do not use wax on the camera lens. Wipe
off any wax with a clean cloth that has
been dampened with a diluted mild cleaning agent, then wipe with a dry cloth.
System temporarily
unavailable
GUID-54CB9F4D-FFBF-4D59-B2CA-ABE23C84C4C7
When the “
” icon is displayed on the screen,
the camera image may be receiving temporary
electronic disturbances from surrounding devices. This will not hinder normal driving
operation but the system should be inspected.
It is recommended you visit a NISSAN dealer.
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
GUID-D75D7493-30FE-49EC-9CBF-3FD6AE6E9FAF
WAE0006X
WAE0056X
When the “
” icon is displayed on the screen,
there will be abnormal conditions in the Around
View Monitor. This will not hinder normal
driving operation but the system should be
inspected. It is recommended you visit a
NISSAN dealer.
CAUTION:
.
.
Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner to
clean the camera. This will cause discoloration.
Do not damage the camera as the monitor screen may be adversely affected.
If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on any of the
cameras , the Around View Monitor may not
display objects clearly. Clean the camera by
wiping with a cloth dampened with a diluted
mild cleaning agent and then wiping with a dry
cloth.
WAE0057X
Monitor, heater and air conditioner, and audio system
4-13
VENTILATORS
HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER
D15A1-561C1B64-A1BB-40F1-AA9E-F43C26FE3339
CENTER VENTILATORS
D15A1-C16C9225-3735-455F-AFF6-7C15D8857951
D15A1-D6D9F812-CB78-4FA4-ADF1-EACDF071310D
REAR VENTILATORS
GUID-579C9B6E-812B-4341-810A-A02EDE1D2D87
WARNING:
.
.
WAE0014X
WAE0013X
Adjust the air flow direction of the ventilators
by moving the center knob (up/down, left/
right) until the preferred position is achieved.
SIDE VENTILATORS
D15A1-284A8689-F07A-4411-B714-B69AB2B6DC80
The air blows from the rear ventilators only
when the automatic air conditioner is operating in the cooling mode.
Open/close the ventilators by moving the
control to either direction.
:
:
This symbol indicates that the ventilators are open. Moving the control to
this direction will open the ventilators.
This symbol indicates that the ventilators are closed. Moving the control
to this direction will close the ventilators.
Adjust the air flow direction of the ventilators
by moving the center knob (up/down, left/
right) until the desired position is achieved.
JVH1669X
Open or close the ventilators, and adjust the air
flow direction as illustrated.
4-14
Monitor, heater and air conditioner, and audio system
.
.
The heater and air conditioner operate
only when the engine is running.
Children or adults who would normally
require supervision should never be left
alone in the vehicle. Pets should not be
left alone either. They could unknowingly
activate switches or controls and inadvertently become involved in a serious
accident and injure themselves. On hot,
sunny days, temperatures in a closed
vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal
injuries to people or animals.
Do not use the recirculation mode for
long periods as it may cause the interior
air to become stale and the windows to
fog up.
Do not adjust the heating and air conditioning controls while driving so that
full attention may be given to vehicle
operation.
The heater and air conditioner operate when
the engine is running. The air blower will
operate even if the engine is turned off and
the ignition switch is in the “ON” position.
NOTE:
. Odors from inside and outside the vehicle
can build up in the air conditioner unit.
Odor can enter the passenger compartment through the ventilators.
. When parking, set the cooler and air
conditioner controls to turn off air recirculation to allow fresh air into the passenger compartment. This should help
reduce odors inside the vehicle.
OPERATING GUID-A8E566ED-26C1-487E-8F3C-42043FD0801F
TIPS
When the engine coolant temperature and
outside air temperature are low, the air flow
from the foot outlets may not operate. However, this is not a malfunction. After the coolant
temperature warms up, the air flow from the
foot outlets will operate normally.
The sensors
,
and
(if equipped) help
maintain a constant temperature. Do not cover
the sensors or put anything on or around the
sensors.
WAE0003X
WAE0004X
WAE0087X
Monitor, heater and air conditioner, and audio system
4-15
AUTOMATIC AIR CONDITIONER AND HEATER
Manual operation
GUID-85C95349-5BA5-4948-8D39-DB829AA93909
GUID-90BB795F-E918-4306-AFE1-1E76D0BDCEE6
The manual mode can be used to control the
heater and air conditioner to your desired
settings.
Fan speed control:
GUID-1295725F-1AF3-4AA4-9B71-2C636F81A13F
Turn the fan speed control dial.
Air flow control:GUID-1295725F-1AF3-4AA4-9B71-2C636F81A13F
Push one of the air flow control buttons to
select the air flow outlets. More than one air
flow control button can be selected at a time.
WAE0002X
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
“AUTO” button
Front defogger “
MAX” button
Air flow control buttons
“A/C OFF” button
Fan speed control “
” dial
Temperature control dial
Rear defogger “
” button (See “Defogger switch” (P.2-19).)
Air recirculation “
” button
Turning system
on/off
GUID-BD1E6BD6-42F4-4EC2-816D-DEFED1825F82
To turn on the system, turn the fan speed
control dial out of the OFF position. Turn the
fan speed control dial counterclockwise to the
OFF position to turn off the system.
Automatic operation
(AUTO)
GUID-F114B86C-9C28-4267-A00C-C8624987867E
The AUTO mode may be used year-round as
the system automatically controls the air conditioner to a constant temperature, air flow
distribution and fan speed after the desired
temperature is set manually.
Cooling and dehumidified
heating:
GUID-1295725F-1AF3-4AA4-9B71-2C636F81A13F
1. Push the “AUTO” button (the indicator light
will turn on).
2. Turn the temperature control dial to set the
desired temperature.
A visible mist may be seen coming from the
ventilators in hot, humid conditions as the air is
cooled rapidly. This does not indicate a malfunction.
MAX defogging/defrosting:
GUID-1295725F-1AF3-4AA4-9B71-2C636F81A13F
Push the front defogger “
MAX” button to
turn on the MAX defogging/defrosting mode
and quickly defog/defrost the windshield.
When this mode is turned on, the fan will be
at its maximum speed, the “A/C OFF” indicator
light will turn off or stays off, and the air
circulation will be fixed at the outside air
circulation mode.
Do not set the temperature too low when the
MAX”
front defogger mode is on (the “
indicator light is illuminated), because doing so
may fog up the windshield.
4-16 Monitor, heater and air conditioner, and audio system
—
—
—
Air flows mainly from the front defogger outlets.
Air flows mainly from the center and
side ventilators.
Air flows mainly from the foot outlets.
Temperature control:
GUID-1295725F-1AF3-4AA4-9B71-2C636F81A13F
Turn the temperature control dial to set the
desired temperature.
Air intake control:
GUID-1295725F-1AF3-4AA4-9B71-2C636F81A13F
The air intake control mode will change each
time the air recirculation “
” button is
pushed.
. When the indicator light is turned on, the air
recirculates inside the vehicle.
. When the indicator light is turned off, the air
flow is drawn from outside the vehicle.
NOTE:
Even if the system is manually set to the air
recirculation mode, when outside temperature and coolant temperature are both low,
the system may automatically switch to the
outside air circulation mode.
AUDIO SYSTEM (if equipped)
D15A1-CCFAECDB-BC93-44CD-9D95-5827181DFAD8
SERVICING AIR
CONDITIONER
D15A1-A358679E-16A8-4C30-82BD-E71957911A2C
WARNING:
WARNING:
The air conditioner system contains refrigerant under high pressure. To avoid personal
injury, any air conditioner service should be
done only by an experienced technician with
the proper equipment.
Do not adjust the audio system while driving
so that full attention may be given to vehicle
operation.
The air conditioner system in your vehicle is
charged with a refrigerant designed with the
environment in mind.
This refrigerant will not harm the earth’s
ozone layer. However, it may contribute in a
small part to global warming.
Special charging equipment and lubricant are
required when servicing your vehicle’s air conditioner. Using improper refrigerants or lubricants will cause severe damage to the air
conditioner system. See “Air conditioner system
refrigerant and lubricant” (P.9-4).
A NISSAN dealer will be able to service your
environmentally friendly air conditioner system.
.
Air conditioner
filter
D15A1-598DCD57-C75B-4CC2-896D-998308A85BC5
.
The air conditioner system is equipped with an
air conditioner filter. To make sure the air
conditioner heats defogs and ventilates efficiently, replace the filter in accordance with the
specified maintenance intervals listed in the
separate maintenance booklet. To replace the
filter, contact a NISSAN dealer.
The filter should be replaced if the air flow
decreases significantly or if windows fog up
easily when operating the heater or air conditioner.
— Rewritable compact discs (CD-RW)
AUDIO OPERATION
PRECAUTIONS
D15A1-FF66CA17-020A-4205-81A4-DB987BF13DDD
Radio
.
D15A1-0B22E016-C5A2-4BB7-945F-32ABB0463B62
Radio reception is affected by station signal
strength, distance from radio transmitters,
buildings, bridges, mountains and other
external influences. Intermittent changes
in reception quality normally are caused by
these external influences.
Using a cellular phone in or near the vehicle
may influence radio reception quality.
Compact Disc
(CD) player
GUID-B4AB969B-1E6B-41B7-BBF8-923183093410
.
.
.
.
.
During cold weather or rainy days, the
player may malfunction due to the humidity. If this occurs, remove the CD from CD
player and dehumidify or ventilate the
player completely.
The player may skip while driving on rough
roads.
The CD player sometimes may not function
when the passenger compartment temperature is extremely high. Lower the
temperature before use.
Do not expose the CD to direct sunlight.
CDs that are of poor quality, or are dirty,
scratched, covered with fingerprints, or
that have pin holes may not work properly.
The following CDs may not work properly.
— Copy control compact discs (CCCD)
— Recordable compact discs (CD-R)
SAA0480
.
.
Do not use the following CDs as they may
cause the CD player to malfunction.
— 8 cm (3.1 in) discs
— CDs that are not round
— CDs with a paper label
— CDs that are warped, scratched or have
unusual edges
— CD lens cleaner discs
This audio system can only play prerecorded CDs. It has no capabilities to record
or burn CDs.
Monitor, heater and air conditioner, and audio system
4-17
If the CD cannot be played, one of the
following messages will be displayed.
Check disc/CHK CD/CD ERROR Check Disk:
. Confirm that the CD is inserted correctly
(the label side is facing up, etc.).
. Confirm that the CD is not bent or warped
and it is free of scratches.
. Confirm that the disc is a CD and not a DVD.
. Confirm that the disc contains audio files.
Push eject/Eject CD/CD Ejecting...:
This is a malfunction due to the temperature
inside the player is too high. Remove the CD by
pushing the EJECT button, and after a short
time reinsert the CD. The CD can be played
when the temperature of the player returns to
normal.
Unplayable:
The file is unplayable in this audio system (only
MP3/WMA/AAC CD).
.
USB (Universal
Serial Bus) connection port
D15A1-D42165CE-FD13-44B7-8CD3-AA279A1EBB6D
WARNING:
Do not connect, disconnect or operate the
USB device while driving. Doing so can be a
distraction. If distracted you could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident or
serious injury.
CAUTION:
.
Do not force the USB device into the USB
connection port. Inserting the USB device
tilted or up-side-down into the port may
damage the port. Make sure that the USB
device is connected correctly into the USB
connection port.
.
.
Do not grab the USB connection port
cover (if equipped) when pulling the USB
device out of the port. This could damage
the port and the cover.
Do not leave the USB cable in a place
where it can be pulled unintentionally.
Pulling the cable may damage the port.
The vehicle is not equipped with a USB device.
USB devices should be purchased separately as
necessary.
This system cannot be used to format USB
devices. To format a USB device, use a personal
computer.
This system supports various USB memory
devices, USB hard drives and iPod players.
Some USB devices may not be supported by
this system.
. Partitioned USB devices may not be played
correctly.
. Some characters used in other languages
(Chinese, Japanese, etc.) are not displayed
properly on display. Using English language
characters with a USB device is recommended.
General notes for USB use:
Refer to your device manufacturer’s owner
information regarding the proper use and care
of the device.
Notes for iPod use:
“Made for iPod”, “Made for iPhone”, and “Made
for iPad” mean that an electronic accessory has
been designed to connect specifically to iPod,
iPhone, or iPad, respectively, and has been
certified by the developer to meet Apple
performance standards.
Apple is not responsible for the operation of
this device or its compliance with safety and
regulatory standards.
4-18 Monitor, heater and air conditioner, and audio system
Please note that the use of this accessory with
iPod, iPhone, or iPad may affect wireless
performance.
iPad, iPhone, iPod, iPod classic, iPod nano, iPod
shuffle, and iPod touch are trademarks of Apple
Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
Lightning is a trademark of Apple Inc.
. Improperly plugging in the iPod may cause
a checkmark to be displayed on and off
(flickering). Always make sure that the iPod
is connected properly.
. An iPod nano (1st Generation) may remain
in fast forward or rewind mode if it is
connected during a seek operation. In this
case, please manually reset the iPod.
. An iPod nano (2nd Generation) will continue
to fast-forward or rewind if it is disconnected during a seek operation.
. An incorrect song title may appear when
the Play Mode is changed while using an
iPod nano (2nd Generation).
. Audiobooks may not play in the same order
as they appear on an iPod.
. If an iPod automatically selects large video
files while in the shuffle mode, the touch
screen display may momentarily black out,
but will soon recover.
Bluetooth® audio
player
GUID-6EC05641-72D2-4675-A8B1-7B3CC46B7FFE
.
.
.
Some Bluetooth® audio devices may not be
used with this system. For detailed information about Bluetooth® audio devices
that are available for use with this system,
contact a NISSAN dealer.
Before using a Bluetooth® audio system,
the initial registration process for the audio
device is necessary.
Operation of the Bluetooth® audio system
may vary depending on the audio device
that is connected. Confirm the operation
.
.
.
.
procedure before use.
The playback of Bluetooth® audio will be
paused under the following conditions. The
playback will be resumed after the following conditions are completed.
— while using a hands-free phone
— while checking a connection with a
cellular phone
The in-vehicle antenna for Bluetooth® communication is built in the system. Do not
place the Bluetooth® audio device in an
area surrounded by metal, far away from
the system or in a narrow space where the
device closely contacts the body or the
seat. Otherwise, sound degradation or
connection interference may occur.
While a Bluetooth® audio device is connected through the Bluetooth® wireless
connection, the battery power of the device
may discharge quicker than usual.
This system is compatible with the Bluetooth® AV profile (A2DP and AVRCP).
Bluetooth® is a trademark
owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc.,
and licensed to Visteon Corporation.
Compact Disc/USB
memory with MP3/WMA/AAC
D15A1-7A0ACDFA-C04E-42CB-9B84-5FEFDC66A091
Explanation of terms:
GUID-1295725F-1AF3-4AA4-9B71-2C636F81A13F
. MP3 — MP3 is short for Moving Pictures
Experts Group Audio Layer 3. MP3 is the
most well known compressed digital audio
file format. This format allows for near “CD
quality” sound, but at a fraction of the size
of normal audio files. MP3 conversion of an
audio track from CD can reduce the file size
by approximately 10:1 ratio (Sampling: 44.1
kHz, Bit rate: 128 kbps) with virtually no
perceptible loss in quality. MP3 compres-
.
.
.
.
.
.
sion removes the redundant and irrelevant
parts of a sound signal that the human ear
doesn’t hear.
WMA — Windows Media Audio (WMA) is a
compressed audio format created by Microsoft as an alternative to MP3. The WMA
codec offers greater file compression than
the MP3 codec, enabling storage of more
digital audio tracks in the same amount of
space when compared to MP3s at the
same level of quality.
This product is protected by certain intellectual property rights of Microsoft Corporation and third parties. Use or
distribution of such technology outside of
this product is prohibited without a license
from Microsoft or an authorized Microsoft
subsidiary and third parties.
AAC — Advanced Audio Coding (AAC) is a
compressed audio format. AAC offers
greater file compression than MP3 and
enables music file creation and storage at
the same quality as MP3.
Bit rate — Bit rate denotes the number of
bits per second used by a digital music files.
The size and quality of a compressed digital
audio file is determined by the bit rate used
when encoding the file.
Sampling frequency — The rate at which
the samples of a signal are converted from
analog to digital (A/D conversion) per
second.
Multisession — Multisession is one of the
methods for writing data to media. Writing
data once to the media is called a single
session, and writing more than once is
called a multisession.
ID3/WMA Tag — The ID3/WMA tag is the
part of the encoded MP3 or WMA file that
contains information about the digital mu-
sic file such as song title, artist, album title,
encoding bit rate, track time duration, etc.
ID3 tag information is displayed on the
Album/Artist/Song title line on the display.
* Windows® and Windows Media® are registered
trademarks and/or trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States of America
and/or other countries.
Playback order:GUID-1295725F-1AF3-4AA4-9B71-2C636F81A13F
SAA2494
Playback order chart
The music playback order of the CD with MP3/
WMA/AAC is as illustrated.
Monitor, heater and air conditioner, and audio system
4-19
.
.
.
The names of folders not containing MP3/
WMA/AAC files are not shown in the display.
If there is a file in the top level of the disc,
“Root Folder” is displayed.
The playback order is the order in which
the files were written by the writing software. Therefore, the files might not play in
the desired order.
4-20 Monitor, heater and air conditioner, and audio system
Specification chart:
GUID-1295725F-1AF3-4AA4-9B71-2C636F81A13F
CD, CD-R, CD-RW, USB2.0
Supported media
ISO9660 LEVEL1, ISO9660 LEVEL2, Romeo, Joliet
ISO9660 Level 3 (packet writing) is not supported.
Files saved using the Live File System component (on a Windows Vista-based
computer) are not supported.
Supported file systems
USB memory: FAT16, FAT32
MP3
Supported versions*1 WMA*2
AAC
Version
MPEG1, MPEG2, MPEG2.5
Sampling frequency
32kHz - 44.1 kHz - 48kHz
Bit rate
32 kbps - 320 kbps VBR*4
Version
WMA7, WMA8, WMA9
Sampling frequency
32 kHz - 48 kHz
Bit rate
48 kbps - 320 kbps, VBR*4
Version
Sampling frequency
MPEG-4 AAC
Bit rate
32 kbps - 192 kbps, VBR*4
Tag information (Song title and Artist name)
*1
*2
*3
*4
ID tag VER1.0, VER1.1, VER2.2, VER2.3 (MP3 only)
WMA tag (WMA only)
CD, CD-R, CD-RW
Folder levels: 8, Folders: 255 (including root folder), Files: 512 (Max. 255 files for
one folder)
USB
Folder levels: 8, Folders 255, Files: 2500 (Max. 255 files for one folder)
Memory size: 4GB
Folder levels
Displayable character codes*3
8 kHz - 48 kHz
01: ASCII, 02: ISO-8859-1, 03: UNICODE (UTF-16 BOM Big Endian), 04: UNICODE
(UTF-16 Non-BOM Big Endian), 05: UNICODE (UTF-8), 06: UNICODE (Non-UTF-16
BOM Little Endian), 07:SHIFT-JIS
Files created with a combination of 48 kHz sampling frequency and 64 kbps bit rate cannot be played.
Protected WMA files (DRM) cannot be played.
Available codes depend on what kind of media, versions and information are going to be displayed.
When VBR files are played, the playback time may not be displayed correctly. WMA7 and WMA8 are not applied to VBR.
Monitor, heater and air conditioner, and audio system
4-21
Troubleshooting guide:
GUID-1295725F-1AF3-4AA4-9B71-2C636F81A13F
Cause and Countermeasure
Symptom
Check if the disc or USB was inserted correctly.
Check if the disc is scratched or dirty.
Check if there is condensation inside the player, and if there is, wait until the condensation is gone (about 1 hour)
before using the player.
If there is a temperature increase error, the CD player will play correctly after it returns to the normal temperature.
Cannot play
If there is a mixture of music CD files (CD-DA data) and MP3/WMA/AAC files on a CD, only the music CD files (CD-DA
data) will be played.
Files with extensions other than “.MP3”, “.WMA”, “.M4A”, “.mp3”, “.wma” or “m4a” cannot be played. In addition, the
character codes and number of characters for folder names and file names should be in compliance with the
specifications.
Check if the disc or the file is generated in an irregular format. This may occur depending on the variation or the
setting of MP3/WMA/AAC writing applications or other text editing applications.
Check if the finalization process, such as session close and disc close, is done for the disc.
Check if the disc or USB is protected by copyright.
Poor sound quality
Check if the disc is scratched or dirty.
If there are many folder or file levels on the disc or USB memory device, some time may be required before the
It takes a relatively long time
before the music starts playing. music starts playing.
The writing software and hardware combination might not match, or the writing speed, writing depth, writing
Music cuts off or skips
width, etc., might not match the specifications. Try using the slowest writing speed.
Skipping with high bit rate files Skipping may occur with large quantities of data, such as for high bit rate data.
When a non-MP3/WMA/AAC file has been given an extension of “.MP3”, “.WMA”, “.M4A”, “.mp3”, “.wma” or “m4a”, or
when play is prohibited by copyright protection, the player will skip to the next song.
Move immediately to the next
song when playing.
The songs do not play back in
the desired order.
4-22
The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software, so the files might not play in
the desired order.
Random/Shuffle may be active on the audio system or on a USB device.
Monitor, heater and air conditioner, and audio system
ANTENNA
D15A1-5594B0A7-2298-4DAF-B984-1C023A577F5E
FM-AM RADIO WITH COMPACT DISC (CD) PLAYER
D15A1-95E73D3B-2D60-46FA-94E2-C6360B70BE08
Shark fin antenna
D15A1-1A9E317C-B1CB-4555-9084-EEDB59A48762
The shark fin antenna is located on the rear
part of the vehicle roof.
JVH1616X
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
DISP (Display) button
RADIO button
Day/Night button
MIX button
Rewind button
Fast forward button
SETUP button
Back button
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
CD eject button
MEDIA button
Phone button
Power/VOL dial
RPT (repeat) button
Radio memory buttons
A-Z button
MENU/ENTER dial
Monitor, heater and air conditioner, and audio system
4-23
Audio mainD15A1-B7FE03E7-4028-40AF-9056-980DBE10756C
operation
The audio system operates when the ignition
switch is placed in the “ON” position.
Power/VOL
dial:
GUID-1295725F-1AF3-4AA4-9B71-2C636F81A13F
Power ON/OFF:
To turn on the audio system, push the Power/
VOL dial.
The system will turn on in the mode that was
used immediately before the system was
turned off.
To turn off the audio system, push the Power/
VOL dial.
Volume control:
To control the volume, turn the Power/VOL dial.
Turn the dial clockwise to make the sound
louder.
Turn the dial counterclockwise to make the
sound quieter.
SETUP button:
GUID-1295725F-1AF3-4AA4-9B71-2C636F81A13F
To configure audio settings, perform the following procedure.
1. Push the
button.
2. Turn the MENU/ENTER dial clockwise or
counterclockwise, the display will appear in
the following order.
Audio � Clock � Radio � Language
3. Push the MENU/ENTER dial to select the
item.
4-24
Audio adjustments:
GUID-1295725F-1AF3-4AA4-9B71-2C636F81A13F
Push the
button and then select “Audio”.
Turn the MENU/ENTER dial, and the mode will
change as follows.
Sound � AUX In � Audio Default
Push the MENU/ENTER dial to select the setting
you want to change. Turn the MENU/ENTER
dial to adjust the selected item.
Sound:
To adjust the sound quality, turn the MENU/
ENTER. Push the MENU/ENTER dial to select the
setting item. Turn the MENU/ENTER dial to
adjust the setting.
. Bass:
Enhances or attenuates the bass response
sound.
. Treble:
Enhances or attenuates the treble.
. Bal. (Balance):
Adjusts the balance of the volume between
the left and right speakers.
. Fade:
Adjusts the balance of the volume between
the front and rear speakers.
AUX In:
Adjusts the volume output from the auxiliary
source.
Audio Default:
Resets sound settings (Bass, Treble, Balance
and Fade) to the default settings.
Monitor, heater and air conditioner, and audio system
Clock setting: GUID-1295725F-1AF3-4AA4-9B71-2C636F81A13F
Push the
button to enter the setup menu
screen and then select “Clock”.
Turn the MENU/ENTER dial, and the mode will
change as follows.
Set Time � ON/OFF � Format
Set Time:
Adjusts the clock as follows.
The hour display will start flashing. Turn the
MENU/ENTER dial to adjust the hour and push
the MENU/ENTER dial. The minute display will
start flashing. Turn the MENU/ENTER dial to
adjust the minute and push the MENU/ENTER
dial to finish the clock adjustment.
ON/OFF:
Set the clock display between on and off. If “ON”
is selected, the clock will be displayed when the
audio unit is turned off by pushing the Power/
VOL dial.
Format:
Switch the clock display between 24-hour and
12-hour clock mode.
Radio setting: GUID-1295725F-1AF3-4AA4-9B71-2C636F81A13F
Push the
button to enter the setup menu
screen and then select “Radio”.
This function is used to select the FM frequency
band.
Language setting:
GUID-1295725F-1AF3-4AA4-9B71-2C636F81A13F
Push the
button to enter the setup menu
screen and then select “Language”.
Select the appropriate language and push the
MENU/ENTER dial. Upon completion, the screen
will automatically adapt the language setting.
Day/Night button:
Fast Forward/Rewind buttons:
GUID-1295725F-1AF3-4AA4-9B71-2C636F81A13F
GUID-1295725F-1AF3-4AA4-9B71-2C636F81A13F
Push the
button to switch the display
brightness between the daytime and nighttime
modes.
When adjusting the broadcasting station frequency manually, push the
or
button
until the desired frequency is achieved.
When adjusting the broadcasting station frequency automatically, push and hold the
or
button. When the system detects a
broadcasting station, it will stop at the station.
Phone button:
GUID-1295725F-1AF3-4AA4-9B71-2C636F81A13F
For operation of the
button, see “Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System” (P.4-30).
MEDIA button:
GUID-1295725F-1AF3-4AA4-9B71-2C636F81A13F
Push the
button to play a compatible
device when it is connected.
Each time the
button is pushed, the audio
source will change as follows.
CD ? USB/iPod ? Bluetooth audio ? AUX ?
CD
A source that is not available will be skipped.
Radio operation
D15A1-FE07B788-671D-4DF0-B6C0-E892C2E07CD6
RADIO button:
GUID-1295725F-1AF3-4AA4-9B71-2C636F81A13F
When the
button is pushed while another
audio source is playing, the other audio source
will turn off and the radio will turn on.
To change the radio bands, push the
button until the desired band appears.
FM 1 ? FM 2 ? AM ? FM 1
During FM reception, push and hold the
button to update FM list.
Turn the MENU/ENTER dial to select a station
from the FM list.
to
Radio memory buttons:
GUID-1295725F-1AF3-4AA4-9B71-2C636F81A13F
During radio reception, pushing the radio
memory button will select the stored radio
station.
The audio system can store up to 12 FM station
frequencies (6 in each of FM 1, FM 2) and 6 AM
station frequencies.
To store the station frequency manually:
1. Tune to the desired broadcasting station
frequency by using the
buttons.
2. Push and hold a radio memory button
to
until a beep sounds. (The radio
mutes when the memory button is
pushed.)
3. The station indicator will display and the
radio mute disengages, indicating that the
memory is stored properly.
4. Perform steps 1 - 3 for all other memory
buttons.
If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the
audio fuse blows, the radio memory will be
erased. In such a case, reset the desired
stations.
CD player operation
GUID-918154D8-5703-4188-9F25-259FC4135F7E
Loading:
GUID-1295725F-1AF3-4AA4-9B71-2C636F81A13F
Insert a CD into the slot with the label side
facing up. The CD will be guided automatically
into the slot and will start playing. After loading
the CD, the number of tracks and the play time
will appear on the display.
CAUTION:
Do not force the CD into the slot. This could
damage the player.
NOTE:
. The CD player accepts normal audio CDs
or CDs containing MP3/WMA/AAC files.
. The audio unit will automatically detect if
a CD containing MP3/WMA/AAC files is
inserted, and the appropriate file format
such as “MP3CD” will be indicated.
. An error notification message will be
displayed when inserting an incompatible disc type (e.g., DVD), or if the player
cannot read the CD. Eject the disc and
insert another disc.
MEDIA button:
GUID-1295725F-1AF3-4AA4-9B71-2C636F81A13F
To change to the CD mode, push the
button with a CD inserted until the CD mode is
selected.
List view:
GUID-1295725F-1AF3-4AA4-9B71-2C636F81A13F
While the track is being played, push or turn the
MENU/ENTER dial to display the available
tracks in a listed view mode. To select a track
from the list, or a track to start listening to, turn
the MENU/ENTER dial and then push the
MENU/ENTER dial.
Monitor, heater and air conditioner, and audio system
4-25
Quick search: GUID-1295725F-1AF3-4AA4-9B71-2C636F81A13F
In the list view mode, a quick search can be
performed to find a track from the list. Push the
A-Z button, turn the MENU/ENTER dial to the
first alphabetic letter of the song title, and then
push the MENU/ENTER dial. When found, a list
of the available songs will be displayed. Select a
song title, and push the MENU/ENTER dial to
play the preferred track.
Fast forward/Rewind buttons:
GUID-1295725F-1AF3-4AA4-9B71-2C636F81A13F
Push and hold the
or
button to fast
forward or rewind through the track. When the
button is released, the track will play at normal
playing speed.
By pushing the
or
button once, the
track will skip forward to the next track or
backward to the beginning of the current track.
Push the
or
button more than once to
skip through the tracks.
Folder browsing:
If the recorded media contains folders with
music files, pushing the
or
button will
play the tracks of each folder in sequence.
To select a preferred folder:
1. Push or turn the MENU/ENTER dial to
display a list of tracks in the current folder.
2. Turn the MENU/ENTER dial for the preferred folder.
3. Push the MENU/ENTER dial to access the
folder. Push the MENU/ENTER dial again to
start playing the first track or turn the
MENU/ENTER dial, and push the MENU/
ENTER dial to select another track.
If the current selected folder contains sub
folders, push the MENU/ENTER dial, and a new
screen with a list of sub folders will be
displayed. Turn the MENU/ENTER dial for the
sub folder and then push the MENU/ENTER dial
to select. Select the root folder item when
songs are recorded additionally in the root
folder.
RPT button:
GUID-1295725F-1AF3-4AA4-9B71-2C636F81A13F
button,
If a CD is ejected by pushing the
and it is not taken out from the loading slot
within 20 seconds, the CD will automatically be
reloaded to the slot in order to protect the CD.
USB (Universal
Serial Bus) Connection Port
D15A1-E9F638F8-88F1-4FC6-B6C1-867904B95102
USB main operation:
GUID-1295725F-1AF3-4AA4-9B71-2C636F81A13F
Push the
button and the current track will
be played continuously.
MIX button:
GUID-1295725F-1AF3-4AA4-9B71-2C636F81A13F
Push the
button and all the tracks will be
played in a random order.
WARNING:
Do not connect, disconnect or operate the
USB device while driving. Doing so can be a
distraction. If distracted you could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident or
serious injury.
DISP button:
CAUTION:
GUID-1295725F-1AF3-4AA4-9B71-2C636F81A13F
While a CD with title information is being
played, the title of the played track is displayed.
When the
button is pushed repeatedly
while a CD with MP3/WMA/AAC is playing,
further information about the track can be
displayed along with the track title as follows.
Playback time ? Artist ? Album ? Playback
time
Track details:
Pushing and holding the
button will turn
the display into a detailed overview. Push the
button to return to the display for the main
display mode.
CD Eject button:
GUID-1295725F-1AF3-4AA4-9B71-2C636F81A13F
When the
button is pushed while a CD is
loaded, the CD will be ejected.
When the ignition switch is in the “OFF” or
“LOCK” position it is possible to eject the CD
currently being played. However the audio unit
will not be activated.
4-26 Monitor, heater and air conditioner, and audio system
.
.
.
Do not force the USB device into the USB
connection port. Inserting the USB device
tilted or upside-down into the port may
damage the port. Make sure that the USB
device is connected correctly into the USB
connection port.
Do not grab the USB connection port
cover (if equipped) when pulling the USB
device out of the port. This could damage
the port and the cover.
Do not leave the USB cable in a place
where it can be pulled unintentionally.
Pulling the cable may damage the port.
Refer to your device manufacturer’s owner
information regarding the proper use and care
of the device.
The USB connection port is located on the
lower part of the instrument panel. See “USB
(Universal Serial Bus) connection port/AUX
(auxiliary) input jack” (P.4-28). When the audio
system operates, the system will switch to the
USB memory device mode automatically.
If the system has been turned off while the USB
memory device was playing, pushing the
Power/VOL dial will start the USB memory
device.
The following operations are identical to the
audio main operation of the Compact Disc (CD)
operation. For details, see “CD player operation”
(P.4-25).
. List view
. Quick search
.
. MIX (Random play)
. RPT (Repeat track)
. Folder browsing
MEDIA button:
GUID-1295725F-1AF3-4AA4-9B71-2C636F81A13F
To change to the USB mode, push the
button with a USB connected until the USB
mode is selected.
DISP button:
GUID-1295725F-1AF3-4AA4-9B71-2C636F81A13F
While a track with recorded music information
tags (ID3-tags) is being played, the title of the
played track is displayed. If the tags are not
provided then a notification message is displayed.
When the
button is pushed continuously,
further information about the track can be
displayed along with the track title as follows.
Playback time ? Artist ? Album ? Playback
time
Track details:
Pushing and holding the
button will turn
the display into a detailed overview. Push the
button to return to the display for the main
display mode.
iPod playerD15A1-6DCF9559-5DD3-4866-9AB8-683ED2BC9F86
operation
Connecting iPod:
GUID-1295725F-1AF3-4AA4-9B71-2C636F81A13F
The USB connection port is located on the
lower part of the instrument panel. See “USB
(Universal Serial Bus) connection port/AUX
(auxiliary) input jack” (P.4-28).
When the iPod is connected to the vehicle, the
iPod music library can only be operated by the
vehicle audio controls.
Compatibility: GUID-1295725F-1AF3-4AA4-9B71-2C636F81A13F
The system unit shall be compatible with all
devices (past and future) supporting Apple
Accessory Protocol on USB link.
It includes (and not limited to):
. iPod nano 1G (Firmware version 1.3.1 -)
. iPod nano 2G (Firmware version 1.1.3 -)
. iPod nano 3G (Firmware version 1.0.0 -)
. iPod nano 4G (Firmware version 1.0.2 -)
. iPod nano 5G (Firmware version 1.0.1 -)
. iPod nano 6G (Firmware version 1.0 -)
. iPod nano 7G (Firmware version 1.0.0 -)
. iPod 5G (Firmware version 1.2.1 -)
. iPod classic (Firmware version 1.0.0 -)
. iPod Touch (iOS 1.1 -)
. iPod Touch 2G (iOS 2.1.1 -)
. iPod Touch 3G (iOS 3.1 -)
. iPod Touch 4G (iOS 4.1 -)
. iPod Touch 5G (iOS 6.0.0 -)
. iPhone (iOS 1.0.0 - 2.2.1)
. iPhone 3G (iOS 2.1 -)
. iPhone 3GS (iOS 3.0 -)
. iPhone 4/4S (iOS 4.0 -)
. iPhone 5 (iOS 6.0.0 -)
MEDIA button:
GUID-1295725F-1AF3-4AA4-9B71-2C636F81A13F
To operate the iPod, push the
button
repeatedly until the USB/iPod mode is selected
and then push the MENU/ENTER dial.
iPod main operation:
GUID-1295725F-1AF3-4AA4-9B71-2C636F81A13F
Interface:
The interface for iPod operation shown on the
audio system display is similar to the iPod
interface. Use the MENU/ENTER dial to play a
track on the iPod.
The following items can be chosen from the
menu list screen.
. Playlists
. Artist
. Albums
. Tracks
. more...
— Composers
— Genre
For further information about each item, see
the iPod owner’s manual.
The following operations are identical to the
audio main operation of the Compact Disc (CD)
operation. For details, see “CD player operation”
(P.4-25).
. List view
. Quick search
.
. MIX (Random play)
. RPT (Repeat track)
Monitor, heater and air conditioner, and audio system
4-27
Bluetooth® audio
player main operation:
GUID-1295725F-1AF3-4AA4-9B71-2C636F81A13F
DISP button:
GUID-1295725F-1AF3-4AA4-9B71-2C636F81A13F
While a track with recorded music information
tags (ID3-tags) is being played, the title of the
played track is displayed.
When the
button is pushed repeatedly,
further information about the track can be
displayed along with the track title as follows:
Playback time? Artist ? Album ? Playback
time
Track details:
Pushing and holding the
button will turn
the display into a detailed overview. To return
to the main display, push the
button.
Bluetooth® audio
player operation
GUID-5388866B-000B-4986-951A-6B1BFD3A172A
Regulatory information:
GUID-1295725F-1AF3-4AA4-9B71-2C636F81A13F
Bluetooth® is a trademark
owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
and licensed to Visteon Corporation.
CE statement: GUID-1295725F-1AF3-4AA4-9B71-2C636F81A13F
Hereby Visteon Corporation declares that this
system is in compliance with the essential
requirements and other relevant provisions of
Directive 1999/5/EC.
NSY0105
NOTE:
The audio system only supports Bluetooth®
devices with AVRCP (Audio Video Remote
Control Profile) version 1.3, or 1.0 or earlier.
JVH0848X
To play Bluetooth® audio, the Bluetooth® audio
device needs to be paired to the in-vehicle
system. For the pairing operation, see “Pairing
device” (P.4-31).
MEDIA button:
To operate the Bluetooth® audio streaming,
button repeatedly until “BT Audio”
push the
is shown.
The type of display,
or
, shown on the
audio system can vary depending on the Bluetooth® version of the device.
Fast forward/Rewind buttons:
When
or
button is pushed continuously, the track will be played at high speed.
When the button is released, the track will be
played at normal playing speed.
By pushing the
or
button once, the
track will skip forward to the next track or
backward to the beginning of the current track.
Push the
or
button more than once to
skip through the tracks.
4-28 Monitor, heater and air conditioner, and audio system
DISP button:
If the song contains music information tags
(ID3– tags), the title of the played song will be
displayed. If tags are not provided then the
display will not show any messages.
When the
button is pushed repeatedly,
further information about the song can be
displayed along with the song title.
A long push on
button will turn the display
into a detailed overview. To return to the main
display, push the
button.
Auxiliary (AUX)
device player operation
D15A1-A07D56BC-1E4D-479E-9D2F-D9FE21EA08FD
The AUX input jack is located on the lower part
of the instrument panel. See “USB (Universal
Serial Bus) connection port/AUX (auxiliary) input jack” (P.4-28). The AUX input jack accepts
any standard analog audio input such as from
a portable cassette tape/CD player, MP3 player
or laptop computer.
Push the
button repeatedly until the AUX
mode is selected, to play a compatible device
when it is plugged into the AUX input jack.
NISSAN strongly recommends using a stereo
mini plug cable when connecting your music
device to the audio system. Music may not play
properly when a monaural cable is used.
USB (Universal Serial Bus) CONNECTION
PORT/AUX D15A1-48EA9CDC-8831-4B77-9E59-2C9D50BED06C
(auxiliary) INPUT JACK
The USB connection port and AUX input jack
are located on the lower part of the instrument
panel.
USB connection port:
.
.
WAE0030X
Do not leave the USB cable in a place
where it can be pulled unintentionally.
Pulling the cable while it is connected
may damage the port.
The USB connection port can provide 1 A
charging circuit for your phone device . If
the charging circuit of your device is
more than 1 A, it is s recommended to
charge your device by power outlet converter, or your device will lose power
quickly sometimes.
WARNING:
.
Do not force the USB device into the USB
connection port. Inserting the USB device
tilted or up-side-down into the port may
damage the port. Make sure that the USB
device is connected correctly into the USB
connection port.
Do not grab the USB connection port
cover (if equipped) when pulling the USB
device out of the port. This could damage
the port and the cover.
.
.
When the AUX contacts the plug of the
connector cable, noise may be heard.
The connected external device cannot be
operated with the main audio system.
The volume and sound quality can be
adjusted.
The song title in the external device
cannot be displayed on the audio display/touch screen display.
For the power source of the external
device, use the special battery. The external device cannot be charged with the
AUX terminal. Noise may be heard if the
radio etc. is operated while charging the
battery with the power outlet of the
vehicle.
CD/USB MEMORY DEVICE CARE AND
CLEANING D15A1-41B44AC7-8DA4-49C8-9186-8D330430E351
CD
Do not connect, disconnect or operate the
USB device while driving. Doing so can be a
distraction. If distracted you could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident or
serious injury.
.
.
AUX input jack:
Insert USB devices or iPod connectors into this
port.
Refer to your device manufacturer’s owner
information regarding the proper use and care
of the device.
CAUTION:
.
GUID-5AB66877-D5EE-43CD-9BAC-1888253DDA07
WAE0064X
Compatible audio devices, such as some MP3
players, can be connected to the system
through the AUX input jack.
WARNING:
Do not allow the cable or an external device
connected to the AUX terminal to affect your
driving.
NOTE:
. Depending on the external device, please
note that the volume may be louder or
quieter than that of the external device.
SAA0451
.
.
Handle a disc by its edges. Never touch the
surface of the disc. Do not bend the disc.
Always place the discs in the storage case
when they are not being used.
Monitor, heater and air conditioner, and audio system
4-29
CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO
Bluetooth® HANDS-FREE PHONE
SYSTEM (if equipped)
D15A1-2B6EF082-07D8-462B-801C-3763A80129DC
.
.
To clean a disc, wipe the surface from the
center to the outer edge using a clean, soft
cloth. Do not wipe the disc using a circular
motion.
Do not use a conventional record cleaner
or alcohol intended for industrial use.
A new disc may be rough on the inner and
outer edges. Remove the rough edges by
rubbing the inner and outer edges with the
side of a pen or pencil as illustrated.
When installing a CB, ham radio or a car phone
in your vehicle, be sure to observe the following
cautions, otherwise the new equipment may
adversely affect the Engine Control System and
other electronic parts.
.
.
4-30
WARNING:
.
CAUTION:
.
USB memory
device
D15A1-6A29EE84-455D-4075-9BA5-64E42C3C8B97
Do not touch the terminal portion of the
USB memory device.
. Do not place heavy objects on the USB
memory device.
. Do not store the USB memory device in
highly humid locations.
. Do not expose the USB memory device to
direct sunlight.
. Do not spill any liquids on the USB memory
device.
Refer to the USB memory device Owner’s
Manual for details.
D15A1-DCB131E7-E41C-4CFF-8A3F-F8D9857CF511
.
.
.
Keep the antenna as far away as possible
from the Electronic Control Module.
Keep the antenna wire at least 20 cm (8
in) away from the Engine Control harnesses. Do not route the antenna wire
next to any harnesses.
Adjust the antenna standing wave ratio
as recommended by the manufacturer.
Connect the ground wire from the radio
chassis to the body.
For details, consult a NISSAN dealer.
Monitor, heater and air conditioner, and audio system
.
Use a phone after stopping your vehicle
in a safe location. If you have to use a
phone while driving, exercise extreme
caution at all times so full attention may
be given to vehicle operation.
If you find yourself unable to devote full
attention to vehicle operation while talking on the phone, pull off the road to a
safe location and stop your vehicle before using a phone.
CAUTION:
To avoid draining the vehicle battery, use a
phone after starting the engine.
Bluetooth® is a wireless radio communication
standard. This system offers a hands-free
facility for your cellular phone to enhance
driving comfort.
To use the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone
System, your cellular phone must first be setup.
For details, see “Bluetooth® settings” (P.4-31).
Once it has been setup, the hands-free mode is
automatically activated on the registered cellular phone (via Bluetooth®) when it comes into
range.
A notification message appears on the audio
display when the phone is connected, when an
incoming call is being received, as well as when
a call is initiated.
When a call is active, the audio system, microphone, and buttons on the instrument panel
enable hands-free communication.
If the audio system is in use at the time, the
audio will be muted and will stay muted until
the active call has ended.
The Bluetooth® system may not be able to
connect with your cellular phone for the
following reasons:
. The cellular phone is too far away from the
vehicle.
. The Bluetooth® mode on your cellular
phone has not been activated.
. Your cellular phone has not been paired
with the Bluetooth® system of the audio
unit.
. Your cellular phone does not support Bluetooth® technology.
NOTE:
. For details, see your cellular phone’s
Owner’s Manual.
. For assistance with your cellular phone
integration, please visit your local NISSAN
dealer.
REGULATORY
INFORMATION
D15A1-5DCCDDEE-76F2-455A-9278-988B267F5757
Bluetooth® D15A1-AA2523F7-7C4C-4FA0-AAA9-4B6399F5336E
Trademark
Bluetooth® is a trademark
owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
and licensed to Visteon Corporation.
CE statement
GUID-1DC163F0-ED45-4230-9382-8A547F4B2FBE
Hereby Visteon Corporation declares that this
system is in compliance with the essential
requirements and other relevant provisions of
Directive 1999/5/EC.
NSY0105
NOTE:
The audio system only supports Bluetooth®
devices with AVRCP (Audio Video Remote
Control Profile) version 1.3, or 1.0 or earlier.
CONTROL BUTTONS
AND MICROPHONE
GUID-82D58A7F-267B-4722-BAA7-7418A7649859
Instrument panel:
JVH0913X
1.
A-Z button
button
2.
Back
3.
Phone
button
4.
MENU/ENTER dial
Microphone:
Microphone is located near the room light.
Bluetooth® SETTINGS
GUID-631BEE16-1124-4429-9E4A-DDBE26EE4A0E
Pairing device
GUID-1A14AF36-4944-47E7-B569-724924E4CE16
Enter the phone setup menu via the
button on the instrument panel, select the
“Bluetooth” key, and then check if the Bluetooth® is set to on. (If not, push the MENU/
ENTER dial to turn it on.)
To setup the Bluetooth® system to pair (connect or register) your preferred cellular phone,
follow the following procedure.
1. To pair a device, use “Scan devices” key or
the “Pair device” key on the display.
2. A notification message will be displayed
when the phone is successfully paired.
3. The display will return to the current audio
source status after the connection is complete.
. While the Bluetooth® connection is active,
the following icons will appear on the
display.
—
: Signal strength indicator
—
: Battery status indicator*
—
: Bluetooth® connection ON indicator
*: If low battery is indicated, the Bluetooth® device must be recharged soon.
. Up to 5 different Bluetooth® devices can be
connected. However, only one device can
be used at a time. If 5 different Bluetooth®
registered devices are registered, a new
device can only replace one of the 5
Monitor, heater and air conditioner, and audio system
4-31
.
existing paired devices.
The pairing procedure and operation may
vary according to device type and compatibility. See the Bluetooth® device Owner’s
Manual for further details.
Setting items
GUID-345C2A46-A075-4A4D-AA2E-4025CB43A454
To set up the Bluetooth® system with a device,
the following items are available:
JVH0847X
.
.
.
.
Scan devices
Shows all available visible Bluetooth® devices and initializes Bluetooth® connection
from the audio unit. A maximum of 5
Bluetooth® devices can be registered.
Pair device
Bluetooth® devices can be paired with the
system. A maximum of 5 Bluetooth® devices can be registered.
Sel. device
Paired Bluetooth® devices are listed and
can be selected for connection.
Del. device
A registered Bluetooth® device can be
deleted.
.
.
Settings
Volume and Ringtone options are listed
and can be selected for the Bluetooth®
hands-free phone. See “General settings”
(P.4-35).
Bluetooth
If this setting is turned off, the connection
between the Bluetooth® devices and the invehicle Bluetooth® module will be cancelled.
Scan devices: GUID-1295725F-1AF3-4AA4-9B71-2C636F81A13F
1. Push the
button on the instrument
panel. Select “Scan devices” key. The audio
unit searches for the Bluetooth® devices
and shows all devices that were found.
Make sure your Bluetooth® device is available at this time.
2. Select the device to be paired using the
MENU/ENTER dial.
3. The pairing procedure depends on the
device to be connected:
a. Device without PIN code:
The Bluetooth® connection will be automatically connected without any further
input.
b. Device with PIN code:
Two different ways of pairing are possible
depending on the device:
. Type A:
The message “To pair” and “Enter Pin”
0000 will be displayed.
Confirm the PIN code on the device. The
Bluetooth® connection will be made.
. Type B:
The message “Pairing request” and “Confirm password” together with a 6 digit
4-32 Monitor, heater and air conditioner, and audio system
code will be displayed. The unique and
identical code should be displayed on
the device. If the code is identical confirm
on the device.
The Bluetooth® connection will be made.
Pair device:
GUID-1295725F-1AF3-4AA4-9B71-2C636F81A13F
. Turn on the Bluetooth® on the audio unit.
See “Setting items” (P.4-32).
. Use the audio unit to pair:
Push the
button on the instrument
panel. Select the “Pair device” key.
The pairing procedure depends on the
Bluetooth® device to be connected:
1) Device without PIN code:
The Bluetooth® connection will be automatically connected without any further
input.
2) Device with PIN code:
Two different ways of pairing are possible
depending on the device. For the correct
procedure details, see “Setting items” (P.432).
. Use the Bluetooth® audio/cellular phone
device to pair:
1) Switch on the search mode for Bluetooth® devices. If the search mode finds
the audio unit it will be shown on the
device display.
2) Select the unit device shown as “My
Car”.
3) Enter the number code shown on the
relevant device with the device’s own
keypad, and push the confirmation key
on the Bluetooth® device.
Refer to the relevant Bluetooth® device Owner’s
Manual for further details.
Sel. device:
GUID-1295725F-1AF3-4AA4-9B71-2C636F81A13F
The paired device list shows which Bluetooth®
audio or cellular phone devices have been
paired or registered to the system. Select the
appropriate device to connect to the system.
The following symbols (if equipped) indicate the
capability of the registered device:
.
: Cellular phone integration
: Audio streaming (A2DP – Advanced
.
Audio Distribution Profile)
Del. device:
GUID-1295725F-1AF3-4AA4-9B71-2C636F81A13F
A registered device can be removed from
Bluetooth® system registration. Select a registered device and push the MENU/ENTER dial to
confirm to delete.
Bluetooth:
GUID-1295725F-1AF3-4AA4-9B71-2C636F81A13F
Turn the vehicle’s Bluetooth ® system on or off.
Push the
button to return to the phone
setup menu.
USING THE SYSTEM
D15A1-FD990195-7119-4DC1-A242-BDDF331A9977
The hands-free mode can be operated using
the
button on the instrument panel.
Receiving a D15A1-72366BA7-5F0D-4911-9C88-AE9661005B93
call
When receiving an incoming call, the display on
the audio unit will show the caller’s phone
number (or a notification message that the
caller’s phone number cannot be shown) and
three operation icons as illustrated. To highlight different icons, turn the MENU/ENTER dial.
Push the MENU/ENTER dial to select the highlighted icon.
Answering and
during a call:
GUID-1295725F-1AF3-4AA4-9B71-2C636F81A13F
Answer the call by selecting .
During the call, the following icons are available:
.
:
Select this item to end the call.
.
:
Select this item to put the call on hold.
:
.
Select this item to transfer the call from the
hands-free phone system to your cellular
phone.
.
:
Select this item to transfer the call back to
the hands-free phone system from the
cellular phone.
. #123:
Select this item to enter numbers during a
call. For example, use this function when
directed by an automated phone system to
dial an extension number.
Putting a callGUID-1295725F-1AF3-4AA4-9B71-2C636F81A13F
on hold:
To put a call on hold, select . Push the MENU/
ENTER dial again to take the call. To reject the
call, select
.
JVH0857X
Rejecting a call:
GUID-1295725F-1AF3-4AA4-9B71-2C636F81A13F
To reject an incoming call, select
.
Initiating a call
GUID-7C0392E0-8E10-4E3F-944F-86D6C926EEEE
WARNING:
Park the vehicle in a safe location, and apply
the parking brake before making a call.
JVH0863X
A call can be initiated using one of the following
methods:
. Making a call from the phonebook
. Manually dialing a phone number
. Redialing
. Using call history (Call List menu)
— Dialled
— Received
— Missed
Making a call from
the phonebook:
GUID-1295725F-1AF3-4AA4-9B71-2C636F81A13F
Once the Bluetooth® connection has been
made between the registered cellular phone
and the hands-free phone system, phonebook
data will be transferred automatically to the
hands-free phone system. The transfer may
take a while before completion.
Monitor, heater and air conditioner, and audio system
4-33
NOTE:
Phonebook data will be erased when:
. Switching to another registered cellular
phone.
. Cellular phone is disconnected.
. The registered cellular phone is deleted
from the audio system.
1.
Push the
button on instrument
panel.
2. Turn the MENU/ENTER dial to highlight
“Phonebook” and push the MENU/ENTER
dial.
3. Scroll down through the list, select the
appropriate contact name (highlighted),
and push the MENU/ENTER dial.
4. The screen will show the number to be
dialled. Push the MENU/ENTER dial to dial
the number.
If more than one number is registered,
select an appropriate icon.
.
: Home
.
: Cellular phone
.
: Office
Quick searching the phonebook:
The quick search mode can be used as follows:
1. Push the A-Z button.
2. Turn the MENU/ENTER dial for the first
alphabetical or numerical letter of the
contact name. Once highlighted, push the
MENU/ENTER dial to select the letter.
3. The display will show the corresponding
contact name(s). Where necessary, use the
MENU/ENTER dial to scroll further for the
appropriate contact name to call.
4. The screen will show the number to be
dialled. Push the MENU/ENTER dial to dial
the number.
4.
Manually dialling
a phone number:
GUID-1295725F-1AF3-4AA4-9B71-2C636F81A13F
Using call history
(Call list menu):
GUID-1295725F-1AF3-4AA4-9B71-2C636F81A13F
JVH0859X
JVH0858X
To dial a phone number manually, perform the
following operation:
1. Push the
button on the instrument
panel and turn the MENU/ENTER dial to
highlight “Dial Number”.
2. Push the MENU/ENTER dial to select “Dial
Number”.
3. Turn the MENU/ENTER dial to scroll along
and highlight each number of the phone
number. Push the MENU/ENTER dial to
select the highlighted number.
4-34 Monitor, heater and air conditioner, and audio system
To delete the last number entered, scroll to
the “/” (Backspace symbol) and once highlighted, push the MENU/ENTER dial. The last
number will be deleted. Pushing the MENU/
ENTER dial repeatedly will delete each
subsequent number.
After entering the last number, scroll to the
” symbol and push the MENU/ENTER
“
dial to dial the number.
Redialing:
GUID-1295725F-1AF3-4AA4-9B71-2C636F81A13F
To redial or call the last number dialled, push
and hold the
button on the instrument
panel for more than 2 seconds.
JVH0860X
A number from the dialled, received, or missed
call lists can also be used to make a call.
button on the instrument
1. Push the
panel and select “Call List” on the display.
2. Turn the MENU/ENTER dial and scroll to an
item, and push the MENU/ENTER dial to
select an item.
Available items:
. Dialed
Use the dialled call mode to make a call
which is based on the list of outgoing
(dialled) calls.
General settings
GUID-22BADC33-E704-4287-A6B0-7B57C5E8A54E
. Received
Use the received call mode to make a call
which is based on the list of received
calls.
.
. Missed
— Phone
Switch the phone ringing volume on or
off.
PB download
Download the phonebook of the mobile
device to the audio unit.
Use the missed call mode to make a call
which is based on the list of missed calls.
3.
Scroll to the preferred phone number and
push the MENU/ENTER dial or
button on the instrument panel.
Second incoming
call
GUID-A6E3F1C0-4310-4D04-82D0-DA86ADDD2187
JVH1202X
Push the
button on instrument panel.
Using the MENU/ENTER dial, select “Settings”.
Volume settings and manually downloading
the phonebook can be done using this menu.
Menu operation:
GUID-1295725F-1AF3-4AA4-9B71-2C636F81A13F
Turn the MENU/ENTER dial to change the
highlighted item and to change the volume
settings.
Push the MENU/ENTER dial to select the highlighted item and to apply the setting.
JVH0861X
Whenever there is a second incoming call is
shown in the display. By selecting the “ ” icon
the call is accepted and the current call is put
on hold.
Selecting the “
” icon using the MENU/
ENTER dial rejects the second incoming call.
When this is done during the conversation it
ends the call.
Selecting the “ ” icon using the MENU/ENTER
dial switches the call on line between the first
and the second call.
Menu items:
GUID-1295725F-1AF3-4AA4-9B71-2C636F81A13F
. Volume
— Ring
Set the phone ringing volume.
— Call
Set the volume of the conversation
during a call.
. Ringtone
— Car
Switch the ringtone to ring from the
vehicle or the cellular phone.
Monitor, heater and air conditioner, and audio system
4-35
MEMO
4-36
Monitor, heater and air conditioner, and audio system
5 Starting and driving
Break-in schedule .........................................................................................
....
Before starting engine ..............................................................................
....
Precautions when starting and driving ......................................
....
Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) ...............................................
....
Three-way catalyst (gasoline engine model) .................
....
Care when driving ........................................................................................
....
Engine cold start period ..................................................................
....
Loading luggage ....................................................................................
....
Driving in wet conditions ................................................................
....
Driving in winter conditions .........................................................
....
Ignition switch (model without Intelligent
Key system) .......................................................................................................
....
Manual Transmission (MT) .............................................................
....
Key positions ............................................................................................
....
Steering lock .............................................................................................
....
Push-button ignition switch (model with Intelligent
Key system) .......................................................................................................
....
Precautions on push-button ignition
switch operation ....................................................................................
....
Intelligent Key system .......................................................................
....
Steering lock .............................................................................................
....
Ignition switch positions .................................................................
....
Intelligent Key battery discharge .............................................
....
Starting engine (model without Intelligent
Key system) .......................................................................................................
....
Gasoline engine ......................................................................................
....
Diesel engine .............................................................................................
....
Starting engine (model with Intelligent Key system) .......
....
Driving vehicle .................................................................................................
....
Driving with Manual Transmission (MT) ..............................
....
5-2
5-2
5-2
5-3
5-3
5-4
5-4
5-4
5-4
5-4
5-4
5-4
5-4
5-5
5-5
5-5
5-5
5-6
5-6
5-6
5-7
5-7
5-7
5-8
5-9
5-9
Eco mode (if equipped) ........................................................................
....
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system
(if equipped) ..................................................................................................
....
Hill start assist system (if equipped) .........................................
....
Speed limiter (if equipped) ................................................................
....
Speed limiter operations ...........................................................
....
Cruise control (if equipped) ..............................................................
....
Precautions on cruise control ...............................................
....
Cruise control operations .........................................................
....
Fuel Efficiency and Carbon Dioxide Reduction
driving tips ......................................................................................................
....
Increasing fuel economy and reducing Carbon
Dioxide emissions .....................................................................................
....
Parking ..............................................................................................................
....
Parking sensor (sonar) system ......................................................
....
Trailer towing ...............................................................................................
....
Power steering ............................................................................................
....
Hydraulic pump electric power steering type .........
....
Brake system ...............................................................................................
....
Brake precautions ..........................................................................
....
Brake assist ..........................................................................................
....
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) ...........................................
....
Vehicle security ..........................................................................................
....
Cold weather driving .............................................................................
....
Battery .....................................................................................................
....
Engine coolant ..................................................................................
....
Tire equipment ..................................................................................
....
Special winter equipment ........................................................
....
Parking brake .....................................................................................
....
Corrosion protection ....................................................................
....
5-10
5-11
5-12
5-12
5-12
5-14
5-14
5-14
5-15
5-16
5-16
5-18
5-19
5-19
5-19
5-19
5-19
5-20
5-20
5-21
5-21
5-22
5-22
5-22
5-22
5-22
5-22
BREAK-IN SCHEDULE
BEFORE STARTING ENGINE
D15A1-E8B3C646-A778-4313-AF16-0B6BA360E60C
D15A1-41CA11C8-A71B-431A-9816-BFD8BE3B85AC
During the first 1,000 km (621 miles) (H4K
engine) or 1,500 km (932 miles) (K9K engine),
follow these recommendations to obtain maximum engine performance and ensure the
future reliability and economy of your new
vehicle. Failure to follow these recommendations may result in shortened engine life and
reduced engine performance.
. Do not drive at a constant speed, either fast
or slow, for long periods of time.
. Do not run the engine over 3,000 to 3,500
rpm (H4K engine) or 2,500 rpm (K9K
engine).
. Do not accelerate at full throttle in any
gear.
. Do not start quickly.
. Do not brake hard as much as possible.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Starting and driving
D15A1-31CD6104-0310-4DC0-AF37-02F08BEF2110
WARNING:
The driving characteristics of your vehicle will
change remarkably by any additional load
and its distribution, as well as by adding
optional equipment (roof racks, etc.). Your
driving style and speed must be adjusted
according to the circumstances. Especially
when carrying heavy loads, your speed must
be reduced adequately.
.
5-2
PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING
AND DRIVING
Make sure the area around the vehicle is
clear.
Visually inspect tires for their appearance
and condition. Measure and check the tire
pressure for proper inflation.
Check that all windows and lights are clean.
Adjust the seat and head restraint positions.
Adjust the inside and outside rearview
mirror positions.
Fasten your seat belt and ask all passengers to do the same.
Check that all doors are closed.
Check the operation of the warning lights
when the ignition switch is placed in the
“ON” position.
Maintenance items in the “8. Maintenance
and do-it-yourself” section should be
checked periodically.
WARNING:
.
.
Never leave children or adults who would
normally require the support of others
alone in your vehicle. Pets should not be
left alone either. They could unknowingly
activate switches or controls and inadvertently become involved in a serious
accident and injure themselves. On hot,
sunny days, temperatures in a closed
vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal
illness to people or animals.
Properly secure all luggage to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. Do not
place luggage higher than the seatbacks.
In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured
luggage could cause personal injury.
NOTE:
During the first few months after purchasing
a new vehicle, if you smell strong odors of
Volatile Organic Compounds (VOCs) inside
the vehicle, ventilate the passenger compartment thoroughly. Open all the windows
before entering or while in the vehicle. In
addition, when the temperature in the passenger compartment rises, or when the
vehicle is parked in direct sunlight for a
period of time, turn off the air recirculation
mode of the air conditioner and/or open the
windows to allow sufficient fresh air into the
passenger compartment.
— You suspect that exhaust fumes are
entering into the passenger compartment.
— You notice a change in the sound of
the exhaust system.
— You have had an accident involving
damage to the exhaust system, underbody, or rear of the vehicle.
EXHAUST GAS
(carbon monoxide)
D15A1-FF415DD8-A3E6-4538-B550-ED73193BFA0D
WARNING:
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Do not breathe exhaust gas; it contains
colorless and odorless carbon monoxide.
Carbon monoxide is dangerous. It can
cause unconsciousness or death.
If you suspect that exhaust fumes are
entering the vehicle, drive with all windows fully open, and have the vehicle
inspected immediately.
Do not run the engine in closed spaces
such as a garage.
Do not park the vehicle with the engine
running for an extended period of time.
Keep the back door closed while driving,
otherwise exhaust gas could be drawn
into the passenger compartment. If you
must drive with the back door open,
follow these precautions:
— Open all the windows.
— Turn the air recirculation mode off
and set the fan speed control to the
highest level to circulate the air.
If a special body or other equipment is
added for recreational or other usage,
follow the manufacturer’s recommendation to prevent carbon monoxide entry
into the vehicle. (Some recreational vehicle appliances such as stoves, refrigerators, heaters, etc. may also generate
carbon monoxide.)
The exhaust system and body should be
inspected by a qualified mechanic whenever:
— Your vehicle is raised while being
serviced.
THREE-WAY CATALYST (gasoline engine
model)
D15A1-8BE2416E-1724-4A2B-858D-F590C9D3C8F1
WARNING:
.
.
.
.
.
overheat. Do not keep driving if the
engine misfires, or if noticeable loss of
performance or other unusual operating
conditions are detected. Have the vehicle
inspected promptly by a NISSAN dealer.
Avoid driving with an extremely low fuel
level. Running out of fuel could cause the
engine to misfire, damaging the threeway catalyst.
Do not race the engine while warming it
up.
Do not push or tow your vehicle to start
the engine.
The exhaust gas and the exhaust system
are very hot. Keep people, animals and
flammable materials away from the exhaust system components.
Do not stop or park the vehicle over
flammable materials such as dry grass,
wastepaper or rags. They may ignite and
cause a fire.
The three-way catalyst is an emission control
device installed in the exhaust system. Exhaust
gas in the three-way catalyst is burned at high
temperatures to help reduce pollutants.
CAUTION:
.
.
Do not use leaded gasoline. (See “Recommended fluids/lubricants and capacities”
(P.9-2).) Deposits from leaded gasoline
seriously reduce the ability of the threeway catalyst to help reduce exhaust
pollutants and/or damage the threeway catalyst.
Keep your engine tuned up. Malfunctions
in the ignition, fuel injection, or electrical
systems may cause overrich fuel to flow
into the three-way catalyst, causing it to
Starting and driving
5-3
IGNITION SWITCH (model without
Intelligent Key system)
CARE WHEN DRIVING
D15A1-365EE49C-5FF9-4447-845A-3881038C5420
Driving your vehicle to fit the circumstances is
essential for your safety and comfort. As a
driver, you should be the one who knows best
how to drive in the given circumstances.
ENGINE COLD
START PERIOD
D15A1-B89C453D-A996-4A1A-A896-4FC3520E6BFC
Due to the higher engine speeds, when the
engine is cold, extra caution must be exercised
when selecting a gear during the engine warmup period after starting the engine.
LOADING LUGGAGE
D15A1-C663B3F6-8EAA-46C6-9228-B3141F69D6D3
D15A1-91DDB153-CBCA-454D-B139-A71B18FD2EDC
DRIVING IN WINTER
CONDITIONS
D15A1-3939347B-E446-4695-87D1-257AFA202DC2
.
.
.
.
.
Drive cautiously.
Avoid accelerating or stopping suddenly.
Avoid sharp turning or lane changing
suddenly.
Avoid sudden steering.
Avoid following too close to the vehicle in
front.
WARNING:
Never remove the key or turn the ignition
switch to the “LOCK” position while driving.
The steering wheel will lock and could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. This
could result in serious vehicle damage or
personal injury.
MANUAL TRANSMISSION
(MT)
D15A1-21B70D8F-F098-475A-A77E-979553F48594
Loads and their distribution and the attachment of equipment (coupling devices, roof
luggage carriers, etc.) will considerably change
the driving characteristics of the vehicle. Your
driving style and speed must be adjusted
according to the circumstances.
DRIVING IN D15A1-3DDDCE8B-46F7-4220-938D-F02C21034A4A
WET CONDITIONS
Avoid accelerating or stopping suddenly.
Avoid sharp turning or lane changing
suddenly.
. Avoid following too close to the vehicle in
front.
When water covers the road surface with water
puddles, small water streams, etc., reduce
speed to prevent hydroplaning which can
cause skidding and loss of control. Worn tires
will increase this risk.
.
.
JVS0807X
The ignition switch includes a device that helps
prevent accidental removal of the key while
driving.
The key can only be removed when the ignition
switch is in the “LOCK” position .
KEY POSITIONS
D15A1-95CA75D5-0D2E-4FAF-BC0D-63E3D92C30B8
LOCK (1)
.
.
5-4
Starting and driving
D15A1-144974C4-67B8-4F45-92DA-6954532EDEFE
The ignition key can only be removed at
this position.
The steering lock can only be locked at this
position.
PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH
(model with Intelligent Key system)
D15A1-8D8CC42A-9474-401D-AE63-E7B674B40563
OFF (2)
D15A1-54D824D0-1B74-4475-84F5-CA80FB23D19C
The engine is turned off with the steering wheel
unlocked.
ON (3)
START (4)
D15A1-16D5423F-AB96-440A-A9B2-60948BDBB14C
The engine starter activates and the engine will
start. The ignition switch, when released, will
automatically turn to the “ON” position.
CAUTION:
As soon as the engine has started, release
the ignition switch immediately.
STEERING LOCK
D15A1-84FC5F17-E3C7-4BE1-842B-2338DC8B9E85
To lock steering
wheel
D15A1-643D9CDC-8445-49BB-8146-1F81F862C0B9
2.
3.
Turn the ignition switch to the “LOCK”
position.
Remove the key from the ignition switch.
Turn the steering wheel 1/6 of a turn
clockwise from the straight up position.
Do not operate the push-button ignition
switch while driving the vehicle except in an
emergency. (The engine will stop when the
ignition switch is pushed 3 consecutive times
or the ignition switch is pushed and held for
more than 2 seconds.) The steering wheel will
lock and could cause the driver to lose
control of the vehicle. This could result in
serious vehicle damage or personal injury.
Before operating the push-button ignition
switch, be sure to move the shift lever to the
“N” (Neutral) position.
INTELLIGENT
KEY SYSTEM
D15A1-771FA3AD-C30C-4693-98E4-B9AE610D746B
The Intelligent Key system can operate the
ignition switch without taking the key out from
your pocket or bag. The operating environment
and/or conditions may affect the Intelligent
Key system operation.
CAUTION:
.
To unlock steering
wheel
D15A1-F991849F-1987-473E-AFAD-235CD32C3712
1.
2.
Insert the key into the ignition switch.
Gently turn the ignition switch while rotating the steering wheel slightly right and left.
Operating range
D15A1-80A44E43-0A1B-4ABB-A7E6-BD571734D53C
WARNING:
D15A1-8FAE5841-E613-460B-A914-0927C1C5B9A6
The ignition system and the electrical accessory power activate without the engine turned
on.
1.
PRECAUTIONS ON PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH
OPERATION
D15A1-13562CA9-9E1B-4EA6-B476-DA4BA15F7D32
.
.
Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with
you when operating the vehicle.
Never leave the Intelligent Key inside the
vehicle when you leave the vehicle.
If the vehicle battery is discharged, the
ignition switch cannot be switched from
the “LOCK” position, and if the steering
lock is engaged, the steering wheel cannot be moved. Charge the battery as
soon as possible. (See “Jump starting”
(P.6-7).)
WAF0170X
The Intelligent Key can only be used for starting
the engine when the Intelligent Key is within
the specified operating range .
When the Intelligent Key battery is almost
discharged or strong radio waves are present
near the operating location, the Intelligent Key
system’s operating range becomes narrower
and may not function properly.
If the Intelligent Key is within the operating
range, it is possible for anyone, even someone
who does not carry the Intelligent Key, to push
the ignition switch to start the engine.
. If the Intelligent Key is placed on the
instrument panel, inside the glove box, door
pocket or the corner of the interior compartment, the Intelligent Key may not
function.
. If the Intelligent Key is placed near the door
or window outside the vehicle, the Intelligent Key may function.
Starting and driving
5-5
STEERING LOCK
D15A1-E0563F6E-C5FD-4C6A-83D7-9D4CAE048AA9
The ignition switch is equipped with an antitheft steering lock device.
.
To lock steering
wheel
D15A1-1990FCB9-1E45-4067-9185-B54F65489D5D
1.
2.
3.
Push the ignition switch to the stop the
engine.
Open or close the driver’s door. The ignition
switch turns to the “LOCK” position.
Turn the steering wheel 1/6 of a turn to the
right or left from the straight up position.
To unlock steering
wheel
D15A1-836CAB5B-2A97-4D4D-BA13-0D61A7DEAB3B
ON positionD15A1-9FF5AE68-135D-4D67-8BBC-43E8DC88123E
CAUTION:
.
Do not leave the vehicle for extended
periods of time when the ignition switch
is in the “ON” position and the engine is
not running. This can discharge the
battery.
Use electrical accessories with the engine
running to avoid discharging the vehicle
battery. If you must use accessories while
the engine is not running, do not use
them for extended periods of time and do
not use multiple electrical accessories at
the same time.
The ignition system and the electrical accessory power activate at this position without the
engine turned on.
The “ON” position has a battery saver feature
that will turn off the ignition if the vehicle is not
running for 3 minutes.
LOCK position
D15A1-43425BBE-7F00-4ED4-A875-071702F2842A
The ignition switch and steering lock can only
be locked at this position.
INTELLIGENTD15A1-EC7BC919-57BA-4B13-9C48-52E1663770CA
KEY BATTERY DISCHARGE
Push the ignition switch, and the steering
wheel will be automatically unlocked.
CAUTION:
.
.
If the battery of the vehicle is discharged,
the push-button ignition switch cannot
be switched from the “LOCK” position.
If the ignition switch position does not
change from the “LOCK” position, push
the ignition switch again while rotating
the steering wheel slightly to the right
and left.
IGNITION SWITCH
POSITIONS
D15A1-78788975-EF20-4EEC-9BD9-C8FD1F38789B
WARNING:
Never push the ignition switch to stop the
engine while driving. The steering wheel may
lock and cause the driver to lose control of
the vehicle, resulting in serious vehicle damage or personal injury.
5-6 Starting and driving
WAF0154X
WAF0007X
Push the ignition switch once to change to
“ON”.
The ignition switch will automatically return to
the “LOCK” position when the driver’s door is
either opened or closed.
If the battery of the Intelligent Key is almost
discharged, the “KEYCARD BATTERY LOW” or
“PLEASE INSERT KEYCARD” message appears in
the vehicle information display. (See “Vehicle
information display” (P.2-11).)
In this case, inserting the Intelligent Key into
the port allows you to start the engine. Make
sure that the key ring side faces backward as
illustrated. Insert the Intelligent Key in the port
until it is latched and secured.
To remove the Intelligent Key from the port,
push the ignition switch to stop the engine and
pull the Intelligent Key.
STARTING ENGINE (model without
Intelligent Key system)
D15A1-CBF21064-B60B-405D-A4B8-F9ACF8015B5A
CAUTION:
.
.
.
.
The Intelligent Key port does not charge
the Intelligent Key battery. If you see the
“KEYCARD BATTERY LOW” or “PLEASE INSERT KEYCARD” message on the vehicle
information display, replace the battery
as soon as possible. (See “Intelligent Key
battery” (P.8-18).)
Never place anything except the Intelligent Key in the Intelligent Key port. Doing
so may cause damage to the equipment.
Make sure the Intelligent Key is in the
correct direction when inserting it to the
Intelligent Key port. The engine may not
start if it is in the wrong direction.
Remove the Intelligent Key from the
Intelligent Key port after the ignition
switch is pushed to stop the engine.
GASOLINE ENGINE
GUID-53CB1C60-3F56-495B-B8EC-1666B8A0CF9D
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Apply the parking brake.
Depress the foot brake pedal.
Move the shift lever to the “N” (Neutral)
position, and depress the clutch pedal to
the floor while starting the engine.
Crank the engine with your foot off the
accelerator pedal by turning the ignition
switch to the “START” position.
Immediately release the ignition switch
when the engine starts. If the engine starts,
but fails to run, repeat the above procedures.
If the engine is very hard to start in
extremely cold or hot weather, depress
the accelerator pedal and hold it to help
start the engine.
CAUTION:
.
.
Do not operate the starter for more than
15 seconds at a time. If the engine does
not start, turn the ignition switch off and
wait 10 seconds before cranking the
engine again. Otherwise, the starter could
be damaged.
After 3 sequence of attempts, if the
engine fails to start or requires many
attempts to start, contact a NISSAN dealer.
.
Do not operate the starter if the engine is
running or while a gear is engaged. It
may damage the starter.
.
If it becomes necessary to start the
engine with a booster battery and jumper
cables, the instructions and cautions
contained in the “6. In case of emergency”
section should be carefully followed.
6.
Allow the engine to idle for at least 30
seconds after starting the engine to warmup. Drive at moderate speeds for a short
distance first, especially in cold weather.
CAUTION:
Do not leave the vehicle unattended while
the engine is warming up.
DIESEL ENGINE
GUID-4DC445E1-881C-46F3-BDE7-EECCF2CAEDB5
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Apply the parking brake.
Depress the foot brake pedal.
Move the shift lever to the “N” (Neutral)
position, and depress the clutch pedal to
the floor while starting the engine.
Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” position
and wait until the glow plug indicator light
turns off.
Crank the engine with your foot off the
accelerator pedal by turning the ignition
switch to the “START” position.
Immediately release the ignition switch
when the engine starts. If the engine starts,
but fails to run, repeat the above procedures.
CAUTION:
.
.
Do not operate the starter for more than
20 seconds at a time. If the engine does
not start, turn the ignition switch off and
wait 20 seconds before cranking the
engine again. Otherwise, the starter could
be damaged.
After 3 sequence of attempts, if the
engine fails to start or requires many
attempts to start, contact a NISSAN dealer.
Starting and driving
5-7
STARTING ENGINE (model with
Intelligent Key system)
D15A1-2DE2AF3E-2C98-4B3D-B10F-15559EF7B7ED
.
.
7.
Do not operate the starter if engine is
running or while a gear is engaged. It
may damage the starter.
If it becomes necessary to start the
engine with a booster battery and jumper
cables, the instructions and cautions
contained in the “6. In case of emergency”
section should be carefully followed.
1.
2.
3.
Allow the engine to idle for at least 30
seconds after starting the engine to warmup. Drive at moderate speeds for a short
distance first, especially in cold weather.
CAUTION:
Do not leave the vehicle unattended while
the engine is warming up.
4.
Apply the parking brake.
Move the shift lever to the “N” (Neutral)
position.
The starter is designed to not operate
unless the brake pedal is fully depressed.
The Intelligent Key must be carried when
operating the ignition switch.
Push the ignition switch to the “ON” position and wait until the glow plug indicator
light
turns off. Depress the brake pedal
and push the ignition switch to start the
engine.
To start the engine immediately, push and
release the ignition switch while depressing
the brake pedal with the ignition switch in
any position.
Immediately release the ignition switch
when the engine starts. If the engine starts,
but fails to run, repeat the above procedures.
If the engine is very hard to start in
extremely cold or hot weather, depress
the accelerator pedal and hold it. Push the
ignition switch for up to 15 seconds while
holding. Release the accelerator pedal
when the engine starts.
CAUTION:
.
.
.
5-8 Starting and driving
As soon as the engine has started,
release the ignition switch immediately.
Do not operate the starter for more than
20 seconds at a time. If the engine does
not start, wait 20 seconds before cranking the engine again. Otherwise, the
starter could be damaged.
After 3 sequence of attempts, if the
engine fails to start or requires many
attempts to start, contact a NISSAN deal-
er.
.
If it becomes necessary to start the
engine with a booster battery and jumper
cables, the instructions and cautions
contained in the “6. In case of emergency”
section should be carefully followed.
5.
Allow the engine to idle for at least 30
seconds after starting the engine to warmup. Drive at moderate speeds for a short
distance first, especially in cold weather.
CAUTION:
Do not leave the vehicle unattended while
the engine is warming up.
6.
To stop the engine, move the shift lever to
the “N” (Neutral) position, apply the parking
brake and push the ignition switch to stop
the engine.
DRIVING VEHICLE
D15A1-FC8DD999-532D-4255-B52B-8544BBF23419
DRIVING WITH MANUAL TRANSMISSION
(MT)
D15A1-08EE8EF5-22CA-45AE-97E1-FC6FB2E7A861
Starting vehicle
D15A1-16757328-65FA-4660-BD9B-5E43351F3AF1
1.
WARNING:
.
.
Do not downshift abruptly on slippery
roads. This may cause a loss of vehicle
control.
Do not over-rev the engine when shifting
to a lower gear. This may cause a loss of
vehicle control or engine damage.
CAUTION:
.
.
.
.
.
Do not rest your foot on the clutch pedal
while driving. This may damage the
clutch system.
Fully depress the clutch pedal before
shifting to help prevent transmission
damage.
Stop the vehicle completely before shifting into the “R” (Reverse) position.
When the vehicle is stopped for a period
of time, for example waiting at stoplights,
shift to the “N” (Neutral) position and
release the clutch pedal with the foot
brake pedal depressed.
Do not shift to the "N" (Neutral) position
while driving. Doing so may result in an
accident due to loss of engine braking.
2.
5-speed ManualGUID-1295725F-1AF3-4AA4-9B71-2C636F81A13F
Transmission (MT) model:
After starting the engine, depress the
clutch pedal to the floor and move the shift
lever to the “1” (1st) or “R” (Reverse) position.
Slowly depress the accelerator pedal, releasing the clutch pedal and parking brake
at the same time.
Shifting gear
D15A1-708BE0C7-A6C5-48DA-A9C3-3AD53F8A3232
To change gears, or when upshifting or downshifting, fully depress the clutch pedal, shift into
the appropriate gear, then slowly and smoothly
release the clutch pedal.
To ensure smooth gear changes, fully depress
the clutch pedal before operating the shift
lever. If the clutch pedal is not fully depressed
before the transmission is shifted, a gear noise
may be heard. Transmission damage could
occur.
Start the vehicle in the “1” (1st) position and shift
to the “2” (2nd), “3” (3rd), “4” (4th), “5” (5th) and “6”
(6th) (if equipped) gear in sequence according
to the vehicle speed.
If it is difficult to move the shift lever into the “R”
(Reverse) or “1” (1st) position, shift to the “N”
(Neutral) position, and then release the clutch
pedal once. Fully depress the clutch pedal
again and shift into “R” or “1”.
WAF0010X
You cannot shift directly from the “5” (5th)
position into the R (Reverse) position. First shift
into the N (Neutral) position, then shift into the
R (Reverse) position.
6-speed ManualGUID-1295725F-1AF3-4AA4-9B71-2C636F81A13F
Transmission (MT) model:
SSD0552
.
.
To reverse, stop the vehicle and move the
shift lever into the N (Neutral) position, and
then pull the ring upward to shift into the
R (Reverse) position.
The ring returns to its original position
when the shift lever is moved to the N
(Neutral) position.
Starting and driving
5-9
ECO MODE (if equipped)
GUID-3AFB1CD4-1855-4684-BECF-C50C47C59B4D
Gear shift indicator
(if equipped)
GUID-5B7EC4F7-B4DD-4EC0-BB59-014CCE1A832F
H4K engine model:
GUID-1295725F-1AF3-4AA4-9B71-2C636F81A13F
1st
2nd
3rd
4th
5th
km/h (MPH)
43 (27)
79 (49)
123 (76)
— (—)
— (—)
K9K engine model (for models not equipped
with the VDC system):
GUID-1295725F-1AF3-4AA4-9B71-2C636F81A13F
SSD1159
The manual transmission gear shift indicator
appears in the meter when the driver should
shift into a higher or lower gear as indicated by
the up or down arrow. The use of the gear shift
indicator will help the driver to upshift or
downshift at a constant engine speed from
any gear according to the preferred operation
or road condition.
When the up arrow appears, upshifting is
recommended. When the down arrow appears,
downshifting is recommended.
Suggested maximum
speed in each gear
D15A1-11EBED13-E731-4C5E-A85D-AC41FFF83620
Downshift to a lower gear if the engine is not
running smoothly, or if you need to accelerate.
Do not exceed the maximum suggested speed
(shown below) in any gear. For level road
driving, use the highest gear suggested for
that speed. Always observe posted speed limits,
and drive according to the road conditions
which will ensure safe operation. Do not overrev the engine when shifting to a lower gear as
it may cause engine damage or loss of vehicle
control.
5-10
Starting and driving
1st
2nd
3rd
4th
5th
6th
km/h (MPH)
39 (24)
75 (47)
110 (68)
— (—)
— (—)
— (—)
K9K engine model (for models equipped with
the VDC system):
GUID-1295725F-1AF3-4AA4-9B71-2C636F81A13F
1st
2nd
3rd
4th
5th
6th
km/h (MPH)
37 (23)
72 (45)
106 (66)
— (—)
— (—)
— (—)
WAF0011X
The ECO mode system helps to enhance the
fuel economy by controlling the air conditioner
and power-assisted steering automatically to
avoid rapid acceleration.
To turn on the ECO mode system, push the
ECO mode switch located on the right side of
the instrument panel. The ECO mode indicator
light illuminates on the meter.
To turn off the ECO mode, push the ECO mode
switch again. The ECO mode indicator light will
turn off.
The ECO mode system can be turned off while
the accelerator pedal is firmly depressed even if
the ECO mode switch is pushed to on. Release
the accelerator pedal to turn on the ECO mode
system again.
VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)
SYSTEM (if equipped)
D15A1-664D8AFF-261B-4944-B0D6-F0B3F5767B92
WARNING:
.
.
.
.
.
.
The Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system is designed to help the driver maintain stability but does not prevent
accidents due to abrupt steering operation at high speeds or by careless or
dangerous driving techniques. Reduce
vehicle speed and be especially careful
when driving and cornering on slippery
surfaces and always drive carefully.
Do not modify the vehicle’s suspension. If
suspension parts such as shock absorbers, struts, springs, stabilizer bars, bushings and wheels are not NISSAN
recommended for your vehicle or are
extremely deteriorated, the VDC system
may not operate properly. This could
adversely affect vehicle handling performance, and the VDC warning light
may illuminate.
If brake related parts such as brake pads,
rotors and calipers are not NISSAN recommended or are extremely deteriorated, the VDC system may not operate
properly and the VDC warning light
may illuminate.
If engine control related parts are not
NISSAN recommended or are extremely
deteriorated, the VDC warning light
may illuminate.
When driving on extremely inclined surfaces such as higher banked corners, the
VDC system may not operate properly
and the VDC warning light
may
illuminate. Do not drive on these types
of roads.
When driving on an unstable surface such
as a turntable, ferry, elevator or ramp, the
.
.
may illuminate.
VDC warning light
This is not a malfunction. Restart the
engine after driving onto a stable surface.
If wheels or tires other than the NISSAN
recommended ones are used, the VDC
system may not operate properly and the
VDC warning light
may illuminate.
The VDC system is not a substitute for
winter tires or tire chains on a snow
covered road.
The Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system
uses various sensors to monitor driver inputs
and vehicle motion. Under certain driving conditions, the VDC system helps to perform the
following functions.
. Controls brake pressure to reduce wheel
slip on one slipping drive wheel so power is
transferred to a non slipping drive wheel on
the same axle.
. Controls brake pressure and engine output
to reduce drive wheel slip based on vehicle
speed (traction control function).
. Controls brake pressure at individual
wheels and engine output to help the driver
maintain control of the vehicle in the
following conditions:
— understeer (vehicle tends to not follow
the steered path despite increased
steering input)
— oversteer (vehicle tends to spin due to
certain road or driving conditions).
The VDC system can help the driver to maintain
control of the vehicle, but it cannot prevent loss
of vehicle control in all driving situations.
When the VDC system operates, the VDC
warning light
in the instrument panel
flashes so note the following:
The road may be slippery or the system
may determine some action is required to
help the vehicle on the steered path.
. You may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal
and hear a noise or vibration from under
the hood. This is normal and indicates that
the VDC system is working properly.
. Adjust your speed and driving to the road
conditions.
If a malfunction occurs in the system, the VDC
illuminates in the instrument
warning light
panel. The VDC system automatically turns off.
See “Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) warning
light” (P.2-8).
The computer has a built-in diagnostic feature
that tests the system each time you start the
engine and move the vehicle forward or in
reverse at a slow speed. When the self-test
occurs, you may hear a “clunk” noise and/or
feel a pulsation in the brake pedal. This is
normal and is not an indication of a malfunction.
.
Starting and driving
5-11
HILL START ASSIST SYSTEM (if equipped)
SPEED LIMITER (if equipped)
D15A1-A3B9F748-5B3B-4B70-9464-CD7A7ECDF40B
WARNING:
.
.
.
Never rely solely on the hill start assist
system to prevent the vehicle from moving backward on a hill. Always drive
carefully and attentively. Depress the
brake pedal when the vehicle is stopped
on a steep hill. Be especially careful when
stopped on a hill on frozen or muddy
roads. Failure to prevent the vehicle from
rolling backwards may result in a loss of
control of the vehicle and possible serious injury or death.
The hill start assist system is not designed to hold the vehicle at a standstill
on a hill. Depress the brake pedal when
the vehicle is stopped on a steep hill.
Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to
roll backwards and may result in a collision or serious personal injury.
The hill start assist system may not
prevent the vehicle from rolling backwards on a hill under all load or road
conditions. Always be prepared to depress the brake pedal to prevent the
vehicle from rolling backwards. Failure
to do so may result in a collision or
serious personal injury.
The hill start assist system automatically keeps
the brakes applied to help prevent the vehicle
from rolling backwards in the time it takes the
driver to release the brake pedal and apply the
accelerator when the vehicle is stopped on a
hill.
The hill start assist system will operate automatically under the following conditions:
. The transmission is shifted to a forward or
reverse gear.
5-12 Starting and driving
GUID-C96E853B-84EB-4628-9ED4-34A36E3A0899
The vehicle is stopped completely on a hill
by applying the brake.
The maximum holding time is 2 seconds. After
2 seconds the vehicle will begin to roll back and
the hill start assist system will stop operating
completely.
The hill start assist system will not operate
when the transmission is shifted to the “N”
(Neutral) or on a flat and level road.
When the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) warning light illuminates in the meter, the hill start
assist system will not operate. (See “Vehicle
Dynamic Control (VDC) system” (P.5-11).)
.
The speed limiter allows you to set the desired
vehicle speed limit. While the speed limiter is
activated, the driver can perform normal braking and acceleration, but the vehicle will not
exceed the set speed.
WARNING:
.
.
Always observe posted speed limits. Do
not set the speed over them.
Always confirm the setting status of the
speed limiter on the instrument panel.
When the speed limiter is on, the cruise control
cannot be operated.
SPEED LIMITER
OPERATIONS
GUID-A1ACE4F4-2614-4D23-91E2-2F5E42EC7C82
The speed limiter can be set between 30 km/h
and 200 km/h (19 MPH and 124 MPH).
The speed limiter set switches are located on
the steering wheel and the right side of the
instrument panel.
WAF0012X
The speed limiter operating condition is shown
on the instrument panel.
Instrument panel:
GUID-1295725F-1AF3-4AA4-9B71-2C636F81A13F
1.
Speed limiter set speed
2.
Speed limiter indicator light
The speed limiter will not automatically
brake the vehicle to the set speed limit.
Turning on speed
limiter
GUID-83BE7EB7-26E6-46ED-B17F-E87CA76E0ED7
WAF0013X
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
+ switch
− switch
RES switch
* switch
Speed limiter MAIN switch
(When this switch is pushed, the speed
limiter enters the standby mode. If the
cruise control system is on, the system will
turn off and the speed limiter enters the
standby mode.)
Cruise control MAIN switch (For details, see
“Cruise control” (P.5-14).)
Speed limiterGUID-1D13B097-DEED-47F6-ABBC-2DCC19A56137
display and indicators
WAF0014X
Push the speed limiter MAIN switch. The speed
limiter indicator (orange) illuminates. The speed
limiter set speed shows “- - -”.
Setting speed
limit
GUID-F5BAED59-50DE-4ADD-BD12-D1F41C279D8F
1.
2.
Push the + switch.
. When the vehicle is stopped, the speed
will be set at 30 km/h (19 MPH).
. While driving, the speed limit will be set
at the current speed.
When the speed limit is set, the speed
limiter indicator light and the speed limiter
set speed illuminate on the instrument
panel.
Changing set speed
limit:
GUID-1295725F-1AF3-4AA4-9B71-2C636F81A13F
Use the following operation to change the
speed limit.
. Push, then quickly release the + or − switch.
Each time you do this, the set speed will
increase or decrease by approximately 2
km/h (1.2 MPH).
Canceling speed
limit
GUID-63BB5432-F856-4713-A711-FD776B5152A5
To cancel the speed limiter, push the * switch.
The speed limiter indicator light will turn off.
(The speed limiter set speed will remain on the
display.)
If the accelerator pedal is fully depressed
(beyond the resistance point), the speed limiter
is temporarily suspended and the vehicle speed
may be controlled above the set speed. The
speed limiter set speed will flash on the vehicle
information display.
The vehicle speed returns to the set speed, the
speed limiter will activate and limit vehicle
speed.
When one of the following operations is performed, the speed limiter will be canceled. The
speed limiter set speed and the speed limiter
indicator light will turn off. These canceling
methods will erase the set speed limit memory.
. Push the speed limiter MAIN switch.
. Push the cruise control MAIN switch.
Speed limiter
malfunction
GUID-7C2DAC6C-9B7E-42FF-9FEC-168CA934AFB5
If the speed limiter malfunctions, the speed
limiter set speed on the instrument panel will
blink. Turn the speed limiter MAIN switch off
and have the system checked by a NISSAN
dealer.
Resuming preset
speed limit:
GUID-1295725F-1AF3-4AA4-9B71-2C636F81A13F
Push the + switch or RES switch. The speed
limiter indicator light illuminates, and the speed
limiter will resume the last set speed limit. If the
vehicle is driven at a speed over the last set
speed limit, the speed limiter indicator light will
blink.
Starting and driving
5-13
CRUISE CONTROL (if equipped)
GUID-FA220D5E-86D5-4658-8BC2-67A17BAE1780
WARNING:
.
.
Always observe the posted speed limits
and do not set the speed over them.
Do not use the cruise control when
driving under the following conditions.
Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle
control and result in an accident.
— When it is not possible to keep the
vehicle at a constant speed
— When driving in heavy traffic
— When driving in traffic that varies
speed
— When driving in windy areas
— When driving on winding or hilly roads
— When driving on slippery (rain, snow,
ice, etc.) roads
CAUTION:
Do not shift to the “N” (Neutral) position
without depressing the clutch pedal when
the cruise control is operated. Should this
occur, depress the clutch pedal and turn the
cruise control MAIN switch off immediately.
Failure to do so may cause engine damage.
.
checked by a NISSAN dealer.
The set speed indicator and cruise control
on indicator light may blink when the cruise
control MAIN switch is turned on while
pushing the RES switch. To properly set
the cruise control system, use the following
procedures.
CRUISE CONTROL
OPERATIONS
GUID-0AF10D9E-C570-4E5F-80E9-8FEC4609A549
The cruise control allows driving at speeds
above 30 km/h (19 MPH) without keeping your
foot on the steering wheel and the accelerator
pedal.
The cruise control will automatically be canceled if the vehicle slows down more than
approximately 13 km/h (8 MPH) below the set
speed.
Depressing the clutch pedal will cancel the
cruise control and the set speed indicator will
turn off.
The cruise control switches are located on the
steering wheel and the right side of the
instrument panel.
WAF0013X
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
+ switch
− switch
RES switch
* switch
Speed limiter MAIN switch (For details, see
“Speed limiter” (P.5-12).)
Cruise control MAIN switch
Cruise control
display and indicators
GUID-291EDC81-32F2-4971-9B02-B38664A12104
PRECAUTIONS
ON CRUISE CONTROL
GUID-DF8D7EFE-0E39-4E61-9D4D-2108091CF450
.
.
.
If the cruise control system malfunctions, it
cancels automatically. The set speed indicator and the cruise control on indicator
light will blink to warn the driver.
If the engine coolant temperature becomes
excessively high, the cruise control system
will be canceled automatically.
If the set speed indicator and cruise control
indicator light blink, turn off the cruise
control MAIN switch and have the system
5-14 Starting and driving
WAF0015X
WAF0012X
The cruise control operating condition is
shown on the instrument panel.
FUEL EFFICIENCY AND CARBON
DIOXIDE REDUCTION DRIVING TIPS
D15A1-F3F8531B-3496-4A94-8288-596829E580FA
Instrument
1.
Cruise
2.
Cruise
3.
Speed
panel:
GUID-1295725F-1AF3-4AA4-9B71-2C636F81A13F
control set speed
control on indicator light
limiter indicator light
Turning on cruise
control
GUID-ECF111A0-BCD4-4318-AF4C-0BBF8450A8A8
Push the cruise control MAIN switch. The speed
limiter indicator light (green) illuminates. The
cruise control set speed shows “- - -”.
Setting cruising
speed
GUID-95436A48-7C70-418A-AEB2-818ECC0CA81D
1.
2.
3.
Accelerate to the desired speed.
Push the + switch and release it.
The cruise control on indicator light, the
speed limiter indicator light and the cruise
control set speed illuminate on the meter
panel.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
The vehicle will maintain the set speed.
Passing another
vehicle:
GUID-1295725F-1AF3-4AA4-9B71-2C636F81A13F
Depress the accelerator pedal to accelerate.
After releasing the accelerator pedal, the vehicle will return to the previously set speed.
The vehicle may not maintain the set speed
when going up or down steep hills. In such
cases, drive without the cruise control.
Resetting to slower
speed:
GUID-1295725F-1AF3-4AA4-9B71-2C636F81A13F
Use any one of the following methods to reset
to a slower speed.
. Lightly tap the foot brake pedal. When the
vehicle reaches the desired speed, push
and release the − switch.
. Push and hold the − switch. When the
vehicle reaches the desired speed, release
the − switch.
.
Quickly push and release the − switch. This
will reduce the vehicle speed by about 2
km/h (1.2 MPH).
Resetting to faster
speed:
GUID-1295725F-1AF3-4AA4-9B71-2C636F81A13F
Use any one of the following methods to reset
to a faster speed.
. Depress the accelerator pedal. When the
vehicle reaches the desired speed, push
and release the − switch.
. Push and hold the + switch. When the
vehicle reaches the desired speed, release
the + switch.
. Quickly push and release the + switch. This
will increase the vehicle speed by about 2
km/h (1.2 MPH).
Resuming at preset
speed:
GUID-1295725F-1AF3-4AA4-9B71-2C636F81A13F
Push and release the RES switch.
The vehicle will resume the last set cruising
speed when the vehicle speed is over 30 km/h
(19 MPH).
Canceling cruising
speed
GUID-9514B08D-471B-469F-9400-C5E7A1E17191
To cancel the cruising speed temporarily, push
the * switch. The cruise control on indicator
light will turn off. (The cruise control set speed
will remain on the display.)
To cancel the cruise control, push the cruise
control MAIN switch. The cruise control set
speed and the cruise control on indicator light
will turn off. This canceling method will erase
the set cruise control memory.
Follow these easy-to-use Fuel Efficiency and
Carbon Dioxide Reduction Driving Tips to help
you achieve the most fuel economy from your
vehicle and reduce carbon dioxide emissions.
1. Use smooth accelerator and brake pedal
application.
. Avoid rapid starts and stops.
. Use smooth, gentle accelerator and
brake application whenever possible.
. Maintain constant speed while commuting and coast whenever possible.
2. Maintain constant speed.
. Look ahead to try and anticipate and
minimize stops.
. Synchronizing your speed with traffic
lights allows you to reduce your number
of stops.
. Maintaining a steady speed can minimize red light stops and improve fuel
efficiency.
3. Drive at economical speeds and distances.
. Observing the speed limit and not exceeding 97 km/h (60 MPH) (where legally
allowed) can improve fuel efficiency due
to reduced aerodynamic drag.
. Maintaining a safe following distance
behind other vehicles reduces unnecessary braking.
. Safely monitoring traffic to anticipate
changes in speed permits reduced braking and smooth acceleration changes.
. Select a gear range suitable to road
conditions.
4. Use cruise control (if equipped).
. Using cruise control during highway
driving helps maintain a steady speed.
Starting and driving
5-15
INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY AND
REDUCING CARBON DIOXIDE EMISSIONS
. Cruise control is particularly effective in
providing fuel savings when driving on
flat terrains.
5. Plan for the shortest route.
. Utilize a map or navigation system (if
equipped) to determine the best route to
save time.
6. Avoid idling.
. Shutting off your engine when safe for
stops exceeding 30-60 seconds saves
fuel and reduces emissions.
7. Buy an automated pass for toll roads.
. Automated passes permit drivers to use
special lanes to maintain cruising speed
through the toll and avoid stopping and
starting.
8. Winter warm up.
. Limit idling time to minimize impact to
fuel economy.
. Vehicles typically need no more than 30
seconds of idling at start-up to effectively circulate the engine oil before
driving.
. Your vehicle will reach its ideal operating
temperature more quickly while driving
versus idling.
9. Keeping your vehicle cool.
. Park your vehicle in a covered parking
area or in the shade whenever possible.
. When entering a hot vehicle, opening the
windows will help to reduce the inside
temperature faster, resulting in reduced
demand on your A/C system.
10. Do not carry excessive weight.
. Remove unnecessary objects from the
vehicle to reduce vehicle weight.
5-16
Starting and driving
PARKING
D15A1-5161DEFA-3E97-4C50-AECE-96871311D319
.
.
.
.
.
Keep your engine tuned up.
Follow the recommended scheduled maintenance.
Keep the tires inflated to the correct
pressure. Low tire pressure increases tire
wear and lowers fuel economy.
Keep the wheels in correct alignment.
Improper alignment increases tire wear
and lowers fuel economy.
Use the recommended viscosity engine oil.
(See “Recommended fluids/lubricants and
capacities” (P.9-2).)
D15A1-63C20373-8237-4559-8ED1-DFC76D027C63
WARNING:
.
.
.
.
.
Do not stop or park the vehicle over
flammable materials such as dry grass,
waste paper or rags. They may ignite and
cause a fire.
Safe parking procedures require that
both the parking brake be applied and
the shift lever placed in an appropriate
gear. Failure to do so could cause the
vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll
away and result in an accident.
Never leave the engine running while the
vehicle is unattended.
Do not leave children unattended inside
the vehicle. They could unknowingly activate switches or controls. Unattended
children could become involved in serious accidents.
To help avoid risk of injury or death
through unintended operation of the
vehicle and/or its systems, do not leave
children, people who require the assistance of others or pets unattended in
your vehicle. Additionally, the temperature inside a closed vehicle on a warm
day can quickly become high enough to
cause a significant risk of injury or death
to people and pets.
SSD0489
1.
2.
3.
Firmly apply the parking brake.
Move the shift lever to the “R” (Reverse)
position. When parking on an uphill grade,
move the shift lever to the “1” (1st) position.
To help prevent the vehicle from moving
into traffic when parked on an incline, it is a
good practice to turn the wheels as illustrated.
HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB
Turn the wheels towards the curb and
move the vehicle forward until the curb
side wheel gently touches the curb. Then
apply the parking brake.
HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB
Turn the wheels away from the curb and
allow the vehicle to move back until the
curb side wheel gently touches the curb.
Then apply the parking brake.
HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, WITHOUT
CURB
Turn the wheels toward the side of the
road so the vehicle will move away from the
center of the road if the vehicle moves.
Then apply the parking brake.
4.
Model with Intelligent Key system:
Place the ignition switch in stop the engine.
Model without Intelligent Key system:
Place the ignition switch in the “LOCK”
position and remove the key.
Starting and driving
5-17
PARKING SENSOR (sonar) SYSTEM
D15A1-3E16D477-77FE-4062-9980-CE1868E9C61A
Keep the sonar sensors (located on the bumper
fascia) free from snow, ice and large accumulations of dirt (do not clean the sensors with
sharp objects). If the sensors are covered, it will
affect the accuracy of the parking sensor
(sonar) system.
If the parking sensor (sonar) system malfunctions, the beep sounds for 3 seconds
when the shift lever is moved to the “R”
(Reverse) position. Have the system checked
by a NISSAN dealer.
SSD0723
WARNING:
.
.
.
.
.
The parking sensor (sonar) system is a
convenience but it is not a substitute for
proper parking. Always look around and
check that it is safe to do so before
parking. Always move slowly.
Read and understand the limitations of
the parking sensor (sonar) system as
contained in this section. Inclement
weather may affect the function of the
parking sensor (sonar) system; this may
include reduced performance or a false
activation.
This system is not designed to prevent
contact with small or moving objects.
The system is designed as an aid to the
driver in detecting large stationary objects to help avoid damaging the vehicle.
The system will not detect small objects
below the bumper, and may not detect
objects close to the bumper or on the
ground.
If your vehicle sustains damage to the
bumper fascia, leaving it misaligned or
bent, the sensing zone may be altered
5-18
Starting and driving
causing inaccurate measurement of obstacles or false alarms.
CAUTION:
Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as
possible to hear the tone clearly.
When the ignition switch is in the “ON” position,
the parking sensor (sonar) system is operational.
The parking sensor (sonar) system sounds a
tone to warn the driver of obstacles near the
bumper. The system detects rear obstacles
when the shift lever is in the “R” (Reverse)
position. The system may not detect objects at
speeds above 10 km/h (6 MPH) and may not
detect certain angular or moving objects.
The parking sensor (sonar) system detects
obstacles up to 1.2 m (3.9 ft) from the bumper
with a decreased coverage area at the outer
corners of the bumper (refer to the illustration
for approximate zone coverage areas). As you
move closer to the obstacle, the rate of the
tone increases. When the obstacle is less than
40 cm (15.7 in) away, the tone will sound
continuously.
TRAILER TOWING
D15A1-5899B275-01B6-41CD-805C-991806AC973D
Your vehicle was designed to be used to carry
passengers and luggage. NISSAN does not
recommend trailer towing, because it places
additional loads on your vehicle’s engine, drivetrain, steering, braking and other systems.
CAUTION:
Vehicle damage resulting from towing a
trailer is not covered by the warranty.
POWER STEERING
GUID-BCDA30B0-9DBA-4200-B39D-6F50F50FBC55
WARNING:
If the engine is not running or is turned off
while driving, the power assist for the steering will not work. The steering will be harder
to operate.
HYDRAULIC PUMP ELECTRIC POWER
STEERING TYPE
GUID-E997326D-57B1-471A-80C8-953DBC65AB68
The hydraulic pump electric power steering is
designed to provide power assistance while
driving to operate the steering wheel with light
force.
When the steering wheel is operated repeatedly or continuously while parking or driving at
a very low speed, the power assist for the
steering wheel will be reduced. This is to
prevent overheating of the hydraulic pump
electric power steering and protect it from
getting damaged. While the power assist is
reduced, steering wheel operation will become
heavy. If the steering wheel operation is still
performed, the power steering may stop. Stop
the engine. The temperature of the hydraulic
pump electric power steering will go down and
the power assist level will return to normal after
starting the engine. Avoid repeating such
steering wheel operations that could cause
the hydraulic pump electric power steering to
overheat.
You may hear a noise from the front of the
vehicle when the steering wheel is operated.
This is not a malfunction.
BRAKE SYSTEM
D15A1-524F2163-875B-4D31-9A49-A2DA9D150D31
The brake system has two separate hydraulic
circuits. If one circuit malfunctions, you will still
have braking ability at two wheels.
BRAKE PRECAUTIONS
D15A1-995F14BA-3250-45E8-A4D5-EFBD0B632895
Vacuum assisted
brakes
D15A1-7AE8E208-0576-4BD2-8C93-C8FFF26A62C6
The brake booster aids braking by using engine
vacuum. If the engine stops, you can stop the
vehicle by depressing the foot brake pedal.
However, greater foot pressure on the foot
brake pedal will be required to stop the vehicle.
The stopping distance will be longer.
If the engine is not running or is turned off
while driving, the power assisted brakes will not
function. Braking will be harder.
WARNING:
Do not coast with the engine stopped.
When the brake pedal is depressed slowly and
firmly, you may hear a clicking noise and feel a
slight pulsation. This is normal and indicates
that the Brake Assist System is operating.
Using brakes
D15A1-B3E7B0F5-C532-43D1-8150-97FB7B385CFC
Avoid resting your foot on the foot brake pedal
while driving. This will overheat the brakes,
wear out the brake linings/pads faster, and
increase fuel consumption.
To help reduce brake wear and to prevent the
brakes from overheating, reduce speed and
downshift to a lower gear before going down a
slope or long grade. Overheated brakes may
reduce braking performance and could result
in loss of vehicle control.
While driving on a slippery surface, be careful
when braking, accelerating or downshifting.
Abrupt braking or acceleration could cause
the wheels to skid and result in an accident.
Starting and driving
5-19
Wet brakes
D15A1-11304DAE-D8A1-41C5-9629-EB4E233FA326
When the vehicle is washed or driven through
water, the brakes may get wet. As a result, your
braking distance will be longer and the vehicle
may pull to one side during braking.
To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe
speed while lightly depressing the foot brake
pedal to heat up the brakes. Do this until the
brakes return to normal. Avoid driving the
vehicle at high speeds until the brakes function
correctly.
Parking brakeD15A1-9F650418-1153-4519-A067-F7B1AB1F0389
break-in
Break in the parking brake shoes whenever the
stopping effect of the parking brake is weakened or whenever the parking brake shoes
and/or drums/rotors are replaced, in order to
assure the best braking performance.
This procedure is described in the vehicle
service manual and can be performed by a
NISSAN dealer.
BRAKE ASSIST
D15A1-CDBFBD03-A9DF-438C-AF95-F32FB9DAFFB2
When the force applied to the brake pedal
exceeds a certain level, the Brake Assist is
activated generating greater braking force
than a conventional brake booster even with
light pedal force.
WARNING:
The Brake Assist is only an aid to assist
braking operation and is not a collision
warning or avoidance device. It is the driver’s
responsibility to stay alert, drive safely and
be in control of the vehicle at all times.
ANTI-LOCK D15A1-C5C2BDDA-1861-49E4-A3EF-B800D31DBF5F
BRAKING SYSTEM (ABS)
WARNING:
.
Driving uphill
D15A1-98F5E8C2-2DFE-4585-B8B6-542F87613B7A
When starting on a steep grade, it is sometimes
difficult to operate both the brake and clutch.
Apply the parking brake to hold the vehicle. Do
not slip the clutch. When ready to start, slowly
release the parking brake while depressing the
accelerator pedal and releasing the clutch
pedal.
Driving downhill
D15A1-32139F93-F218-4D2C-BC4E-B0CC3241F2E9
The engine braking action is effective for
controlling the vehicle while descending hills.
The shift lever should be placed in the lower
speed position prior to descending.
5-20 Starting and driving
.
The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) is a
sophisticated device, but it cannot prevent accidents resulting from careless or
dangerous driving techniques. It can help
maintain vehicle control during braking
on slippery surfaces. Remember that
stopping distances on slippery surfaces
will be longer than on normal surfaces
even with ABS. Stopping distances may
also be longer on rough, gravel or snow
covered roads, or if you are using tire
chains. Always maintain a safe distance
from the vehicle in front of you. Ultimately, the driver is responsible for
safety.
Tire type and condition may also affect
braking effectiveness.
— When replacing tires, install the specified size of tires on all four wheels.
— When installing a spare tire, make
sure that it is the proper size and
type as specified on the tire placard.
(See “Tire placard” (P.9-7).)
— For detailed information, see “Tires
and wheels” (P.8-26).
The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) controls
the brakes so the wheels do not lock during
hard braking or when braking on slippery
surfaces. The system detects the rotation
speed at each wheel and varies the brake fluid
pressure to prevent each wheel from locking
and sliding. By preventing each wheel from
locking, the system helps the driver maintain
steering control and helps to minimize swerving and spinning on slippery surfaces.
Using system
D15A1-B691277D-BAF2-49A1-8951-8ED1D5C5D7A8
Depress the brake pedal and hold it down.
Depress the brake pedal with firm steady
pressure, but do not pump the brakes. The
ABS will operate to prevent the wheels from
locking up. Steer the vehicle to avoid obstacles.
WARNING:
Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing so may
result in increased stopping distances.
Self-test feature
D15A1-5C05705F-920A-4D23-B3F5-122BA0E9441C
The ABS includes electronic sensors, electric
pumps, hydraulic solenoids and a computer.
The computer has a built-in diagnostic feature
that tests the system each time you start the
engine and move the vehicle at a low speed in
forward or reverse. When the self-test occurs,
you may hear a “clunk” noise and/or feel a
pulsation in the brake pedal. This is normal and
does not indicate a malfunction. If the computer senses a malfunction, it switches the ABS
VEHICLE SECURITY
COLD WEATHER DRIVING
D15A1-16129265-62AC-4A0C-9B39-48A5D69BB276
off and illuminates the ABS warning light on the
instrument panel. The brake system then
operates normally, but without anti-lock assistance.
If the ABS warning light illuminates during the
self-test or while driving, have the vehicle
checked by a NISSAN dealer.
Normal operation
D15A1-28CDE416-6443-49AE-B0A3-3F4B5A2BDCF4
The ABS operates at speeds above 5 to 10
km/h (3 to 6 MPH). The speed varies according
to road conditions.
When the ABS senses that one or more wheels
are close to locking up, the actuator rapidly
applies and releases hydraulic pressure. This
action is similar to pumping the brakes very
quickly. You may feel a pulsation in the brake
pedal and hear a noise from under the hood or
feel a vibration from the actuator when it is
operating. This is normal and indicates that the
ABS is operating properly. However, the pulsation may indicate that road conditions are
hazardous and extra care is required while
driving.
When leaving your vehicle unoccupied:
. Always take the key with you - even when
leaving the vehicle in your own garage.
. Close all windows completely and lock all
doors.
. Always park your vehicle where it can be
seen. Park in a well lit area during the night.
. If the security system is equipped, use it even for a short period.
. Never leave children or pets in the vehicle
unattended.
. Never leave valuables inside the vehicle.
Always take valuables with you.
. Never leave the vehicle documents in the
vehicle.
. Never leave articles on a roof rack. Remove
them from the rack and keep and lock
them inside the vehicle.
. Never leave the spare key in the vehicle.
D15A1-EBC97F4F-D1CC-40F0-8EC6-B8EC419B4084
WARNING:
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Whatever the condition, drive with caution. Accelerate and decelerate with great
care. If accelerating or decelerating too
fast, the drive wheels will lose even more
traction.
Allow more stopping distance in cold
weather driving. Braking should be
started sooner than on dry pavement.
Keep at a greater distance from the
vehicle in front of you on slippery roads.
Wet ice (0°C, 32°F and freezing rain), very
cold snow and ice can be slick and very
difficult to drive on. The vehicle will have
a lot less traction or grip under these
conditions. Try to avoid driving on wet ice
until the road is salted or sanded.
Watch for slippery spots (glaring ice).
These may appear on an otherwise clear
road in shaded areas. If a patch of ice is
seen ahead, brake before reaching it. Try
not to brake while actually on the ice, and
avoid any sudden steering maneuvers.
Do not use cruise control (if equipped) on
slippery roads.
Snow can trap dangerous exhaust gas
under your vehicle. Keep snow clear of
the exhaust pipe and from around your
vehicle.
Starting and driving
5-21
BATTERY
D15A1-C2CA590A-9BA8-4FC1-9CCC-FDAEE005A29C
If the battery is not fully charged during
extremely cold weather conditions, the battery
fluid may freeze and damage the battery. To
maintain maximum efficiency, the battery
should be checked regularly. For details, see
“Battery” (P.8-17).
ENGINE COOLANT
D15A1-7A6B0449-65CB-41B1-8B96-CE9ED7D446D2
If the vehicle is to be left outside without antifreeze, drain the cooling system, including the
engine block. Refill before operating the vehicle.
For details, see “Changing engine coolant” (P.87).
TIRE EQUIPMENT
D15A1-64E9A9C9-4E88-4008-9967-F2592A02E8D2
1.
2.
3.
4.
If you have snow tires installed on the
front/rear wheels of your vehicle, they
should be of the same size, loading range,
construction and type (bias, bias-belted or
radial) as the rear/front tires.
If the vehicle is to be operated in severe
winter conditions, snow tires should be
installed on all four wheels.
For additional traction on icy roads,
studded tires may be used. However, some
countries, provinces and states prohibit
their use. Check local, state and provincial
laws before installing studded tires.
Skid and traction capabilities of studded
snow tires, on wet or dry surfaces, may
be poorer than that of non-studded snow
tires.
Snow chains may be used if desired. Make
sure they are the proper size for the tires on
your vehicle and are installed according to
the chain manufacturer’s instructions. Use
chain tensioners when recommended by
the tire chain manufacturer to ensure a
5-22
Starting and driving
tight fit. Loose end links of the tire chains
must be secured or removed to prevent the
possibility of whipping action damage to
the fenders or underbody. In addition, drive
at a reduced speed, otherwise, your vehicle
may be damaged and/or vehicle handling
and performance may be adversely affected.
SPECIAL WINTER
EQUIPMENT
D15A1-87A06AD4-9E97-40C3-AE6B-765ECEC9A0CA
It is recommended that the following items be
carried in the vehicle during the winter:
. A scraper and stiff-bristled brush to remove
ice and snow from the windows.
. A sturdy, flat board to be placed under the
jack to give it firm support.
. A shovel to dig the vehicle out of snowdrifts.
PARKING BRAKE
D15A1-AA570ECB-5F9D-4900-BD7B-65F841C1AAD8
When parking in the area where the outside
temperature is below 0°C (32°F), do not apply
the parking brake to prevent it from freezing.
For safe parking:
. Place the shift lever in the “1” (1st) or “R”
(Reverse) position.
. Securely block the wheels.
CORROSIOND15A1-605EEE0A-D879-474B-9CA2-428161302F6C
PROTECTION
Chemicals used for road surface deicing are
extremely corrosive and will accelerate corrosion and the deterioration of underbody components such as the exhaust system, fuel and
brake lines, brake cables, floor pan and fenders.
In the winter, the underbody must be cleaned
periodically. For additional information, see
“Corrosion protection” (P.7-5).
For additional protection against rust and
corrosion, which may be required in some
areas, consult a NISSAN dealer.
6 In case of emergency
Hazard indicator flasher switch ........................................................
....
Emergency Stop Signal ............................................................................
....
Flat tire ..................................................................................................................
....
Stopping vehicle ....................................................................................
....
Preparing tools and spare tire ...................................................
....
Blocking wheels .....................................................................................
....
Removing tire ...........................................................................................
....
Installing spare tire ..............................................................................
....
Stowing damaged tire and tools .............................................
....
6-2
6-2
6-2
6-2
6-3
6-4
6-4
6-6
6-6
Jump starting .................................................................................................
....
6-7
Push starting ................................................................................................
....
6-10
If your vehicle overheats ....................................................................
....
6-10
Towing your vehicle ...............................................................................
....
6-11
Towing precautions ......................................................................
....
6-11
Towing recommended by NISSAN ....................................
....
6-12
NissanConnect application (if equipped) ...............................
....
6-13
HAZARD INDICATOR FLASHER SWITCH
D15A1-DC13C8BB-D3C5-4ABE-9B25-588DE68D652F
EMERGENCY STOP SIGNAL
FLAT TIRE
GUID-62232BE0-DAF4-4E59-97B4-94DF3A99E749
D15A1-731D6607-4AFE-4B6B-8CEA-9FC3B0AD95C8
The Emergency Stop Signal will blink the
hazard indicator flasher to prevent the rearend collision, when a sudden braking operation
is detected. To stop the hazard indicator
flasher, push the hazard indicator flasher
switch once.
If you have a flat tire, follow the instructions as
follows.
STOPPING VEHICLE
D15A1-6E3362D8-C092-442C-91E5-C16CBD838BC7
WARNING:
.
.
.
SIC2475
The hazard indicator flasher switch operates
regardless of the ignition switch position except when the battery is discharged.
The hazard indicator flasher is used to warn
other drivers when you have to stop or park
under emergency conditions.
When the hazard indicator flasher switch is
pushed, all turn signal lights will flash. To turn
off the hazard indicator flasher, push the
hazard indicator flasher switch again.
When an impact that could activate the supplemental air bags is detected, the hazard warning flasher lights blink automatically. If the
hazard warning flasher switch is pushed, the
hazard warning flashers will turn off.
.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
WARNING:
Do not turn the hazard warning flasher
switch to off until you can make sure that it
is safe to do so. Also, the hazard flasher
warning may not blink automatically depending on the force of impact.
6-2
In case of emergency
8.
Be sure to apply the parking brake firmly.
Be sure to move the shift lever to the “R”
(Reverse) position.
Never change tires when the vehicle is on
a slope, ice or slippery area. This is
hazardous.
Never change tires when the oncoming
traffic is close to your vehicle. Call for
professional road assistance.
Safely move the vehicle off the road away
from traffic.
Turn on the hazard indicator flasher lights.
Park on a level surface.
Apply the parking brake.
Move the shift lever to the “R” (Reverse)
position.
Turn off the engine.
Open the hood:
. To warn other traffic.
. To signal professional road assistance
personnel that you need assistance.
Have all passengers get out from the
vehicle and stand in a safe place, away
from other traffic and clear of the vehicle.
PREPARING D15A1-0A9AE268-59C1-4A9D-8532-F6593649CFF6
TOOLS AND SPARE TIRE
CAUTION:
.
.
.
When removing the jack, be careful that
your hands do not hit against the vehicle.
Otherwise, this could result in personal
injury.
When storing the jack, do not overtighten
the jack lever or use a screw driver. Doing
so could cause deformation of the installation area for the jack.
Do not allow the jack to contact the
interior parts. Doing so could cause damage to the vehicle.
Spare tire
WAG0007X
WAG0006X
Remove the jack and necessary tools from the
storage area.
1.
2.
3.
4.
GUID-C19BDD73-EC59-46F0-A066-6A4FFA9449AD
The spare tire is located under the rear of the
vehicle.
To remove the spare tire, perform the following
procedures.
1. Have all passengers get out from the
vehicle.
2. Open the back door.
3. Loosen the bolt , located near the back
door opening, counterclockwise a few
turns using the wheel nut wrench.
Remove the storage door.
Unhook the clips restraining the necessary
tools, and then remove the necessary tools.
Loosen the jack by turning the clamp nut
counterclockwise .
Remove the clamp nut , tilt the top of the
jack and then remove the jack slowly. To
store the jack, perform this in the reverse
order and then tighten the clamp nut
so
that it does not rattle.
WAG0008X
In case of emergency
6-3
4.
5.
Push up the spare tire hanger and turn the
bolt
counterclockwise by hand to lower
the spare tire.
Stop turning the bolt when the tire is
lowered to the place where the spare tire
hanger
can be removed from the hook
.
Do not loosen the bolt excessively, otherwise the spare tire hanger may fall
suddenly.
BLOCKING WHEELS
D15A1-23E7DEFB-5802-48C9-BB6F-FDF013EA5A18
REMOVING TIRE
D15A1-F9E36B2A-7AA5-4B04-8663-E2B23C1A97CC
Removing wheel
cover
D15A1-6BADB43C-DD4D-48E4-BF8C-57E46F4382F1
MCE0001D
SCE0630
WARNING:
Type A
Be sure to block the appropriate wheel to
prevent the vehicle from moving, which may
cause personal injury.
WAG0009X
6.
7.
Hold the spare tire hanger and remove it
from the hook by pushing the hanger
upward.
Lower the spare tire hanger slowly to the
ground, and then take out the spare tire.
Place suitable blocks
at both the front and
back of the wheel diagonally opposite the flat
tire to prevent the vehicle from moving when
it is jacked up.
SCE0637
Type B
CAUTION:
.
.
Be careful not to touch the exhaust pipe
while removing the spare tire, as it may
be hot.
Properly stow the spare tire hanger after
removing the spare tire.
6-4
In case of emergency
Type A:
GUID-1295725F-1AF3-4AA4-9B71-2C636F81A13F
WARNING:
Never use your hands to remove the wheel
cover. This may cause personal injury.
To remove the wheel cover, use the jack rod
as illustrated.
Apply cloth
between the wheel and jack rod
to prevent damaging the wheel and wheel
cover.
Type B:
GUID-1295725F-1AF3-4AA4-9B71-2C636F81A13F
Remove the center wheel cap as illustrated.
Jacking up vehicle
D15A1-B37ACDE4-B409-461F-93E1-BF96415D844D
WAG0026X
WARNING:
.
WAG0038X
Jack-up points
.
.
.
.
SCE0914
.
Floor jack-up point
For the rear, never jack up the vehicle at a
location other than the floor jack-up point that
is specified.
.
.
Be sure to read and follow the instructions in this section.
DO NOT GET UNDER A VEHICLE THAT IS
SUPPORTED BY A JACK.
Never use a jack which is not provided
with your vehicle.
The jack, which is provided with your
vehicle, is designed only to lift your
vehicle during a tire change. Do not use
the jack provided with your vehicle on
other vehicles.
Never jack up the vehicle at a location
other than the jack-up point that is
specified.
Never lift the vehicle more than necessary.
Never use blocks on or under the jack.
Never start or run the engine while the
vehicle is on the jack. The vehicle may
move suddenly, and this may cause an
accident.
.
.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Never allow passengers to remain in the
vehicle while the tire is off the ground.
Be sure to read the caution label attached
to the jack body before using.
Place the jack directly under the jack-up
point as illustrated so that the top of the
jack contacts the vehicle at the jack-up
point.
The jack should be placed on firm level
ground.
Align the jack head between the two
notches located at the jack-up point of
either the front or the rear section.
Fit the groove of the jack head between the
notches as shown.
Loosen each wheel nut, counterclockwise,
one or two turns with the wheel nut
wrench.
Do not remove the wheel nuts until the
tire is off the ground.
Carefully raise the vehicle until the clearance between the tire and ground is
achieved.
In case of emergency
6-5
6.
To lift the vehicle, securely hold the jack
lever and rod with both hands and turn the
jack lever.
.
Removing tire
D15A1-972115C8-16B3-429F-9DF1-CC69110A00AF
1.
1.
2.
Remove the wheel nuts.
Remove the damaged tire.
CAUTION:
The tire is heavy. Be sure that your feet are
clear from the tire and use gloves as necessary to avoid injury.
INSTALLINGD15A1-028A15EE-D4CA-4435-AFC6-94D3C9EC3071
SPARE TIRE
WAG0010X
WARNING:
.
.
Never use wheel nuts which are not
provided with your vehicle. Incorrect
wheel nuts or improperly tightened
wheel nuts may cause the wheel to
become loose or come off. This could
cause an accident.
Never use oil or grease on the wheel
studs or nuts. This may cause the wheel
nuts to become loose.
6-6 In case of emergency
The temporary-use spare tire (if
equipped) is designed for emergency
use only.
STOWING DAMAGED
TIRE AND TOOLS
D15A1-1FABB527-F376-4605-B0E8-545A3C1B479F
Clean any mud or dirt from the surface
between the wheel and hub.
2. Carefully put the spare tire on and tighten
the wheel nuts with your fingers. Check
that all the wheel nuts contact the wheel
surface horizontally.
3. Tighten the wheel nuts alternately and
evenly in the sequence illustrated ( - ),
more than 2 times with the wheel nut
wrench, until they are tight.
4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire
touches the ground.
5. Tighten the wheel nuts securely, with the
wheel nut wrench, in the sequence illustrated.
6. Lower the vehicle completely.
Tighten the wheel nuts to the specified
torque with a torque wrench as soon as
possible.
Wheel nut tightening torque:
110 N·m (11 kg-m, 81 ft-lb)
Be sure that the tire, jack and tools used are
properly stored after use. Such items can
become dangerous projectiles in an accident
or sudden stop.
WARNING:
1.
2.
Securely store the jack, tools in the storage
area.
Close the back door.
Storing tire onGUID-EE171771-D8B4-4D9B-8163-5A5497739151
spare tire hanger
To store the tire on the spare tire hanger,
perform the following procedures.
1. Place the tire in the spare tire hanger and
slightly push it toward the vehicle’s front so
that it is properly sitting within the spare
tire hanger.
The wheel nuts must be kept tightened to
specification at all times. It is recommended
that the wheel nuts be tightened to specification at each lubrication interval.
WAG0015X
WARNING:
Retighten the wheel nuts when the vehicle
has been driven for 1,000 km (600 miles)
(also in cases of a flat tire, etc.).
2.
Lift the spare tire hanger
the hook .
and hang it to
JUMP STARTING
D15A1-CA3FC571-40A7-4E0F-A6D6-412F4AB6C190
WARNING:
.
.
WAG0016X
.
3.
Push up the hanger and turn the bolt
clockwise by hand to raise the spare tire
hanger.
clockwise using the
4. Tighten the bolt
wheel nut wrench until the spare tire
hanger is stored securely.
Spare tire hanger bolt tightening torque:
64 to 86 N·m (6.5 to 8.8 kg-m, 47 to 64 ft-lb)
.
.
.
.
.
Incorrect jump starting can lead to a
battery explosion. The battery explosion
may result in severe injury or death. It
may also result in damage to the vehicle.
Be sure to follow the instructions in this
section.
Explosive hydrogen gas is always present
in the vicinity of the battery. Keep all
sparks and flames away from the battery.
Always wear suitable eye protection and
remove rings, bracelets, and any other
jewelry whenever working on or near a
battery.
Never lean over the battery while jump
starting.
Never allow battery fluid to come into
contact with eyes, skin, clothes or the
vehicle’s painted surfaces. Battery fluid is
a corrosive sulfuric acid which can cause
severe burns. If the fluid comes into
contact with anything, immediately flush
the contacted area with plenty of water.
Keep the battery out of the reach of
children.
The booster battery must be rated at 12
volts. Use of an incorrectly rated battery
will damage your vehicle.
Never attempt to jump start a frozen
battery. It could explode and cause serious injury.
In case of emergency
6-7
WAG0024X
H4K engine models
6-8 In case of emergency
6.
7.
8.
Remove the vent caps, if equipped, on the
battery.
Cover the battery with a firmly wrung out
moist cloth to reduce the hazard of an
explosion.
Connect the jumper cables in the sequence
as illustrated ( , , , ).
CAUTION:
.
.
.
Always connect positive + to positive +
and negative 7 to body ground, NOT to
the battery’s negative 7.
Be sure that the jumper cables do not
touch moving parts in the engine compartment.
Be sure that the jumper cable’s clamps do
not contact any other metal.
9.
WAG0025X
K9K engine models
1.
If the booster battery is in another vehicle
, position the two vehicles
and
to
bring the batteries into close proximity to
each other.
CAUTION:
If the battery of vehicle
equipped with the
Intelligent Key system is discharged, the
ignition switch cannot be moved from the
“LOCK” position and, if the steering lock is
engaged, the steering wheel cannot be
moved. Connect the jumper cables to the
before turning the ignition
booster vehicle
switch and disengaging the steering lock.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Apply the parking brake.
Move the shift lever to the “N” (Neutral)
position.
Switch off all unnecessary electrical systems (headlights, heater, air conditioner,
etc.).
Place the ignition switch in the “LOCK”
position.
Start the engine of the booster vehicle
and let it run for a few minutes.
10. Depress the accelerator pedal of the boosat about 2,000 rpm.
ter vehicle
11. Start the engine of the jumped vehicle
in
the normal manner.
CAUTION:
Never keep the starter motor engaged for
more than 10 seconds. If the engine does not
start right away, wait at least 10 seconds
before trying again.
12. After the engine is started, carefully disconnect the jumper cables in the opposite
sequence from that illustrated ( , , , ).
13. Remove and dispose of the cloth as it may
be contaminated with corrosive acid.
In case of emergency
6-9
PUSH STARTING
IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS
D15A1-9D920AF3-899E-4949-B9DE-B9DA38EBCD0D
14. Replace the vent caps, if removed.
D15A1-6FF3F0CC-8B6E-46AC-926D-3EB9C863FE4D
Do not attempt to start the engine by pushing
the vehicle.
CAUTION:
.
.
.
Manual Transmission (MT) model cannot
be started by pushing. Attempting to do
so may cause damage to the transmission.
Three-way catalyst equipped model
should not be started by pushing. Attempting to do so may cause damage to
the catalyst.
Never try to start the engine by towing.
When the engine starts, the forward
surge could cause the vehicle to collide
with the towing vehicle.
WARNING:
.
.
.
.
.
.
Never continue driving if your vehicle
overheats. Doing so could cause a vehicle
fire.
Never open the hood if steam is coming
out.
Never remove the radiator or coolant
reservoir cap while the engine is hot. If
the radiator or coolant reservoir cap is
removed when the engine is hot, pressurized hot water will spurt out and
possibly cause burning, scalding or serious injury.
If steam or coolant is coming from the
engine, stand clear of the vehicle to
prevent getting burned.
The engine cooling fan will start at anytime when the coolant temperature exceeds preset degrees.
Be careful not to allow your hands, hair,
jewelry or clothing to come into contact
with, or to get caught in the cooling fan or
drive belts.
If your vehicle is overheating (indicated by the
high temperature indicator), or if you feel a lack
of engine power, detect unusual noise, etc.,
take the following steps:
1. Safely move the vehicle off the road away
from traffic.
2. Turn on the hazard indicator flasher lights.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Move the shift lever to the “N” (Neutral)
position.
DO NOT STOP THE ENGINE.
6-10
In case of emergency
TOWING YOUR VEHICLE
D15A1-69740B53-3C7A-41B9-8F95-F0E7FA4B4FAC
5.
6.
Open all the windows.
Turn off the air conditioner. Move the
temperature control to maximum hot and
the fan control to high speed.
7. Get out from the vehicle.
8. Visually inspect and listen for steam or
coolant escaping from the radiator before
opening the hood. Wait until no steam or
coolant can be seen before proceeding.
9. Open the engine hood.
10. Visually inspect if the cooling fan is running.
11. Visually inspect the radiator and radiator
hoses for leakage.
If the cooling fan is not running or the
coolant is leaking, stop the engine.
12. After the engine cools down, check the
coolant level in the reservoir with the
engine running. Do not open the radiator
cap.
13. Add coolant to the reservoir if necessary.
Have your vehicle inspected/repaired at a
NISSAN dealer.
When towing your vehicle, local regulations for
towing must be followed. Incorrect towing
equipment could damage your vehicle. To
assure proper towing and to prevent accidental damage to your vehicle, NISSAN recommends that you have professional road
assistance personnel tow your vehicle. It is
advisable to have the professional road assistant carefully read the following precautions.
TOWING PRECAUTIONS
D15A1-8DAF4418-6E64-4D27-BC10-07511BA91A9C
.
.
.
Be sure that the transmission, steering
system, and drivetrain are in working condition before towing. If any units are
damaged, the vehicle must be towed using
a dolly or flatbed tow truck.
NISSAN recommends that your vehicle be
towed with the driving (front) wheels off
the ground.
Always attach safety chains before towing.
In case of emergency
6-11
.
TOWING RECOMMENDED BY NISSAN
D15A1-9EF33807-9D9B-4011-8B78-623D89036CBF
Two-Wheel Drive (2WD) models
D15A1-3646D4FA-EFB8-4F09-A7F3-936517691C4D
JVE0020X
NISSAN recommends that towing dollies be
used under the front wheels when towing your
vehicle or the vehicle be placed on a flatbed
tow truck as illustrated.
Front wheels on
the ground:
GUID-1295725F-1AF3-4AA4-9B71-2C636F81A13F
1. Place the ignition switch to stop the engine.
2. Secure the steering wheel in a straight
ahead position with rope or a similar
device.
3. Move the shift lever to the “N” (Neutral)
position.
4. Release the parking brake.
5. Attach safety chains whenever towing.
Rear wheels onGUID-1295725F-1AF3-4AA4-9B71-2C636F81A13F
the ground:
1. Place the ignition switch to stop the engine.
2. Secure the steering wheel in a straightahead position with rope or a similar
device.
3. Move the shift lever to the “N” (Neutral)
position.
6-12 In case of emergency
4.
5.
Release the parking brake.
Attach safety chains whenever towing.
All four wheels GUID-1295725F-1AF3-4AA4-9B71-2C636F81A13F
on the ground:
NISSAN recommends that the vehicle be placed
on a flatbed tow truck as illustrated.
1. Place the ignition switch to stop the engine.
2. Move the shift lever to the “N” (Neutral)
position.
3. Release the parking brake.
Do not pull the vehicle using the rear
hook. The rear hook is not designed to
pull the vehicle out in the event that the
vehicle becomes trapped.
In the event that your vehicle’s tires become
trapped in sand, snow, or mud, and the vehicle
is unable to free itself without being pulled, use
the recovery hook.
. Use the recovery hook only. Do not attach
the pulling device to any other part of the
vehicle body. Otherwise, the vehicle body
may be damaged.
. Use the recovery hook to free a vehicle only.
. The recovery hook is under tremendous
stress when used to free a trapped vehicle.
Always pull the pulling device straight out
from the vehicle. Never pull on the recovery
hook at an angle.
Front:
GUID-1295725F-1AF3-4AA4-9B71-2C636F81A13F
Freeing trapped
vehicle
D15A1-E1C53A8A-382D-4409-936A-B6A11CAB094F
WARNING:
.
.
Never allow anyone to stand near the
towing line during the pulling operation.
Never spin the tires at high speed. This
could cause them to explode and result in
serious injury. Parts of the vehicle could
also overheat and be damaged.
WAG0011X
NISSANCONNECT APPLICATION (if
equipped)
GUID-ECC30BCE-A27F-46D4-BE22-F8AD04226A54
SCE0833
Remove the hook cover from the bumper
with a suitable tool.
Securely install the recovery hook as
illustrated. (The hook is stored with the
jacking tools.)
Make sure that the recovery hook is properly
secured in its storage area after use.
Rear:
GUID-1295725F-1AF3-4AA4-9B71-2C636F81A13F
SCE0833
Remove the hook cover from the bumper
with a suitable tool.
Securely install the recovery hook as
illustrated. (The hook is stored with the
jacking tools.)
Make sure that the recovery hook is properly
secured in its storage area after use.
NissanConnect helps you to get connected to
your vehicle through a smartphone application.
This app is available for Android, Windows and
iOS devices. The steps to be followed for
Android device are given for reference.
Install procedure:
Step 1.
Download the NissanConnect app from
the app store of your perspective mobile
platform.
Step 2.
Contact your nearest Nissan dealers to
activate NissanConnect.
Step 3.
Also access customer portal at Nissanconnect.in for more info and customize
user settings.
For further details visit: https://www.nissan.in/
nissanconnect.html
Nissan Connect application contains DEMO
videos / Quick Reference Videos (QRV) for
Customer’s easy understanding of its Features.
During emergency, we have an SOS button in
the NissanConnect application which triggers
the Emergency message/Call to the pre-registered number/email. The number/mail id can
be Customer specific.
NOTE:
No support in case connecting OBD dongle or
other device.
WAG0012X
In case of emergency
6-13
MEMO
6-14 In case of emergency
7 Appearance and care
Cleaning exterior ...........................................................................................
....
Washing ........................................................................................................
....
Removing spots .....................................................................................
....
Waxing ............................................................................................................
....
Glass ................................................................................................................
....
Underbody ..................................................................................................
....
Wheels ............................................................................................................
....
Aluminum alloy wheels ....................................................................
....
Chrome parts ...........................................................................................
....
7-2
7-2
7-2
7-2
7-2
7-3
7-3
7-3
7-3
Cleaning interior ...........................................................................................
....
Air fresheners ........................................................................................
....
Floor mats ................................................................................................
....
Glass .............................................................................................................
....
Seat belts ..................................................................................................
....
Corrosion protection ................................................................................
....
Most common factors contributing to
vehicle corrosion ................................................................................
....
Environmental factors influence rate
of corrosion ............................................................................................
....
To protect your vehicle from corrosion ..........................
....
7-3
7-4
7-4
7-4
7-4
7-5
7-5
7-5
7-5
CLEANING EXTERIOR
D15A1-7CB8924B-F9C4-429D-ADB0-BC9E02AD6934
In order to maintain the appearance of your
vehicle, it is important to take proper care of it.
Whenever possible, park your vehicle inside a
garage or in a covered area to minimize the
chances of damaging the paint surface of your
vehicle.
When it is necessary to park outside, park in a
shady area or protect the vehicle with a body
cover. Be careful not to scratch the paint
surface when putting on or removing the
body cover.
WASHING
D15A1-9F6B826F-F269-47EF-A485-4DEB2E726776
In the following instances, wash your vehicle as
soon as possible to protect the paint surface:
. After a rainfall, which may cause the paint
surface damage from acid rain.
. After driving on coastal roads, which may
cause rusting from the sea breeze.
. When contaminants such as soot, bird
droppings, tree sap, metal particles or bugs
get on the paint surface.
. When dust or mud builds up on the paint
surface.
1. Wash the vehicle surface with a wet sponge
and plenty of water.
2. Clean the vehicle surface gently and thoroughly using a mild soap, a special vehicle
soap or a general purpose dishwashing
liquid mixed with clean, lukewarm (never
hot) water.
CAUTION:
.
Do not wash the vehicle with strong
household soap, strong chemical detergents, gasoline or solvents.
7-2 Appearance and care
.
.
Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight
or while the vehicle body is hot, as the
paint surface may become waterspotted.
Avoid using tight-napped or rough cloths,
such as washing mitts. Care must be
taken when removing caked-on dirt or
other foreign substances so the paint
surface is not scratched or damaged.
Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with plenty of
clean water.
4. Use a dampened chamois to dry the paint
surface and avoid leaving water spots.
When washing the vehicle, take care of the
following:
. Inside flanges, joints and folds on the doors,
hatches and hood are particularly vulnerable to the effects of road salt. Therefore,
these areas must be cleaned regularly.
. Be sure that the drain holes in the lower
edge of the doors are not clogged.
. Spray water to the underbody and in the
wheel wells to loosen the dirt and/or wash
away road salt.
WAXING
3.
REMOVING SPOTS
D15A1-717DD9B1-5C26-44D0-A76C-3E699BC0B183
Remove tar and oil spots, industrial dust,
insects, and tree sap as quickly as possible
from the paint surface to avoid lasting damage
or staining. Special cleaning products are
available at a NISSAN dealer or any automotive
accessory store.
D15A1-FE346184-0DE5-4B3B-8AEC-E842874E9E91
Regular waxing protects the paint surface and
helps maintain a new vehicle appearance.
After waxing, polishing is recommended to
remove built-up residue and to avoid a weathered appearance.
A NISSAN dealer can assist you in choosing the
appropriate waxing products.
CAUTION:
.
.
.
Wash your vehicle thoroughly and completely before applying wax to the paint
surface.
Always follow the manufacturer’s instructions supplied with the wax.
Do not use a wax containing any abrasives, cutting compounds or cleaners
that may damage the vehicle finish.
Machine compounding or aggressive polishing
on a base coat/clear coat paint finish may dull
the finish or leave swirl marks.
GLASS
D15A1-F15B5E23-8886-4DD3-AB87-39274A06846B
Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and dust
film from the glass surfaces. It is normal for
glass to become coated with a film after the
vehicle is parked in the hot sun. Glass cleaner
and a soft cloth will easily remove this film.
CLEANING INTERIOR
D15A1-E4C0088E-D11B-428E-9FC8-BCF4B6D9231F
UNDERBODYD15A1-89AF2A41-6CEA-44E0-80F8-1B7040436EE7
In areas where road salt is used in the winter, it
is necessary to clean the vehicle’s underbody
regularly in order to prevent dirt and salt from
building up and causing the acceleration of
corrosion on the underbody and suspension.
Before the winter and again in the spring, the
underseal must be checked and, if necessary,
re-treated.
WHEELS
.
.
.
.
.
D15A1-2390DE90-52B6-4CC6-847A-7DC2BA9E7940
Wash the wheels when washing the vehicle
to maintain their appearance.
Clean the inner side of the wheels when the
wheel is changed or the underside of the
vehicle is washed.
Do not use abrasive cleaners when washing the wheels.
Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents or
corrosion. This may cause loss of pressure
or damage the tire bead.
NISSAN recommends that the road wheels
be waxed to protect against road salt in
areas where it is used during winter.
ALUMINUM ALLOY
WHEELS
D15A1-1A54676E-FE36-464E-B750-86EA828DF50B
Wash the wheels regularly with a sponge
dampened in a mild soap solution, especially
during winter in areas where road salt is used.
The salt residue from road salt could discolor
the wheels if it is not washed off regularly.
.
.
Do not apply wheel cleaners to the
wheels when they are hot. The wheel
temperature should be the same as
ambient temperature.
Rinse the wheel to completely remove
the cleaner within 15 minutes after the
cleaner is applied.
CHROME PARTS
D15A1-A28C0751-4F80-44DA-8C22-EFE406D2DF5D
Clean all chrome parts regularly with a nonabrasive chrome polish to maintain the finish.
Occasionally remove loose dust from the interior trim, plastic parts and seats using a vacuum
cleaner or soft bristled brush. Wipe the vinyl
and leather surfaces with a clean, soft cloth
dampened in mild soap solution, then wipe
clean with a dry, soft cloth.
Regular care and cleaning is required in order
to maintain the appearance of the leather.
Before using any fabric protector, read the
manufacturer’s recommendations. Some fabric
protectors contain chemicals that may stain or
bleach the seat material.
Use a soft cloth dampened only with water to
clean the meter and gauge lens covers.
CAUTION:
.
.
.
.
Never use benzine, thinner or any similar
material.
Small dirt particles can be abrasive and
damaging to leather surfaces and should
be removed promptly. Do not use saddle
soap, car waxes, polishes, oils, cleaning
fluids, solvents, detergents or ammoniabased cleaners as they damage the
leather natural finish.
Never use fabric protectors unless recommended by the manufacturer.
Do not use glass or plastic cleaner on
meter or gauge lens covers. It may
damage the lens covers.
CAUTION:
Follow the directions below to avoid staining
or discoloring the wheels:
.
Do not use a cleaner that uses strong acid
or alkali contents to clean the wheels.
Appearance and care
7-3
AIR FRESHENERS
D15A1-C7C413A1-F012-4742-91F0-57403F08B7AB
Most air fresheners use a solvent that could
affect the vehicle interior. If you use an air
freshener, take the following precautions:
. Hanging-type air fresheners can cause
permanent discoloration when they contact vehicle interior surfaces. Place the air
freshener in a location that allows it to
hang free and not contact an interior
surface.
. Liquid-type air fresheners typically clip on
the vents. These products can cause immediate damage and discoloration when
spilled on interior surfaces.
Carefully read and follow the manufacturer’s
instructions before using air fresheners.
FLOOR MATS
D15A1-FEB53C0F-2B13-4DA5-9FFC-A4B230889197
The use of genuine NISSAN floor mats (if
equipped) can extend the life of your vehicle
carpet and make it easier to clean the interior.
Regardless of what mats are used, be sure they
are fitted for your vehicle and are properly
positioned in the foot well to prevent interference with pedal operation. Mats should be
maintained with regular cleaning and replaced
if they become excessively worn.
Floor mat positioning
aid (driver’s side)
D15A1-0F3306F1-4AE6-4165-B183-646B6719990D
WARNING:
.
.
WAH0001X
This vehicle includes floor mat brackets to act
as a floor mat positioning aid. NISSAN floor
mats have been specially designed for your
vehicle model.
Position the mat by placing the floor mat
bracket hook through the floor mat grommet
hole while centering the mat in the foot area.
Periodically check that the mats are properly
positioned.
GLASS
D15A1-47B68639-6537-4853-8BB4-A5E527CF1D3C
Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and dust
film from the glass surfaces. It is normal for
glass to become coated with a film after the
vehicle is parked in the hot sun. Glass cleaner
and a soft cloth will easily remove this film.
CAUTION:
When cleaning the inside of the windows, do
not use sharp-edged tools, abrasive cleaners
or chlorine-based disinfectant cleaners. They
could damage the electrical conductors, such
as rear window defogger elements.
7-4 Appearance and care
SEAT BELTSD15A1-30F2EF69-84CD-4146-8EDF-44903B81C08C
Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up in
the retractor.
Never use bleach, dye or chemical solvents to clean the seat belts, since these
materials may severely weaken the seat
belt webbing.
The seat belts can be cleaned by wiping them
with a sponge dampened in a mild soap
solution.
Allow the belts to dry completely in the shade
before using them. (See “Seat belts” (P.1-6).)
CORROSION PROTECTION
D15A1-B2B2F40E-6DE1-431F-BFF7-7AD3044C6450
MOST COMMON FACTORS CONTRIBUTING TO D15A1-55FEEED2-A1C3-4B27-A550-4BBB7C8BF9E6
VEHICLE CORROSION
TO PROTECT YOUR VEHICLE FROM
CORROSION D15A1-77A08170-1FEB-45EA-BDB9-316B61A611C0
.
The accumulation of moisture-retaining
dirt and debris in body panel sections,
cavities, and other areas.
Damage to the paint surface and other
protective coatings caused by gravel and
stone chips or minor traffic accidents.
.
ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS INFLUENCE
RATE OF CORROSION
D15A1-4D36D387-64CA-4EA3-9221-169D30C6EC41
.
.
.
Moisture
.
D15A1-6F6421FF-23F2-4A51-AC98-F8467A5769E8
The accumulation of sand, dirt and water on
the inside floor of the vehicle can accelerate
corrosion. Wet floor carpet/floor mats will not
dry completely inside the vehicle. They should
be removed and completely dried to avoid floor
panel corrosion.
.
Relative humidity
D15A1-C51023EB-DA4E-4AAD-B646-D10FD3960B66
.
Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of high
relative humidity.
TemperatureD15A1-08419ED2-3D09-4F9D-9B36-E32282165145
High temperatures accelerate the rate of
corrosion to those parts which are not well
ventilated.
Corrosion will also be accelerated in areas
where the temperatures stay above freezing.
Air pollutionD15A1-4130D607-9939-412C-83E9-6FC9F3EC20D9
Industrial pollution, the presence of salt in the
air in coastal areas, or heavy road salt use
accelerates the corrosion process. Road salt
also accelerates the disintegration of paint
surfaces.
Wash and wax your vehicle often to keep
the vehicle clean.
Always check for minor damage to the
paint surface and if any exists, repair it as
soon as possible.
Keep the drain holes in the lower edge of
the doors open to avoid water accumulation.
Check the vehicle underbody for accumulation of sand, dirt or salt. If present, wash
with water as soon as possible.
CAUTION:
Never remove dirt, sand or other debris
from the passenger compartment by
washing it out with a hose. Remove dirt
with a vacuum cleaner.
Never allow water or other liquids to
come in contact with electronic components inside the vehicle as this may
damage them.
Chemicals used for road surface deicing are
extremely corrosive. They accelerate corrosion
and deterioration of underbody components
such as the exhaust system, fuel and brake
lines, brake cables, floor pan and fenders.
In the winter, the underbody must be cleaned
periodically.
For additional protection against rust and
corrosion, which may be required in some
areas, consult a NISSAN dealer.
Appearance and care
7-5
MEMO
7-6 Appearance and care
8 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
General maintenance ................................................................................
....
8-2
Explanation of general maintenance items ....................
....
8-2
Maintenance precautions ..............................................................
....
8-3
Maintenance requirements ..................................................................
....
8-4
Scheduled maintenance ..................................................................
....
8-4
General maintenance ........................................................................
....
8-4
Where to go for service ....................................................................
....
8-5
Engine compartment check locations ........................................
....
8-5
H4K engine model ...............................................................................
....
8-5
K9K engine model ................................................................................
....
8-6
Engine cooling system .............................................................................
....
8-6
Checking engine coolant level ...................................................
....
8-7
Changing engine coolant ...............................................................
....
8-7
Engine oil .............................................................................................................
....
8-7
Checking engine oil level ................................................................
....
8-7
Changing engine oil and oil filter .............................................
....
8-8
Drive belt ..........................................................................................................
....
8-10
Spark plugs (gasoline engine model) ........................................
....
8-11
Nickel-tipped spark plugs ............................................................
....
8-11
Brakes .................................................................................................................
....
8-11
Checking parking brake ...............................................................
....
8-11
Checking foot brake pedal .........................................................
....
8-11
Brake booster .......................................................................................
....
8-12
Brake fluid ........................................................................................................
....
8-12
Clutch fluid ......................................................................................................
....
8-13
Power steering fluid ................................................................................
....
8-13
Hydraulic pump electric power steering type ............
....
8-13
Air cleaner filter ..........................................................................................
....
Wiper blades .................................................................................................
....
Windshield wiper blades ............................................................
....
Rear window wiper blade (if equipped) ........................
....
Window washer fluid ..............................................................................
....
Battery ...............................................................................................................
....
Vehicle battery ..................................................................................
....
Remote controller battery .......................................................
....
Intelligent Key battery .................................................................
....
Fuses ...................................................................................................................
....
Engine compartment ...................................................................
....
Passenger compartment ..........................................................
....
Lights ..................................................................................................................
....
Headlights .............................................................................................
....
Exterior lights .....................................................................................
....
Interior lights .......................................................................................
....
Light locations ...................................................................................
....
Tires and wheels .......................................................................................
....
Tire inflation pressure .................................................................
....
Types of tires ......................................................................................
....
Tire chains .............................................................................................
....
Tire rotation .........................................................................................
....
Tire wear and damage ...............................................................
....
Tire age ...................................................................................................
....
Changing tires and wheels .....................................................
....
Wheel balance ....................................................................................
....
Spare tire ...............................................................................................
....
8-14
8-14
8-14
8-15
8-16
8-17
8-17
8-17
8-18
8-19
8-19
8-20
8-21
8-21
8-22
8-22
8-23
8-26
8-26
8-26
8-27
8-27
8-27
8-28
8-28
8-28
8-28
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
D15A1-41D52985-13EF-4849-BE86-06FE33BE5839
During normal day-to-day operation of the
vehicle, general maintenance should be performed regularly as prescribed in this section. If
you detect any unusual sounds, vibrations or
smells, be sure to check for the cause or have a
NISSAN dealer do it promptly. In addition, you
should notify a NISSAN dealer if you think that
repairs are required.
When performing any checks or maintenance
work, closely observe “Maintenance precautions” (P.8-3).
EXPLANATION OF GENERAL MAINTENANCE ITEMS
D15A1-93ED51D4-2178-43ED-8D01-7CDF6194EAC9
Additional information on the following
items with “*” is found later in this section.
Outside vehicle
D15A1-E2608191-CBFF-4F8A-B24A-EDE685639B84
The maintenance items listed here should be
performed from time to time, unless otherwise
specified.
Doors and hood:
GUID-1295725F-1AF3-4AA4-9B71-2C636F81A13F
Check that all doors and the hood operate
smoothly as well as the back door, trunk lid and
hatch. Also make sure that all latches lock
securely. Lubricate if necessary. Make sure that
the secondary latch keeps the hood from
opening when the primary latch is released.
When driving in areas using road salt or other
corrosive materials, check lubrication frequently.
Lights*:
GUID-1295725F-1AF3-4AA4-9B71-2C636F81A13F
Clean the headlights on a regular basis. Make
sure that the headlights, stop lights, tail lights,
turn signal lights, and other lights are all
operating properly and installed securely. Also
check the aim of the headlights.
8-2
Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Tires*:
GUID-1295725F-1AF3-4AA4-9B71-2C636F81A13F
Check the pressure with a gauge often and
always prior to long distance trips. Adjust the
pressure in all tires, including the spare, to the
pressure specified. Check carefully for damage,
cuts or excessive wear.
Tire rotation*: GUID-1295725F-1AF3-4AA4-9B71-2C636F81A13F
In the case that Two-Wheel Drive (2WD) and
front and rear tires are same size; tires should
be rotated every 10,000 km (6,000 miles). Tires
marked with directional indicators can only be
rotated between front and rear. Make sure that
the directional indicators point in the direction
of wheel rotation after the tire rotation is
completed.
In the case that Four-Wheel Drive and All-Wheel
Drive (4WD/AWD) and front and rear tires are
same size; tires should be rotated every 5,000
km (3,000 miles). Tires marked with directional
indicators can only be rotated between front
and rear. Make sure that the directional indicators point in the direction of wheel rotation
after the tire rotation is completed.
In the case that front tires are different size
from rear tires; tires cannot be rotated.
The timing for tire rotation may vary according
to your driving habits and the road surface
conditions.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
transmitter components
(if so equipped):
GUID-1295725F-1AF3-4AA4-9B71-2C636F81A13F
Replace the TPMS transmitter grommet seal,
valve core and cap when the tires are replaced
due to wear or age.
Wheel alignment
and balance:
GUID-1295725F-1AF3-4AA4-9B71-2C636F81A13F
If the vehicle should pull to either side while
driving on a straight and level road, or if you
detect uneven or abnormal tire wear, there
may be a need for wheel alignment. If the
steering wheel or seat vibrates at normal
highway speeds, wheel balancing may be
needed.
Windshield:
GUID-1295725F-1AF3-4AA4-9B71-2C636F81A13F
Clean the windshield on a regular basis. Check
the windshield at least every six months for
cracks or other damage. Repair as necessary.
Wiper blades*: GUID-1295725F-1AF3-4AA4-9B71-2C636F81A13F
Check for cracks or wear if not functioning
correctly. Replace as necessary.
Inside vehicle
D15A1-554469D2-1296-4F49-B7A0-0A8847FB7455
The maintenance items listed here should be
checked on a regular basis, such as when
performing periodic maintenance, cleaning
the vehicle, etc.
Accelerator pedal:
GUID-1295725F-1AF3-4AA4-9B71-2C636F81A13F
Check the pedal for smooth operation and
make sure that the pedal does not catch or
require uneven effort. Keep the floor mats away
from the pedal.
Brake pedal*: GUID-1295725F-1AF3-4AA4-9B71-2C636F81A13F
Check the pedal for smooth operation and
make sure that it is the proper distance from
the floor mat when depressed fully. Check the
brake booster function. Be sure to keep the
floor mats away from the pedal.
Parking brake*:GUID-1295725F-1AF3-4AA4-9B71-2C636F81A13F
Check the parking brake operation regularly.
Check that the lever (if so equipped) or the
pedal (if so equipped) has the proper travel.
Also make sure that the vehicle is held securely
on a fairly steep hill when only the parking
brake is applied.
Battery (except for maintenance free batteries)*:
GUID-1295725F-1AF3-4AA4-9B71-2C636F81A13F
Check the fluid level in each cell. It should be
between the UPPER and LOWER lines. Vehicles
operated in high temperatures or under severe
conditions require frequent checks of the
battery fluid level.
Seat belts:
GUID-1295725F-1AF3-4AA4-9B71-2C636F81A13F
Check that all parts of the seat belt system (for
example, buckles, anchors, adjusters and retractors) operate properly and smoothly, and
are installed securely. Check the belt webbing
for cuts, fraying, wear or damage.
Brake (and clutch)
fluid level(s)*:
GUID-1295725F-1AF3-4AA4-9B71-2C636F81A13F
For Manual Transmission (MT) model; make
sure that the brake and clutch fluid levels are
between the MAX and MIN lines on the reservoirs.
Except for Manual Transmission (MT) model;
make sure that the brake fluid level is between
the MAX and MIN lines on the reservoir.
Steering wheel:GUID-1295725F-1AF3-4AA4-9B71-2C636F81A13F
Check for changes in the steering condition,
such as excessive play, hard steering or strange
noises.
Warning lights and
chimes:
GUID-1295725F-1AF3-4AA4-9B71-2C636F81A13F
Make sure that all warning lights and chimes
are operating properly.
Windshield defogger:
GUID-1295725F-1AF3-4AA4-9B71-2C636F81A13F
Check that the air comes out of the defogger
outlets properly and in good quantity when
operating the heater or air conditioner.
Windshield wiper
and washer*:
GUID-1295725F-1AF3-4AA4-9B71-2C636F81A13F
Check that the wipers and washer operate
properly and that the wipers do not streak.
Under hood D15A1-E5D10961-EA14-4A37-B87E-268783A0FC38
and vehicle
The maintenance items listed here should be
checked periodically (for example, each time
you check the engine oil or refuel).
Power steeringGUID-1295725F-1AF3-4AA4-9B71-2C636F81A13F
fluid level and lines*:
Check the level when the fluid is cold, with the
engine off. Check the lines for proper attachment, leaks, cracks, etc.
Windshield washer
fluid*:
GUID-1295725F-1AF3-4AA4-9B71-2C636F81A13F
Check that there is adequate fluid in the
reservoir.
MAINTENANCE
PRECAUTIONS
D15A1-E469E0D9-6CFF-4A9B-8459-D2B589DFA455
When performing any inspection or maintenance work on your vehicle, always take care to
prevent serious accidental injury to yourself or
damage to the vehicle. The following are
general precautions which should be closely
observed.
Engine coolant GUID-1295725F-1AF3-4AA4-9B71-2C636F81A13F
level*:
Check the coolant level when the engine is
cold. Make sure that the coolant level is
between the MAX and MIN lines on the reservoir.
.
Engine drive belt(s)*:
GUID-1295725F-1AF3-4AA4-9B71-2C636F81A13F
Make sure that drive belt(s) is not frayed, worn,
cracked or oily.
.
Engine oil level*:
GUID-1295725F-1AF3-4AA4-9B71-2C636F81A13F
Check the level after parking the vehicle (on a
level ground) and turning off the engine.
.
Fluid leaks:
GUID-1295725F-1AF3-4AA4-9B71-2C636F81A13F
Check under the vehicle for fuel, oil, water or
other fluid leaks after the vehicle has been
parked for a while. Water dripping from the air
conditioner after use is normal. If you should
notice any leaks or if fuel fumes are evident,
check for cause and have it corrected immediately.
WARNING:
.
.
Park the vehicle on a level surface, apply
the parking brake securely and block the
wheels to prevent the vehicle from moving. Move the shift lever to the “N”
(Neutral) position.
Be sure the ignition switch is in the “OFF”
or “LOCK” position when performing any
parts replacement or repairs.
Do not work under the hood while the
engine is hot. Always turn off the engine
and wait until it cools down.
If you must work with the engine running,
keep your hands, clothing, hair and tools
away from moving fans, belts and any
other moving parts.
It is advisable to secure or remove any
loose clothing and any jewelry, such as
rings, watches, etc. before working on
your vehicle.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself
8-3
MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS
D15A1-59942846-7166-4224-BF7F-2B18FC065A82
If you must run the engine in an enclosed
space such as a garage, be sure there is
proper ventilation for exhaust gases to
escape.
. Never get under the vehicle while it is
supported by a jack.
. Keep smoking materials, flame and
sparks away from fuel and the battery.
. Never connect or disconnect either the
battery or any transistorized component
connector while the ignition switch is in
the “ON” position.
. On gasoline engine models with the
Multiport Fuel Injection (MFI) system, the
fuel filter and fuel lines should be serviced by a NISSAN dealer because the fuel
lines are under high pressure even when
the engine is turned off.
. Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic engine cooling fan. It may come on
at any time without warning, even if the
ignition switch is in the “OFF” or “LOCK”
position and the engine is not running. To
avoid injury, always disconnect the negative battery cable before working near
the fan.
. Always wear eye protection whenever
you work on your vehicle.
. Never leave the engine or transmission
related component harness connector
disconnected while the ignition switch is
in the “ON” position.
. Avoid direct contact with used engine oil
and coolant. Improperly disposed engine
oil, engine coolant, and/or other vehicle
fluids can hurt the environment. Always
conform to local regulations for disposal
of vehicle fluids.
This “8. Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section
.
8-4
Maintenance and do-it-yourself
provides instructions regarding only those
items which are relatively easy for an owner
to perform.
You should be aware that incomplete or
improper servicing may result in operating
difficulties or excessive emissions, and could
affect your warranty coverage. If in doubt
about any servicing, have it done by a NISSAN
dealer.
Some day-to-day and regular maintenance is
essential to maintain your vehicle’s good mechanical condition, as well as its emission and
engine performance.
It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure that
the specified maintenance, as well as general
maintenance, is performed.
As the vehicle owner, you are the only one who
can ensure that your vehicle receives the
proper maintenance care.
SCHEDULED D15A1-81E26708-DAB3-41AE-A752-C19E294DF186
MAINTENANCE
For your convenience, the required scheduled
maintenance items are described and listed in
a separate Warranty Information and Maintenance booklet. You must refer to that booklet
to ensure that necessary maintenance is performed on your vehicle at regular intervals.
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
D15A1-1163C165-40B6-4B3A-B9E9-F57588E6EADF
General maintenance includes those items
which should be checked during normal dayto-day operation of the vehicle. They are
essential if your vehicle is to continue to
operate properly. It is your responsibility to
perform these procedures regularly as prescribed.
Performing general maintenance checks requires minimal mechanical skill and only a few
general automotive tools.
These checks or inspections can be done by
yourself, a qualified technician, or if you prefer,
your NISSAN dealer.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK LOCATIONS
D15A1-66B2162B-2CD7-470F-9DAD-BD99AF54AF2C
WHERE TO D15A1-8553854F-873D-40F5-B030-38E68B98CDBD
GO FOR SERVICE
H4K ENGINE MODEL
GUID-FF448DA5-84B7-4D58-9CF0-29A21C33D30D
If maintenance service is required or your
vehicle appears to malfunction, have the systems checked and tuned by an authorized
NISSAN dealer.
WAA0027X
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Engine coolant reservoir
Brake and clutch fluid reservoir
Engine oil filler cap
Air cleaner
Window washer fluid reservoir
Fuse/fusible link holders
Engine drive belt location
Engine oil dipstick
9.
10.
Battery
Power steering fluid reservoir
Maintenance and do-it-yourself
8-5
ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM
D15A1-431BB6E1-F915-4C1F-8B9B-5A5747425D98
K9K ENGINE MODEL
WARNING:
GUID-11AA7F6D-6411-4E10-A258-0B8BD16158FD
.
.
Never remove the radiator or coolant
reservoir cap when the engine is hot.
Serious burns could be caused by highpressure fluid escaping from the radiator.
Wait until the engine and radiator cool
down.
Engine coolant is poisonous and should
be stored carefully in marked containers
out of the reach of children.
The engine cooling system is filled at the
factory with a high-quality, year-round, antifreeze coolant solution. The anti-freeze solution contains rust and corrosion inhibitors,
therefore additional cooling system additives
are not necessary.
CAUTION:
.
.
WAA0026X
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Engine coolant reservoir
Brake and clutch fluid reservoir
Air cleaner
Window washer fluid reservoir
Engine drive belt location
Engine oil filler cap/Engine oil dipstick
Battery
Power steering fluid reservoir
Fuse/fusible link holders
8-6 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Never use any cooling system additives
such as radiator sealer. Additives may
clog the cooling system and cause damage to the engine, transmission and/or
cooling system.
When adding or replacing coolant, be
sure to use only Genuine NISSAN Engine
Coolant or equivalent in its quality with
the proper mixture ratio. Examples of the
mixture ratio of coolant and water are
shown in the following table:
ENGINE OIL
For K9K engine
model
D15A1-431BB6E1-F915-4C1F-8B9B-5A5747425D98
Outside
temperature
down to
°F
°C
Engine
coolant
(concentrated)
Demineralized or distilled water
−15
5
30%
70%
−35
−30
50%
50%
For H4K engine
model
D15A1-431BB6E1-F915-4C1F-8B9B-5A5747425D98
Outside
temperature
down to
°F
°C
Engine
coolant
(concentrated)
Demineralized or distilled water
−23
−9
40%
60%
−35
−30
50%
50%
The use of other types of coolant solutions may
damage the engine cooling system.
The radiator is equipped with a pressure cap.
To prevent engine damage, use only a Genuine
NISSAN radiator cap or its equivalent when
replacement is required.
CHECKING D15A1-D03A92CA-BED2-48B1-BCC9-483FEBCF0743
ENGINE COOLANT LEVEL
the engine is cold. If the coolant level is below
MIN level , add coolant up to the MAX level .
Tighten the cap securely after adding engine
coolant.
If the cooling system frequently requires
coolant, have it checked by a NISSAN dealer.
D15A1-B120ADA3-D03C-49B1-B529-7A274BD909D0
CHECKING D15A1-7FB3D707-060C-4B57-BBE7-3BDD80ACE305
ENGINE OIL LEVEL
CHANGING ENGINE
COOLANT
D15A1-48C2A2F9-80B7-4B82-8607-B4C24D1C4773
Contact a NISSAN dealer if replacement is
required.
Major engine cooling system repair should be
performed by a NISSAN dealer. The service
procedures can be found in the appropriate
NISSAN Service Manual.
Improper servicing can result in reduced heater
performance and engine overheating.
SDI1993
H4K engine
WARNING:
.
.
.
.
To avoid being scalded, never change the
coolant when the engine is hot.
Never remove the radiator or coolant
reservoir cap when the engine is hot.
Serious burns could be caused by high
pressure fluid escaping from the radiator.
Avoid direct skin contact with used coolant. If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as soon
as possible.
Keep coolant out of the reach of children
and pets.
WAI0098X
K9K engine
1.
2.
Engine coolant must be disposed of properly.
Check your local regulations.
3.
4.
WAI0005X
Park the vehicle on a level surface and
apply the parking brake.
Start the engine and warm it up until the
engine temperature reaches the normal
operating temperature (approximately 5
minutes).
Stop the engine.
Wait at least 10 minutes for the engine oil to
drain back to the oil pan.
Check the coolant level in the reservoir when
Maintenance and do-it-yourself
8-7
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean.
For K9K engine, the engine oil dipstick is
attached to the engine oil filler cap. Open
the engine oil filler cap to remove the
dipstick.
Reinsert the dipstick all the way.
Remove the dipstick and check the oil level.
It should be within the range .
If the oil level is below , remove the oil filler
cap and pour the recommended oil into the
opening. Do not overfill .
When filling the engine oil, do not remove
the dipstick (except for K9K engine).
Recheck the oil level with the dipstick.
It is normal to add some oil between oil
maintenance intervals or during the
break-in period, depending on the severity of operating conditions.
CAUTION:
The oil level should be checked regularly.
Operating your vehicle with an insufficient
amount of oil can damage the engine, and
such damage is not covered by the warranty.
.
.
.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Prolonged and repeated contact with
used engine oil may cause skin cancer.
Avoid direct skin contact with used oil. If
contacted, wash thoroughly with soap or
hand cleaner and plenty of water as soon
as possible.
Store used engine oil in marked containers out of the reach of children.
Engine oil and
filter (H4K engine model)
D15A1-5F013F78-EE34-4C18-BFFB-79938408A1A2
Park the vehicle on a level surface and
apply the parking brake.
Start the engine and warm it up until the
engine temperature reaches the normal
operating temperature (approximately 5
minutes).
Stop the engine.
Wait at least 10 minutes for the engine oil to
drain back to the oil pan.
Raise and support the vehicle using a
suitable floor jack and safety jack stands.
. Place the safety jack stands under the
vehicle jack-up points.
. A suitable adapter should be attached to
the jack stand saddle.
WAI0037X
CHANGING ENGINE
OIL AND OIL FILTER
D15A1-BFC63F3B-A179-42CF-BDF1-B43386889AD1
WARNING:
.
.
Used oil must be disposed of properly.
Never pour or dump oil into the ground,
canals, rivers, etc. It should be disposed
of at proper waste facilities. NISSAN
recommends having your oil changed by
a NISSAN dealer.
Be careful not to burn yourself, as the
engine oil may be hot.
8-8 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
1.
2.
3.
Oil filler cap
Oil drain plug
Oil filter
Place a large drain pan under the drain
plug.
Remove the drain plug
with a wrench.
Remove the oil filler cap
and completely
drain the oil.
If the oil filter is to be changed, remove and
replace it at this time.
CAUTION:
Waste oil must be disposed of properly.
Check your local regulations.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Loosen the oil filter
with an oil filter
wrench.
Remove the oil filter by turning it by hand.
Wipe the engine oil filter mounting surface
with a clean cloth.
Be sure to remove any old gasket remaining on the mounting surface.
Apply new engine oil to the gasket of the
new oil filter.
Screw in the oil filter until a slight resistance
is felt and then tighten an additional 2/3 of
a turn to secure the filter.
Oil filter tightening torque:
15 to 20 N·m
(1.5 to 2.0 kg-m, 11 to 15 ft-lb)
Clean and reinstall the drain plug and new
washer. Securely tighten the drain plug
with a wrench. Do not use excessive force.
Drain plug tightening torque:
29 to 39 N·m
(3.0 to 4.0 kg-m, 22 to 29 ft-lb)
10. Refill the recommended engine oil and
quantity. (See “Recommended fluids/lubricants and capacities” (P.9-2).)
When filling the engine oil, do not remove
the dipstick.
11. Securely install the oil filler cap.
12. Start the engine.
13. Check the drain plug for any sign of
leakage.
14. Dispose of the used oil in the proper
manner. Check your local regulations.
15. Check the engine oil level according to the
proper procedure. (See “Checking engine oil
level” (P.8-7).)
Engine oil and
filter (K9K engine model)
GUID-57FCF953-9DE4-4BE8-9333-2B0BFCFEE258
6.
7.
8.
9.
SDI2472
1.
2.
3.
Oil drain plug
Oil filter
Place a large drain pan under the drain
plug.
Remove the drain plug
with a wrench.
Remove the oil filler cap and completely
drain the oil.
If the oil filter is to be changed, remove and
replace it at this time.
CAUTION:
Waste oil must be disposed of properly.
Check your local regulations.
4.
5.
Wipe the entire oil filter mounting surface
with a clean cloth.
Be sure to remove any old gasket remaining on the mounting surface.
Apply new engine oil to the gasket on the
new oil filter.
Screw in the oil filter until a slight resistance
is felt, and then tighten an additional 3/4 of
a turn to secure the filter.
Oil filter tightening torque:
16 to 20 N·m (1.6 to 2.0 kg-m, 12 to 15 ftlb)
Clean and reinstall the drain plug and new
washer. Securely tighten the drain plug
with a wrench. Do not use excessive force.
Drain plug tightening torque:
16 to 24 N·m (1.6 to 2.4 kg-m, 12 to 18 ftlb)
10. Refill the recommended engine oil and
quantity. (See “Recommended fluids/lubricants and capacities” (P.9-2).)
11. Securely install the oil filler cap.
12. Start the engine.
13. Check the drain plug and the oil filter for
any sign of leakage.
14. Dispose of the used oil in the proper
manner. Check your local regulations.
15. Check the engine oil level according to the
proper procedure. (See “Checking engine oil
level” (P.8-7).)
Loosen the oil filter with an oil filter wrench.
Remove the oil filter
by turning it by
hand.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself
8-9
DRIVE BELT
D15A1-4B37DD34-9FBB-48DA-870F-42F88580E4D7
wear, cuts, fraying or looseness. Check regularly for condition. If the belt is in poor condition
or loose, have it replaced or adjusted by a
NISSAN dealer.
After the operation
D15A1-D31C7ECF-FDA1-4CF1-B6A7-3C0771BADAF0
1.
2.
Lower the vehicle carefully to the ground.
Dispose of waste oil and filter properly.
JVM0882X
H4K engine
1.
2.
3.
4.
!:
Water pump
Alternator
Crankshaft pulley
Air conditioner compressor
Tension checking point
SDI2484
K9K engine
1.
Crankshaft pulley
2.
Drive belt auto-tensioner
3.
Alternator
4.
Air conditioner compressor
Be sure the ignition switch is in the “OFF” or
“LOCK” position.
Visually inspect the belt for signs of unusual
8-10
Maintenance and do-it-yourself
SPARK PLUGS (gasoline engine model)
D15A1-5EDAE568-00C3-4A3B-9C28-6044BCDA9F5A
WARNING:
BRAKES
D15A1-F497334F-4BCC-481C-99C2-53B8238FFDF5
CHECKING PARKING
BRAKE
D15A1-7CB565C4-0463-4945-B007-47D7F7E6B757
Replace the spark plugs according to the
maintenance log shown in a separate maintenance booklet.
If replacement is required, contact a NISSAN
dealer.
With the engine running, check the distance
between the upper surface of the pedal and
the metal floor. If it is out the range listed, see a
NISSAN dealer.
: 65 mm (2.56 in) or more
Depressing force: 490 N (50 kg, 110 lb)
NICKEL-TIPPED
SPARK PLUGS
GUID-9676566D-DB2C-4EA3-BB94-3E033CA051FC
CAUTION:
.
.
Do not reuse the nickel-tipped spark
plugs by cleaning or re-gapping.
Always replace with the recommended
nickel-tipped spark plugs.
WARNING:
See a NISSAN dealer for a brake system
check if the foot brake pedal height does
not return to normal.
Be sure the engine and ignition switch are off
and that the parking brake is applied.
SDI1447A
From the released position, pull the parking
brake lever up slowly and firmly. If the number
of clicks is out of the range listed, see a NISSAN
dealer.
8 to 12 clicks
Pulling force 196 N (20 kg, 44 lb)
CHECKING FOOT
BRAKE PEDAL
D15A1-0E50006C-EEFA-471F-802B-36E5E95578F4
DI1020MR
Self-adjusting
brakes
D15A1-E1391AD9-018D-40D0-9FCB-F7BFE6269D65
Your vehicle is equipped with self-adjusting
brakes. The disc-type brakes self-adjust every
time the foot brake pedal is applied.
Brake pad wear
warning
D15A1-0AD9F709-9ABC-45A7-8A9A-BEC9A3A9E863
The disc brake pads have audible wear warnings. When a brake pad requires replacement, it
will make a high pitched scraping sound when
the vehicle is in motion. This scraping sound
will first occur only when the brake pedal is
depressed. After more wear of the brake pad,
the sound will always be heard even if the
brake pedal is not depressed. Have the brakes
checked as soon as possible if the wear
warning sound is heard.
Under some driving or climate conditions,
occasional brake squeaks, squeals or other
noises may be heard. Occasional brake noise
during light to moderate stops is normal and
does not affect the function or performance of
the brake system.
Proper brake inspection intervals should be
followed. For additional information, see a
separate maintenance booklet.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself
8-11
BRAKE FLUID
D15A1-7B48C533-E5D3-486B-BF9A-FB22BA267E0A
BRAKE BOOSTER
D15A1-79F46EFD-F47C-47DD-98FB-536B7D3C7D06
Check the brake booster function as follows:
1. With the engine off, depress and release the
foot brake pedal several times. When the
brake pedal movement (distance of travel)
remains the same from one pedal application to the next, continue on to the next
step.
2. While depressing the foot brake pedal, start
the engine. The pedal height should drop a
little.
3. With the foot brake pedal depressed, stop
the engine. Keep the pedal depressed for
about 30 seconds. The pedal height should
not change.
4. Run the engine for 1 minute without
depressing the foot brake pedal, then turn
it off. Depress the foot brake pedal several
times. The pedal travel distance will decrease gradually with each depression as
the vacuum is released from the booster.
If the brakes do not operate properly, have the
brakes checked by a NISSAN dealer.
NISSAN dealer.
WARNING:
.
.
.
Use only new fluid from a sealed container. Old, inferior, or contaminated fluid
may damage the brake system. The use
of improper fluids can damage the brake
system and affect the vehicle’s stopping
ability.
Clean the filler cap before removing.
Brake fluid is poisonous and should be
stored carefully in marked containers out
of the reach of children.
CAUTION:
Do not spill the fluid on painted surfaces. This
will damage the paint. If fluid is spilled, wash
it off with plenty of water immediately.
WAI0004X
Check the fluid level in the reservoir. If the fluid
is below the MIN line , the brake warning light
will illuminate. Add fluid up to the MAX line .
(For recommended types of fluid, see “Recommended fluids/lubricants and capacities” (P.92).)
If the fluid must be added frequently, the
system should be thoroughly checked by a
8-12 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
CLUTCH FLUID
POWER STEERING FLUID
D15A1-49CB670B-6D6F-47EA-A1B5-33D3AF6563F7
WARNING:
.
.
.
GUID-25AEE225-E80B-4B72-902B-4BF5AD28D206
system should be thoroughly checked by a
NISSAN dealer.
Use only new fluid from a sealed container. Old, inferior, or contaminated fluid
may damage the clutch system. The use
of improper fluids can damage the clutch
system.
Clean the filler cap before removing.
Clutch fluid is poisonous and should be
stored carefully in marked containers out
of the reach of children.
HYDRAULIC PUMP ELECTRIC POWER
STEERING TYPE
GUID-685DB8EB-8CC3-4493-9C73-B7A2027C6A7B
CAUTION:
Do not spill the clutch fluid on painted
surfaces. This will damage the paint. If clutch
fluid is spilled, wash it off with plenty of water
immediately.
WAI0033X
WARNING:
Power steering fluid is poisonous and should
be stored carefully in marked containers out
of the reach of children.
Check the fluid level in the reservoir. The fluid
level should be checked when the fluid is cold
at fluid temperatures of 0 to 30°C (32 to 86°F).
The fluid level should be between
MAXI and
MINI line.
If it is necessary to add fluid, contact a NISSAN
dealer.
WAI0004X
Check the fluid level in the reservoir. The brake
fluid reservoir is shared with the clutch system
for manual transmissions. If the fluid is below
the MIN line , add fluid up to the MAX line .
(For recommended types of fluid, see “Recommended fluids/lubricants and capacities” (P.92).)
If the fluid must be added frequently, the clutch
Maintenance and do-it-yourself
8-13
AIR CLEANER FILTER
WIPER BLADES
D15A1-31654BFB-7FD1-4485-8577-CEC93F60D8BD
D15A1-1E87C0C3-19A7-495E-AF48-A77448AE4962
WINDSHIELD
WIPER BLADES
D15A1-CB3E500E-FF38-4A23-B90C-E296B23CFC7A
Cleaning
WAI0007X
WARNING:
Operating the engine with the air cleaner
filter off can cause you or others to be
burned. The air cleaner filter not only cleans
the intake air, it also stops flame if the engine
backfires. If the air cleaner filter is not
installed and the engine backfires, you could
be burned. Never drive with the air cleaner
filter off. Be cautious working on the engine
when the air cleaner filter is off.
To remove the filter from the air cleaner,
release the two retaining clips , then release
the holders at the back of the unit. Pull the unit
upward .
The air cleaner filter element may be cleaned
and reused. Replace the air filter according to
the maintenance log shown in a separate
maintenance booklet.
When replacing the air filter, wipe the inside of
the air cleaner housing and the cover with a
damp cloth.
D15A1-1F848096-A502-4F62-82A8-5DCF0E18CBBB
If the windshield does not become clear after
using the windshield washer or if the wiper
blades chatter when operating the windshield
wipers, wax or other materials may be on the
windshield and/or wiper blades.
Clean the outside of the windshield surface
with a washer solution or mild detergent. Your
windshield is clean if beads do not form when
rinsing with water.
Clean the blade by wiping it with a cloth soaked
in a washer solution or a mild detergent. Rinse
the blade with water. If your windshield is still
not clear after cleaning the blades and using
the wipers, replace the blades.
When a washer
nozzle is clogged:
GUID-F996AD4C-EBB1-43FF-A082-07E8EDDB9F39
See a NISSAN dealer if a washer nozzle is
clogged or any malfunction occurs. Do not
attempt to clean the nozzle using a needle or a
pin. Doing so may damage the nozzle.
Replacing
WAI0047X
2.
3.
D15A1-4462DA2C-A6A5-41D7-9863-C47C1EA48EA4
Replace the wiper blades if they are worn.
1. Hold the wiper arm and blade as shown in
the illustration below.
WAI0097X
4.
5.
8-14 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Slightly push the wiper blade towards upside along the windshield by hand (otherwise, the wiper blades may be scratched
and may cause damage) and lift the wiper
arm.
When lifting the wiper arm, lift the driver’s
side first, then the passenger’s side.
Pull up the release tab , and then move
the wiper blade down the wiper arm to
remove .
Remove the wiper blade.
Insert the new wiper blade onto the wiper
arm until it clicks into place.
CAUTION:
.
.
REAR WINDOW WIPER BLADE (if equipped)
D15A1-CD123B1F-9F52-4282-B7E1-D4BCF29E6754
After wiper blade replacement, return the
wiper arm to its original position. Otherwise the wiper arm or the engine hood
may be scratched and may cause damage when the engine hood is opened.
Worn wiper blades can damage the windshield and impair driver vision.
JVM0883X
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Lift the wiper arm away from the rear
window.
Rotate the wiper blade
perpendicular to
wiper arm.
gently out from
Remove the wiper blade
the wiper arm.
Set the new wiper blade in the wiper arm
in perpendicular position.
in shown direcRotate the wiper blade
tion until it clicks in its place.
CAUTION:
After wiper blade replacement, return the
wiper arm to its original position.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself
8-15
WINDOW WASHER FLUID
D15A1-7DA18CA2-4A81-4DD7-B18F-1925A54D06B4
WAI0006X
WARNING:
Anti-freeze is poisonous and should be
stored carefully in marked containers out of
the reach of children.
Check the fluid level in the window washer fluid
reservoir. If the fluid level is low, add window
washer fluid.
Fill the window washer fluid reservoir periodically. Add a washer solvent to the water for
better cleaning. In the winter season, add a
windshield washer anti-freeze. Follow the manufacturer’s instructions for the mixture ratio.
8-16
Maintenance and do-it-yourself
BATTERY
D15A1-3C02603D-9124-4B12-AABD-F53153752600
SDI1573
VEHICLE BATTERY
D15A1-528D82D4-0CAF-445B-8A89-04F410575D60
MaintenanceD15A1-461628DE-B637-436E-AE97-24A8232C1CB6
free battery
For a maintenance free battery, it is not
required to check the fluid level. However,
NISSAN recommends to check it periodically
at a NISSAN dealer.
Jump starting
D15A1-11D3C5DB-2A0B-4018-86AB-51CB482BFC29
REMOTE CONTROLLER
BATTERY
D15A1-00EE2301-30E3-4755-8C51-422C4840D84C
If jump starting is necessary, see “Jump starting” (P.6-7). If the engine does not start by jump
starting or the battery does not charge, the
battery may have to be replaced. Contact a
NISSAN dealer for replacing the battery.
Battery replacement
D15A1-B32EDD00-B796-4F2B-9D83-8F979594A0DF
CAUTION:
.
.
Be careful not to allow children to swallow the battery and removed parts.
An improperly disposed battery can harm
the environment. Always confirm local
regulations for battery disposal.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself
8-17
.
.
.
When changing batteries, do not let dust
or oil get on the components.
There is danger of explosion if the lithium
battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace
only with the same or equivalent type.
Do not expose the battery to excessive
heat such as sunshine, fire, etc.
lent
. Do not touch the internal circuit and
electric terminals as doing so could
cause a malfunction.
. Make sure that the + side faces the
bottom of the case .
3. Close the lid securely.
4. Operate the buttons to check its operation.
See a NISSAN dealer if you need assistance for
replacement.
INTELLIGENTD15A1-DF12F1B1-793B-42C2-A0D7-466ECF2BE1FA
KEY BATTERY
Battery replacement
D15A1-D30A852B-CF01-4B8D-A3A3-742BD4A4C40D
CAUTION:
.
.
.
.
.
WAI0019X
To replace the battery:
1. Remove the screw .
2. Replace the battery with a new one.
Recommended battery: CR2032 or equiva-
8-18
Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Be careful not to allow children to swallow the battery and removed parts.
An improperly disposed battery can harm
the environment. Always confirm local
regulations for battery disposal.
When changing batteries, do not let dust
or oil get on the components.
There is danger of explosion if lithium
battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace
only with the same or equivalent type.
Do not expose the battery to excessive
heat such as sunshine, fire, etc.
WAD0005X
To replace the battery:
1. Release the lock knob at the side of the
Intelligent Key and remove the mechanical
key.
FUSES
D15A1-9514CEEE-B80E-4951-BA34-D456909231DC
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
D15A1-2566CF78-9D09-4E62-BA83-FDDD99EB8FFB
WAI0034X
CAUTION:
Never use a fuse of a higher or lower
amperage rating than that specified on the
fuse box cover. This could damage the
electrical system or cause a fire.
For checking and/or replacing, see a NISSAN
dealer.
WAI0020X
2.
Remove the battery by pressing on one
side
and by lifting the other side .
3. Replace the battery with a new one.
. Recommended battery: CR2032 or
equivalent
. Do not touch the internal circuit and
electric terminals as doing so could
cause a malfunction.
. Make sure that the 7 side faces the
bottom of the case.
See a NISSAN dealer if you need assistance for
replacement.
Fusible linksGUID-3C206CEE-C934-4CE6-A2B1-98E2D49AC502
If any electrical equipment does not operate
and the fuses are in good condition, check the
fusible links. If any of these fusible links are
melted, replace only with genuine NISSAN
parts.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself
8-19
6.
If the fuse is open , replace it with a new
fuse .
If the new fuse also opens, after installing, have
the electrical system checked, and if necessary
repaired, by a NISSAN dealer.
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
D15A1-A499C18A-796A-46C2-94E3-543D18706760
WAI0032X
CAUTION:
Never use a fuse of a higher or lower
amperage rating than that specified on the
fuse box cover. This could damage the
electrical system or cause a fire.
If any electrical equipment does not operate,
check for an open fuse.
1. Be sure the ignition switch is in the “OFF” or
“LOCK” position.
2. Be sure the headlight switch is in the “OFF”
position.
3. Remove the fuse box cover
placed inside
of the glove box.
4. Locate the fuse that needs to be replaced.
5. Remove the fuse using the fuse puller .
SDI1754
SDI1753
8-20
Maintenance and do-it-yourself
LIGHTS
D15A1-0CA4CBD7-552D-4275-8986-132CF6DFB30B
HEADLIGHTSD15A1-2A2B2E01-3752-481E-ADE0-0FB5E73813F7
CAUTION:
Fog may temporarily form inside the lens of the
exterior lights in the rain or in a car wash. A
temperature difference between the inside and
the outside of the lens causes the fog. This is
not a malfunction. If large drops of water
collect inside the lens, contact a NISSAN dealer.
.
.
LED headlight
D15A1-3D96434B-114C-41D4-87F7-CC9C54751D98
If replacement is required, contact a NISSAN
dealer.
When handling the bulb, do not touch the
glass envelope.
Do not leave the bulb out of the headlight
reflector for a long period of time as dust,
moisture and smoke may enter the headlight body and affect the performance of
the headlight.
Use the same number and wattage as originally installed:
Halogen headlight model
Low-beam bulb: 55W (H7)
High-beam bulb: 65W (H9)
Halogen headlight
bulb
D15A1-2113779C-8969-4483-818E-EFB621042A37
The halogen headlight is a semi-sealed beam
type which uses replaceable headlight (halogen) bulbs. They can be replaced from inside
the engine compartment without removing the
headlight assembly.
LED headlight model
High-beam bulb: 65W (H9)
Aiming adjustment is not necessary if only the
bulbs are replaced. When aiming adjustment is
necessary, contact a NISSAN dealer.
CAUTION:
High-pressure halogen gas is sealed inside
the bulb. The bulb may break if the glass
envelope is scratched or the bulb is dropped.
WAI0036X
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Low-beam (halogen headlight model)
High-beam
Disconnect the battery negative cable.
Pull off the rubber cap. (if equipped)
Disconnect the electrical connector from
the rear end of bulb.
Remove the bulb . Do not shake or rotate
the bulb when removing it.
Install the new bulb in the reverse order of
removal.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself
8-21
EXTERIOR LIGHTS
D15A1-A39ABF0E-9793-4A72-8940-2C4F41CC93E8
Item
Headlight
Low-beam (halogen
headlight model)
Low-beam (LED headlight model)*
High-beam
Front turn signal light
Front clearance light*
Front fog light (if equipped)*
Side turn signal light*
Rear combination lights
Turn signal light
Stop/tail light
55
LED
65
21
LED
35
5
21
21/5
Tail light
5
Reverse light
16
Rear fog light (if equipped)
High-mounted stop light*
License plate light
*:
Wattage (W)
21
LED
5
See a NISSAN dealer for replacement.
8-22 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
INTERIOR LIGHTS
D15A1-F16248C6-8448-48CC-A907-253EFE587A2A
Item
Cargo room light
Glove box light*
Map light
Room light
*:
Wattage (W)
5
5
5
5
See a NISSAN dealer for replacement.
LIGHT LOCATIONS
ReplacementD15A1-48FFC193-56B1-491E-B974-207C25ED351B
procedures
D15A1-1973B783-D758-4430-9B7D-C0DCAC417CD8
WAI0009X
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Map light and front room light
Rear room light
Clearance light
Front turn signal light
Headlight (high-beam)
Front fog light (if equipped)
Headlight (low-beam)
Side turn signal light
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
Stop/Tail light
Tail light
High-mounted stop light
Rear turn signal light
Reverse light
Cargo room light
License plate light
Rear fog light (if equipped)
SDI1679
Maintenance and do-it-yourself
8-23
:
:
REMOVE
INSTALL
All other lights are either type A, B, C, D, E or F.
When replacing a bulb, first remove the lens
and/or cover.
WAI0003X
JVM0794X
Tail light
Rear combination light
WAI0008X
Front turn signal light
8-24 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
To replace the rear combination light bulbs:
1. Open the back door.
2. Remove the bolts
and move the rear
combination light
as shown to make a
clearance, then carefully pry the light using
a suitable tool.
3. Replace the bulbs. (Stop/Tail light , Reverse light , Turn signal light )
4. Install the combination light in the reverse
order of removal.
To
1.
2.
3.
replace the tail light (back door side) bulbs:
Open the back door.
Remove the back door trim.
Remove the nut
and move the tail light
rearward to make a clearance, then carefully pry the light using a suitable tool.
4. Replace the bulb.
5. Install the tail light in the reverse order of
removal.
WAI0041X
Map light
WAI0042X
JVM0796X
Rear fog light (if equipped)
JVM0879X
Room light
License plate light
Maintenance and do-it-yourself
8-25
TIRES AND WHEELS
D15A1-89AA9F92-CFAE-4F92-AA2C-BA49362A5AC1
If you have a flat tire, see “Flat tire” (P.6-2).
Summer tires
D15A1-1BCA3371-A230-4062-AA5F-8C5A87D25FD6
TIRE INFLATION
PRESSURE
D15A1-04203F7D-291C-40D7-90BE-10B1CCA7D953
NISSAN specifies summer tires on some models
to provide superior performance on dry roads.
Summer tire performance is substantially reduced in snow and ice. Summer tires do not
have the tire traction rating M&S on the tire
sidewall.
If you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy or
icy conditions, NISSAN recommends the use of
snow or all season tires on all four wheels.
Periodically check the pressure of the tires,
including the spare. An incorrect tire pressure
may adversely affect tire life and vehicle handling. The tire pressure should be checked when
tires are COLD. Tires are considered COLD after
the vehicle has been parked for 3 or more
hours, or driven less than 1.6 km (1 mile). COLD
tire pressures are shown on the tire placard.
Insufficient pressure can lead to an overheating of the tire and subsequent internal damage.
At high speeds, this could result in tread
separation and even bursting of the tire.
TYPES OF TIRES
D15A1-FD4C9C50-5C6C-4EF5-B23D-7ED0D15DD332
CAUTION:
When changing or replacing tires, be sure all
four tires are of the same type (that is,
summer, all season or snow) and construction. A NISSAN dealer may be able to help you
with information about tire type, size, speed
rating and availability.
JVM0843X
Cargo room light
Replacement tires may have a lower speed
rating than the factory equipped tires, and they
may not match the potential maximum vehicle
speed. Never exceed the maximum speed
rating of the tire.
All season tires
D15A1-02E78856-75F7-450C-A4E5-A056B38650FC
NISSAN specifies all season tires on some
models to provide good performance all year,
including snowy and icy road conditions. All
season tires are identified by ALL SEASON and/
or M&S on the tire sidewall. Snow tires have
better snow traction than all season tires and
may be more appropriate in some areas.
8-26
Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Snow tires
D15A1-BD71A441-BE44-414B-A336-9620651A7A92
If snow tires are needed, it is necessary to
select tires equivalent in size and load rating to
the original equipment tires. If you do not, it can
adversely affect the safety and handling of your
vehicle.
Generally, snow tires have lower speed ratings
than factory equipped tires and may not match
the potential maximum vehicle speed. Never
exceed the maximum speed rating of the tire. If
you install snow tires, they must be the same
size, brand, construction and tread pattern on
all four wheels.
For additional traction on icy roads, studded
tires may be used. However, some states and
provinces prohibit their use. Check local, state
and provincial laws before installing studded
tires. Skid and traction capabilities of studded
snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may be
poorer than that of non-studded snow tires.
TIRE CHAINSD15A1-B3C50512-BC75-4874-9813-A33A083D2770
Use of tire chains may be prohibited according
to location. Check the local laws before installing tire chains. When installing tire chains,
make sure that they are of proper size for the
tires on your vehicle and are installed according to the chain manufacturer’s instructions.
Use chain tensioners when recommended by
the tire chain manufacturer to ensure a tight fit.
Loose end links of the tire chains must be
secured or removed to prevent the possibility
of whipping action damage to the fenders or
underbody. If possible, avoid fully loading your
vehicle when using tire chains. In addition, drive
at a reduced speed. Otherwise, your vehicle
may be damaged and/or vehicle handling and
performance may be adversely affected.
Tire chains must be installed only on the
front wheels and not on the rear wheels. Do
not use the chains on dry roads.
Never install tire chains on the temporary-use
spare tire (if equipped).
Do not drive with tire chains on paved roads
which are clear of snow. Driving with chains in
such conditions can cause damage to the
various mechanisms of the vehicle due to some
overstress.
TIRE ROTATION
D15A1-23DF55B4-DD3E-4C02-BE3A-0192E6257BCB
TIRE WEAR D15A1-4A2BCF51-D55C-4334-A8D6-DC2F85B46DC2
AND DAMAGE
SDI1662
NISSAN recommends that tires be rotated
every 10,000 km (6,000 miles). However, the
timing for tire rotation may vary according to
your driving habits and the road surface
conditions. (For the tire replacement, see “Flat
tire” (P.6-2).)
WARNING:
.
.
.
.
After rotating the tires, adjust the tire
pressure.
Retighten the wheel nuts when the vehicle has been driven for 1,000 km (600
miles) (also in cases of a flat tire, etc.).
Do not include the temporary-use spare
tire (if equipped) in tire rotation.
Incorrect tire selection, fitting, care, or
maintenance can affect vehicle safety
with risk of accident and injury. If in
doubt, consult a NISSAN dealer or the tire
manufacturer.
SDI1663
Wear indicator
Wear indicator location marks. The locations are shown by “
”, “TWI”, etc.
depending on tire types.
Tires should be periodically inspected for wear,
cracking, bulging or objects caught in the
tread. If excessive wear, cracks, bulging or deep
cuts are found, the tire should be replaced
immediately.
The original tires have a built-in tread wear
indicator. When the wear indicator is visible, the
tire should be replaced.
Improper service of a spare tire may result in
serious personal injury. If it is necessary to
repair the spare tire, contact a NISSAN dealer.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself
8-27
TIRE AGE
D15A1-3E7975C3-C597-4CE1-A08D-2C08AEA23F88
Never use a tire over six years old, regardless of
whether it has been used or not.
Tires degrade with age as well as with the
vehicle usage. Have your tires checked and
balanced often by a repair shop or, if you prefer,
a NISSAN dealer.
CHANGING D15A1-5D645BC0-1936-4CCB-9C94-6EABD270F7CD
TIRES AND WHEELS
WARNING:
Do not install a deformed wheel or tire even if
it has been repaired. Such wheels or tires
could have structural damage and could fail
without warning.
When replacing a tire, use the same size, speed
rating and load carrying capacity as originally
equipped. (For recommended types and sizes
of tires and wheels, see “Tires and wheels” (P.95).) The use of tires other than those recommended or the mixed use of tires of different
brands, construction (bias, bias-belted, or radial), or tread patterns can adversely affect the
ride, braking, handling, ground clearance, bodyto-tire clearance, snow chain clearance, speedometer calibration, headlight aim and bumper
height. Some of these effects may lead to
accidents and could result in serious personal
injury.
If the wheels are changed for any reason,
always replace with wheels which have the
same offset dimension. Wheels of a different
offset could cause early tire wear, possibly
degraded vehicle handling characteristics
and/or interference with the brake discs/
drums. Such interference can lead to decreased braking efficiency and/or early brake
pad/shoe wear.
8-28
Maintenance and do-it-yourself
WHEEL BALANCE
D15A1-124CDD75-E1C1-464A-A263-743C8A8C0B2D
Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle handling
and tire life. Even with regular use, wheels can
get out of balance. Therefore, they should be
balanced as required.
.
.
.
SPARE TIRED15A1-7AD87379-2C2C-452F-A3F4-CA9047048BFA
The spare tire supplied with your vehicle varies
depending on the model. See “Tires and
wheels” (P.9-5) for applicable spare tire.
.
Temporary-use
spare tire (if equipped)
GUID-080552C8-C91E-4E30-9AFC-BB39E161C691
.
.
SDI1912
A temporary-use spare tire (different size from
the original tire) is supplied with your vehicle.
Observe the following precautions if the spare
tire must be used, otherwise your vehicle could
be damaged or involved in an accident.
CAUTION:
.
.
The spare tire should be used only for
emergency. It should be replaced by the
standard tire at the first opportunity.
Drive carefully while the spare tire is
installed.
.
Avoid sharp turns and abrupt braking
while driving.
Do not drive your vehicle at speeds faster
than 80 km/h (50 MPH).
Do not use tire chains on a spare tire. Tire
chains will not fit properly on the spare
tire and may cause damage to the
vehicle.
When driving on roads covered with snow
or ice, the spare tire should be used on
the rear wheel and the original tire used
on the front wheels (drive wheels). Use
tire chains only on the front two original
tires.
Because the spare tire is smaller than the
original tire, ground clearance is reduced.
To avoid damage to the vehicle do not
drive over obstacles. Also do not drive the
vehicle through an automatic car wash
since it may get caught.
Do not use the spare tire on other
vehicles.
Do not use more than one spare tire at
the same time.
ConventionalGUID-4D409338-A3C4-4D20-8981-C25168F170E9
spare tire (if equipped)
A standard tire (the same size as the original
tire) is supplied with your vehicle.
9 Technical information
Recommended fluids/lubricants and capacities ................
....
Fuel information .....................................................................................
....
Recommended SAE viscosity number .................................
....
Air conditioner system refrigerant and lubricant .......
....
Engine ....................................................................................................................
....
Tires and wheels ...........................................................................................
....
Dimensions ........................................................................................................
....
9-2
9-3
9-3
9-4
9-4
9-5
9-5
When travelling or registering in another country ...........
....
Vehicle identification .................................................................................
....
Vehicle identification label ..........................................................
....
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .....................................
....
Engine serial number ......................................................................
....
Tire placard .............................................................................................
....
Air conditioner specification label ........................................
....
Installation of an RF transmitter .....................................................
....
9-6
9-6
9-6
9-6
9-6
9-7
9-7
9-7
RECOMMENDED FLUIDS/
LUBRICANTS AND CAPACITIES
D15A1-53320E59-E6E6-477B-926D-8FBE547E0530
The following are approximate capacities. The actual refill quantities may be slightly different. When refilling, follow the procedures instructed in the “8.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section to determine the proper refill capacity.
Fluid type
Fuel
Engine oil*
H4K
Drain and refill
*: For additional
information,
K9K
see “Changing
engine oil and
oil filter” (P.8-8).
Engine coolant
(with reservoir)
With oil filter
change
Capacity (approximate)
Imperial
US
Measure
Measure
13-1/4 gal
11 gal
4-1/2 qt
3-3/4 qt
4.1 L
4-3/8 qt
4.4 L
4-5/8 qt
3-7/8 qt
4.3 L
4-1/2 qt
3-3/4 qt
H4K
4.5 L
4-3/4 qt
4 qt
K9K
4.5 L
4-3/4 qt
4 qt
—
—
—
Without oil filter
change
With oil filter
change
Without oil filter
change
Manual Transmission (MT) gear oil
Power steering fluid
Brake and clutch fluid
Multi-purpose grease
Air conditioner system refrigerant
Air conditioner system lubricants
9-2
Metric
Measure
50 L
4.3 L
Technical information
3-5/8 qt
—
—
—
Refill to the proper fluid level according to the
instructions in the “8. Maintenance and do-ityourself” section.
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Recommended Fluids/Lubricants
· See “Fuel information” (P.9-3).
· Genuine “NISSAN Motor Oil 10W-30 SM or SN” is recommended.
· If the above motor oil is not available, use “NISSAN Motor Oil” or equivalent that
matches the following grade and viscosity.
· Oil grade: API SM or SN, ILSAC GF-4 or GF-5
· SAE Viscosity: See “Recommended SAE viscosity number” (P.9-3).
· Genuine NISSAN engine oil
· Oil grade:
– ACEA B3, B4
– API CF
· SAE Viscosity: See “Recommended SAE viscosity number” (P.9-3).
· Genuine NISSAN Engine Coolant (blue) or equivalent
· Use Genuine NISSAN Engine Coolant or equivalent in its quality, in order to avoid
possible aluminum corrosion within the engine cooling system caused by the use of
non-genuine engine coolant.
Note that any repairs for the incidents within the engine cooling system while using
non-genuine engine coolant may not be covered by the warranty even if such
incidents occurred during the warranty period.
· Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) TRANSELF NFJ 75W-80, or equivalent
· If Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) TRANSELF NFJ is not available, API GL-4, Viscosity
SAE 75W-80 may be used as a temporary replacement. However, use Manual
Transmission Fluid (MTF) TRANSELF NFJ as soon as it is available.
RENAULTMATIC D2 or equivalent
· Genuine NISSAN Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT4
· NLGI No. 2 (Lithium soap base)
· HFC-134a (R-134a)
· SP-10 or equivalent
FUEL INFORMATION
D15A1-37026D02-5291-4945-95D4-DC57AE1253E5
Gasoline engine
GUID-5C0E29CB-B057-403C-B65A-06A305CC47C6
CAUTION:
Do not use leaded gasoline. Using leaded
gasoline will damage the three-way catalyst.
RECOMMENDED SAE VISCOSITY NUMBER
D15A1-B69B25E9-F64E-4D5C-BAA6-35926C1D7140
For H4K engine model
10W-30 is preferable.
If 10W-30 is not available, select the viscosity,
from the chart below, that is suitable for the
outside temperature range.
For K9K engine model
5W-30 is preferable.
If 5W-30 is not available, select the viscosity,
from the chart below, that is suitable for the
outside temperature range.
Use UNLEADED REGULAR gasoline with an
octane rating of at least 91 (RON).
Diesel engine*GUID-11D2E4E4-09FC-4187-8473-6EC509118819
Use diesel fuel of at least 50 cetane.
*
If two types of diesel fuel are available, use summer
or winter fuel properly according to the following
temperature conditions.
.
.
Above −7°C (20°F) ... Summer type diesel
fuel.
Below −7°C (20°F) ... Winter type diesel fuel.
CAUTION:
.
.
Do not use home heating oil, gasoline or
other alternate fuels in your diesel engine. The use of those or adding those to
diesel fuel can cause engine damage.
Do not use summer fuel at temperatures
below −7°C (20°F). The cold temperatures
will cause wax to form in the fuel. As a
result, it may prevent the engine from
running smoothly.
STI0589
STI0387B
Technical information
9-3
ENGINE
AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM REFRIGERANT AND LUBRICANT
D15A1-F50D0177-18DA-4E61-88BE-04797457828A
The air conditioner system of your vehicle must
be charged with the refrigerant HFC-134a (R134a) and the lubricant SP-10 or equivalents.
Use of any other refrigerants or lubricants will
cause severe damage, and you may need to
replace your vehicle’s entire air conditioner
system.
The release of refrigerants into the atmosphere
is prohibited in many countries and regions.
The refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) in your
vehicle will not harm the Earth’s ozone layer.
However, it may contribute in a small part to
the global warming effect. NISSAN recommends that the refrigerant be appropriately
recovered and recycled. Contact a NISSAN
dealer when servicing the air conditioner
system.
D15A1-A78EA9EA-3DB9-49F8-93FC-A8730B890A74
Engine model
H4K
K9K
Type
Gasoline, 4-cycle, DOHC
Diesel, 4-cycle
Cylinder arrangement
4-cylinder, in-line
4-cylinder, in-line
Bore × Stroke
mm (in)
78.0 × 78.4 (3.071 × 3.087) 76.0 × 80.5 (2.992 × 3.169)
Displacement
cm3 (cu
in)
1,498 (91.41)
1,461 (89.15)
700±50
800±25
5±2°
—
LZKAR7D-9
—
Idle speed at the “N” (Neutral)
position
Ignition timing (B.T.D.C.) at the
“N” (Neutral) position
Technical information
degree
at idle
Spark plugs
Type
Gap
Camshaft operation
9-4
rpm
Standard
mm (in)
0.8 to 0.9 (0.031 to 0.035) —
Timing chain
Timing belt
TIRES AND WHEELS
DIMENSIONS
D15A1-ED65DAB9-BF6F-4D2B-A659-EF3C41067548
D15A1-CC338AF9-A59C-4F54-8AF6-8926E9ACE048
Tire size
Road wheel
Spare
Standard
Spare
215/65R16 98H
215/65R16 98H
215/60R17 96H
215/65R16 98H
Size
Offset mm (in)
Steel
16 × 6 1/2J
50 (1.97)
Aluminum
17 × 6 1/2J
50 (1.97)
Steel
16 × 6 1/2J
50 (1.97)
Unit: mm (in)
Overall length
Overall width
Overall height
Front tread
Rear tread
Wheelbase
*1:
*2:
4,384 (172.6)
1,813 (71.4)
1,656 (65.2)*1
1,651 (65.0)*2
1,559 (61.4)
1,566 (61.7)
2,673 (105.2)
Model with roof rack
Model without roof rack
For India: Tires & tubes fitted in the vehicle, as per clause 3(c) & 3(e) meet the requirement of BIS and
comply with the requirements under the Central Motor Vehicle Rules (CMVR), 1989.
Technical information
9-5
WHEN TRAVELLING OR REGISTERING
IN ANOTHER COUNTRY
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
D15A1-A3C259B5-3957-48F9-AD1A-28F71CFE7919
D15A1-C3451F67-29CF-4696-AC8F-FF53FB6D9318
When planning to travel in another country or
region, find out whether the fuel required for
your vehicle is available in that country or
region. Using a low octane rated fuel may
cause engine damage. Therefore, be sure that
the required fuel is available wherever you go.
For additional information regarding recommended fuel, see earlier in this section.
When transferring the registration of your
vehicle to another country, state, province or
district, contact the appropriate authorities to
find out that the vehicle complies with the local
legal requirements. In some cases, a vehicle
cannot meet the legal requirements, and it may
be necessary to modify the vehicle to meet
local laws and regulations. In addition, there
may be possibilities that a vehicle cannot be
adapted in certain areas.
The laws and regulations for motor vehicle
emission control and safety standards vary
according to the country, state, province or
district; therefore, the vehicle specification may
differ.
When any vehicles are to be taken into
another country, state, province or district,
its modification, transportation, registration,
and any other expenses which may result,
are the responsibility of the user. NISSAN is
not responsible for any inconveniences that
may result.
It is prohibited to cover, paint, weld, cut, drill,
alter or remove Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN).
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
LABEL
D15A1-A8D4A33D-8E44-4B77-9564-66061CA3EC29
WAJ0015X
H4K engine
STI0630
The vehicle identification label is affixed as
shown.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
NUMBER (VIN)
D15A1-505A7DA9-C3BF-4C75-AB40-5946EE343054
WAJ0016X
K9K engine
The engine serial number is attached/stamped
on the engine as shown.
WAJ0069X
The vehicle identification number is located as
shown.
9-6 Technical information
ENGINE SERIAL
NUMBER
D15A1-8C4F3838-A433-4C32-8CBD-475661B53BEE
INSTALLATION OF AN RF TRANSMITTER
GUID-45CBF2C0-6ACD-4B32-978D-F17EFDA2796F
TIRE PLACARD
D15A1-D14A8E63-463A-4F44-9209-FCD6E928E5F2
For countries conforming to UN regulation
No.10 or equivalent:
The installation of an RF transmitter in your
vehicle could affect electric equipment systems. Be sure to check with your NISSAN dealer
for precautionary measures or special instructions regarding installation. Upon request, your
NISSAN dealer will provide the detailed information (frequency band, power, antenna position, installation guide, etc.) regarding
installation.
STI0435
The cold tire pressures are shown on the tire
placard affixed to the driver’s side center pillar.
AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATION LABEL
D15A1-4D037102-4D39-497F-B75D-28FF1A27ECEA
WAJ0017X
Technical information
9-7
MEMO
9-8 Technical information
MEMO
Technical information
9-9
MEMO
9-10
Technical information
10 Index
A
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) .......................
...
5-20
Aiming control, Headlights...................................
...
2-16
Air bag system
Air bag warning labels .....................................
...
1-22
Supplemental front-impact air
bag system .................................................
...
1-19, 1-24
Supplemental side-impact air
bag system .................................................
...
1-19, 1-24
Air cleaner filter.............................................................
...
8-14
Air conditioner
Air conditioner operation...............................
...
4-14
Air conditioner service......................................
...
4-17
Air conditioner specification label..............
...
9-7
Air conditioning system refrigerant
and lubricant recommendations .............
...
4-17
Air fresheners .....................................................................
...
7-4
Antenna...............................................................................
...
4-23
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) .......................
...
5-20
Anti-lock Braking system (ABS)
warning light .......................................................................
...
2-7
Appearance care
Exterior appearance care .................................
...
7-2
Interior appearance care...................................
...
7-3
Armrest ....................................................................................
...
1-4
Around View Monitor ...................................................
...
4-7
Audible reminders.......................................................
...
2-10
Audio operation precautions .............................
...
4-17
Audio system ..................................................................
...
4-17
Automatic air conditioner ....................................
...
4-16
Auxiliary input jack .....................................................
...
4-28
B
Back door ..........................................................................
...
Battery.......................................................................
...
8-3,
Battery replacement, Intelligent Key .....
...
Battery replacement,
Remote controller ................................................
...
3-13
8-17
8-18
8-17
Bluetooth® audio player operation ...............
...
4-28
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System .....
... 4-30
Brake
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) ................
...
5-20
Brake booster..........................................................
...
8-12
Brake fluid ..................................................................
...
8-12
Brake system ...........................................................
...
5-19
Checking foot brake pedal ...........................
...
8-11
Parking brake check ..........................................
...
8-11
Parking brake operation.................................
...
5-22
Warning light ...............................................................
...
2-7
Break-in schedule ...........................................................
...
5-2
Brightness control, Instrument panel .............
...
2-5
Bulb check/instrument panel................................
...
2-7
Bulb replacement .............................................
...
8-2, 8-21
Cockpit .....................................................................................
...
2-2
Cold weather driving ................................................
...
5-21
Cool box function........................................................
...
2-22
Coolant
Changing engine coolant .................................
...
8-7
Checking engine coolant level......................
...
8-7
High temperature warning light .................
...
2-8
Cornering fog light function...............................
...
2-17
Corrosion protection ....................................................
...
7-5
Cover, Cargo cover.....................................................
...
2-23
Cruise control .................................................................
...
5-14
Cruise control display and indicators .........
... 5-14
Cup holders......................................................................
...
2-23
C
Defogger switch ...........................................................
...
2-19
Dimensions ...........................................................................
...
9-5
Door open warning light ...........................................
...
2-7
Drive belt ............................................................................
...
8-10
Driving
Cold weather driving .........................................
...
5-21
Driving with Manual Transmission
(MT) .....................................................................................
...
5-9
Precautions when starting and
driving ...............................................................................
...
5-2
Canceling cruising speed ......................................
...
5-15
Canceling speed limit...............................................
...
5-13
Car phone or CB radio ............................................
...
4-30
Card holder.......................................................................
...
2-22
Cargo cover .....................................................................
...
2-23
Cargo room light .........................................................
...
2-26
Catalytic converter, Three way catalyst .......
... 5-3
CD player operation ..................................................
...
4-25
Checking
Checking engine coolant level......................
...
8-7
Checking engine oil level...................................
...
8-7
Checking foot brake pedal ...........................
...
8-11
Checking lights..........................................................
...
2-7
Checking parking brake..................................
...
8-11
Child restraints ..............................................................
...
1-10
Child safety...........................................................................
...
1-8
Child safety rear door lock ......................................
...
3-4
Chimes, Audible reminders ..................................
...
2-10
Circuit breaker, Fusible link .................................
...
8-19
Cleaning exterior and interior ...................
...
7-2, 7-3
Clock ......................................................................................
...
2-14
Clutch fluid........................................................................
...
8-13
D
E
ECO mode .........................................................................
...
5-10
ECO mode indicator......................................................
...
2-9
Economy, Fuel ................................................................
...
5-16
Emergency Stop Signal ..............................................
...
6-2
Engine
Break-in schedule ...................................................
...
5-2
Changing engine coolant .................................
...
8-7
Checking engine coolant level......................
...
8-7
Checking engine oil level...................................
...
8-7
Engine compartment
check locations .........................................................
...
8-5
Engine cooling system ........................................
...
8-6
Engine oil........................................................................
...
8-7
Engine serial number ...........................................
...
9-6
Engine specifications............................................
...
9-4
High temperature warning light .................
...
2-8
If your vehicle overheats ................................
...
6-10
Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) .........................
...
5-3
Explanation of general
maintenance items ........................................................
...
8-2
G
Interior lights...................................................................
...
2-25
Gauge........................................................................................
...
2-4
Fuel gauge ....................................................................
...
2-5
Speedometer ..............................................................
...
2-4
Tachometer..................................................................
...
2-4
Trip computer .........................................................
...
2-13
General maintenance...................................................
...
8-2
Glove box ...........................................................................
...
2-22
J
F
H
Flat tire.....................................................................................
...
6-2
Floor mat cleaning .........................................................
...
7-4
Fluid
Brake fluid ..................................................................
...
8-12
Clutch fluid.................................................................
...
8-13
Engine coolant...........................................................
...
8-6
Engine oil........................................................................
...
8-7
Power steering fluid ...........................................
...
8-13
Window washer fluid .............................
...
8-3, 8-16
FM-AM radio with Compact Disc (CD)
player.....................................................................................
...
4-23
Fog light switch ............................................................
...
2-17
Front fog lights..............................................................
...
2-17
Front map lights...........................................................
...
2-26
Front room light ...........................................................
...
2-26
Front seat, Front seat adjustment ....................
...
1-2
Fuel
Fuel economy ..........................................................
...
5-16
Fuel gauge ....................................................................
...
2-5
Fuel information .......................................................
...
9-3
Fuel octane rating ..................................................
...
9-3
Fuel-filler cap............................................................
...
3-15
Fuel-filler lid ...............................................................
...
3-15
Fuel Efficiency and Carbon Dioxide
Reduction driving tips..............................................
...
5-15
Fuses......................................................................................
...
8-19
Fusible links......................................................................
...
8-19
Hands-Free Phone System, Bluetooth® ....... 4-30
Hazard indicator flasher switch...........................
...
6-2
Head restraints..................................................................
...
1-4
Headlights
Aiming control ........................................................
...
2-16
Bulb replacement .................................................
...
8-21
Headlight switch ...................................................
...
2-15
Heater
Heater and air
conditioner operation .......................................
...
4-14
High temperature warning light .........................
...
2-8
Hill start assist system ............................................
...
5-12
Hood release ...................................................................
...
3-12
Horn........................................................................................
...
2-19
Hydraulic pump electric
power steering ..............................................................
...
5-19
10-2
I
Ignition switch
(with Intelligent Key system) ..........................
...
(without Intelligent Key system)..................
...
Key positions...............................................................
...
Indicator lights...................................................................
...
Instrument brightness control .............................
...
Instrument panel .............................................................
...
Intelligent Key.....................................................................
...
Intelligent Key system .................................................
...
5-5
5-4
5-4
2-9
2-5
2-3
3-2
3-5
Jump starting .....................................................................
...
6-7
K
Key
NISSAN Anti-Theft System (NATS) key........ 3-2
Keyless entry (See remote keyless
entry system) ......................................................................
...
3-4
Keyless entry (See using remote keyless
entry function), Intelligent Key..........................
...
3-10
Keys ............................................................................................
...
3-2
For Intelligent Key system................................
...
3-5
L
Labels
Air conditioner specification label..............
...
9-7
Engine serial number ...........................................
...
9-6
Vehicle identification ............................................
...
9-6
Lead me to car function........................................
...
2-26
Light
Bulb replacement .....................................
...
8-2, 8-21
Fog light switch .....................................................
...
2-17
Front map lights....................................................
...
2-26
Front room light ....................................................
...
2-26
Headlight switch ...................................................
...
2-15
Headlights bulb replacement .....................
...
8-21
Indicator lights...........................................................
...
2-9
Interior lights............................................................
...
2-25
Rear room light ......................................................
...
2-26
Replacement ................................................
...
8-2, 8-21
Warning/indicator lights and audible
reminders.......................................................................
...
2-7
Lock
Back door lock........................................................
...
3-13
Vehicle speed sensing door
lock mechanism .......................................................
...
3-4
Low fuel warning light ................................................
...
2-8
Luggage hooks .............................................................
...
2-24
M
Maintenance
Battery...............................................................
...
8-3, 8-17
Explanation of general
maintenance items ................................................
...
8-2
General maintenance...........................................
...
8-2
Maintenance precautions .................................
...
8-3
Maintenance requirements .............................
...
8-4
Seat belt maintenance.....................................
...
1-10
Maintenance free battery .....................................
...
8-17
Malfunction Indicator Light .....................................
...
2-9
Manual Transmission (MT) .......................................
...
5-4
Mechanical key (Intelligent Key system) .......
... 3-3
Meter
Trip computer .........................................................
...
2-13
Meters and gauges ........................................................
...
2-4
Instrument brightness control .....................
...
2-5
Mirror, Vanity mirror ..................................................
...
3-17
Monitor, Rear view monitor.....................................
...
4-3
N
New vehicle break-in ....................................................
...
5-2
NISSAN Anti-Theft System (NATS) key............
...
3-2
O
Oil
Checking engine oil level...................................
...
8-7
Engine oil........................................................................
...
8-7
Outside air temperature ........................................
...
2-14
Overheat, If your vehicle overheats..............
...
6-10
P
Parking
Brake break-in ........................................................
...
5-20
Parking brake operation.................................
...
5-22
Parking sensor system............................................
...
5-18
Phone
Bluetooth® Hands-Free
Phone System .........................................................
...
4-30
Phone, Car phone or CB radio..........................
...
4-30
Power
Power outlet .............................................................
...
2-21
Power steering .......................................................
...
5-19
Power steering fluid ...........................................
...
8-13
Power windows .....................................................
...
2-20
Pre-tensioner seat belt system.........
... 1-22, 1-26
Precautions
Audio operation .....................................................
...
4-17
Maintenance ................................................................
...
8-3
Seat belt usage .........................................................
...
1-6
Supplemental restraint system.................
...
1-19
Towing precautions ...........................................
...
6-11
When starting and driving................................
...
5-2
Precautions on cruise control...........................
...
5-14
Push starting...................................................................
...
6-10
Push-button ignition switch ...................................
...
5-5
R
Radio......................................................................................
...
4-17
Car phone or CB radio .....................................
...
4-30
FM-AM radio with Compact Disc
(CD) player ..................................................................
...
4-23
Rain-sensing auto wiper system ....................
...
2-18
Rear door lock, Child safety rear
door lock ................................................................................
...
3-4
Rear fog light ..................................................................
...
2-17
Rear fog light indicator light ..................................
...
2-9
Rear room light .............................................................
...
2-26
Rear seats..............................................................................
...
1-3
Rear view monitor ..........................................................
...
4-3
Rear window wiper and washer switch ....... 2-19
Remote keyless entry system ...............................
...
3-4
Roof, Roof rack ..............................................................
...
2-24
S
Safety, Child seat belts................................................
...
1-8
Seat adjustment, Front seats ................................
...
1-2
Seat belt(s)
Child safety...................................................................
...
1-8
Injured persons .........................................................
...
1-9
Pre-tensioner seat
belt system .................................................
...
1-22, 1-26
Precautions on seat belt usage...................
...
1-6
Pregnant women.....................................................
...
1-8
Seat belt cleaning ...................................................
...
7-4
Seat belt maintenance.....................................
...
1-10
Seat belt warning light .......................................
...
2-8
Seat belts .......................................................................
...
1-6
Seat(s), Seats .......................................................................
...
1-2
Security system.............................................................
...
3-12
Setting cruising speed.............................................
...
5-15
Setting speed limit .....................................................
...
5-13
Shark fin antenna........................................................
...
4-23
Side-impact air bag system .................
...
1-19, 1-24
Sonar system ..................................................................
...
5-18
Spare tire............................................................................
...
8-28
Spark plugs.......................................................................
...
8-11
Speed limiter ...................................................................
...
5-12
Speed limiter display and indicators ...........
...
5-13
Speed limiter malfunction ....................................
...
5-13
Speed limiter operations .......................................
...
5-12
Speedometer ......................................................................
...
2-4
SRS air bag warning light .....................................
...
1-22
Starting
Jump starting .............................................................
...
6-7
Precautions when starting
and driving....................................................................
...
5-2
Push starting............................................................
...
6-10
Steering
Power steering .......................................................
...
5-19
Power steering fluid ...........................................
...
8-13
Steering lock.....................................................
...
5-5, 5-6
Tilting steering wheel........................................
...
3-15
Sun visors ..........................................................................
...
2-25
10-3
Supplemental front-impact air bag
system ..................................................................................
...
1-24
Supplemental side-impact air
bag system ........................................................
...
1-19, 1-24
Switch
Fog light switch .....................................................
...
2-17
Headlight aiming control ...............................
...
2-16
Headlight switch ...................................................
...
2-15
Power door lock switch .....................................
...
3-3
Turn signal switch ...............................................
...
2-16
T
Tachometer..........................................................................
...
2-4
Three-way catalyst.........................................................
...
5-3
Tilting steering wheel...............................................
...
3-15
Tires
Flat tire.............................................................................
...
6-2
Tire chains..................................................................
...
8-27
Tire rotation ..................................................
...
8-2, 8-27
Tires and wheels .......................................
...
8-26, 9-5
Types of tires ...........................................................
...
8-26
Tonneau cover (see cargo cover) ..................
...
2-23
Towing
Tow truck towing.................................................
...
6-11
Towing precautions ...........................................
...
6-11
Towing your vehicle ...........................................
...
6-11
Transmission
Driving with Manual
Transmission (MT) ...................................................
...
5-9
Transmitter (See Intelligent Key system) .....
... 3-5
Transmitter (See remote keyless
entry system) ......................................................................
...
3-4
Trip computer ................................................................
...
2-13
Turn signal switch ......................................................
...
2-16
Turning on cruise control .....................................
...
5-15
Turning on speed limiter.......................................
...
5-13
10-4
U
Underbody cleaning ......................................................
...
7-3
USB connection port ................................................
...
4-28
V
Vanity mirror ...................................................................
...
3-17
Vehicle
Dimensions ...................................................................
...
9-5
Information display .............................................
...
2-11
Speed sensing door lock mechanism........ 3-4
Vehicle identification ............................................
...
9-6
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system.....
... 5-11
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)
warning light .......................................................................
...
2-8
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ..................
...
9-6
Ventilators .........................................................................
...
4-14
W
Warning
Lights.................................................................................
...
2-7
Warning lights, indicator lights and
audible reminders ...................................................
...
2-6
Warning light
Anti-lock braking system (ABS)
warning light ...............................................................
...
2-7
Brake warning light ...............................................
...
2-7
Door open warning light ...................................
...
2-7
Low fuel warning light ........................................
...
2-8
Seat belt warning light .......................................
...
2-8
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC)
warning light ...............................................................
...
2-8
Washer switch
Rear window wiper and washer
switch.............................................................................
...
2-19
Washer switch, Windshield wiper and
washer switch ................................................................
...
2-17
Washing ...................................................................................
...
7-2
Waxing ......................................................................................
...
7-2
Wheels and tires
Care of wheels ...........................................................
...
7-3
Cleaning aluminum alloy wheels ................
...
7-3
Window washer fluid .....................................
...
8-3, 8-16
Window(s)
Cleaning ...............................................................
...
7-2, 7-4
Power windows .....................................................
...
2-20
Windshield wiper and washer switch..........
...
2-17
Wiper
Rain-sensing auto wiper system .............
...
2-18
Rear window wiper and
washer switch .........................................................
...
2-19
Rear window wiper blade ..............................
...
8-15
Windshield wiper and
washer switch .........................................................
...
2-17
Wiper blades .............................................................
...
8-14
MEMO
10-5
11 Epilogue
GAS STATION INFORMATION
D15A1-FC020EBC-318A-41B4-A3F2-617B777F8E4A
FUEL INFORMATION
D15A1-20666506-3478-4880-B39F-040D3664C358
Gasoline engine
GUID-1E056A38-A511-44A0-B5DA-F6E5219A91CB
CAUTION:
Do not use leaded gasoline. Using leaded
gasoline will damage the three-way catalyst.
Use UNLEADED REGULAR gasoline with an
octane rating of at least 91 (RON).
Diesel engine*
GUID-2E105103-F556-468E-ABCC-692869C49224
Use diesel fuel of at least 50 cetane.
*
If two types of diesel fuel are available, use
summer or winter fuel properly according
to the following temperature conditions.
. Above −7°C (20°F) ... Summer type diesel
fuel.
. Below −7°C (20°F) ... Winter type diesel fuel.
CAUTION:
.
.
Do not use home heating oil, gasoline or
other alternate fuels in your diesel engine. The use of those or adding those to
diesel fuel can cause engine damage.
Do not use summer fuel at temperatures
below −7°C (20°F). The cold temperatures
will cause wax to form in the fuel. As a
result, it may prevent the engine from
running smoothly.
QUICK REFERENCE
D15A1-829EC5B8-3D12-4D53-83F3-8FE4909536CE
RECOMMENDED
ENGINE OIL
D15A1-BBD67FD7-D9B3-4828-9FF4-493C90375C77
See “Recommended fluids/lubricants and capacities” (P.9-2).
TIRE COLD PRESSURE
D15A1-FC18257F-ACB3-4279-A379-E6BE9799F8AF
See the tire placard affixed to the driver’s side
center pillar.
.
.
.
.
.
In case of emergency ... 6-1
(Flat tire, engine will not start, overheating,
towing)
How to start the engine ... 5-1
How to read the meters and
gauges ... 2-1
Maintenance and do-it-yourself ... 8-1
Technical information ... 9-1
0
Nissan Connect
1
0 Foreword
FOREWORD
AV0NJA1-801B9B40-26BD-49A7-A3FA-A8D4A5112094
Thank you for purchasing a NISSAN
vehicle.
This user’s manual is for NissanConnect
System featuring Apple CarPlay and Android Auto offered in your NISSAN vehicle.
Operation instructions for the following
systems are included in this manual.
. Audio
.
Hands-free phone
.
Apple CarPlay
.
Android Auto
.
Navigation
.
Voice recognition
.
Information and settings viewable on
NissanConnect
Please read this manual carefully to ensure safe operation of NissanConnect
System.
. Because of possible specification
changes and optional equipment,
some sections of this manual may
not apply to your vehicle.
.
All information, specifications and illustrations in this manual are those in
effect at the time of printing. NISSAN
reserves the right to change specifications or design at any time without
notice.
.
Do not remove this manual from the
vehicle when selling this vehicle. The
next user of the system may need the
manual.
Contents
Introduction
1
Getting started
2
Audio system
3
Hands-Free Phone
4
Information
5
Navigation (if equipped)
6
Voice recognition (if equipped)
7
Troubleshooting guide
8
Index
9
10
11
12
1 Introduction
How to use this manual .........................................................
...
For safe operation ................................................................
...
Reference symbols ...............................................................
...
Screen illustrations ..............................................................
...
Safety information ......................................................................
...
1-2
1-2
1-2
1-2
1-3
Regulatory information ..........................................................
...
Radio approval number and information .......
...
Trademarks .....................................................................................
...
Licenses ..............................................................................................
...
Software Licenses ..............................................................
...
1-3
1-3
1-4
1-5
1-5
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
AV0NJA1-D8FFB8FA-A072-42AA-8D6D-9FEA0AD9B6F9
This manual uses special words, symbols,
icons and illustrations organized by function.
Please refer to the following items and
familiarize yourself with them.
FOR SAFE
OPERATION
AV0NJA1-AF356C63-BA5E-4B54-878D-6D8BA7D7E683
REFERENCE
SYMBOLS
AV0NJA1-A9CE57CF-4F6A-454A-9EF8-91C4E396725F
INFO:
This indicates information that is necessary for efficient use of your vehicle or
accessories.
Reference page:
WARNING:
This is used to indicate the presence of
a hazard that could cause death or
serious personal injury. To avoid or
reduce the risk, the procedures must
be followed precisely.
CAUTION:
This is used to indicate the presence of
a hazard that could cause minor or
moderate personal injury or damage
to your vehicle. To avoid or reduce the
risk, the procedures must be followed
carefully.
NOTE:
Indicates items that help you understand and maximize the performance
of your vehicle. If ignored, they may
lead to a malfunction or poor performance.
1-2
Introduction
This indicates the title and page that you
should refer to.
< >:
Indicates a button on the control panel.
[ ]:
This indicates a key/item displayed on the
screen.
SCREEN ILLUSTRATIONS
AV0NJA1-5F699818-FF71-447B-881E-832E1898366B
.
The illustrations in this manual are
representatives of various models and
may not be identical with the design
and specifications of your vehicle.
.
Icons and menu items displayed on
the screen may be abbreviated or
omitted from the screen illustrations
when appropriate. The omitted icons
and menu items are described as
dotted lines as illustrated.
5GH0782X
SAFETY INFORMATION
REGULATORY INFORMATION
AV0NJA1-E215E2CD-5877-46AC-B4EF-5D0B6683FCA9
This system is primarily designed to help
you support pleasant driving as outlined
in this manual. However, you, the driver,
must use the system safely and properly.
Information and the availability of services may not always be up to date. The
system is not a substitute for safe, proper
and legal driving.
Before using the system, please read the
following safety information. Always use
the system as outlined in this manual.
WARNING:
.
.
To operate the system, first park the
vehicle in a safe location and set the
parking brake. Operating the system
while driving can distract the driver
and may result in a serious accident.
Exercise extreme caution at all times
so full attention may be given to
vehicle operation. If the system does
not respond immediately, please be
patient and keep your eyes on the
road. Inattentive driving may lead to
a crash resulting in serious injuries
or death.
.
Do not rely on route guidance (if
equipped) alone. Always be sure that
all driving maneuvers are legal and
safe in order to avoid accidents.
.
Do not disassemble or modify this
system. If you do, it may result in
accidents, fire or electrical shock.
AV0NJA1-E1B76219-B24A-4588-A087-0985C8AA0D4C
.
If you notice any foreign objects in
the system hardware, spill liquid on
the system or notice smoke or a
smell coming from it, stop using the
system immediately and it is recommended you contact a NISSAN dealer. Ignoring such conditions may
lead to accidents, fire or electrical
shock.
CAUTION:
.
Some jurisdictions may have laws
limiting the use of video screens
while driving. Use this system only
where it is legal to do so.
.
Extreme temperature conditions
[below −20°C (−4°F) and above 70°C
(158°F)] could affect the performance of the system.
.
The display screen may break if it is
hit with a hard or sharp object. If the
display screen breaks, do not touch
it. Doing so could result in an injury.
NOTE:
Do not keep the system running with
the engine stopped. Doing so may
discharge the vehicle battery (12V battery). When you use the system, always
keep the engine running.
RADIO APPROVAL NUMBER AND
INFORMATION
GUID-43B104F9-DF13-4079-A70D-A7FA2CF10CD3
For EuropeGUID-C155C787-DD2F-4BC8-8E65-A521841F0829
Hereby, Robert Bosch Car Multimedia
GmbH declares that the radio equipment
type AIVICMFB0 and AIVIP32R0 is in
compliance with Directive 2014/53/EU.
The full text of the EU declaration of
conformity is available at the following
internet address:
http://cert.bosch-carmultimedia.net
PBA0034X
Frequency Band
2400 MHz - 2480 MHz
Radiated Power [EIRP]
Bluetooth < 10 mW
WLAN < 100 mW
Hints/Restrictions
Internal Antenna
Internal antenna not accessible by user.
Any change of the user will violate the
legal approval of this product.
Introduction
1-3
TRADEMARKS
AV0NJA1-9FC03AD0-EBF8-481D-A9E5-F229D1F2B583
der license from iBiquity Digital Corporation. U.S. and Foreign Patents. For patents
see http://dts.com/patents. HD Radio,
PBA0032X Artist Experience, and the HD, HD Radio,
and "ARC" logos are registered trademarks or trademarks of iBiquity Digital
Corporation in the United States and/or
other countries.
5GD0030X App Store
Apple and the Apple logo are trademarks
Apple, iPhone, iPod, and iPod touch are
of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and
trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the
other countries. App Store is a service
U.S. and other countries. Apple CarPlay is
For Brazil GUID-CB15F0D6-C1E7-43C1-A577-BA64A786F310 a trademark of Apple Inc. Use of the Apple mark of Apple Inc.
Siri
Este equipamento opera em caráter seCarPlay logo means that a vehicle user
cundário, isto é, não tem direito a proteinterface meets Apple performance stanSiri is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered
ção contra interferência prejudicial,
dards. Apple is not responsible for the
in the U.S. and other countries.
mesmo de estações do mesmo tipo, e
operation of this vehicle or its compliance
Google Play
não pode causar interferência a sistemas
with safety and regulatory standards.
Google, Google Play are trademarks of
operando em caráter primário.
Please note that the use of this product
Google Inc.
with iPhone or iPod may affect wireless
performance.
Google
PBH0016X
Google is a trademark of Google Inc.
For MexicoGUID-26ABAF26-8EA0-4BEE-929A-226CC1658792
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a
las siguientes dos condiciones:
(1) es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y
(2) este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
Modelo: AIVIL42P0 and AIVIL12F0
Marca: Bosch
5GA0023X
Bluetooth® is a trademark owned by
Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and licensed to Robert
Bosch GmbH.
5GA0018X
HD Radio Technology manufactured un-
1-4
Introduction
LICENSES
AV0NJA1-5FE782B1-F1F2-4C43-B7B0-EE88A41A6D05
SOFTWARE
LICENSES
AV0NJA1-1E5EA8CA-F06A-4CB9-A570-37F39CE42842
Open Source Software Licenses
http://oss.bosch-cm.com/nissan.html
Introduction 1-5
MEMO
1-6 Introduction
2 Getting started
Control buttons and touch screen display ............
...
2-2
Control panel (Type A) ......................................................
...
2-2
Control panel (Type B) ......................................................
...
2-4
Control panel (Type C) ......................................................
...
2-5
Control panel (Type D) ......................................................
...
2-6
Control panel (Type E) ......................................................
...
2-8
Liquid crystal display ..........................................................
...
2-9
Steering wheel switches (Type A) .........................
...
2-10
Steering wheel switches (Type B) .........................
...
2-11
Steering wheel switches (Type C) .........................
...
2-12
Steering wheel switches (Type D) ........................
...
2-12
Steering column switches (if equipped) ..........
... 2-13
USB (Universal Serial Bus) connection port
and AUX (auxiliary) input jack ..................................
...
2-14
Starting system ..........................................................................
...
2-15
Start-up screen (if equipped) ...................................
...
2-15
Basic operation ..........................................................................
...
2-15
Selecting menu from Launch Bar ........................
...
2-15
Touch panel operation ...............................................
...
Main screen operations ..............................................
...
Adjusting settings ...........................................................
...
How to input letters and numbers ...................
...
How to view and operate HOME
MENU screen .......................................................................
...
Functions disabled while driving
(if equipped) .........................................................................
...
System settings .........................................................................
...
Settings menu ....................................................................
...
Connections settings ...................................................
...
Volume and Beeps settings ....................................
...
Clock settings .....................................................................
...
Display settings .................................................................
...
Language setting ............................................................
...
Units settings (if equipped) ......................................
...
Keyboard type settings ..............................................
...
Return all settings to default .................................
...
2-16
2-17
2-18
2-18
2-19
2-20
2-21
2-21
2-23
2-25
2-26
2-28
2-28
2-28
2-28
2-29
CONTROL BUTTONS AND TOUCH
SCREEN DISPLAY
AV0NJA1-1D7E0D66-C372-4533-A154-A968B3FBAE87
Push the button again to turn on the
display.
CONTROL PANEL (Type A)
AV0NJA1-0F79FBFA-8617-4697-9F42-8714291E5E6B
:
Push to display the audio screen.
When this button is pushed while
the audio screen is displayed, a
screen to select an audio source will
be displayed.
“Selecting audio source” (page 316)
Models with navigation system
5GH0828X
:
Push to turn the power of the audio
system on and off. Turn to adjust the
volume.
Touch screen display:
Various information and operation
menus are displayed on the liquid
crystal display. Touch keys and icons
on the screen for operation.
“Touch panel operation” (page 216)
Models without navigation system
5GH0829X
:
map.
“Navigation screen” (page 6-3)
Push to display the HOME MENU
screen.
<
>:
“How to view and operate HOME
Push to switch between the day
MENU screen” (page 2-19)
screen (bright) and the night screen
(models with navigation
(dark) and to adjust the level of
system):
screen brightness. Push and hold
the button to turn off the display.
Push to display the current location
2-2 Getting started
<
>/<
>:
In audio operation, selecting and
rewinding/fast-forwarding tracks as
well as radio station tuning can be
performed.
“Audio operations” (page 3-16)
:
Depending on the screen, pushing
the button will display the previous
screen.
Push and hold to quit the voice
recognition session (if equipped).
“7. Voice recognition”
equipped):
INFO:
(if
When a menu screen is displayed,
turn the dial to select items on the
screen.
Depending on conditions, menu items
may not be selected by turning
/<
/SOUND>.
Push to confirm the selected item or
setting.
The button can also be used for audio
operations.
“Audio operations” (page 3-16)
<
/SOUND> (if equipped):
When a menu screen is displayed,
turn the dial to select items on the
screen.
Push to confirm the selected item or
setting.
On the scrolled map screen, turn to
adjust the map scale.
The button can also be used for audio
operations.
“Audio operations” (page 3-16)
<
> (models without navigation
system):
Push to display the phone screen.
“4. Hands-Free Phone”
Getting started 2-3
CONTROL PANEL (Type B)
(dark) and to adjust the level of
screen brightness. Push and hold
the button to turn off the display.
Push the button again to turn on the
display.
GUID-C494CEB0-74D3-4844-8019-66E4AEC6BBEC
Models with navigation system
:
Push to display the audio screen.
When this button is pushed while
the audio screen is displayed, a
screen to select an audio source will
be displayed.
“Selecting audio source” (page 316)
5GH0916X
Models without navigation system
5GH0917X
(models with navigation
*: Refer to the vehicle Owner’s Manual for
system):
details.
Push to display the current location
:
map.
Push to display the HOME MENU
“Navigation screen” (page 6-3)
screen.
<
>:
“How to view and operate HOME
MENU screen” (page 2-19)
Push to switch between the day
screen (bright) and the night screen
2-4 Getting started
:
Push to turn the power of the audio
system on and off. Turn to adjust the
volume.
Touch screen display:
Various information and operation
menus are displayed on the liquid
crystal display. Touch keys and icons
on the screen for operation.
“Touch panel operation” (page 216)
<
>/<
>:
In audio operation, selecting and
rewinding/fast-forwarding tracks as
well as radio station tuning can be
performed.
“Audio operations” (page 3-16)
:
Depending on the screen, pushing
the button will display the previous
screen.
Push and hold to quit the voice
recognition session.
“7. Voice recognition”
CONTROL PANEL (Type C)
GUID-5CB66A93-B853-4568-ACCA-0AFAD69826E7
:
When a menu screen is displayed,
turn the dial to select items on the
screen.
Push to confirm the selected item or
setting.
The button can also be used for audio
operations.
“Audio operations” (page 3-16)
<
> (models without navigation
system):
Push to display the phone screen.
“4. Hands-Free Phone”
INFO:
Depending on conditions, menu items
may not be selected by turning
.
:
<
Push to display the HOME MENU
screen.
“How to view and operate HOME
MENU screen” (page 2-19)
Depending on the screen, pushing
the button will display the previous
screen.
:
Push to display the audio screen.
When this button is pushed while
the audio screen is displayed, a
screen to select an audio source will
be displayed.
“Selecting audio source” (page 316)
<
>/<
>:
In audio operation, selecting and
rewinding/fast-forwarding tracks as
well as radio station tuning can be
performed.
“Audio operations” (page 3-16)
>:
5GH0865X
Push and hold to quit the voice
recognition session.
“7. Voice recognition”
<
>:
Push to switch between the day
screen (bright) and the night screen
(dark) and to adjust the level of
screen brightness. Push and hold
the button to turn off the display.
Push the button again to turn on the
display.
:
Push to turn the power of the audio
system on and off. Turn to adjust the
volume.
Getting started 2-5
Touch screen display:
Various information and operation
menus are displayed on the liquid
crystal display. Touch keys and icons
on the screen for operation.
“Touch panel operation” (page 216)
CONTROL PANEL (Type D)
GUID-7F6C29A2-E796-43F2-863A-3BA7C90574B2
Models with navigation system
Models without navigation system
Touch screen display:
:
Various information and operation
menus are displayed on the liquid
crystal display. Touch keys and icons
on the screen for operation.
“Touch panel operation” (page 216)
2-6
Getting started
PBA0011X
5GH0878X
Push to turn the power of the audio
system on and off. Turn to adjust the
volume.
<
>:
Push to switch between the day
screen (bright) and the night screen
(dark) and to adjust the level of
screen brightness. Push and hold the
button to turn off the display. Push
the button again to turn on the
display.
<
>/<
>:
The button can also be used to end
voice recognition sessions.
“7. Voice recognition”
equipped):
(if
In audio operation, selecting and
rewinding/fast-forwarding tracks as
well as radio station tuning can be
performed.
“Audio operations” (page 3-16)
When a menu screen is displayed,
turn the dial to select items on the
screen.
:
Push to display the audio screen.
When this button is pushed while
the audio screen is displayed, a
screen to select an audio source will
be displayed.
“Selecting audio source” (page 316)
The button can also be used for audio
operations.
“Audio operations” (page 3-16)
:
Push to confirm the selected item or
setting.
Push to display the HOME MENU
screen.
“How to view and operate HOME
MENU screen” (page 2-19)
(models with navigation
system):
Push to display the current location
map.
“Navigation screen” (page 6-3)
<
>:
Depending on the screen, pushing
the button will display the previous
screen.
INFO:
Depending on conditions, menu items
may not be selected by turning
/<
/SOUND>.
Push to confirm the selected item or
setting.
<
/SOUND> (if equipped):
When a menu screen is displayed,
turn the dial to select items on the
screen.
On the scrolled map screen, turn to
adjust the map scale.
The button can also be used for audio
operations.
“Audio operations” (page 3-16)
<
> (models without navigation
system):
Push to display the phone screen.
“4. Hands-Free Phone”
Getting started 2-7
<
CONTROL PANEL (Type E)
GUID-96167D0E-81DC-44F6-92AA-3D6E84C55DA5
>:
Push to switch between the day
screen (bright) and the night screen
(dark) and to adjust the level of
screen brightness. Push and hold
the button to turn off the display.
Push the button again to turn on the
display.
Models with navigation system
PBA0012X
:
Push to display the audio screen.
When this button is pushed while
the audio screen is displayed, a
screen to select an audio source will
be displayed.
“Selecting audio source” (page 316)
:
Push to turn the power of the audio
system on and off. Turn to adjust the
volume.
<
>:
Models without navigation system
MENU screen” (page 2-19)
Push to eject a CD.
“Compact disc (CD) player” (page
3-23)
:
Push to display the HOME MENU
screen.
“How to view and operate HOME
2-8
Getting started
CD slot:
Insert a CD into the slot.
“Compact disc (CD) player” (page
3-23)
PBA0013X
(models with navigation
system):
Push to display the current location
map.
“Navigation screen” (page 6-3)
<
>/<
>:
In audio operation, selecting and
rewinding/fast-forwarding tracks as
well as radio station tuning can be
performed.
“Audio operations” (page 3-16)
:
Depending on the screen, pushing
the button will display the previous
screen.
screen.
Push and hold to quit the voice
recognition session (if equipped).
“7. Voice recognition”
The button can also be used for audio
operations.
“Audio operations” (page 3-16)
<
/OK> (models with
navigation system):
When a menu screen is displayed,
turn the dial to select items on the
screen.
Push to confirm the selected item or
setting.
On the scrolled map screen, turn to
adjust the map scale.
The button can also be used for audio
operations.
“Audio operations” (page 3-16)
Touch screen display:
Various information and operation
menus are displayed on the liquid
crystal display. Touch keys and icons
on the screen for operation.
“Touch panel operation” (page 216)
<
> (models without navigation
system):
Push to display the phone screen.
“4. Hands-Free Phone”
(models without
navigation system):
When a menu screen is displayed,
turn the dial to select items on the
.
Some pixels in the display are darker
or brighter than others. This condition
is an inherent characteristic of liquid
crystal displays, and it is not a malfunction.
.
A remnant of the previous display
image may remain on the screen. This
screen burn is inherent in displays,
and it is not a malfunction.
.
The screen may become distorted by
strong magnetic fields.
.
Depending on the condition, brightness may be adjusted automatically to
prevent the display from screen burning.
Push to confirm the selected item or
setting.
INFO:
Depending on conditions, menu items
may not be selected by turning
/<
/OK>.
LIQUID CRYSTAL
DISPLAY
AV0NJA1-372A4E1B-44A4-402D-B2E2-BBC1C2EE95EA
The display on this unit is a liquid crystal
display and should be handled with care.
WARNING:
Never disassemble the display. Some
parts utilize extremely high voltage.
Touching them may result in serious
personal injury.
Characteristics of liquid crystal
display AV0NJA1-606BA666-3A03-489B-86FB-CE0129A6D140
.
If the temperature inside the vehicle is
especially low, the display will stay
relatively dim or the movement of
the images may be slow. These conditions are normal. The display will
function normally when the interior of
the vehicle has warmed up.
Maintenance
of display
AV0NJA1-A416EADC-8AF0-4234-BF0D-ADD3A5F4AF96
To clean the display screen, use a dry, soft
cloth. If additional cleaning is necessary,
use a small amount of neutral detergent
with a soft cloth. Never spray the screen
with water or detergent. Dampen the
cloth first, then wipe the screen.
CAUTION:
.
Clean the display with the ignition
switch in the OFF position. If the
display is cleaned while the ignition
switch is placed in the ON position,
unintentional operation may occur.
.
To clean the display, never use a
rough cloth, alcohol, benzine, thinner or any kind of solvent or paper
towel with a chemical cleaning
Getting started 2-9
agent. They will scratch or deteriorate the panel.
.
STEERING WHEEL SWITCHES (Type
A)
AV0NJA1-1B7CD1C1-5D48-4964-8816-2649513B59D0
Do not splash any liquid, such as
water or car fragrance, on the display. Contact with liquid will cause
the system to malfunction.
<
> (TALK):
Push to use the Voice Recognition
System (if equipped). Push and hold
to end the voice recognition session.
“Giving voice commands” (page
7-2)
Models with Voice Recognition System:
5GH0763X
<
>:
Push the + or - side of the switch to
adjust the volume.
<
>/<
>:
This switch can be used for audio
control.
“Audio operations” (page 3-16)
<
> (Back):
Push to go back to the previous
screen while operating the Voice
Recognition System (if equipped).
Push and hold to end a voice recognition session.
<
>/<
>/:
Push <
>/<
> to select the voice
command while operating the Voice
Recognition System (if equipped).
Push to confirm the selected
item.
2-10 Getting started
When Apple CarPlay (if equipped) or
Android Auto (if equipped) is active,
pushing and holding this switch will
start a Siri or Talk to Google voice
control session.
“Siri operation” (page 5-6)
“Talk to Google operation” (page
5-10)
Models without Voice Recognition
System:
When Apple CarPlay (if equipped) or
Android Auto (if equipped) is active,
pushing this switch will start a Siri or
Talk to Google voice control session.
“Siri operation” (page 5-6)
“Talk to Google operation” (page
5-10)
If your iPhone is connected to the invehicle system via Bluetooth®, Siri
Eyes Free (if equipped) can be activated by pushing and holding this
switch without having to activate
Apple CarPlay (if equipped).
“Siri Eyes Free” (page 5-13)
<
>
:
Push to answer a received call or to
end an active call.
“4. Hands-Free Phone”
When no phone is received or when
there is no active call, pushing this
switch will display the phone screen.
“Phone screen” (page 4-3)
INFO:
Steering wheel switches are mainly for
the vehicle information display control
and may not be able to operate the touch
screen display depending on the conditions.
For details of the vehicle information
display, refer to the vehicle Owner’s
Manual.
STEERING WHEEL SWITCHES (Type
B)
GUID-E74297EA-928F-4030-AC7F-8E2E3B41D672
Push to change the audio source.
<
/
>:
Tilt <
/
> to select the voice
command while operating the Voice
Recognition System. Push this switch
to confirm the selected item.
This switch can be used for audio
control.
“Audio operations” (page 3-16)
<
> (Back):
Push to go back to the previous
screen while operating the Voice
Recognition System. Push and hold
to end a voice recognition session.
<
>:
Push the + or - side of the switch to
adjust the volume.
<
>
Push to answer a received call or to
end an active call.
“4. Hands-Free Phone”
When no phone is received or when
there is no active call, pushing this
switch will display the phone screen.
“Phone screen” (page 4-3)
<
5GH0866X
When Apple CarPlay (if equipped) or
Android Auto (if equipped) is active,
pushing and holding this switch will
start a Siri or Talk to Google voice
control session.
“Siri operation” (page 5-6)
“Talk to Google operation” (page
5-10)
If your iPhone is connected to the invehicle system via Bluetooth®, Siri
Eyes Free (if equipped) can be activated by pushing and holding this
switch without having to activate
Apple CarPlay (if equipped).
“Siri Eyes Free” (page 5-13)
INFO:
Steering wheel switches are mainly for
the vehicle information display control
and may not be able to operate the touch
screen display depending on the conditions.
For details of the vehicle information
display, refer to the vehicle Owner’s
Manual.
> (TALK):
Push to use the Voice Recognition
System. Push and hold to end the
voice recognition session.
“Giving voice commands” (page
7-2)
Getting started 2-11
STEERING WHEEL SWITCHES (Type
C)
GUID-4A5B20DE-926F-4BB5-9DDA-087254395843
5GH0868X
:
Push to change the audio source.
<
/
>:
Tilt <
/
> to select the voice
command while operating the Voice
Recognition System. Push this switch
to confirm the selected item.
This switch can be used for audio
control.
“Audio operations” (page 3-16)
<
>:
Push the + or - side of the switch to
adjust the volume.
<
>:
Push to use the Voice Recognition
System. Push and hold to end the
voice recognition session.
“Giving voice commands” (page
7-2)
2-12
Getting started
When Apple CarPlay (if equipped) or
Android Auto (if equipped) is active,
pushing and holding this switch will
start a Siri or Talk to Google voice
control session.
“Siri operation” (page 5-6)
“Talk to Google operation” (page
5-10)
If your iPhone is connected to the invehicle system via Bluetooth®, Siri
Eyes Free (if equipped) can be activated by pushing and holding this
switch without having to activate
Apple CarPlay (if equipped).
“Siri Eyes Free” (page 5-13)
<
>:
Push to answer a received call or to
end an active call.
“4. Hands-Free Phone”
When no phone is received or when
there is no active call, pushing this
switch will display the phone screen.
“Phone screen” (page 4-3)
INFO:
Steering wheel switches are mainly for
the vehicle information display control
and may not be able to operate the touch
screen display depending on the conditions.
For details of the vehicle information
display, refer to the vehicle Owner’s
Manual.
STEERING WHEEL SWITCHES (Type
D)
GUID-50CB4DAE-B5C7-4E8C-8AD9-21AA542F4BAF
5GH0879X
Example
:
Push to change the audio source.
<
/
>:
Tilt <
/
> to select the voice
command while operating the Voice
Recognition System. Push this switch
to confirm the selected item.
This switch can be used for audio
control.
“Audio operations” (page 3-16)
<
>:
Push the + or - side of the switch to
adjust the volume.
<
> (Back):
Push to go back to the previous
screen while operating the Voice
Recognition System. Push and hold
to end a voice recognition session.
<
> (TALK):
Push to use the Voice Recognition
System. Push and hold to end the
voice recognition session.
“Giving voice commands” (page
7-2)
When Apple CarPlay (if equipped) or
Android Auto (if equipped) is active,
pushing and holding this switch will
start a Siri or Talk to Google voice
control session.
“Siri operation” (page 5-6)
“Talk to Google operation” (page
5-10)
INFO:
Steering wheel switches are mainly for
the vehicle information display control
and may not be able to operate the touch
screen display depending on the conditions.
For details of the vehicle information
display, refer to the vehicle Owner’s
Manual.
STEERING COLUMN SWITCHES (if
equipped) GUID-206A3788-FA90-4A28-9437-F66FBAE728B1
:
Push to change the audio source.
<
/ / >
If your iPhone is connected to the invehicle system via Bluetooth®, Siri
Eyes Free (if equipped) can be activated by pushing and holding this
switch without having to activate
Apple CarPlay (if equipped).
“Siri Eyes Free” (page 5-13)
<
Push to answer a received call or to
end an active call.
“4. Hands-Free Phone”
>:
Push to answer a received call or to
end an active call.
“4. Hands-Free Phone”
When no phone is received or when
there is no active call, pushing this
switch will display the phone screen.
“Phone screen” (page 4-3)
PBA0019X
Back view
PBA0016X
Front view
When no phone is received or when
there is no active call, pushing this
switch will display the phone screen.
“Phone screen” (page 4-3)
Push and hold to use the Voice
Recognition System.
“Giving voice commands” (page
7-2)
<
>:
Push the + or - side of the switch from
behind to adjust the volume.
:
Push to display the HOME MENU
screen.
Getting started 2-13
“How to view and operate HOME
MENU screen” (page 2-19)
Tuning wheel :
This tuning wheel can be used for
audio control.
“Audio operations” (page 3-16)
USB (Universal Serial Bus) CONNECTION PORT AND AUX (auxiliary) INPUT
JACK
AV0NJA1-E9AC7D61-BCC2-48F6-87C6-43CA8EAE0D5D
WARNING:
ally. Pulling the cable may damage
the port.
The vehicle is equipped with a USB
connection port and an AUX input jack.
When connected, the in-vehicle audio
system can play audio contents from
the compatible device.
The USB connection port and the AUX
input jack are located on the lower part of
the instrument panel or in the center
console box.
AUX (Auxiliary) input jack:
Connect an audio player that accepts
a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) TRS connector (such
as an MP3 player etc.) to play music.
Do not connect, disconnect or operate
the USB device while driving. Doing so
can be a distraction. If distracted you
could lose control of your vehicle and
cause an accident or serious injury.
USB connection port:
Connect a compatible device to play
media such as an iPod or a USB
memory device.
CAUTION:
.
.
.
Do not force the USB device into the
USB connection port. Inserting the
USB device tilted or up-side-down
into the port may damage the port.
Make sure that the USB device is
connected correctly into the USB
connection port.
Do not grab the USB connection port
cover (if equipped) when pulling the
USB device out of the port. This
could damage the port and the
cover.
Do not leave the USB cable in a place
where it can be pulled unintention-
2-14
Getting started
PBH0012X
Media hub Type B
5GH0905X
Media hub Type A
Connect an iPhone or an Android
phone to use Apple CarPlay (if
equipped) or Android Auto (if
equipped).
USB connection port (for USB TypeC only):
Connect a compatible device to play
media such as an iPod or a USB
memory device.
Connect an iPhone or an Android
phone to use Apple CarPlay (if
equipped) or Android Auto (if
STARTING SYSTEM
equipped).
INFO:
.
.
Refer to your AUX and USB device
manufacturer’s owner information regarding the proper use and care of
the device.
Cables made by Apple Inc. should be
used to connect electronic devices
marketed by Apple Inc.
BASIC OPERATION
AV0NJA1-F7A7E93C-1CA4-4F06-A2C8-03063B07BE78
AV0NJA1-A9E6F207-4B16-4522-84EB-16B8F6F3D435
The system starts when the ignition
switch is placed in the ACC or ON position.
The system can be operated with the
touch panel as well as switches on the
control panel and the steering wheel.
This manual mainly describes the touch
panel operation.
START-UP
SCREEN (if equipped)
AV0NJA1-1CCFB241-BAB4-4C9C-8412-EF467F738826
The start-up screen is displayed when the
ignition switch is placed in the ACC or ON
position.
After an animated start-up screen is
displayed, a message screen will be displayed. Touch [OK] after reading and
agreeing to the message displayed on
the screen. If you do not agree to the
message, some of the functions on the
system will be disabled.
SELECTING MENU FROM LAUNCH
BAR
AV0NJA1-F5B8AC5D-C122-4534-9FC7-2A14ED1A68AA
NOTE:
Do not keep the system running with
the engine stopped. Doing so may
discharge the vehicle battery (12V battery). When you use the system, always
keep the engine running.
5GH0765X
Models with navigation system
5GH0803X
Models without navigation system
Various system functions can be accessed by touching the items on the
Getting started 2-15
Launch Bar which is displayed on most
of the main menu screens. (The Launch
Bar does not appear on some screens
such as scrolled map screen, keyboard
screen, etc.)
Touch the item on the Launch Bar to
display the corresponding screens.
The items on the Launch Bar differ
according to which button on the control
panel is pushed.
The following menus are available on the
Launch Bar.
When pushing / (if
equipped):
Shortcuts for various functions are displayed.
Displayed items may vary depending on
models and specifications.
. [Phone]*
“Phone” (page 4-4)
.
[Info]
“Information menu” (page 5-2)
.
[Audio]
“Audio operations” (page 3-16)
.
[MENU]
Touching [MENU] on the Launch Bar
will display the center page of the
HOME MENU screen.
.
[Map]
“Displaying navigation screen”
(page 6-3)
2-16 Getting started
.
[Connections]
“Connections settings” (page 223)
.
[Settings]
“System settings” (page 2-21)
*: [Phone] will be replaced by [CarPlay]
when Apple CarPlay (if equipped) is active,
and it will be replaced by [ ] when
Android Auto (if equipped) is active.
When pushing :
Shortcuts mainly for the audio functions
are displayed.
“Selecting audio source” (page 3-16)
When pushing (if equipped):
Shortcuts mainly for the navigation functions are displayed.
“Launch Bar” (page 6-3)
TOUCH PANEL
OPERATION
AV0NJA1-A1BF9C2C-4643-4997-9E6E-93C94C9905EC
The system can be controlled mainly by
the touch panel operation.
The following operations are examples of
the touch panel operation.
The map operations are also available
with touch panel operation.
“Map operation” (page 6-4)
. Touch
5GH0888X
Touch the item on the screen to
display the corresponding screen.
INFO:
Some keys function differently depending
on whether the key is touched briefly or
when it is being touched and held for a
few seconds.
.
Touch [
] to return to the screen
displayed previously.
Swipe/Flick
.
Touch [
] or [
] to skip to the
previous or next page.
Touch [
] or [
] (if equipped) to
scroll the message or list one item at
a time.
Horizontal scrolling
Indicates the total number of items in
the list and the entry number of the
selected item.
INFO:
Depending on the screens, swiping on the
touch screen can scroll pages vertically or
horizontally.
5GH0769X
5GH0767X
Menu screen pages will skip to the
next page when swiped/flicked horizontally.
Some of the list screens can also be
scrolled by swiping/flicking on the
screen vertically.
.
Touch [>] to scroll to the next page.
Indicates the position of the currently
displayed page.
MAIN SCREEN
OPERATIONS
AV0NJA1-B2704A91-F2DB-44B4-827A-4CF2E650F379
The following operations are generally
available on the various screen.
. Displaying previous screen
Scrolling list by selecting alphabet
Touch [<] to scroll to the previous
page.
.
Vertical scrolling
5GH0889X
Touch a preferred location within the
alphabetical list.
5GH0770X
5GH0768X
The detailed alphabetical list will be
shown. Touch to scroll the list items
to the section that begins with the
letter selected.
Example
Getting started 2-17
INFO:
When [A-Z] is displayed on the list screen,
touching [A-Z] and turning
< T U N E · S C R O L L / S O U N D > /
(if equipped) can
also select an alphabet to scroll.
ADJUSTING
SETTINGS
AV0NJA1-7511E082-9116-41D3-90B0-85329BDCEE4D
HOW TO INPUT LETTERS AND
NUMBERS
AV0NJA1-95CCE032-178B-4697-8BFB-8BB9856AFD9C
Basic operations to enter letters and
numbers are explained here.
Character and number input screens vary
depending on the conditions.
English character input screen (if
equipped)
AV0NJA1-9244CA6E-8CE8-4E92-9F93-3F3D3E32096E
Entered characters are displayed.
Touch to delete the last character
entered.
Touch and hold to delete all the
characters entered.
Touch to change the type of keyboard.
Touch to switch between the uppercase and lowercase character input
screen.
Touch to enter a space.
Touch to enter a character.
Touch to confirm the entry.
5GH0773X
Example
Touch adjustment keys, such as [-]/[+],
etc., to adjust each item. Each time a key
is touched, the indicator moves along the
bar.
For items with [ON] indicator, touch the
menu item to turn on/off the setting. The
indicator light will turn on when the
setting is turned on.
Arabic character input screen (if
equipped) GUID-0C210175-BB72-43B6-B88D-629B54F2776A
5GH0830X
Type A
PBH0001X
Touch to delete the last character
entered.
5GH0858X
Type B
2-18 Getting started
Touch and hold to delete all the
characters entered.
Entered characters are displayed.
Touch to change the type of keyboard.
Touch to enter a character.
Touch to enter a space.
Touch to confirm the entry.
HOW TO VIEW AND OPERATE
HOME MENU
SCREEN
AV0NJA1-CA23AE87-F50B-4970-A7BD-D9932C5241AB
Push / (if equipped)
to display the HOME MENU screen.
The HOME MENU consists of 3 pages
which can display preferred shortcuts
and widgets.
Customizing
HOME MENU screen
AV0NJA1-6891DABF-54F5-4264-BFFC-F75F8C5E4B9B
The HOME MENU screen can be personalized by selecting which shortcuts and
widgets are to be displayed and where to
place them on the screen.
Selecting shortcut or widget:
GEN5-N-120906-EB91730C-D0C7-441C-9028-C9C6F27A417B
NumberAV0NJA1-BCECD62B-4D09-48C9-997D-360243F5586E
input screen
5GH0831X
5GH0853X
Example
Entered numbers are displayed.
Touch to delete the last number
entered.
Touch and hold to delete all the
numbers entered.
Touch to enter a number.
Touch to confirm the entry.
Example
Shortcut icons:
Icons for frequently used menu items
can be placed on the HOME MENU
screens as shortcuts.
Widget:
Useful information from primary
menu functions can be displayed as
widgets. Depending on the contents
of the widget, keys may be available
for operation of the function.
5GH0862X
Example
1. Touch [Settings] on the Launch Bar.
2. Touch [Customise Home Menu].
3. Touch [Shortcuts] or [Widgets].
4. Drag the shortcut or widget icon to
each page layout .
If a different shortcut or a widget is
already located on the page layout ,
a message will be displayed. Touch
[Yes] to replace the shortcut/widget.
The page layout can be changed by
dragging the icons.
The categories of shortcuts can be
changed by touching [Category] .
Dragging an icon into the [ ]
can
Getting started 2-19
delete the current shortcut or widget
to create a blank spot.
INFO:
Available widgets categories:
. Models with navigation system
— [Phone]
— [Audio]
Touch [ ] , and then a message will
appear. While the message is displayed,
touching any icon on the page layout
and [Delete] can delete the selected icon.
To delete all icons, touch [Select All] and
then [Delete].
Available shortcut/widget categories:
— [Map]
— [Turn by Turn]
— [Clock]
— [Qibla Compass]
.
GEN5-N-120906-EB91730C-D0C7-441C-9028-C9C6F27A417B
Available shortcut categories:
. Models with navigation system
— [Audio]
— [Audio]
— [Clock]
— [Route]
— [Phone]
INFO:
.
Available items may vary depending
on models and specifications. Items
displayed on the screen may not
function depending on various conditions.
— [Destination]
.
Models without navigation system
— [Audio]
The HOME MENU screen can display
up to 8 shortcuts on a page.
.
Some widgets, such as [Audio], [Clock]
or etc., can be selected from 2 shortcut spot sizes and 4 shortcut spot
sizes. All other widgets require 4
shortcut spot sizes to be displayed.
— [Settings]
— [Info]
— [Voice Recognition]
.
Models without navigation system
— [Phone]
— [Phone]
— [Settings]
— [Voice Recognition] (if equipped)
2-20 Getting started
FUNCTIONS DISABLED WHILE
DRIVINGAV0NJA1-96075C82-A5BC-42F2-A4C5-DF0BB2863C3F
(if equipped)
To ensure safe driving, some functions
cannot be operated while driving.
The on-screen functions that are not
available while driving will be “grayedout” or muted. In some cases, certain text
will not be displayed on the screen.
To use these functions, first park the
vehicle in a safe location and then operate the system.
SYSTEM SETTINGS
AV0NJA1-811B4F8E-8E41-435D-BA44-76204FB0B276
The system settings can be changed for personal convenience.
SETTINGS
MENU
AV0NJA1-12A7E9D2-EBD5-4390-9640-2629B7A307F5
Touch [Settings] on the Launch Bar and touch a setting item you wish to adjust.
Available setting items may vary depending on models and specifications.
Available setting items
Setting item
Result
[Connections]
Displays the Bluetooth®, Wi-Fi and USB setting screen.
“Connections settings” (page 2-23)
[Phone]
Displays the Phone and text message settings screen.
“Phone and text message settings” (page 4-9)
[Navigation]
Displays the navigation settings screen.
“Navigation settings” (page 6-50)
[Sound]
Displays the audio settings screen.
“Audio settings” (page 3-36)
[Volume & Beeps]
Displays the volume adjustment screen.
“Volume and Beeps settings” (page 2-25)
[System Update]
[Version Information]
Displays the information of the Software Version, Map
Version, etc.
[Software Update]
The system software can be updated.
“Updating system software” (page 5-4)
[Map Update]
The map data can be updated.
“How to update map data” (page 6-58)
[Clock]
Displays the clock adjustment screen.
“Clock settings” (page 2-26)
[Customise Home Menu]
Displays the HOME MENU editing screen.
“Customizing HOME MENU screen” (page 2-19)
[Customise Audio Sources]
Displays the editing screen for audio source menus on the
Launch Bar.
“Selecting from Launch Bar” (page 3-17)
Getting started 2-21
[System Voice]
Displays the system voice settings screen.
“System Voice settings” (page 7-11)
[Camera]
Displays the camera settings screen.
See the vehicle Owner’s Manual for details of the monitor
system.
[More Settings]
[Apps]
[Display]
Displays the display settings screen.
“Display settings” (page 2-28)
[Language]
Displays the language settings screen.
“Language setting” (page 2-28)
[Units]
Displays the units settings screen.
“Units settings” (page 2-28)
[Keyboard Type]
Keyboard type can be selected.
“Keyboard type settings” (page 2-28)
[Return All Settings to Default]
This resets all settings to default.
“Return all settings to default” (page 2-29)
[Apple CarPlay]
Displays the Apple CarPlay settings screen.
“Apple CarPlay settings” (page 5-8)
[Android Auto]
Displays the Android Auto settings screen.
“Android Auto settings” (page 5-12)
INFO:
The system software and map (if equipped) update menus can also be accessed from [System Information] on the information
screen, even if the menus are not available from the settings screen.
“Information menu” (page 5-2)
2-22
Getting started
CONNECTIONS
SETTINGS
AV0NJA1-B1D6479B-2DE5-4B50-AD8F-54A4EC13EA7D
Changing the settings and viewing information of Bluetooth®, Wi-Fi and USB are
available on the Connections settings
screen.
Connecting cellular phone/audio device:
GEN5-N-120906-EB91730C-D0C7-441C-9028-C9C6F27A417B
INFO:
.
The paired phone will be added to the
list on the Bluetooth® connection
screen.
.
Touching name of the other device on
the list will switch the connected
device.
.
Touching [ ] will allow the device to
be connected via Bluetooth® and be
used on the Hands-Free Phone System.
.
Touching [ ] will allow the device to
be connected via Bluetooth® and be
used for Bluetooth® Audio.
.
Touching [ ] will display the information of the cellular phone.
.
Up to 6 Bluetooth® devices can be
connected. If 6 devices are already
connected, one of the devices must
first be deleted before another device
can be connected.
.
The pairing procedure of the cellular
phone varies according to each cellular phone. See the cellular phone
Owner’s Manual for the details.
.
Consult a NISSAN dealer for information regarding Bluetooth® device connection to your vehicle.
Setting Bluetooth®
AV0NJA1-BEE172A8-E0E0-4F75-8762-230628E44312
Your vehicle is equipped with the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System and
Bluetooth® audio device support. If you
are an owner of a compatible Bluetooth®
enabled cellular phone or Bluetooth®
audio device, you can set up the wireless
connection between your cellular phone
and the in-vehicle phone module or Bluetooth® audio device and in-vehicle audio
module. With Bluetooth® wireless technology, you can make or receive a telephone call with your cellular phone in
your pocket and listen to Bluetooth®
audio.
“Bluetooth® audio” (page 3-31)
“Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System” (page 4-2)
5GH0778X
To use the Bluetooth® device with the invehicle system for the first time, the
device connection operation is required.
1. Touch [Settings] on the Launch Bar.
2. Touch [Connections].
3. Touch [Bluetooth] and touch [Add
New]. A message is displayed.
4. Touch [Yes] to connect a cellular
phone. Touch [No] to connect an
audio device and operate as guided
by the system. (Operations may differ
depending on the device.)
NOTE:
Some cellular phones or other devices
may cause interference or a buzzing
noise to come from the audio system
speakers. Storing the device in a different location may reduce or eliminate
the noise.
Getting started
2-23
Bluetooth® settings:
GEN5-N-120906-EB91730C-D0C7-441C-9028-C9C6F27A417B
The Bluetooth® settings can be changed
according to your preference.
1. Touch [Settings] on the Launch Bar.
2. Touch [Connections].
3. Touch [Bluetooth].
4. Touch [ ].
Available setting items
Setting item
Action
[Bluetooth]
Turns the Bluetooth®
connection on/off.
[Device Name]
The device name can be
changed.
[PIN]
The PIN code can be
changed.
INFO:
With [Device Name], the device name that
appears on the screen can be changed
and be renamed from the name set as
default to the preferred name (such as
“Steve’s Car” for example).
4. Touch [ ] by the cellular phone name
you wish to delete.
5. Touch [Delete]. Touch [Yes] when a
message appears.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Wi-Fi Setting
AV0NJA1-58574DBB-6838-41C9-A054-FAC518DD656A
A Wi-Fi connection can be made by using
an available Wi-Fi network near the vehicle or tethering function of smartphone,
etc. Wi-Fi connectivity is useful for updating map data (if equipped) and system
software, or using online services such as
Online Search (if equipped) or Premium
Traffic (if equipped).
“Updating system software” (page 54)
“How to update map data” (page 658)
“Online Search” (page 6-20)
“Premium Traffic information” (page
6-40)
Indicates that a password is set.
Indicates the strength of the signal
the Wi-Fi device is receiving.
5. Enter the network password and
touch [OK]. The device will be connected.
If a listed device is in a status capable
of making Wi-Fi connection, touching
the device name on the list will start
the connection.
INFO:
.
Enter the password correctly, including capitalization.
.
Touching the [ ] will display the network information. Turning [Auto Connect] on will automatically connect
the vehicle to the network if the network is available.
.
The Wi-Fi hotspot communication is
not available on this system.
.
Enabling the Wi-Fi hotspot functionality of your smartphone may incur
additional charges from your cellular
provider. Consult your cellular provi-
Connecting to a Wi-Fi network:
GEN5-N-120906-EB91730C-D0C7-441C-9028-C9C6F27A417B
Deleting cellular phone/audio device:
GEN5-N-120906-EB91730C-D0C7-441C-9028-C9C6F27A417B
Paired phones can be deleted from the
list.
1. Touch [Settings] on the Launch Bar.
2. Touch [Connections].
3. Touch [Bluetooth].
2-24
Getting started
5GH0779X
To use the Wi-Fi connection for the first
time, the following connecting procedures are required.
Touch [Settings] on the Launch Bar.
Touch [Connections].
Touch [Wi-Fi].
Touch the name of the device you
wish to connect.
der contract regarding the communication fee.
.
System can connect to only WPA2
security network (not connect WEP,
WPA1 network).
3. Touch [Wi-Fi].
4. Touch [ ] by the name of the network you wish to delete.
5. Touch [Delete]. Touch [Yes] when a
message appears.
.
Wi-Fi networks that require a web
browser cannot be accessed through
this unit.
Displaying USB device information
AV0NJA1-0410F8D5-4D74-4C02-A786-2D75AB254FEC
Wi-Fi settings:
GEN5-N-120906-EB91730C-D0C7-441C-9028-C9C6F27A417B
The Wi-Fi settings can be changed according to your preference.
1. Touch [Settings] on the Launch Bar.
2. Touch [Connections].
3. Touch [Wi-Fi].
4. Touch [ ].
5. Touch a preferred item.
Available setting items
Setting item
Action
[Wi-Fi]
Turns the Wi-Fi connection on/off.
[Security]
The used cipher system
is displayed.
Deleting Wi-Fi network:
GEN5-N-120906-EB91730C-D0C7-441C-9028-C9C6F27A417B
The stored Wi-Fi network can be deleted
from the list.
1. Touch [Settings] on the Launch Bar.
2. Touch [Connections].
The information of the connected USB
device can be viewed.
“USB memory device player” (page 325)
VOLUME AV0NJA1-210F184A-892E-4546-8D2A-0868DA7C4F52
AND BEEPS SETTINGS
The volume of various functions including
audio, phone, navigation voice guidance
(if equipped), and system beeps can be
adjusted.
1. Touch [Settings] on the Launch Bar.
2. Touch [Volume & Beeps].
Available setting items may vary depending on models and specifications.
Available setting items
Setting item
Action
[Audio Volume]
Adjusts the volume level
of the audio system.
[Guidance Volume]
Adjusts the volume level
of the navigation guidance voice.
[Ringtone]
Adjusts the volume level
of the ringtone of incoming calls.
5GH0780X
1.
2.
3.
4.
Touch [Settings] on the Launch Bar.
Touch [Connections].
Touch [USB].
Touch the name of the device you
wish to check. The name and the type
of the device are displayed.
[Outgoing Call] Adjusts the volume level
of the outgoing calls.
[Button Beeps] Turns on/off the button
beep sound and alarm for
prohibited operations.
[Guidance
Voice]
Turns on/off the voice
guidance.
Getting started 2-25
CLOCK SETTINGS
AV0NJA1-6FB05DB7-7A72-4B43-A7A5-4796C1370711
Clock settings of the system can be changed.
1. Touch [Settings] on the Launch Bar.
2. Touch [Clock].
Available setting items may vary depending on models and specifications.
Available setting items
Setting item 1
Setting item 2
[On-Screen Clock]
[Clock Mode]
[Clock Format]
Action
Sets the clock display on/off. When this item is on, the clock display
appears.
[Auto]
Adjusts clock time automatically using Global Navigation Satellite
System (GNSS).
[Time Zone]
Adjusts clock time reflecting selected time zone.
[Manual]
Reflects [Set Clock Manually] settings.
[12H]
The clock can be set to 12 hours or 24 hours.
[24H]
[Date Format]
The display format of the day, month and year display can be
selected.
[Offset (hour)]
Adjusts the offset value (hour/minutes). [Clock Mode] must be set
to [Auto] or [Time Zone] for this option.
[Offset (min.)]
[Summer Time]
Turns on/off the summer time setting. This option becomes
available only when [Clock Mode] is set to [Time Zone].
[Time Zone]
Select an appropriate time zone from the list. [Clock Mode] must be
set to [Time Zone] for this option to be available.
[Set Clock Manually]
Adjusts the clock manually. Touch [+] or [-] to adjust the hours,
minutes, day, month and year up or down. When [Clock Format] is
set to [12H], [AM]/[PM] can be selected.
Models with navigation system:
[Clock Mode] must be set to [Manual] for this option to be available.
2-26 Getting started
INFO:
When the [On-Screen Clock] setting is turned on, the clock settings screen can also be displayed by touching the clock at the upper
right corner of the screen.
Getting started 2-27
DISPLAY AV0NJA1-6BF6BB79-7BC5-47FC-AE67-09BC1505C4C5
SETTINGS
Display settings can be adjusted.
1. Touch [Settings] on the Launch Bar.
2. Touch [More Settings].
3. Touch [Display].
4. Touch a preferred item to adjust the
setting.
Available setting items
touch screen display, voice announcements, and the Voice Recognition System
(if equipped).
INFO:
.
Setting item Action
[Display]
Turns the screen off.
Pushing and holding <
>
will also turn off the screen.
Push <
> to turn the
screen back on.
[Brightness]
Adjusts the brightness of
the display.
[Contrast]
Adjusts the contrast of the
display.
[Black Level]
Adjusts the black level of the
display.
.
2-28 Getting started
When [Sync with Driver Information
Display] (if equipped) is turned on,
changing the language setting on
the vehicle information display will
also change the language setting of
the touch screen display.
.
Models with navigation system:
If the language is not set to the
standard language of the current
vehicle position, the route guidance,
etc. for map operation are not available.
.
Do not change the position of the
ignition switch while changing the
language.
LANGUAGE
SETTING
AV0NJA1-D7E9171E-3B1C-414A-AD30-925AD34D89F6
This changes the language used in the
system.
1. Touch [Settings] on the Launch Bar.
2. Touch [More Settings].
3. Touch [Language].
Selects the preferred system language.
The language setting is applied to the
Depending on the models, if the selected language is also supported by
the vehicle information display, a confirmation message asking if you also
wish to change the vehicle information display language is displayed.
Select [Yes] to apply the language
setting to the vehicle information display as well.
UNITS SETTINGS
(if equipped)
AV0NJA1-5357F055-6C98-47D0-8C9F-E8D92E236164
This changes the units used in the
system.
1. Touch [Settings] on the Launch Bar.
2. Touch [More Settings].
3. Touch [Units].
Setting item
Action
[Distance]
Select the distance
unit.
[Temperature]
Select the temperature unit.
INFO:
.
Do not change the position of the
ignition switch while changing the
units for distance or temperature.
.
Depending on the models, unit settings of the vehicle information display and the touch screen display may
be linked, and changing one of the
unit settings may also change the unit
setting of the other.
KEYBOARD
TYPE SETTINGS
AV0NJA1-9DE94100-E084-401F-AEC3-2D71C2119A0B
The keyboard layout of the character
input screens can be selected.
1. Touch [Settings] on the Launch Bar.
2. Touch [More Settings].
3. Touch [Keyboard Type]. The type of
keyboard switches between [ABC] and
[QWERTY].
RETURN ALL SETTINGS TO DEFAULT AV0NJA1-F8F3CD4E-6B1E-4129-A4B4-C7A452414D93
This resets all settings to default.
1. Touch [Settings] on the Launch Bar.
2. Touch [More Settings].
3. Touch [Return All Settings to Default].
4. A confirmation message is displayed.
Touch [Yes] to set the settings to
default.
Getting started
2-29
MEMO
2-30
Getting started
3 Audio system
Audio operation precautions .............................................
...
3-2
Radio ...............................................................................................
...
3-2
Compact Disc (CD) player (if equipped) ..............
...
3-3
USB (Universal Serial Bus) connection port ......... 3-4
Compressed Audio Files (MP3/WMA/AAC) .......
... 3-5
Bluetooth® audio ...................................................................
...
3-9
Names and functions of audio
control buttons ..........................................................................
...
3-10
Audio main buttons (Type A) ...................................
...
3-10
Audio main buttons (Type B) ...................................
...
3-11
Audio main buttons (Type C) ...................................
...
3-12
Audio main buttons (Type D) ...................................
...
3-13
Audio main buttons (Type E) ....................................
...
3-14
Audio control steering wheel switches
(Type A) ......................................................................................
...
3-14
Audio control steering wheel switches
(Type B) ......................................................................................
...
3-15
Audio control steering wheel switches
(Type C) ......................................................................................
...
3-15
Audio control steering wheel switches
(Type D) ....................................................................................
...
Audio control steering column switches
(if equipped) .........................................................................
...
Audio operations ......................................................................
...
Audio main operation ..................................................
...
Radio ..........................................................................................
...
Compact disc (CD) player (if equipped) .........
...
USB memory device player .....................................
...
iPod player ............................................................................
...
Bluetooth® audio .............................................................
...
Auxiliary (AUX) devices .................................................
...
Smartphone audio (if equipped) .........................
...
Audio settings .............................................................................
...
Audio adjustments with audio adjust bar
(if equipped) .........................................................................
...
CD/USB memory device care and cleaning .......
...
CD (if equipped) ................................................................
...
USB memory device ......................................................
...
3-15
3-16
3-16
3-16
3-18
3-23
3-25
3-28
3-31
3-34
3-35
3-36
3-37
3-37
3-37
3-38
AUDIO OPERATION PRECAUTIONS
AV0NJA1-B0DBBB37-B849-425F-902A-DDABE30FE9B4
CAUTION:
.
Operate the audio system only when
the vehicle engine is running. Operating the audio system for extended
periods of time with the engine
turned off can discharge the vehicle
battery.
.
Do not allow the system to get wet.
Excessive moisture such as spilled
liquids may cause the system to
malfunction.
RADIO
AV0NJA1-2E7BDA12-EFEE-40F2-BD7E-0C1AD5ECA109
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
position before turning on the radio. If
you listen to the radio with the engine not
running, the ignition switch should be
placed in the ACC position.
Radio reception is affected by station
signal strength, distance from radio
transmitter, buildings, bridges, mountains
and other external influences. Intermittent changes in reception quality normally are caused by these external
influences.
Using a cellular phone in or near the
vehicle may influence radio reception
quality.
3-2
Audio system
Radio reception
AV0NJA1-89FE3704-0B57-4447-88CD-7BD9D337A7DC
Your radio system is equipped with stateof-the-art electronic circuits to enhance
radio reception. These circuits are designed to extend reception range, and to
enhance the quality of that reception.
However there are some general characteristics of both FM and AM radio signals
that can affect radio reception quality in a
moving vehicle, even when the finest
equipment is used. These characteristics
are completely normal in a given reception area, and do not indicate any malfunction in your radio system.
Reception conditions will constantly
change because of vehicle movement.
Buildings, terrain, signal distance and
interference from other vehicles can work
against ideal reception. Described below
are some of the factors that can affect
your radio reception.
Some cellular phones or other devices
may cause interference or a buzzing
noise to come from the audio system
speakers. Storing the device in a different
location may reduce or eliminate the
noise.
FM radioAV0NJA1-275BC1BF-3C52-437B-9A90-2B55439E4402
reception
5GA0053X
Range: FM range is normally limited to 40
to 48 km (25 to 30 miles), with monaural
(single station) FM having slightly more
range than stereo FM. External influences
may sometimes interfere with FM station
reception even if the FM station is within
40 km (25 miles). The strength of the FM
signal is directly related to the distance
between the transmitter and receiver. FM
signals follow a line-of-sight path, exhibiting many of the same characteristics as
light. For example they will reflect off
objects.
Fade and drift: As your vehicle moves
away from a station transmitter, the
signals will tend to fade and/or drift.
Static and flutter: During signal interference from buildings, large hills or due to
antenna position, usually in conjunction
with an increased distance from the
station transmitter, static or flutter can
be heard. This can be reduced by low-
ering the treble setting to reduce the
treble response.
Multipath reception: Because of the reflective characteristics of FM signals, direct and reflected signals reach the
receiver at the same time. The signals
may cancel each other, resulting in momentary flutter or loss of sound.
AM radioAV0NJA1-F3C8ECE4-EFC7-4ED4-9553-9C805FE5ED54
reception
AM signals, because of their low frequency, can bend around objects and
skip along the ground. In addition, the
signals can bounce off the ionosphere
and be bent back to earth. Because of
these characteristics, AM signals are also
subject to interference as they travel from
transmitter to receiver.
Fading: Occurs while the vehicle is passing through motorway underpasses or
in areas with many tall buildings. It can
also occur for several seconds during
ionospheric turbulence even in areas
where no obstacles exist.
Static: Caused by thunderstorms, electrical power lines, electric signs and even
traffic lights.
Digital Audio Broadcast (DAB) (if
equipped) GUID-34901E7D-82CD-4E5D-BE99-167F6834F540
The supported standards for this system
are DAB and DAB+.
HD Radio Technology reception (if
equipped) GUID-77F75B6E-2ED4-44AB-BDB3-A81D6FC8D71B
COMPACT DISC (CD) PLAYER (if
equipped)GUID-64CD3532-BE0B-4C5D-AC76-E8DC09533108
HD Radio Technology reception needs to
be activated to receive HD Radio broadcasts.
“Radio” (page 3-18)
This enables you to receive radio broadcasts digitally (where available), providing
a better quality sound with clear reception. When this feature is not activated or
HD Radio broadcasts are not available,
you will receive analog radio (AM/FM)
broadcasts.
SAA0480
.
Do not force a CD into the CD slot. This
could damage the CD and/or CD
player.
.
Trying to load a CD with the CD door
closed could damage the CD and/or
CD player.
.
During cold weather or rainy days, the
player may malfunction due to the
Audio system 3-3
humidity. If this occurs, remove the CD
and dehumidify or ventilate the player
completely.
.
The player may skip while driving on
rough roads.
.
The CD player sometimes cannot
function when the passenger compartment temperature is extremely
high. Decrease the temperature before use.
.
Only use high quality 12 cm (4.7 in)
round discs that have the “COMPACT
disc DIGITAL AUDIO” logo on the disc
or packaging.
.
Do not expose the CD to direct sunlight.
.
CDs that are of poor quality, dirty,
scratched, covered with fingerprints
or that have pin holes may not work
properly.
.
The following CDs may not work
properly:
— Copy control compact discs (CCCD)
— Recordable compact discs (CD-R)
— Rewritable compact discs (CD-RW)
.
Do not use the following CDs as they
may cause the CD player to malfunction.
— 8 cm (3.1 in) discs
3-4
Audio system
— CDs that are not round
— CDs with a paper label
— CDs that are warped, scratched, or
have abnormal edges
.
This audio system can only play prerecorded CDs. It has no capabilities to
record or burn CDs.
.
If the CD cannot be played, one of the
following messages will be displayed.
Disc read error:
Indicates a CLV, Focus, TOC or Access
error. Check and reinsert the CD. Make
sure that it is inserted correctly.
Please eject disc:
Indicates a mechanism error. If the CD
can be ejected, eject and reinsert the
CD. If the CD cannot be ejected, it is
recommended you visit a NISSAN
dealer for service.
Unplayable file:
Indicates that a readable file is not
found on the inserted CD. Check the
data in your CD.
USB (Universal Serial Bus) CONNECTIONAV0NJA1-B14770CC-B357-4196-BAA4-5BEF948ED871
PORT
WARNING:
Do not connect, disconnect or operate
the USB device while driving. Doing so
can be a distraction. If distracted you
could lose control of your vehicle and
cause an accident or serious injury.
CAUTION:
.
Do not force the USB device into the
USB connection port. Inserting the
USB device tilted or up-side-down
into the port may damage the port.
Make sure that the USB device is
connected correctly into the USB
connection port.
.
Do not grab the USB connection port
cover (if equipped) when pulling the
USB device out of the port. This
could damage the port and the
cover.
.
Do not leave the USB cable in a place
where it can be pulled unintentionally. Pulling the cable may damage
the port.
The vehicle is not equipped with a USB
device. USB devices should be purchased
separately as necessary.
This system cannot be used to format
USB devices. To format a USB device, use
a personal computer.
This system supports various USB memory devices, USB hard drives and iPod
players. Some USB devices may not be
supported by this system.
. Partitioned USB devices may not be
played correctly.
.
Some characters used in other languages (Chinese, Japanese, etc.) are
not displayed properly on the display.
Using English language characters
with a USB device is recommended.
General notes for USB use:
Refer to your device manufacturer’s owner information regarding the proper care
of the device.
Notes for iPod use:
iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
. Improperly plugging in the iPod may
cause a checkmark to be displayed on
and off (flickering). Always make sure
that the iPod is connected properly.
.
parts of sound that seem inaudible
to most people.
.
.
Bit rate — Bit rate denotes the number
of bits per second used by a digital
music file. The size and quality of a
compressed digital audio file is determined by the bit rate used when
encoding the file.
.
Sampling frequency — Sampling frequency is the rate at which the
samples of a signal are converted
from analog to digital (A/D conversion) per second.
.
Multisession — Multisession is one of
the methods for writing data to media. Writing data once to the media is
called a single session, and writing
more than once is called a multisession.
.
ID3/WMA tag — The ID3/WMA tag is
the part of the encoded MP3 or WMA
file that contains information about
the digital music file such as song title,
artist, album title, encoding bit rate,
track time duration, etc. ID3 tag in-
Audiobooks may not play in the same
order as they appear on an iPod.
COMPRESSED AUDIO FILES (MP3/
WMA/AAC)
AV0NJA1-59506932-77E0-4626-8C21-4A60DD222070
Explanation
of terms
AV0NJA1-EB91730C-D0C7-441C-9028-C9C6F27A417B
.
MP3 — MP3 is short for Moving Pictures Experts Group Audio Layer 3.
MP3 is the most well-known compressed digital audio file format. This
format allows for near “CD quality”
sound, but at a fraction of the size of
normal audio files. MP3 conversion of
an audio track can reduce the file size
by approximately a 10:1 ratio (Sampling: 44.1 kHz, Bit rate: 128 kbps) with
virtually no perceptible loss in quality.
The compression reduces certain
WMA — Windows Media Audio (WMA) is
a compressed audio format created
by Microsoft as an alternative to MP3.
The WMA codec offers greater file
compression than the MP3 codec,
enabling storage of more digital audio
tracks in the same amount of space
when compared to MP3s at the same
level of quality.
formation is displayed on the Album/
Artist/Track title line on the display.
.
AAC — Advanced Audio Coding (AAC)
is a compressed audio format. AAC
offers greater file compression than
MP3 and enables music file creation
and storage at the same quality as
MP3.
PlaybackAV0NJA1-2A8E94F5-2F22-4C97-ACEA-E869F1816CEF
order
SAA2494
Audio system
3-5
.
Names of folders not containing compressed audio files are not shown on
the display.
.
The playback order is the order in
which the files were written by the
writing software, so the files might not
play in the desired order.
.
Music playback order of compressed
audio files is as illustrated.
3-6 Audio system
Specification chart for CD (if equipped)
GUID-19A9BCB1-4943-42BC-AD47-91E924E3EE85
Supported media
CD, CD-R*5, CD-RW*5
Supported file systems
CD, CD-R*5, CD-RW*5
MP3
Supported versions*1
WMA*2
AAC*3
Version
MPEG1 Audio Layer3, MPEG2 Audio Layer3
Sampling frequency
MPEG1 Audio Layer3: 32kHz, 44.1kHz, 48kHz
MPEG2 Audio Layer3: 16kHz, 22.05kHz, 24kHz
Bit rate
MPEG1 Audio Layer3: 32 kbps - 320 kbps
MPEG2 Audio Layer3: 8 kbps - 160 kbps
Version
WMA7, WMA8, WMA9, WMA9.1, WMA9.2
Bit rate/Sampling frequency
Bit rate: Ver7, Ver8: 32-192kbps Ver9,Ver9.1,Ver9.2:32-192kbps, VBR
Sampling frequency: Ver7, Ver8:8k/11.025k/16k/22k/32k/44.1k Ver9,Ver9.1,
Ver9.2:8k/11.025k/16k/22k/32k/44.1k/48 kHz
Bit rate/Sampling frequency
Bit rate: 8-256 kbps, VBR
Sampling frequency: 11.025-48kHz
Tag information (Song title, Artist name and Album
name)
ID3 tag VER1.0, VER1.1, VER2.2, VER2.3, VER2.4 (MP3 only)
WMA tag (WMA only)
AAC tag (AAC only)
Folder levels
CD, CD-R*5, CD-RW*5: Folder levels: 8, Folders: 255 (including root folder), Files: 510
(Max. 255 files for one folder)
Displayable character codes*4
01: SHIFT-JIS, ASCII, ISO-8859-1, UTF-8, UTF-16 BOM, UTF-16 Big Endian, UTF-16 Little
Endian, 02: UNICODE, 03: UTF-16
*1 Files created with a combination of 48 kHz sampling frequency and 64 kbps bit rate cannot be played.
*2 Protected WMA files (DRM) cannot be played.
*3 Made by iTunes.
*4 Available codes depend on what kind of media, versions and information are going to be displayed.
*5 May not be operated with the Voice Recognition System.
“7. Voice recognition”
Audio system
3-7
Specification chart for USB
AV0NJA1-6D2C4A13-89EC-4642-A614-FF0B956F762C
Supported media
USB2.0
Supported file systems
FAT16, FAT32
Folder levels
Folder levels: 8, Files via folder: 255, Folders: 512 (including root folder), Files: 8000
Tag information (Song title, Artist name and ID3 tag VER1.0, VER1.1, VER2.2, VER2.3, VER2.4 (MP3 only)
Album name)
WMA tag (WMA only)
AAC tag (AAC only)
Format
MP3 *1
MPEG1
MPEG2
Layer-3
Sampling frequency
Supported bitrate
32, 44.1, 48 kHz
32-320 kbps
16, 22.05, 24 kHz
8-160 kbps
8, 11.025, 16 ,22.05, 32, 44.1, 48 kHz
12-192 kbps
AAC (MPEG4) *3 (Extension “m4a” only)
11.025, 16, 22.05, 32, 44.1, 48 kHz
8-320 kbps
FLAC
8-192 kHz
128 kbps - 12,288 Mbps
WAV
8-192 kHz
128 kbps - 12,288 Mbps
WMA *2
*1 MPEG2.5 is not supported.
*2 WMA7, WMA8, WMA9, WMA9.1, WMA9.2 are supported. (WMA9 Professional, Lossless, Voice are not supported.)
*3 Only AAC files encoded by iTunes are supported. HE-AAC (High-Efficiency) is not supported.
3-8 Audio system
BLUETOOTH®
AUDIO
AV0NJA1-24BDA0F9-283E-4615-995E-7F61FFF7F7B7
.
Some Bluetooth® audio devices may
not be recognized by the in-vehicle
audio system.
.
It is necessary to set up the wireless
connection between a compatible
Bluetooth® audio device and the invehicle Bluetooth® module before
using the Bluetooth® audio.
.
The Bluetooth® audio may stop playing when
— receiving a hands-free call.
(A2DP) and Audio/Video Remote Control Profile (AVRCP).
.
Wireless LAN (Wi-Fi) and the Bluetooth® functions share the same frequency band (2.4 GHz). Using the
Bluetooth® and the wireless LAN functions at the same time may slow down
or disconnect the communication and
cause undesired noise. It is recommended that you turn off the wireless
LAN (Wi-Fi) when using the Bluetooth®
functions.
— checking the connection to the
hands-free phone.
— connecting the hands-free phone
or the audio device.
— downloading the phonebook memory from the connected cellular
phone.
.
Do not place a Bluetooth® audio
device in an area surrounded by metal
or far away from the in-vehicle Bluetooth® module to prevent tone quality
degradation and wireless connection
disruption.
.
While an audio device is connected
through a Bluetooth® wireless connection, the battery of the device may
discharge quicker than usual.
.
This system supports the Bluetooth®
Advanced Audio Distribution Profile
Audio system 3-9
NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF
AUDIO CONTROL BUTTONS
AV0NJA1-AABAE45E-5D0B-46C4-B8C5-63D6B3725503
item on the screen is highlighted, the
audio settings can be adjusted.
“Audio adjustments with audio
adjust bar” (page 3-37)
AUDIO MAIN BUTTONS (Type A)
AV0NJA1-BF54B88E-4C49-415B-A092-1CE4DFB2AE85
<
/SOUND> (if equipped):
Push to select the highlighted item
when a menu screen is displayed.
When this button is pushed when no
item on the screen is highlighted, the
audio settings can be adjusted.
“Audio adjustments with audio
adjust bar” (page 3-37)
:
Push to display the audio screen.
Push again to display the audio
source menu screen.
“Selecting audio source” (page 316)
:
Push to turn on/off the audio system.
The audio system can also be turned
on if the button is turned when the
system is turned off.
Turn to adjust the volume.
<
>/<
>:
5GA0240X
Push to select and rewind/fast-forward tracks and to tune radio stations.
:
Depending on the screen, pushing
the button will display the previous
screen.
equipped):
(if
Turn to manually tune AM/FM/DAB (if
equipped) or to skip the tracks.
Push to select the highlighted item
when a menu screen is displayed.
When this button is pushed when no
3-10
Audio system
AUDIO MAIN BUTTONS (Type B)
audio settings can be adjusted.
“Audio adjustments with audio
adjust bar” (page 3-37)
GUID-9328DC27-1B37-4658-96CE-DE924E44CFDB
:
Push to display the audio screen.
Push again to display the audio
source menu screen.
“Selecting audio source” (page 316)
:
Push to turn on/off the audio system.
The audio system can also be turned
on if the button is turned when the
system is turned off.
Turn to adjust the volume.
<
>/<
>:
5GA0259X
Push to select and rewind/fast-forward tracks and to tune radio stations.
:
Depending on the screen, pushing
the button will display the previous
screen.
:
Turn to manually tune AM/FM or to
skip the tracks.
Push to select the highlighted item
when a menu screen is displayed.
When this button is pushed when no
item on the screen is highlighted, the
Audio system
3-11
AUDIO MAIN BUTTONS (Type C)
GUID-80D13E42-BE5D-43B3-9FF3-C245D896EDEC
:
Push to display the audio screen.
Push again to display the audio
source menu screen.
“Selecting audio source” (page 316)
<
>/<
>:
Push to select and rewind/fast-forward tracks and to tune radio stations.
<
>:
Depending on the screen, pushing
the button will display the previous
screen.
3-12 Audio system
:
5GA0260X
Push to turn on/off the audio system.
The audio system can also be turned
on if the button is turned when the
system is turned off.
Turn to adjust the volume.
AUDIO MAIN BUTTONS (Type D)
GUID-051EB075-6F2C-4BAE-BEBE-C7B517E49DE9
:
screen.
PBA0014X
Push to turn on/off the audio system.
The audio system can also be turned
on if the button is turned when the
system is turned off.
equipped):
Turn to adjust the volume.
<
>/<
>:
Push to select and rewind/fast-forward tracks and to tune radio stations.
Push to select the highlighted item
when a menu screen is displayed.
When this button is pushed when no
item on the screen is highlighted, the
audio settings can be adjusted.
“Audio adjustments with audio
adjust bar” (page 3-37)
:
Push to display the audio screen.
Push again to display the audio
source menu screen.
“Selecting audio source” (page 316)
<
>:
Depending on the screen, pushing
the button will display the previous
(if
Turn to manually tune AM/FM or to
skip the tracks.
<
/SOUND> (if equipped):
Push to select the highlighted item
when a menu screen is displayed.
When this button is pushed when no
item on the screen is highlighted, the
audio settings can be adjusted.
“Audio adjustments with audio
adjust bar” (page 3-37)
Audio system
3-13
AUDIO MAIN BUTTONS (Type E)
audio settings can be adjusted.
“Audio adjustments with audio
adjust bar” (page 3-37)
GUID-2C6188E3-BB3D-4C00-9E73-7308C88E35D6
<
/OK> (if equipped):
Push to select the highlighted item
when a menu screen is displayed.
When this button is pushed when no
item on the screen is highlighted, the
audio settings can be adjusted.
“Audio adjustments with audio
adjust bar” (page 3-37)
:
Depending on the screen, pushing
the button will display the previous
screen.
<
>:
Push to eject a CD.
CD slot:
Insert a CD with the label side facing
up.
<
>/<
>:
Push to select and rewind/fast-forward tracks and to tune radio stations.
16)
PBA0015X
:
Push to turn on/off the audio system.
The audio system can also be turned
on if the button is turned when the
system is turned off.
Turn to adjust the volume.
:
(if equipped):
Turn to manually tune AM/FM/DAB (if
equipped) or to skip the tracks.
Push to display the audio screen.
Push again to display the audio
source menu screen.
“Selecting audio source” (page 3-
Push to select the highlighted item
when a menu screen is displayed.
When this button is pushed when no
item on the screen is highlighted, the
3-14 Audio system
AUDIO CONTROL STEERING
WHEEL SWITCHES
(Type A)
AV0NJA1-8D8B77B0-542F-4040-8910-08948E84EDF4
5GA0187X
<
> (Volume control):
Push the + or - side of the switch to
adjust the volume.
<
>/<
>:
<
Use the switches for audio operations.
“Audio operations” (page 3-16)
> (Volume control):
INFO:
Push the + or - side of the switch to
adjust the volume.
INFO:
INFO:
Steering wheel switches are mainly for
the vehicle information display control
and may not be able to operate the touch
screen display depending on the conditions.
AUDIO CONTROL STEERING
WHEEL SWITCHES
(Type B)
GUID-CE853DE9-5C2E-4A80-B487-AB0600BACACF
Steering wheel switches are mainly for
the vehicle information display control
and may not be able to operate the touch
screen display depending on the conditions.
Steering wheel switches are mainly for
the vehicle information display control
and may not be able to operate the touch
screen display depending on the conditions.
AUDIO CONTROL STEERING
WHEEL SWITCHES
(Type D)
GUID-1C75E92C-7A36-4FB7-968A-BCCBB480127C
AUDIO CONTROL STEERING
WHEEL SWITCHES
(Type C)
GUID-EFAC44B2-3FBC-4117-B0B8-8647BEEFB367
5GH0884X
:
5GA0262X
5GA0276X
:
:
Push to change the audio source.
<
/
>:
Use the switch for audio operations.
“Audio operations” (page 3-16)
Push to change the audio source.
<
/
>:
Use the switch for audio operations.
“Audio operations” (page 3-16)
Push to change the audio source.
<
/
>:
Use the switch for audio operations.
“Audio operations” (page 3-16)
<
> (Volume control):
Push the + or - side of the switch to
adjust the volume.
<
> (Volume control):
Push the + or - side of the switch to
adjust the volume.
Audio system
3-15
AUDIO OPERATIONS
AV0NJA1-8910DA01-FA52-4035-BC56-AEEA46A2B06E
:
INFO:
Steering wheel switches are mainly for
the vehicle information display control
and may not be able to operate the touch
screen display depending on the conditions.
AUDIO CONTROL STEERING COLUMN SWITCHES
(if equipped)
GUID-ADB9BECC-F33F-48CE-8C90-16715CB70F69
Push to change the audio source.
<
> (Volume control):
Push the + or - side of the switch from
behind to adjust the volume.
Tuning wheel:
Use the tuning wheel for audio operations.
“Audio operations” (page 3-16)
AUDIO MAIN
OPERATION
AV0NJA1-21A3D1F2-D88E-4CCE-B170-B9485A368E7F
Turning audio
system on/off
AV0NJA1-DEC1D39C-0B79-4535-9FBF-86BD31187CDD
The ignition switch must be in the ACC or
ON position to turn on the audio system.
Push / or
to turn on the last audio
source that was playing immediately
before the system was turned off. To
turn off the audio system, push / again.
INFO:
The audio system can also be turned on
by turning /
when the system is turned off.
SelectingAV0NJA1-2A84B441-03C2-4E17-9A89-AC3DD54D9273
audio source
PBA0017X
Selecting from source menu screen:
GEN5-N-120906-EB91730C-D0C7-441C-9028-C9C6F27A417B
Front view
5GA0253X
PBA0018X
Back view
3-16 Audio system
Example
1. Push when the audio screen
is displayed.
2. Select an audio source you prefer to
play.
INFO:
.
.
Selecting using steering column switch
(if equipped):
Touching [Source] on the upper left
corner of the audio screen will also
display the audio source menu screen.
GEN5-N-120906-EB91730C-D0C7-441C-9028-C9C6F27A417B
For models with on
the steering column, the audio source
can be changed by pushing the switch.
Depending on the models, the audio
source can also be changed by operating the vehicle information display.
Refer to the vehicle Owner’s Manual
for the detail of the vehicle information display.
Selecting from Launch Bar:
GEN5-N-120906-EB91730C-D0C7-441C-9028-C9C6F27A417B
5GA0254X
Example
1. Push or touch [Source], while
the Audio screen is displayed.
2. Touch [Customise Audio Sources].
3. Drag the preferred source icon to the
Launch Bar.
4. Push /<
> or touch [
] to
confirm the setting.
5GA0242X
Example
The source icons are displayed on the
Launch Bar. Touch the icon to select the
preferred audio source.
Customizing Launch Bar:
The source icons displayed on the Launch
Bar can be customized.
INFO:
[Customise Audio Sources] can also
be accessed from [Settings] on the
Launch Bar.
“System settings” (page 2-21)
Selecting using steering wheel switch (if
equipped):
GEN5-N-120906-EB91730C-D0C7-441C-9028-C9C6F27A417B
For models with on the
steering wheel, the audio source can be
changed by pushing the switch.
Audio system
3-17
RADIO
[AM Menu]/[FM Menu]/[DAB Menu] (if
equipped):
AV0NJA1-952EDDB7-2BDB-4ADF-BF9F-C1407C8FAA3E
How to view radio screen
Touch to display the radio menu
screen.
“Radio Menu” (page 3-21)
AV0NJA1-C7E211CC-F05B-44A2-86A6-770B8278B318
[Source]:
Touch to switch to the source menu
screen.
“Selecting audio source” (page 316)
Audio source indicator:
Indicates the currently selected audio
source.
Reception information display:
Reception information currently
available such as frequency, station
name, etc. is displayed.
Album artwork (if equipped)/turn direction indicator (if equipped):
When a navigation route is set, turning direction and the distance to the
next turn are displayed.
When in the HD Radio mode (if
equipped), images or album artworks
are displayed by the currently playing
station.
PBA0038X
3-18
Audio system
[Tune] (if equipped):
Touch to select a station by entering
a radio frequency.
“Direct tuning” (page 3-19)
Preset list:
To listen to a preset station, touch
the corresponding station from the
preset list. If displayed, touch [ < ] or [
> ] to scroll the preset list.
Touch and hold one of the keys in the
preset list to store the currently
playing station to that key location.
“Presetting” (page 3-20)
HD Radio mode on/off key (if
equipped):
The HD Radio mode turns on and the
indicator light comes on by touching
it while the AM or FM radio screen is
displayed.
INFO:
you will receive analog radio (AM/FM)
broadcasts.
— Tilt and hold <
/
>*
>*
Radio operation (models with fast
tuning function)
GUID-80A929F3-7DCC-4A07-8E24-1D5FD0478011
*: if equipped
Radio activation and band selection:
Fast tune to stations with the following
operation.
. Control panel
>/<
>
— Push and hold <
GEN5-N-120906-EB91730C-D0C7-441C-9028-C9C6F27A417B
To listen to the radio, turn on the audio
system and select a preferred radio band.
“Selecting audio source” (page 3-16)
INFO:
When the stereo broadcast signal is weak,
the radio will automatically change from
stereo to monaural reception.
Tuning:
GEN5-N-120906-EB91730C-D0C7-441C-9028-C9C6F27A417B
Tune to stations manually with the following operations.
. Control panel
— Turn *
.
When TA (Traffic Announcement)
setting (if equipped) is turned on, the
TA indicator will be displayed in the
upper right of the screen.
“Radio Menu” (page 3-21)
.
TA indicator (if equipped) is also displayed on the screen of other audio
sources.
*: if equipped
HD Radio (if equipped) reception
needs to be enabled to receive HD
Radio broadcasts. This enables you to
receive radio broadcasts digitally
(where available), providing a better
quality sound with clear reception.
When this feature is not enabled or
HD Radio broadcasts are not available,
Seek up/down to the next/previous receivable station with the following operations.
. Control panel
— Push <
>/<
>
.
>/<
— Push and hold <
— Turn *
Seek tuning:
GEN5-N-120906-EB91730C-D0C7-441C-9028-C9C6F27A417B
.
Steering wheel switches*
Fast tuning:
GEN5-N-120906-EB91730C-D0C7-441C-9028-C9C6F27A417B
Direct tuning (if equipped):
GEN5-N-120906-EB91730C-D0C7-441C-9028-C9C6F27A417B
To directly tune to the preferred stations,
touch [Tune] on the radio screen and
then enter the radio frequency.
Presetting:
GEN5-N-120906-EB91730C-D0C7-441C-9028-C9C6F27A417B
Up to 6 for AM, 12 for FM stations can be
registered in the preset list.
1. Select a radio band (AM or FM).
2. Tune to the station you wish to store.
3. Touch and hold one of the preset
numbers in the preset list.
Select preset stations with the following
operations.
. Steering wheel switches*
— Push <
>/<
>*
— Tilt <
/
>*
.
Steering column switches*
— Scroll the tuning wheel
.
Touch screen
Audio system
3-19
— Briefly touch a preferred station on
the preset list on the radio screen
— Push <
>/<
>
— Turn *
*: if equipped
— Turn *
Radio operation (models without
fast tuning
function)
AV0NJA1-70A6C418-6C6D-4604-A521-AA2E6BCD59DC
*: if equipped
Radio activation and band selection:
AM/FM
Seek up/down to the next/previous receivable station with the following operations.
. Control panel
— Push and hold <
>/<
>
GEN5-N-120906-EB91730C-D0C7-441C-9028-C9C6F27A417B
To listen to the radio, turn on the audio
system and select a preferred radio band.
“Selecting audio source” (page 3-16)
INFO:
When the stereo broadcast signal is weak,
the radio will automatically change from
stereo to monaural reception.
Tuning:
GEN5-N-120906-EB91730C-D0C7-441C-9028-C9C6F27A417B
AM/FM
Tune to stations manually with the following operations.
. Control panel
— Push <
>/<
>
— Turn *
— Turn *
DAB*
Tune to your preferred service component with the following operations.
. Control panel
3-20
Audio system
Seek tuning:
GEN5-N-120906-EB91730C-D0C7-441C-9028-C9C6F27A417B
.
Steering wheel switches
— Push and hold <
>/<
>
DAB*
Seek up/down to the next receivable
station with the following operations.
. Control panel
— Push and hold <
>/<
>
.
Steering wheel switches
— Push and hold <
>/<
>
*: if equipped
Presetting:
GEN5-N-120906-EB91730C-D0C7-441C-9028-C9C6F27A417B
Up to 6 for AM, 12 for FM and DAB (if
equipped) stations can be registered in
the preset list.
1. Select a radio band (AM, FM or DAB).
2. Tune to the station you wish to store.
3. Touch and hold one of the preset
numbers in the preset list.
Select preset stations with the following
operations.
. Steering wheel switches
>/<
>
— Push <
.
Touch screen
— Briefly touch a preferred station on
the preset list on the radio screen
Radio Menu
AV0NJA1-D950716C-9E53-45AA-A4AF-8EC5B4A2CD6E
Touch [FM Menu], [AM Menu], and [DAB Menu] (if equipped) on each radio screen to display the corresponding menu screen.
Available menu items may vary depending on models and specifications.
[FM Menu]:
GEN5-N-120906-EB91730C-D0C7-441C-9028-C9C6F27A417B
[TA]
When this item is turned on, received TA (Traffic Announcement) will interrupt the audio source that is
playing.
[REG]
When this item is turned on, the system will switch to regional radio programs when detected.
[SCAN]
When touched, the stations will be tuned from low to high frequencies and stop at each broadcasting
station for several seconds. Touching [SCAN] again during this period of several seconds will stop scan
tuning and the radio will remain tuned to that station.
[Radio Text]
Displays the radio text information.
[Refresh]
Touch to update the station list displayed on the right side of the FM menu screen.
Station List
Displays the station list on the right side of the FM menu screen.
[AM Menu]:
GEN5-N-120906-EB91730C-D0C7-441C-9028-C9C6F27A417B
[SCAN]
When touched, the stations will be tuned from low to high frequencies and stop at each broadcasting
station for several seconds. Touching [SCAN] again during this period of several seconds will stop scan
tuning and the radio will remain tuned to that station.
[Radio Text]
Displays the radio text information.
[Refresh]
Touch to update the station list displayed on the right side of the AM menu screen.
Station List
Displays the station list on the right side of the AM menu screen.
Audio system 3-21
[DAB Menu] (if equipped):
GEN5-N-120906-EB91730C-D0C7-441C-9028-C9C6F27A417B
[TA]
When this item is turned on, received TA (Traffic Announcement) will interrupt the audio source that is
playing.
[Radio Text]
Touch to display the radio text information.
[Refresh]
Touch to update the station list displayed on the right side of the DAB menu screen.
[DAB-FM]
When this item is turned on, the system searches for and tunes to FM stations when DAB reception is
poor.
Station List
Displays the station list on the right side of the DAB menu screen.
3-22 Audio system
COMPACT DISC (CD) PLAYER (if equipped)
[CD Menu]:
How to view CD screen
Touch to display the CD Menu screen.
“CD Menu” (page 3-25)
GUID-846D3C9D-73A1-46D3-BB87-C6E3A17228FB
GUID-7C69FD64-5146-486B-AE42-3935DA66B9B7
[Source]:
Touch to switch to the source menu
screen.
“Selecting audio source” (page 316)
Track information:
Track information such as the song
name, artist name and album name
are displayed.
Audio source indicator:
Indicates that CD is the currently
selected audio source.
Play time and progress bar:
The play time of the track is displayed. The bar indicates the progress in playing the current track.
Album artwork/turn direction indicator (if equipped):
When a navigation route is not set,
album artwork will be displayed.
When a navigation route is set, turning direction and the distance to the
next turn are displayed.
PBA0020X
CD operation keys:
Touch to control CD playback functions.
Audio system
3-23
[
[
]
Each time [
] is touched, the
repeat mode changes.
“Changing play mode”
(page 3-24)
]
Touch once to return to the
beginning of the current track.
Touch again to select the previous track. Touch and hold to
rewind the current track.
[
]
Touch to play the track.
[
]
Touch to pause the track.
[
[
]
Touch to select the next track.
Touch and hold to fast-forward
the track.
]
Each time [
] is touched, the
random mode changes.
“Changing play mode”
(page 3-24)
CD player operation
GUID-81DA1A90-799F-4F7C-86F4-C3BE955F8197
Loading:
GEN5-N-120906-EB91730C-D0C7-441C-9028-C9C6F27A417B
Insert a CD into the slot with the label side
facing up. The CD will be guided automatically into the slot and start playing.
Activation and playing:
GEN5-N-120906-EB91730C-D0C7-441C-9028-C9C6F27A417B
The CD mode can also be selected from
the source list with a CD loaded.
“Selecting audio source” (page 3-16)
3-24 Audio system
Rewinding/fast-forwarding:
Skipping tracks:
GEN5-N-120906-EB91730C-D0C7-441C-9028-C9C6F27A417B
GEN5-N-120906-EB91730C-D0C7-441C-9028-C9C6F27A417B
Skip the tracks with the following operations.
. Control panel
>/<
>
— Push <
Rewind or fast-forward the track with the
following operations.
. Control panel
>/<
>
— Push and hold <
.
Steering wheel switches
— Push <
>/<
>
.
Steering wheel switches
— Push and hold <
>/<
>
.
Touch screen
— Touch [
]/[
.
Touch screen
— Touch and hold [
]
]
INFO:
Depending on the condition, skipping to
the previous track may require pushing
the button or touching the key twice.
Pushing the button or touching the key
once may only restart the current track
from the beginning.
Changing folders:
GEN5-N-120906-EB91730C-D0C7-441C-9028-C9C6F27A417B
To change folders, touch [CD Menu].
“CD Menu” (page 3-25)
Skip to different folders with the following
operation. If no folders are found, tracks
will be skipped.
. Control panel
— Turn *
*: if equipped
]/[
Changing play mode:
GEN5-N-120906-EB91730C-D0C7-441C-9028-C9C6F27A417B
Repeat mode
Touch [
] on the CD screen to change
the repeat mode. The following modes
are available.
. CD
[All]: Repeat Album
[Track]: Repeat track
No text displayed: Repeat off
.
CD with compressed audio files
[All]: Repeat all
[Folder]: Repeat folder/sub-folder
[Track]: Repeat track
No text displayed: Repeat off
Random mode
Touch [
] on the CD screen to change
the random mode.
No text displayed: Random off
[Random]: Random play
Ejecting CD:
GEN5-N-120906-EB91730C-D0C7-441C-9028-C9C6F27A417B
Push <
> to eject a CD. If the CD is
ejected and left unremoved, it will be
reloaded into the slot for protection.
INFO:
The ignition switch must be placed in the
ACC or ON position in order for the CD to
be ejected.
CD Menu
USB MEMORY
DEVICE PLAYER
AV0NJA1-4ECBAE05-C74A-4D4B-B183-1F4933C3C92B
Connecting
USB memory device
AV0NJA1-8B4A7CDA-0428-4D60-A67E-D4AD0C453CB2
WARNING:
Do not connect, disconnect or operate
the USB device while driving. Doing so
can be a distraction. If distracted you
could lose control of your vehicle and
cause an accident or serious injury.
GUID-0D506201-9F09-4C6E-B583-1C950C95E8C7
Touch [CD Menu] on the CD screen to
display the CD menu screen.
The following items are available.
CAUTION:
.
Do not force the USB device into the
USB connection port. Inserting the
USB device tilted or up-side-down
into the port may damage the port.
Make sure that the USB device is
connected correctly into the USB
connection port.
.
Do not grab the USB connection port
cover (if equipped) when pulling the
USB device out of the port. This
could damage the port and the
cover.
.
Do not leave the USB cable in a place
where it can be pulled unintentionally. Pulling the cable may damage
the port.
[Now Playing] Touch to display the CD
screen.
Folder* and
track list
The track list for the selected folder is displayed.
The name of sub folder is
displayed on the top of the
list if the sub holder is
included in the selected
folder.
Touch an item on the list to
select the folder or track.
Touch [
] and go back to
the previous screen.
files on the storage devices can be played
through the vehicle’s audio system.
For the location of the USB connection
port:
“USB (Universal Serial Bus) connection port and AUX (auxiliary) input
jack” (page 2-14)
*: Displayed only when available.
Refer to your device manufacturer’s owner information regarding the proper use
and care of the device.
When compatible storage devices are
plugged into the port, compatible audio
Audio system 3-25
Track information:
How to view USB screen
AV0NJA1-E9144E87-0DC7-4702-9C76-7699BDDE627E
Track information such as the song
name, artist name and album name
are displayed.
Device name indicator:
Indicates the name of the USB device
currently playing.
Album artwork/turn direction indicator (if equipped):
Image of an album artwork is displayed when available if the setting is
turned on.
“USB Menu” (page 3-28)
When the album artwork display
setting is turned off, the turn direction and the distance to the next turn
are displayed when a route is set
(models with navigation system).
Play time and progress bar:
The play time of the track is displayed. The bar indicates the progress in playing a track.
USB operation keys:
Touch to control USB playback functions.
[USB Menu]:
Touch to switch to the USB Menu
screen.
“USB Menu” (page 3-28)
3-26
Audio system
[Source]:
5GA0194X
Touch to switch to the source menu
screen.
“Selecting audio source” (page 316)
[
[
]
Each time [
] is touched, the
repeat mode changes.
“Changing play mode”
(page 3-27)
]
Touch to return to the beginning of the current track.
Touch again to select the previous track. Touch and hold to
rewind the current track.
[
]
Touch to play the track.
[
]
Touch to pause the track.
[
[
]
]
Touch to select the next track.
Touch and hold to fast-forward
the track.
Each time [
] is touched, the
random mode changes.
“Changing play mode”
(page 3-27)
Selecting search method:
GEN5-N-120906-EB91730C-D0C7-441C-9028-C9C6F27A417B
A list of search methods is displayed in
the USB menu.
“USB Menu” (page 3-28)
Rewind or fast-forward the track with the
following operations.
. Control panel
>/<
>
— Push and hold <
Skipping tracks:
GEN5-N-120906-EB91730C-D0C7-441C-9028-C9C6F27A417B
Skip the tracks with the following operations.
. Control panel
>/<
>
— Push <
— Turn *
.
.
Steering wheel switches*
— Push and hold <
>/<
— Tilt and hold <
.
Touch screen
— Touch and hold [
— Turn *
*: if equipped
Steering wheel switches*
— Push <
>/<
>*
Changing play mode:
— Tilt <
/
>*
.
Steering column switches*
— Scroll the tuning wheel
USB memory device player operation AV0NJA1-D6F756B8-A874-4D4F-BD71-90C3D033F1C0
.
Touch screen
— Touch [
]/[
Activation and playing:
*: if equipped
]
GEN5-N-120906-EB91730C-D0C7-441C-9028-C9C6F27A417B
Connecting the USB memory device into
the port will start playing the USB memory.
USB memory device can also be played by
selecting the source on the audio source
menu screen.
“Selecting audio source” (page 3-16)
To pause playing the USB memory device,
touch [
]. To resume playing, touch
[
].
Rewinding/fast-forwarding:
GEN5-N-120906-EB91730C-D0C7-441C-9028-C9C6F27A417B
INFO:
Depending on the condition, skipping to
the previous track may require pushing
the button or touching the key twice.
Pushing the button or touching the key
once may only restart the current track
from the beginning.
/
>*
>*
]/[
]
GEN5-N-120906-EB91730C-D0C7-441C-9028-C9C6F27A417B
Repeat mode
Touch [
] on the USB screen to change
the repeat mode. The following modes
are available.
No text displayed: Repeat off
[All]: Repeat all
[Folder]: Repeat folder/sub-folder
[Track]: Repeat track
Random mode
Touch [
] on the screen to change the
random mode as follows.
No text displayed: Random off
[Random]: Random play
Audio system 3-27
USB Menu
AV0NJA1-D7405901-8E6D-4B27-8B77-BD50EA7A85CF
iPod PLAYER
AV0NJA1-92F97DCC-8A7B-4962-B3EF-B537B5AA8CFE
Touch [USB Menu] on the USB screen to
display the USB Menu screen.
The following items are available.
Connecting
iPod
AV0NJA1-86159E90-EC5B-440C-8A60-183226DEE0E7
[Now Playing]
Touch to display the USB
screen.
[Folder List] Touch to display the folder
*
list. Touch an item on the list
to select the folder.
The sub-folder or track list
will be displayed. Select a
sub-folder or track from the
list.
WARNING:
Do not connect, disconnect or operate
the USB device while driving. Doing so
can be a distraction. If distracted you
could lose control of your vehicle and
cause an accident or serious injury.
CAUTION:
.
[Album Art- Touch to turn on/off the
work]
album artwork display on the
USB screen.
[Playlists]
[Artists]
Touch to display the list according to the selected item.
[Albums]
3-28
Audio system
GEN5-N-120906-EB91730C-D0C7-441C-9028-C9C6F27A417B
Made for
. iPod touch (6th generation)
iPod touch (5th generation)
Do not grab the USB connection port
cover (if equipped) when pulling the
USB device out of the port. This
could damage the port and the
cover.
.
iPod nano (7th generation)
.
iPod nano (6th generation)
.
iPod nano (5th generation)
.
iPhone 6 Plus
Do not leave the USB cable in a place
where it can be pulled unintentionally. Pulling the cable may damage
the port.
.
iPhone 6
.
iPhone 5s
.
iPhone 5c
Connect the iPod to the USB connection
port.
“USB (Universal Serial Bus) connection port and AUX (auxiliary) input
jack” (page 2-14)
.
iPhone 5
.
iPhone 4S
.
[Genres]
*: Displayed only when available.
Compatibility:
.
[Songs]
[Composers]
Do not force the USB device into the
USB connection port. Inserting the
USB device tilted or up-side-down
into the port may damage the port.
Make sure that the USB device is
connected correctly into the USB
connection port.
The battery of the iPod will be charged
while the device is connected to the
vehicle if the iPod supports charging via
a USB connection.
Depending on the device and firmware
version of the iPod, the display on the
iPod shows a NISSAN or Accessory Attached screen when the connection is
completed. When the iPod is connected
to the vehicle, the iPod music library can
only be operated by the vehicle audio
controls.
iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
.
INFO:
.
Make sure that the iPod firmware is
updated.
.
The Lightning connector works with
iPhone (5 through 6 Plus), iPod touch
(5th and 6th generation), and iPod
nano (7th generation).
The 30-pin connector works with
iPhone 4S and iPod nano (5th and
6th generation).
USB works with iPhone (4S through 6
Plus), iPod touch (5th and 6th generation) and iPod nano (5th through 7th
generation).
.
Refer to your device manufacturer’s
owner information regarding the
proper use and care of the device.
How to view iPod screen
AV0NJA1-266AD5A0-1330-4370-8D3C-7E9AB4FC7E8E
[iPod Menu]:
Touch to display the iPod Menu
screen.
“iPod Menu” (page 3-31)
[Source]:
5GA0195X
Touch to switch to the source menu
screen.
“Selecting audio source” (page 316)
Audio system
3-29
Track information:
[
]
Each time [
] is touched, the
repeat mode changes.
“Changing play mode”
(page 3-31)
Track information such as the song
name, artist name and album name
are displayed.
Device name indicator:
[
]
Touch to return to the beginning of the current track. Touch
again to select the previous
track. Touch and hold to rewind the current track.
Indicates the name of the iPod currently playing.
Album artwork/turn direction indicator (if equipped):
Image of an album artwork is displayed when available if the setting is
turned on.
“iPod Menu” (page 3-31)
When the album artwork display
setting is turned off, the turn direction and the distance to the next turn
are displayed when a route is set
(models with navigation system).
Play time and progress bar:
The play time of the track is displayed. The progress bar indicates
the progress in playing the current
track.
iPod operation keys:
Touch to control iPod playback functions.
3-30 Audio system
[
]
Touch to play the track.
[
]
Touch to pause the track.
[
[
]
]
Selecting search method:
GEN5-N-120906-EB91730C-D0C7-441C-9028-C9C6F27A417B
A list of search methods is displayed in
the iPod menu.
“iPod Menu” (page 3-31)
Skipping tracks:
GEN5-N-120906-EB91730C-D0C7-441C-9028-C9C6F27A417B
Skip the tracks with the following operations.
. Control panel
>/<
>
— Push <
— Turn *
Touch to select the next track.
Touch and hold to fast-forward
the track.
.
Each time [
] is touched, the
random mode changes.
“Changing play mode”
(page 3-31)
.
Steering column switches*
— Scroll the tuning wheel
.
Touch screen
— Touch [
]/[
iPod player
operation
AV0NJA1-28BF6832-2085-494B-A4E6-1813413B09C2
Depending on the connected device,
some functions cannot be used.
— Turn *
Steering wheel switches*
— Push <
>/<
>*
— Tilt <
/
>*
]
*: if equipped
Activation and playing:
GEN5-N-120906-EB91730C-D0C7-441C-9028-C9C6F27A417B
Connecting an iPod to the vehicle via USB
cable will activate the iPod mode.
The iPod can also be played by selecting
the source on the audio source menu
screen.
“Selecting audio source” (page 3-16)
INFO:
Depending on the condition, skipping to
the previous track may require pushing
the button or touching the key twice.
Pushing the button or touching the key
once may only restart the current track
from the beginning.
Rewinding/fast-forwarding:
GEN5-N-120906-EB91730C-D0C7-441C-9028-C9C6F27A417B
Rewind or fast-forward the track with the
following operations.
. Control panel
>/<
>
— Push and hold <
.
Steering wheel switches*
— Push and hold <
>/<
— Tilt and hold <
.
Touch screen
— Touch and hold [
/
>*
iPod Menu
AV0NJA1-1EDCB51F-8470-481B-BD52-A860687C05EA
Touch [iPod Menu] on the iPod screen to
display the iPod menu screen.
The following items are available.
[Now Playing]
Touch to display the
iPod screen.
[Current List]
Touch to display the
current list. A list of
tracks in the currently
selected category is
displayed.
[Album Artwork]
Touch to turn on/off
the album artwork
display on the iPod
screen.
[Playlists]
Touch to display the
list according to the
selected item.
>*
]/[
]
*: if equipped
Changing play mode:
GEN5-N-120906-EB91730C-D0C7-441C-9028-C9C6F27A417B
Repeat mode
Touch [
] on the iPod screen to change
the repeat mode. The following modes
are available.
No text displayed: Repeat off
[All]: Repeat all
[Track]: Repeat track
Random mode
Touch [
] on the screen to change the
random mode as follows.
No text displayed: Random off
[Random]: Random play
[Artists]
[Albums]
[Songs]
[Genres]
[Composers]
[Audiobooks]
[Podcasts]
BLUETOOTH®
AUDIO
AV0NJA1-6D822548-78A4-4D36-B8BE-13EE7D8B3971
Your vehicle is equipped with Bluetooth®
Audio.
If you have a compatible Bluetooth®
device with streaming audio capability
(A2DP profile), you can set up a wireless
connection between your Bluetooth® device and the in-vehicle audio system. This
connection allows you to listen to the
audio from the Bluetooth® device using
your vehicle speakers. It also may allow
basic control of the device for playing and
skipping audio files using the AVRCP
Bluetooth® profile. Not all Bluetooth®
devices have the same level of controls
for AVRCP. Please consult the manual for
your Bluetooth® device for more details.
Wireless LAN (Wi-Fi) and the Bluetooth®
functions share the same frequency band
(2.4 GHz). Using the Bluetooth® and the
wireless LAN functions at the same time
may slow down or disconnect the communication and cause undesired noise. It
is recommended that you turn off the
wireless LAN (Wi-Fi) when using the Bluetooth® functions.
Connecting Bluetooth® audio device
AV0NJA1-35FDD5DF-AF21-4074-8409-897CA408B2B2
A Bluetooth® audio device must be connected to the vehicle before operation.
“Setting Bluetooth®” (page 2-23)
Audio system
3-31
[Source]:
How to view Bluetooth® audio screen
AV0NJA1-7EB7CC01-4D10-4A62-9367-0139FAD07C36
Touch to switch to the source menu
screen.
“Selecting audio source” (page 316)
Track information:
Track information such as the song
name, artist name and album name
are displayed.
Device name indicator:
Indicates the name of the Bluetooth®
audio device currently playing.
Album artwork (if equipped)/turn direction indicator (if equipped):
Image of an album artwork is displayed when available if the setting is
turned on.
“BT Menu” (page 3-34)
When the album artwork display
setting is turned off, the turn direction and the distance to the next turn
are displayed when a route is set
(models with navigation system).
Play time and progress bar:
[BT Menu]/[Connections]:
Depending on the connected device,
either [BT Menu] or [Connections] is
displayed.
Touch [BT Menu] to display the Blue-
3-32
Audio system
tooth® audio menu screen.
“BT Menu” (page 3-34)
PBA0039X
Touch [Connections] to display the
connection screen.
“Setting Bluetooth®” (page 2-23)
The play time of the track is displayed. The progress bar indicates
the progress in playing the current
track.
Bluetooth® audio operation keys:
Touch to control the Bluetooth®
audio playback function.
[
[
]
Each time [
] is
touched, the repeat
mode changes.
“Changing play
mode” (page 3-34)
]
Touch to return to the
beginning of the current
track. Touch again to
select the previous
track. Touch and hold to
rewind the current track.
[
]
Touch to play the track.
[
]
Touch to pause the
track.
[
[
]
]
Touch to select the next
track. Touch and hold to
fast-forward the track.
Each time [
] is
touched, the random
mode changes.
“Changing play
mode” (page 3-34)
Bluetooth®
audio operation
AV0NJA1-1383FDB6-EEAE-412C-8E8F-2D0CFC7AD013
— Push <
The ability to pause, change tracks, fastforward, rewind, randomize and repeat
music may be different between devices.
Some or all of these functions may not be
supported on each device.
— Tilt <
INFO:
Depending on the Bluetooth® audio device that is connected, it may not be
possible to perform audio operations or a
delay may occur before music is played
back.
Activation and playing:
GEN5-N-120906-EB91730C-D0C7-441C-9028-C9C6F27A417B
A Bluetooth® audio device can be played
by selecting the source on the audio
source menu screen.
“Selecting audio source” (page 3-16)
To pause playing the Bluetooth® audio,
]. Touch [
] to resume
touch [
playing.
>/<
/
>*
>*
.
Steering column switches*
— Scroll the tuning wheel
.
Touch screen
— Touch [
]/[
]
*: if equipped
INFO:
Depending on the condition, skipping to
the previous track may require pushing
the button or touching the key twice.
Pushing the button or touching the key
once may only restart the current track
from the beginning.
Changing folders:
GEN5-N-120906-EB91730C-D0C7-441C-9028-C9C6F27A417B
To change folders, touch [BT Menu].
“BT Menu” (page 3-34)
Rewinding/fast-forwarding:
GEN5-N-120906-EB91730C-D0C7-441C-9028-C9C6F27A417B
INFO:
Depending on the audio device that is
connected to the vehicle, track information may not be displayed.
Skipping tracks:
GEN5-N-120906-EB91730C-D0C7-441C-9028-C9C6F27A417B
Skip the tracks with the following operations.
. Control panel
>/<
>
— Push <
Rewind or fast-forward the track with the
following operations.
. Control panel
>/<
>
— Push and hold <
.
— Turn *
— Tilt and hold <
— Turn *
.
Steering wheel switches*
Steering wheel switches*
— Push and hold <
>/<
.
/
>*
>*
Touch screen
Audio system 3-33
— Touch and hold [
]/[
]
*: if equipped
[Connections] *
Changing play mode:
GEN5-N-120906-EB91730C-D0C7-441C-9028-C9C6F27A417B
Repeat mode
Touch [
] on the screen to change the
repeat mode.
Random mode
Touch [
] on the screen to change the
random mode.
INFO:
Available repeat/random modes change
depending on the connected device.
BT Menu (if
equipped)
AV0NJA1-AAD511F7-A469-4A45-8111-0410E225502E
Touch [BT Menu] on the Bluetooth® audio
screen to display the Bluetooth® audio
menu screen.
The following items are available.
[Now Playing]
Touch to display the Bluetooth® audio screen.
[Album Art- Touch to turn on/off the
work] *
album artwork display on the
Bluetooth® audio screen.
[Current
List]
3-34
Touch to display the current
list. A list of tracks in the
currently selected folder is
displayed.
Audio system
Touch to display the connections screen.
“Connections settings”
(page 2-23)
Folder list * Touch an item on the list to
select the folder.
*: Displayed only when available.
INFO:
AUX operation
AV0NJA1-8467D2B9-7D28-4DAB-8F80-11B9ACDD5164
Activation and playing:
GEN5-N-120906-EB91730C-D0C7-441C-9028-C9C6F27A417B
Turn on an AUX device.
Connect an AUX cable to the AUX device
and the AUX input jack. Select AUX mode
from the audio source menu screen.
“Selecting audio source” (page 3-16)
How to view
AUX screen
AV0NJA1-3A8A4717-B982-4AEC-B5FA-083909A32A94
Depending on the connected device, [BT
Menu] may not be displayed.
AUXILIARY
(AUX) DEVICES
AV0NJA1-7E4C982E-CE83-4819-8396-9601FE8561DB
Connecting
auxiliary devices
AV0NJA1-9776C08E-803B-4D3E-857D-1723F8FE9887
Connect an AUX device to the AUX input
jack.
AUX input jack location:
“USB (Universal Serial Bus) connection port and AUX (auxiliary) input
jack” (page 2-14)
The AUX input jack accepts any standard
analog audio input such as from a
portable cassette player, CD player or
MP3 player.
INFO:
Insert a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) stereo mini plug in
the audio input jack. If a cable with a
mono plug is used, the audio output may
not function normally.
5GA0266X
[Source]:
Touch to switch to the source menu
screen.
“Selecting audio source” (page 316)
Audio source indicator:
Indicates that the AUX source is
currently playing.
Turn direction indicator (if equipped):
When a navigation route is set, the
turn direction and the distance to the
next turn are displayed.
Volume Setting keys:
“Selecting audio source” (page 316)
Touch one of the keys to select the
sound output gain from [Low], [Medium] and [High].
SMARTPHONE
AUDIO (if equipped)
AV0NJA1-09570053-D159-44C3-92FA-82928FDB59BA
You can also listen to music from your
compatible smartphone using Apple CarPlay or Android Auto.
“Apple CarPlay” (page 5-5)
“Android Auto” (page 5-9)
Connecting
smartphone
AV0NJA1-85D99C1D-6F8E-4540-A0B8-CE584A4F7ED2
Connect the iPhone or Android phone to
the USB connection port.
“USB (Universal Serial Bus) connection port and AUX (auxiliary) input
jack” (page 2-14)
Smartphone
audio operation
AV0NJA1-869103BD-04F6-4DB6-95CA-436C13C02B75
1.
Connect the iPhone or Android phone
to the USB connection port and activate Apple CarPlay or Android Auto.
“Apple CarPlay operation” (page
5-6)
“Android Auto operation” (page 510)
2. Push .
3. Touch [Source].
4. Touch [Apple CarPlay] or [Android
Auto] in the audio source menu
screen, and the smartphone audio
starts activating.
Audio system
3-35
AUDIO SETTINGS
AV0NJA1-ECFE1718-B192-4A27-91B2-70E3D8B84B09
Audio settings can be adjusted or audio related functions can be turned on/off with the following procedure.
1. Touch [Settings] on the Launch Bar.
2. Touch [Sound].
Available setting items may vary depending on models and specifications.
Setting items
Action
[Bass]
[Mid]
[Treble]
Adjust the speaker tone quality and sound balance by touching [-]/[+], [L]/[R] or [R]/[F].
[Balance]
[Fade]
[Bass Enhancer]
When this item is turned on, the system enhances bass sound.
[Speed-Sensitive Volume]
Automatically adjusts the volume depending on the vehicle speed. Touch [-]/[+] to change
the sensitivity level.
[PersonalSpace]
Adjust the audio settings to best optimize the sound for the driver’s listening position.
3-36 Audio system
CD/USB MEMORY DEVICE CARE
AND CLEANING
AV0NJA1-382E2C0C-F95D-4F32-83DB-7AC976003DF3
AUDIO ADJUSTMENTS WITH
AUDIO ADJUST
BAR (if equipped)
AV0NJA1-4037132B-707C-4A3D-B14B-B0CCB3B69C4B
.
Type C:
[Bass] ? [Treble] ? [Balance] ? [Fade]
CD (if equipped)
GUID-3628CBA6-4DA9-4C0E-AAC1-E3DBB8669F16
Turn the button to adjust the level of the
selected setting item.
INFO:
This function may not be available when a
menu is highlighted on the screen.
5GA0198X
Example
Sound quality can be adjusted with the
following buttons.
. *
SAA0451
.
*
.
<
/SOUND>*
.
<
/OK>*
*: if equipped
When the list screen is not displayed,
pushing any of the buttons listed above
will display the audio adjustment bar.
Each time the button is pushed, the
selected setting item will change as
follows.
. Type A:
[Bass] ? [Mid] ? [Treble] ? [Balance]
? [Fade]
.
Type B:
[Bass] ? [Treble] ? [Space] (PersonalSpace)
.
Handle a CD by its edges. Never touch
the surface of the disc. Do not bend
the disc.
.
Always place the discs in the storage
case when they are not being used.
.
To clean a disc, wipe the surface from
the center to the outer edge using a
clean, soft cloth. Do not wipe the disc
using a circular motion.
Do not use a conventional record
cleaner or alcohol intended for industrial use.
.
A new disc may be rough on the inner
and outer edges. Remove the rough
edges by rubbing the inner and outer
edges with the side of a pen or pencil
as illustrated.
Audio system
3-37
USB MEMORY
DEVICE
AV0NJA1-F355BB54-6B69-4B59-B94F-C82FA1BFE34F
.
Never touch the terminal portion of
the USB memory device.
.
Do not place heavy objects on the USB
memory device.
.
Do not store the USB memory device
in highly humid locations.
.
Do not expose the USB memory
device to direct sunlight.
.
Do not spill any liquids on the USB
memory device.
Refer to the USB memory device Owner’s
Manual for the details.
3-38 Audio system
4 Hands-Free Phone
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System ......................
...
4-2
Phone screen ...........................................................................
...
4-3
Indicators .....................................................................................
...
4-3
Phone ...........................................................................................
...
4-4
Hands-free text messaging assistant ................
...
4-6
Phone and text message settings ........................
...
4-9
BLUETOOTH® HANDS-FREE
PHONE SYSTEM
AV0NJA1-99952F72-0167-4B11-9D0E-D9F1C385EEA8
WARNING:
.
.
Use a phone after stopping your
vehicle in a safe location. If you have
to use a phone while driving, exercise extreme caution at all times
so full attention may be given to
vehicle operation.
If you find yourself unable to devote
full attention to vehicle operation
while talking on the phone, pull off
the road to a safe location and stop
your vehicle before doing so.
CAUTION:
To avoid draining the vehicle battery,
use a phone only after starting the
engine.
Your vehicle is equipped with Bluetooth®
Hands-Free Phone System. If you are an
owner of a compatible Bluetooth® enabled cellular phone, you can set up the
wireless connection between your cellular phone and the in-vehicle phone module. With Bluetooth® wireless technology,
you can make or receive a phone call with
your cellular phone in your pocket.
Once a cellular phone is connected to the
in-vehicle phone module, the procedure
for connecting the phone does not need
to be performed again. Your phone is
automatically selected with the in-vehicle
phone module when the ignition switch is
4-2 Hands-Free Phone
placed in the ACC or ON position with the
selected cellular phone turned on and
carried in the vehicle.
You can register up to 6 different Bluetooth® devices in the in-vehicle phone
module. However, you can talk on only
one cellular phone at a time.
The Voice Recognition System (if
equipped) supports phone commands,
so dialing a phone number using your
voice is possible.
“Voice recognition” (page 7-2)
Before using the Bluetooth® Hands-Free
Phone System, refer to the following
notes.
. Wireless LAN (Wi-Fi) and the Bluetooth® functions share the same frequency band (2.4 GHz). Using the
Bluetooth® and the wireless LAN functions at the same time may slow down
or disconnect the communication and
cause undesired noise. It is recommended that you turn off the wireless
LAN (Wi-Fi) when using the Bluetooth®
functions.
.
.
Set up the wireless connection between a compatible cellular phone
and the in-vehicle phone module before using the Bluetooth® Hands-Free
Phone System.
Some Bluetooth® enabled cellular
phones may not be recognized by
the in-vehicle phone module.
Consult a NISSAN dealer for phone
compatibility.
.
You will not be able to use a handsfree phone under the following conditions:
— Your vehicle is outside of the phone
service area.
— Your vehicle is in an area where it is
difficult to receive radio waves;
such as in a tunnel, in an underground parking garage, behind a
tall building or in a mountainous
area.
— Your cellular phone is locked in
order to prevent dialing.
.
When the radio wave condition is not
ideal or ambient sound is too loud, it
may be difficult to hear the other
person’s voice during a call.
.
Immediately after the ignition switch
is placed in the ACC or ON position, it
may be impossible to receive a call for
a short period of time.
.
Do not place the cellular phone in an
area surrounded by metal or far away
from the in-vehicle phone module to
prevent tone quality degradation and
wireless connection disruption.
.
While a cellular phone is connected
through the Bluetooth® wireless connection, the battery power of the
cellular phone may discharge quicker
than usual.
.
.
.
.
Consult a NISSAN dealer if the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System
seems to be malfunctioning.
Some cellular phones or other devices
may cause interference or a buzzing
noise to come from the audio system
speakers. Storing the device in a
different location may reduce or eliminate the noise.
Refer to the cellular phone Owner’s
Manual regarding the phone pairing
procedure specific to your phone,
battery charging, cellular phone antenna, etc.
The antenna display on the screen
may not coincide with the antenna
display of some cellular phones.
.
The battery display on the screen may
not coincide with the battery display
of some cellular phones.
.
.
.
PHONE SCREEN
GUID-70ACF9EA-0A9A-452F-9CC6-B6BDEA9398AC
.
Push <
.
Push <
column*
.
Touch [Phone] on the Launch Bar
> on the steering wheel*
/
/
Displays the received
message list screen.
“Displaying received
message list” (page
4-7)
[Connections]
Displays the connection
screen.
“Setting Bluetooth®”
(page 2-23)
[Volume]
Displays the volume adjustment screen.
“Volume settings”
(page 4-11)
> on the steering
*:if equipped
Available items
Menu item
Action
[Quick Dial]
Displays the Quick Dial
screen.
“Making a call” (page
4-4)
[Phone Book]
The microphone is located near the
map light.
Displays the phone book
screen.
“Making a call” (page
4-4)
[Call History]
Keep the interior of the vehicle as
quiet as possible to hear the caller’s
voice clearly as well as to minimize its
echoes.
Displays the call history
screen.
“Making a call” (page
4-4)
[Dial Number]
Displays the phone
number entry screen.
“Making a call” (page
4-4)
If reception between callers is unclear,
adjusting the outgoing call volume
may improve the clarity.
“Volume and Beeps settings”
(page 2-25)
[Text Message]
The phone screen can be displayed by
following operations.
. Push <
> on the control panel*
INFO:
Depending on the connected device,
some functions cannot be used.
INDICATORS
AV0NJA1-DF17CCD9-47EB-42F9-B647-1A1218B25DA1
5GF0096X
When a cellular phone is connected
through the Bluetooth® wireless connection, indicators
for phone and text
messaging are displayed on the top of
Hands-Free Phone 4-3
the screen.
Indicates the number of unread
received messages.
Indicates the Bluetooth® device
that is currently connected.
Indicates the strength of the
signal the Bluetooth® device is
receiving.
Indicates the amount of remaining Bluetooth® device battery.
PHONE
AV0NJA1-023A5F01-7310-424C-B3E9-547E1F8FC21F
Connecting Bluetooth® HandsFree Phone
AV0NJA1-46BD8347-EF56-4BDE-AE6B-DB97C7EC282D
3. Touch one of the connected cellular
phones from the list.
When the connection is successful,
"Connected" is displayed under the
device name.
If [ ] displayed in gray, touch [ ].
INFO:
To select a phone, the Bluetooth® of the
cellular phone needs to be turned on.
Making aAV0NJA1-A10664E4-4636-4046-949D-803558D90AF1
call
1. Touch [Phone] on the Launch Bar.
2. Select one of the following methods
to make a call.
A cellular phone device must be connected to the Bluetooth® Hands-Free
Phone System before operation. Up to 6
Bluetooth® devices can be connected to
the system.
“Setting Bluetooth®” (page 2-23)
Phone selection
AV0NJA1-205885D8-3C6A-48D8-97F0-5631F1B29D25
Follow the instructions below to select a
connected device for use with the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System:
1. Touch [Phone] on the Launch Bar.
2. Touch [Connections] and touch [Bluetooth]. A list of the connected cellular
phones is displayed.
4-4 Hands-Free Phone
book will be downloaded from the
cellular phone automatically when it
is connected. If the automatic download does not take place, the phone
number must be transferred to the
hands-free phone system from the
cellular phone prior to using this
method.
“Phone settings” (page 4-9)
[Call History] :
Select a phone number from recent
incoming, outgoing or missed calls.
[Dial Number] :
Enter the phone number manually
using the keypad displayed on the
screen.
“How to input letters and numbers” (page 2-18)
3. Dialing will start and the screen will
change to the call in progress screen.
ReceivingAV0NJA1-309AF505-32BC-4C5C-80D1-0E512251C11B
a call
5GF0116X
[Quick Dial] :
Select a phone number registered as a
Quick Dial number.
“Quick Dial” (page 4-12)
[Phone Book] :
Select a person and the phone number you wish to call from the phonebook.
Depending on the device, the phone-
5GF0098X
When you receive a phone call, the display
switches to the Incoming Call screen and
the ringtone is played through the vehi-
cle’s audio system.
Taking a call:
To answer the call, take one of the
following actions.
. Push <
> (if equipped) on the
steering wheel.
GEN5-N-120906-EB91730C-D0C7-441C-9028-C9C6F27A417B
There are some options available other
than hanging up a call or answering/
rejecting incoming calls.
Touch one of the following displayed keys
on the screen to take action.
.
Push <
/ / > (if equipped) on
the steering column.
Available
item
Action
.
Touch [Answer].
[Use Handset]
Transfer the call to the
cellular phone.
[Mute]
When muted, your voice
will not be heard by the
person on the other end of
the line.
[Dial Number]
Using the touch tone, send
digits to the connected
party for using services
such as voicemail.
Rejecting a call:
To reject the call, take one of the following actions.
. Push and hold <
> (if equipped) on
the steering wheel.
.
Touch [Decline].
Holding a call:
To hold the call, touch [Hold Call].
During a call
AV0NJA1-C160F19D-493E-4687-BE13-1F6A2E523B4E
[Switch Call]*
Answer another incoming
call. The person you are
talking to will be placed on
hold. Push once more to
speak to the person on
hold again.
*: Available when a call is received while
on the line with another person. The
availability of this function depends on
5GF0117X the cellular phone.
The Call in Progress screen will appear
during a call.
To hang up the phone, touch [Hang Up].
INFO:
Operations during a call:
To adjust the person’s voice to be louder
or quieter, push <
> (if equipped) on
the steering wheel, push <
> (if
equipped) on the steering column from
behind or turn / on the control panel while talking
on the phone.
Call from a second person:
GEN5-N-120906-EB91730C-D0C7-441C-9028-C9C6F27A417B
5GF0100X
When another phone call is received
during a call, the Call Waiting screen will
appear.
Answering call from a second person:
To answer the call from the second
person and place the first caller on hold,
take one of the following actions.
. Push <
> (if equipped) on the
steering wheel.
.
Push <
/ / > (if equipped) on
the steering column.
.
Touch [Answer].
Hands-Free Phone 4-5
Rejecting call from a second person:
To reject a call from the second person
and continue the conversation with the
first caller, touch [Decline].
During a call with a second person:
.
Laws in some jurisdictions may restrict the use of some of the applications and features, such as social
networking and texting. Check local
regulations for any requirements.
.
If you are unable to devote full
attention to vehicle operation while
using the text messaging feature,
pull off the road to a safe location
and stop your vehicle.
Receiving
a message
AV0NJA1-21DB93A3-3BB9-4A41-BD63-D9FB66E9ED45
CAUTION:
5GF0118X
To hang up the phone and return to the
conversation with the first caller, touch
[Hang Up].
To switch between two calls on line,
touch [Switch Call].
HANDS-FREE TEXT MESSAGING
ASSISTANT
AV0NJA1-9092E6E3-0312-4427-83C9-7BCEA4744D55
WARNING:
.
.
Use the text messaging feature after
parking your vehicle in a safe location. If you have to use the feature
while driving, exercise extreme caution at all times so full attention may
be given to vehicle operation.
Laws in some jurisdictions may restrict the use of “Text-to-Speech.”
Check local regulations before using
this feature.
4-6
Hands-Free Phone
This feature is disabled if the connected
device does not support it. See the
phone’s Owner’s Manual for details
and instructions.
The system allows for the sending and
receiving of text messages through the
vehicle interface.
The availability of the text message function may vary depending on the cellular
phone.
5GF0102X
When the cellular phone connected to the
vehicle receives a text message, a notification will appear on the touch screen
display with a tone. (Depending on the
models, the notification will also appear
on the vehicle information display.)
To check the message, touch [Read].
Touch [Ignore] to save the message to
be checked later.
If you want to respond using a predefined
message, touch the message for auto
reply .
The text message for auto reply can be
edited.
“Phone settings” (page 4-9)
INFO:
.
Depending on the cellular phone, the
notification display setting may need
to be activated on the cellular phone.
.
.
Models with <
> on the steering
wheel:
Whether to read or ignore the message can be selected operating the
switch on the steering wheel. Push
<
> to read the message. Push and
hold the switch to ignore the
message.
/
/ > on the
Models with <
steering column:
Push <
/
/ > to read the
message.
Displaying
received message list
AV0NJA1-95452804-687D-42E4-A40B-91BFF2EC5D60
5GF0103X
1. Touch [Phone] on the Launch Bar.
2. Touch [Text Message].
3. Touch an item on the list to read or
reply to the message.
INFO:
5GF0113X
Touching [Read] on the new message
notification screen or selecting a message from the message list will show the
details of the received message on the
display.
Available actions:
. [Prev.]:
Touch to read the previous message.
.
[Next]:
Touch to read the next message.
.
[Play]/[Stop]:
Touch [Play] to have the hands-free
phone system read out the received
message. Touch [Stop] to stop reading.
.
[Call]:
If the sender of the message is registered in the phonebook, touch this
icon to make a call to the sender.
.
[Reply]:
A reply message can be selected from
the template.
INFO:
Up to 100 messages can be stored in the
message list.
“Sending a text message” (page
4-8)
Received
message screen
AV0NJA1-C9EDB768-A890-45FB-A50B-C65A60FEEDEE
.
Push <
>/<
> (if equipped) on the
steering wheel or tilt <
/
> (if
equipped) on the steering wheel to
read the previous or next message.
.
Depending on the language setting,
the "Text-to-Speech" function may
not be available.
.
Available keys may vary depending on
the situations and models.
.
If the sender’s name and phone number are registered in the phonebook,
the name of the sender is displayed
when a message is received.
.
To adjust the message reading voice
volume, push <
> (if equipped) on
the steering wheel, push <
> (if
equipped) on the steering column
from behind or turn / on the control
panel.
Hands-Free Phone 4-7
Sending AV0NJA1-2F6880B3-BAEC-4B6F-91B4-5465323E6184
a text message
This function may not be supported
depending on the cellular phone.
5GF0109X
1. Touch [Phone] on the Launch Bar.
2. Touch [Text Message].
3. Touch [Create Message].
The following items are available.
Action
Available item
[To]
[Select Text]
[Send]
4-8
Hands-Free Phone
[Enter Number with Keypad]
Enter the phone number of the recipient using the keypad. Touch [OK] to
confirm.
[Quick Dial]
Select a recipient from the Quick Dial list.
[Phone Book]
Select a recipient from the phonebook.
[Call History]
Select a recipient/phone number from call history.
[Fixed]
Touch to display a list of fixed text messages.
[Customised]
Touch to display a list of custom text message templates.
Custom text can be created or edited from the setting menu.
“Phone and text message settings” (page 4-9)
Touch to send the message.
PHONE AND TEXT MESSAGE SETTINGS
AV0NJA1-1513E8E2-AF29-4D62-968F-3689E6A05889
Phone settings
AV0NJA1-113ACEB2-74B1-46EA-92C5-7C0462E956E7
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System settings can be changed according to the user’s preference.
1. Touch [Settings] on the Launch Bar.
2. Touch [Phone].
Available setting items may vary depending on models and specifications.
Available setting items
Setting item
Action
[Connections]
Displays the Connections screen. Phone connection, selection,
deletion and other features are available.
“Connections settings” (page 2-23)
[Quick Dial]
[Phone Book]
[Edit]
Entries in the Quick Dial can be edited. Touch [Add New] to register
a new entry.
“Quick Dial” (page 4-12)
[Delete All]
Deletes all of the phone numbers in the Quick Dial.
[Download Entire Phone Book]
All of the phone numbers that are stored in a phonebook of a
cellular phone that is connected to the vehicle are downloaded at
once.
[Auto Download]
Turns on/off automatic downloading of the phonebook from the
connected cellular phone.
[Sort Phone Book by]
Changes the sorted order of contacts in the phonebook.
Hands-Free Phone 4-9
[Text Message]
[Notifications]
[Text Message]
Turns the text messaging function on/off.
[Text Message Ringtone]
Turns the incoming message sound on/off.
[Signature]
Turns the signature setting for the outgoing text message on/off.
[Auto Reply]
Turns on/off the automatic text message reply function.
[Auto Reply Text Message]
Selects the text message to be used for the automatic reply
function.
[Edit Custom Text]
Creates or edits a customized text message reply.
[Driver Only]
When this item is turned on, incoming call notification is displayed
only in the vehicle information display.
[Vehicle Ringtone]
[Automatic Hold]
4-10 Hands-Free Phone
Turns the vehicle ringtone on/off.
When this item turns on, an incoming phone call will be put on hold
automatically.
Volume settings
AV0NJA1-1440FF88-223C-48E5-961F-4C0707FFD6FA
Volume settings can be adjusted.
1. Touch [Phone] on the Launch Bar.
2. Touch [Volume].
The following volume setting items are available.
Setting items
Action
[Ringtone]
Adjusts the volume level of the ringtone of incoming calls.
[Outgoing Call]
Adjusts the volume level of the outgoing calls.
INFO:
The volume settings can also be accessed from [Settings] on the Launch Bar.
“System settings” (page 2-21)
Hands-Free Phone
4-11
Quick Dial
AV0NJA1-0FB27751-B822-433A-977A-435B2430D290
manually using keypad.
select [Relationship / Voice Tag].
. Select a preferred relationship from
the list.
INFO:
Available methods may vary depending on cellular phone support.
6. When a phone number has been
selected, the registration screen is
displayed. Enter the phone number
and edit the entry information as
5GF0107X
necessary.
Up to 20 Quick Dial entries can be
7. Touch [OK] to save the entry.
registered.
Quick Dial entries can be used to quickly
INFO:
make a call or send text messages.
Quick Dial entries can also be regisRegistration:
tered by touching [Settings] on the
GEN5-N-120906-EB91730C-D0C7-441C-9028-C9C6F27A417B
Launch Bar and then selecting
1. Touch [Phone] on the Launch Bar.
[Phone].
2. Touch [Quick Dial].
“Phone settings” (page 4-9)
3. Touch [Edit].
Voice Tag (if equipped):
4. Touch [Add New] to register a phone
A voice tag can be recorded for each of
number to the Quick Dial list.
the registered Quick Dial numbers and
5. Select a method for registration.
can be used to dial the number by
speaking it.
Available methods:
. [Copy from Call History]:
A phone number can be selected
from [All], [Incoming], [Outgoing], or
[Missed] call history lists.
.
[Copy from Phone Book]:
A phone number can be selected
from the phonebook.
.
[Enter Number with Keypad]:
A phone number can be entered
5GF0119X
4-12
Hands-Free Phone
On the Quick Dial registration screen,
.
Touch [Customise] and touch [Record]
to register your original voice tag.
INFO:
.
Touch [Play] to play the recorded
voice tag.
.
Touch [Delete] to delete the voice tag.
5 Information
Information menu .......................................................................
...
Updating system software ............................................
...
Apple CarPlay (if equipped) ..................................................
...
Compatibility .............................................................................
...
Apple CarPlay operation .................................................
...
Apple CarPlay settings ......................................................
...
Apple CarPlay system limitations ............................
...
Android Auto (if equipped) ...................................................
...
Compatibility .............................................................................
...
5-2
5-4
5-5
5-6
5-6
5-8
5-9
5-9
5-9
Initial Android Auto settings ...................................
...
Android Auto operation .............................................
...
Android Auto settings ..................................................
...
Android Auto system limitations ........................
...
Siri Eyes Free (if equipped) ...............................................
...
Requirements .....................................................................
...
Siri Eyes Free activation .............................................
...
Operating Siri Eyes Free .............................................
...
5-10
5-10
5-12
5-13
5-13
5-13
5-13
5-13
INFORMATION MENU
AV0NJA1-5E9B2C85-D229-414A-96FE-2A3389057A2B
The information screen sets or displays various information that is helpful for using the vehicle.
5GH0912X
Push / (if equipped) and then touch [Info] on the Launch Bar to display the Information menu.
Available items may vary depending on models and specifications. Items displayed on the screen may not function depending on
various conditions.
Models with navigation system:
Menu item
[Vehicle]
Action
[ECO Drive Report]
Displays the eco drive report.
Your driving score will be displayed in real time, with 100 points
designated as the score for ideal eco-driving.
Touch [History] to view the drive report history. Touch [Reset] to clear the
past records.
To improve your score:
. When starting off, depress the accelerator gently.
. When cruising, accelerate and decelerate as little as possible.
. When decelerating, release the accelerator early.
[Traffic Information]/[Premium Traffic]
Displays the Traffic Information screen.
“Viewing traffic information” (page 6-40)
[Where Am I?]
The name and distance of the next/previous street, and other information that indicates the current vehicle location are displayed. Latitude
and longitude of the current vehicle location are shown on the bottom
right.
5-2
Information
Menu item
[System Information]
Action
[Software Version]
Displays the information of the Software Version, Map Version, etc.
[Software Update]
The system software can be updated.
“Updating system software” (page 5-4)
[Map Update]
The map data can be updated.
“How to update map data” (page 6-58)
[Licence Information (OSS)]
Displays the Open Source Software (OSS) licenses information.
[GPS Position]
Displays Global Navigation Satellite System (GNSS) information, such as
number of satellites, latitude/longitude, and approximate altitude, etc.
[Vehicle Data Transmission]
When [OK] is touched, data transmission to NISSAN is enabled. Touching
[Decline] disables the Premium Traffic, Online Search, etc.
[Apps]
[Apple CarPlay]
Displays the Apple CarPlay screen.
“Apple CarPlay” (page 5-5)
[Android Auto]
Displays the Android Auto screen.
“Android Auto” (page 5-9)
Models without navigation system:
Menu item
[System Information]
[Apps]
Action
[Software Version]
Displays the information of the Software Version, etc.
[Software Update]
The system software can be updated.
“Updating system software” (page 5-4)
[Licence Information (OSS)]
Displays the Open Source Software (OSS) licenses information.
[Apple CarPlay]
Displays the Apple CarPlay screen.
“Apple CarPlay” (page 5-5)
[Android Auto]
Displays the Android Auto screen.
“Android Auto” (page 5-9)
Information
5-3
UPDATING
SYSTEM SOFTWARE
AV0NJA1-C5812199-D226-4CAE-88BC-9850F5D75D4A
WARNING:
During the update process, your vehicle
should be kept in a well ventilated area
to avoid the exposure to carbon monoxide. Do not breathe exhaust gases;
they contain colorless and odorless
carbon monoxide. Carbon monoxide is
dangerous. It can cause unconsciousness or death.
How to update from the pop-up
screen
GUID-979ED9C3-7128-4C20-ADA1-C53BFEF37405
2. After the system software update is
complete, place the ignition switch in
the OFF position and leave the system
for 20 minutes without operating the
switches on the control panel and the
steering wheel. Place the ignition
switch in the ON position and the
updated software will be available.
The update may not be reflected if the
ignition switch is placed back in the ON
position before the 20-minute period has
passed.
How to update from the system
menu
GUID-FC64C925-47CE-4811-8064-3F8FA339552F
.
The system is connected to Wi-Fi
network.
“Wi-Fi Setting” (page 2-24)
1.
When the pop-up appears and
prompts the driver to perform the
system software update, operate the
system according to the guides
shown on the screen to download
the updates. Another pop-up will appear when downloading is complete.
System software updates can be downloaded manually via Wi-Fi from the system menu.
1. Connect the vehicle to a Wi-Fi network.
“Wi-Fi Setting” (page 2-24)
2. P u s h < M E N U > / < M O D E / O K > ( i f
equipped).
3. Touch [Info] on the Launch Bar and
then touch [System Information].
Information
5GH0781X
INFO:
When both of the following conditions are
met, the system informs the driver with a
pop-up on the screen when system software update is available.
. [Auto] is selected under [Update Method].
“How to update from the system
menu” (page 5-4)
5-4
4. Touch [Software Update].
WARNING:
To operate the system for software
update, first park the vehicle in a safe
location.
5. Touch [Start Software Update]. The
current software version and date of
last check are displayed.
INFO:
When [Update Method] is set to [Auto],
a notification is made in case that
software can be updated.
6. To check manually for available updates, touch [Check for an Update]. A
message is displayed when update
availability is confirmed.
7. Touch [Download] to start downloading and updating the system software.
8. After the system software is complete,
place the ignition switch in the OFF
position and leave the system for 20
minutes without operating the
switches on the control panel and
the steering wheel. Place the ignition
switch in the ON position and the
updated software will be available.
Apple CarPlay (if equipped)
AV0NJA1-2F4A0198-4EA3-402B-905C-8A97B30EE3C1
INFO:
.
The update may not be reflected if
the ignition switch is placed back in
the ON position before the 20minute period has passed.
.
The following indicators are displayed on the top of the screen
while the software is being downloaded or updated.
: Downloading
: Updating
.
If updating software is unnecessary,
touch [OK] to return to the previous
screen.
.
You will be charged separately
when the internet communication
is made via smartphones. Consult
your communication companies
regarding the communication fee.
.
The download data size of software
updates can vary between 80 MB
to 300 MB. If you use your smartphone as a Wi-Fi connection, you
may incur data charges from your
phone carrier. Please connect to a
secure WPA2 Wi-Fi network to avoid
potential phone carrier data
charges.
.
[Save Version Information to USB
Device] is not available on this
system.
.
Depending on the models, the same
operation can be performed by
touching [Settings] on the Launch
Bar and then touching [System
Update].
WARNING:
.
Stop your vehicle in a safe location
and apply the parking brake before
connecting your iPhone to the vehicle or operating your connected
iPhone for setup.
.
If you are unable to devote full
attention to vehicle operation while
using Apple CarPlay, pull off the road
to a safe location and stop your
vehicle.
You can use Apple CarPlay by connecting
a compatible iPhone to your vehicle via a
USB cable.
To connect your iPhone with the invehicle system, it is recommended to
use the Apple Lightning cable (Mfi certified) that was provided with your iPhone.
With Apple CarPlay, your in-vehicle system can be used as a display and a
controller for some of the iPhone functions. Apple CarPlay features Siri which
enables operations via voice controls.
Visit apple.com for information about
the functions that are available and details about Apple’s privacy policy.
Certain vehicle information (e.g. location
and speed) may be shared with your
device while Apple CarPlay is in use.
Carrier charges may apply to use Apple
CarPlay.
Information
5-5
COMPATIBILITY
AV0NJA1-57200BDF-E943-45F8-9ED1-7BFD321F3774
Apple CarPlay
OPERATION
AV0NJA1-A682AF5E-1560-4F44-8560-D04EE0074E05
The following iPhone models support
Apple CarPlay.
1.
Model
Firmware version
iPhone 5 or later iOS 8.4 or later
Refer to the Apple website for more
information.
INFO:
.
In some countries, iPhone in the
market may not be supported by
Apple CarPlay.
.
For best results, always update your
device to the latest software version.
.
Apple CarPlay will take the place of
your Bluetooth® audio and Bluetooth®
hands-free phone functionality.
.
Phone menu and access to the connected phone through Voice Recognition System (if equipped) will be
disabled while Apple CarPlay is connected. To access your phone, use the
Siri function or select the phone icon
in the Apple CarPlay top menu screen.
5-6 Information
Connect the iPhone to the USB connection port.
“USB (Universal Serial Bus) connection port and AUX (auxiliary)
input jack” (page 2-14)
2. Depending on the setting, a Startup
Information screen will appear. Touch
[Yes] to use Apple CarPlay.
INFO:
If you do not wish to display the
Startup Information screen each time
you activate Apple CarPlay, turn on
[Don’t Ask Any More] on the Startup
Information screen. The Startup Information screen will not be displayed
from the next Apple CarPlay activation. The Startup Information screen
can be set to appear again in the
Apple CarPlay setting menu.
“Apple CarPlay settings” (page 58)
3. The Apple CarPlay screen will appear.
The iPhone functions displayed on the
screen should now be operable using
the in-vehicle system.
4. To return to the Apple CarPlay top
menu screen after detailed operation,
touch [ ] on the lower corner of the
Apple CarPlay screen.
5. To exit the Apple CarPlay screen,
touch [Nissan] on the Apple CarPlay
screen.
INFO:
When pushing the buttons such as
on the control panel or
(if equipped) on the
steering column, the corresponding
display to the button is displayed.
6. To return to the Apple CarPlay screen,
take one of the following actions.
. Touch [CarPlay] on the Launch Bar.
.
Touch [Apps] on the information
screen, and then touch [Apple CarPlay].
INFO:
When your iPhone is locked, Apple CarPlay can still be activated by operating
the iPhone and allowing Apple CarPlay
activation when asked.
Siri operation
AV0NJA1-016CA560-9A82-4480-ACFF-C212BEB65587
With Siri, some of the functions in your
iPhone can be voice controlled.
Make sure that Siri on your iPhone is
turned on.
Activation:
GEN5-N-120906-EB91730C-D0C7-441C-9028-C9C6F27A417B
Perform one of the following operations
to start a Siri session.
. Models with Voice Recognition System:
Push and hold <
> (if equipped) on
the steering wheel.
Models without Voice Recognition
System:
Push <
.
> on the steering wheel.
Touch and hold [ ] at the lower
corner of the Apple CarPlay screen.
INFO:
.
Push <
> (if equipped) or touch [
to end Siri operation.
.
Keep the interior of the vehicle as
quiet as possible. Close the windows
to eliminate the surrounding noises
(traffic noises, vibration sounds, etc.),
which may prevent the system from
recognizing the voice commands correctly.
.
For functions that can be used with
Siri, please refer to the Apple website.
]
Phone operation
AV0NJA1-CA86E5DA-1E0E-4802-B5B9-38BE555174E6
If you wish to use make a call with Apple
CarPlay, follow the procedure below:
1. Touch [Phone] on the Apple CarPlay
top menu.
2. Operate the screen displayed to make
a call, etc.
Information
5-7
Apple CarPlay SETTINGS
AV0NJA1-65850203-2BC2-4381-947B-B8A88B6EF111
1. Touch [Settings] on the Launch Bar.
2. Touch [Apps].
3. Touch [Apple CarPlay].
Available items:
Setting item 1
Setting item 2
Action
[Enable after USB Connection:]
[Always]
Activates Apple CarPlay automatically when an iPhone is
connected to the in-vehicle system.
[Ask]
Displays the Apple CarPlay Startup Information screen
when an iPhone is connected to the in-vehicle system.
[Never]
Apple CarPlay will not activate even if an iPhone is
connected to the in-vehicle system.
[Nissan’s Help for Apple CarPlay]
Displays helpful tips for Apple CarPlay operation.
INFO:
Normal voice recognition (if equipped) access to songs on your iPod music will not be available when connected to Apple CarPlay. To
access to your iPod music, use the Siri function or select the music icon in the Apple CarPlay top menu screen.
5-8 Information
Android Auto (if equipped)
AV0NJA1-412822B5-2ED1-4B16-AFE8-C7987322F2B9
Apple CarPlay SYSTEM LIMITATIONS AV0NJA1-DE810B65-32DE-4575-96BD-BF2007415096
For all features of Apple CarPlay to
operate correctly, it is necessary to have
a compatible iPhone, a cellular connection and a data plan.
When Apple CarPlay is operating, system
performance is affected by the strength
of the cellular connection or performance
of the phone itself. If performance of the
system decreases:
. Disconnect and reconnect your phone
.
Cycle phone power off/on to restart
Functionality of Apple CarPlay may decrease or be lost if there are changes to
operating systems, hardware, software or
other technologies central to supporting
the system that are outside of NISSAN’s
control. Changing government regulations may also affect operation of Apple
CarPlay.
WARNING:
.
Stop your vehicle in a safe location
and apply the parking brake before
connecting your Android phone to
the vehicle or operating your connected Android phone for setup.
.
If you are unable to devote full
attention to vehicle operation while
using Android Auto, pull off the road
to a safe location and stop your
vehicle.
You can use Android Auto by connecting
a compatible Android phone to your
vehicle via a USB cable. It is also recommended to use the Android phone OEM
cable that was provided with your phone.
With Android Auto, your in-vehicle system
can be used as a display and a controller
for some of the Android phone functions.
Voice control of some of the Android
phone functions is also possible with
Android Auto. Visit www.android.com for
information about the functions that are
available and details about Google’s privacy policy.
Certain vehicle information (e.g. location
and speed) may be shared with your
device while Android Auto is in use.
Carrier charges may apply to use Android
Auto.
COMPATIBILITY
AV0NJA1-182297CC-D302-4CCC-ABC9-9C0A51082A34
Only Android 5.0 (Lollipop) or later versions are compatible with Android Auto.
Refer to the Android Auto website for
more information.
INFO:
.
In some countries, Android phone in
the market may not be supported by
Android Auto.
.
Download the Android Auto App from
Google Play to Android phone in
advance.
.
For best results, always update your
device to the latest Android software
and Android Auto App version. When
you connect the Android phone to the
in-vehicle system, it will automatically
update the Android software and
Android Auto App version.
.
Android Auto will take the place of
your Bluetooth® audio and Bluetooth®
hands-free phone functionality.
.
When setting a route with the navigation system (if equipped), if you set a
destination with Android Auto, the
route setting of the navigation system
will be cancelled.
.
The Phone menu and access to the
connected phone through the Voice
Recognition System (if equipped) will
be disabled while Android Auto is
connected. To access your phone,
Information
5-9
use the Talk to Google function or
select the phone icon in the Android
Auto top menu screen.
Startup Information screen will not
be displayed from the next Android
Auto activation. The Startup Information screen can be set to appear
again in the Android Auto setting
menu.
“Android Auto settings” (page
5-12)
INITIAL Android
Auto SETTINGS
AV0NJA1-52E7591D-B45F-4A36-9262-329DFD5AAF96
Before using Android Auto, the Android
Auto App must be downloaded on your
Android phone.
For downloading the Android Auto App,
refer to the Google Play website.
It may be necessary to operate the
Android phone when connected first.
Depending on the selection, such as
approval, some of the features of Android
Auto are not available.
Android AV0NJA1-D0FCADBE-7B14-4C0C-9561-B2096C501B47
Auto OPERATION
Unlock your phone’s screen before connecting your Android phone.
1. Connect your Android phone to USB
connection port.
“USB (Universal Serial Bus) connection port and AUX (auxiliary)
input jack” (page 2-14)
2. Depending on the setting, a Startup
Information screen will appear. Touch
[Yes] to use Android Auto.
.
.
5-10
If you do not wish to display the
Startup Information screen each
time you activate Android Auto,
turn on [Don’t Ask Any More] on
the Startup Information screen. The
Information
Some functions of Android Auto are
not available if the Bluetooth® is
not connected.
3. The Android Auto top menu screen
will appear. The Android phone functions displayed on the screen should
now be operable using the in-vehicle
system.
4. To exit the Android Auto screen, touch
[ ] and then touch [Return to Nissan]
on the Android Auto screen.
INFO:
.
If [Return to Nissan] does not appear, touch [ ] again.
.
When pushing the buttons, such as
on the control panel or
(if equipped) on the
steering column, the
corresponding display to the
INFO:
.
Your phone’s Bluetooth® will be
turned on automatically when Android Auto is activated. Keep the
Bluetooth® turned on to use the
phone functions.
button is displayed.
5. To return to the Android Auto screen,
take one of the following actions.
. Touch [ ] on the Launch Bar.
.
Touch [Apps] on the information
screen, and then touch [Android
Auto].
INFO:
.
While Android Auto is activated on the
Android phone, the phone operations,
such as making or receiving calls, can
only be done with Android Auto.
.
Depending on the device, an Android
phone requires MTP mode to be
selected in the USB transfer setting.
Talk to Google
operation
AV0NJA1-AD68865B-24C2-483F-BD02-E7D3E5384D38
Some of the functions on your Android
phone can be voice controlled when
Android Auto is active.
Activation:
GEN5-N-120906-EB91730C-D0C7-441C-9028-C9C6F27A417B
Perform one of the following operations
to start a Talk to Google session.
. Models with Voice Recognition System:
Push and hold <
> (if equipped) on
the steering wheel.
Models without Voice Recognition
System:
Push <
> on the steering wheel.
.
Touch [ ] on the Android Auto screen.
INFO:
.
Push <
> (if equipped) or touch [
to end voice operation.
.
Keep the interior of the vehicle as
quiet as possible. Close the windows
to eliminate the surrounding noises
(traffic noises, vibration sounds, etc.),
which may prevent the system from
recognizing the voice commands correctly.
.
For functions that can be used with
the voice operation, refer to the Android Auto website.
]
Phone operation
AV0NJA1-EFF4E878-069B-4A3E-96E6-19701CFCD403
If you wish to use your phone while
Android Auto is activated, follow the
procedure below:
1. Touch [ ] on the Android Auto screen.
2. Operate the screen displayed to make
a call, etc.
Information 5-11
Android Auto SETTINGS
AV0NJA1-EC243861-E1D2-4256-996B-13627A0E5F53
1. Touch [Settings] on the Launch Bar.
2. Touch [Apps].
3. Touch [Android Auto].
Available items:
Setting item 1
Setting item 2
Action
[Enable after USB Connection:]
[Always]
Activates Android Auto automatically when an Android
phone is connected to the in-vehicle system.
[Ask]
Displays the Android Auto Startup Information screen
when an Android phone is connected to the in-vehicle
system.
[Never]
Android Auto will not activate even if an Android phone is
connected to the in-vehicle system.
[Nissan’s Help for Android Auto]
5-12 Information
Displays helpful tips for Android Auto operation.
Siri Eyes Free (if equipped)
AV0NJA1-A61C11E5-4853-4AC9-A9BF-F65E9CE25B80
Android Auto SYSTEM LIMITATIONS AV0NJA1-8FE5B302-BFD6-4E24-8F49-0F52508F7E4A
For all features of Android Auto to operate correctly, it is necessary to have a
compatible Android phone, a cellular
connection and a data plan.
When Android Auto is operating, system
performance is affected by the strength
of the cellular connection or performance
of the phone itself. If performance of the
system decreases:
. Disconnect and reconnect your phone
.
Close all apps and restart them
.
Cycle phone power off/on to restart
It should also be confirmed that the latest
version of both Android OS and the
Android Auto App are installed on the
cellular phone.
Functionality of Android Auto may decrease or be lost if there are changes to
operating systems, hardware, software or
other technologies central to supporting
the system that are outside of NISSAN’s
control. Changing government regulations may also affect the operation of
Android Auto.
Apple Siri Eyes Free personal assistant
can be accessed from the vehicle. Siri
Eyes Free can be accessed in Siri Eyes
Free mode to reduce user distraction. In
this mode, Siri Eyes Free is available for
interaction by voice control. After connecting a compatible Apple device via
Bluetooth®, Siri Eyes Free can be activated by using <
> (if equipped) on the
steering wheel.
Siri is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered
in the U.S. and other countries.
INFO:
.
Some Siri Eyes Free functions, such as
opening apps, may not be available
during driving.
.
For best results, always update your
device to the latest software version.
.
Keep the interior of the vehicle as
quiet as possible. Close the windows
to eliminate the surrounding noises
(traffic noises, vibration sounds, etc.),
which may prevent the system from
recognizing the voice commands correctly.
.
For functions that can be used in Siri
Eyes Free, please refer to the Apple
website.
REQUIREMENTS
AV0NJA1-BA846C8D-86D5-4A8B-B490-70A061CFB10A
Siri is available on the iPhone 4S or later.
Devices released before iPhone 4S are not
supported by the Siri Eyes Free system.
Visit Apple’s website for details about
device compatibility.
Siri must be enabled on the phone. Please
check phone settings.
If the device has a lock screen, Siri must
be accessible from the lock screen. Please
check phone settings.
Siri EyesAV0NJA1-ECB52A61-C423-4ECF-A4DB-B9C5F8D67C32
Free ACTIVATION
Siri Eyes Free function can be activated
using <
> (if equipped) on the steering
wheel.
1. Connect a Siri Eyes Free enabled
iPhone to the vehicle.
“Setting Bluetooth®” (page 2-23)
2. After the Bluetooth® connection is
established, push and hold <
> (if
equipped) on the steering wheel to
activate the Siri Eyes Free function.
OPERATING
Siri Eyes Free
AV0NJA1-6C5993E4-3BF5-459F-9940-E6741860B7A7
1.
Push and hold <
> (if equipped) on
the steering wheel.
2. Speak your command and then listen
to the Siri Eyes Free reply.
After starting Siri Eyes Free, push <
> (if
equipped) on the steering wheel again
within five seconds of the end of the Siri
Eyes Free announcement to extend the
session.
Information
5-13
5-14 Information
6 Navigation (if equipped)
Safety information ......................................................................
...
6-3
Navigation screen .......................................................................
...
6-3
Displaying navigation screen ......................................
...
6-3
Launch Bar .................................................................................
...
6-3
Map operation ................................................................................
...
6-4
Map types ....................................................................................
...
6-4
Road color ..................................................................................
...
6-9
Moving map ...............................................................................
...
6-9
Changing scale of map ....................................................
...
6-9
Changing map ......................................................................
...
6-10
Map settings ..........................................................................
...
6-12
Setting information on map .....................................
...
6-15
Traffic information on map (if equipped) .......
... 6-15
Map Menu screen ..............................................................
...
6-16
Setting destination ..................................................................
...
6-17
Basic operations .................................................................
...
6-17
Free text search ..................................................................
...
6-20
Setting home or work location
as destination .......................................................................
...
6-20
Finding address (except for Mexico) ...................
...
6-21
Finding address (for Mexico) .....................................
...
6-21
Finding points of interest ............................................
...
6-21
Searching from previous destinations ..............
...
6-23
Searching from address book .................................
...
6-23
Setting city center (for Mexico) ...............................
...
6-24
Setting intersection (for Mexico) ............................
...
6-24
Setting by phone number (if equipped) ..........
... 6-24
Setting from saved routes ..........................................
...
6-25
Setting point on map .....................................................
...
6-25
Setting with latitude/longitude ...........................
...
Using Door-to-Door Navigation
(if equipped) .........................................................................
...
Options before starting the
route guidance ..................................................................
...
Route guidance .........................................................................
...
About route guidance .................................................
...
Route menu .........................................................................
...
Canceling Route ...............................................................
...
Displaying Turn List .....................................................
...
Setting detour route .....................................................
...
Route Preference .............................................................
...
Recalculating route ........................................................
...
Editing route ........................................................................
...
Guidance settings ...........................................................
...
Viewing traffic information (if equipped) ..............
...
RDS-TMC feature (for Europe) ...............................
...
Premium Traffic information ..................................
...
Viewing available traffic information ...............
...
Traffic information settings ....................................
...
Storing a location/route ....................................................
...
Storing location ................................................................
...
Storing route .......................................................................
...
Storing avoid area ..........................................................
...
Editing stored information .......................................
...
Deleting stored item .....................................................
...
Navigation settings ................................................................
...
General information for navigation system .......
...
Current vehicle location .............................................
...
Route calculation .............................................................
...
6-25
6-26
6-27
6-27
6-27
6-29
6-32
6-32
6-32
6-33
6-36
6-36
6-39
6-40
6-40
6-40
6-40
6-42
6-42
6-42
6-43
6-44
6-44
6-48
6-50
6-53
6-53
6-56
Route guidance ...................................................................
...
6-57
How to update map data ...........................................
...
6-58
SAFETY INFORMATION
NAVIGATION SCREEN
AV0NJA1-86E86BA3-BF7E-40C4-BA2C-BCE97C60A7D2
AV0NJA1-C5FCA318-4BBA-4D15-A857-9B542ACCC9A3
The navigation system is primarily designed to help you reach your destination.
However, you, the driver, must use the
system safely and properly. Information
concerning road conditions, traffic signs
and the availability of services may not
always be up to date. The system is not a
substitute for safe, proper, and legal
driving.
DISPLAYING
NAVIGATION SCREEN
AV0NJA1-D8AC00A2-1C2D-4A70-9906-9AEEE4DB75F8
5GB0761X
WARNING:
Do not rely on route guidance alone.
Always be sure that all driving maneuvers are legal and safe in order to avoid
accidents.
After setting the destination
5GB0760X
To display the current location map
which can be operated, push
and then touch [Map] on the Launch Bar
or push .
Destination settings or other navigation
operations are also available from the
Launch Bar.
LAUNCHAV0NJA1-D5D4DD54-609E-45E6-8000-80EE515CBEAF
BAR
The Launch Bar related to operating the
navigation system is displayed on the
current location map screen. Displayed
items vary depending on the route settings.
5GB0762X
Menu item
Action
[Add Home]/ [Add Home]:
[Go Home]
When the home location is
not stored, a home location
can be stored in the system.
“Storing home or work
location” (page 6-42)
[Go Home]:
When the home location is
stored, sets the home location as a destination.
“Setting home or work
location as destination”
(page 6-20)
[POI]
Searches for a Points of
Interest to set as a destination.
“Finding points of interest” (page 6-21)
[Destination]
Displays the destination
menu.
“Setting destination”
(page 6-17)
Before setting the destination
Navigation (if equipped)
6-3
MAP OPERATION
AV0NJA1-D4FC98C8-FC44-47CD-AB7C-DFB95B4C855A
[Zoom Out]
[Zoom In]
Zoom out the map.
“Changing scale of
map” (page 6-9)
Zoom in the map.
“Changing scale of
map” (page 6-9)
[Cancel]
Cancels the route guidance.
“Canceling Route”
(page 6-32)
[Route]
Displays the route menu
screen.
“Route menu” (page 629)
MAP TYPES
AV0NJA1-8F144229-3732-40A7-B87E-81F06E4649A2
Two types of map views are available: 2D and 3D.
2D map (except for the Middle East)
AV0NJA1-EE372FB2-4CFF-45FF-B632-64E8205D13D0
The 2D map displays the map in a two-dimensional environment similar to a road map.
Screen information:
GEN5-N-120906-EB91730C-D0C7-441C-9028-C9C6F27A417B
Arrow and distance:
Indicates the distance to the next
guide point and the turning direction
at that guide point.
If the current vehicle position is off
the road, an arrow indicating the
direction to the nearest road may be
displayed instead of displaying the
next turn arrow/distance.
6-4
Navigation (if equipped)
Next street name:
5GB0824X
Displays the next street name during
the route guidance.
Waypoint:
Displays the location of the waypoint
that the vehicle will stop by before
heading to the final destination. A
maximum of 20 waypoints can be set.
Destination:
Indicates the location of the final
destination.
Stored location:
Displays the locations that are stored
in the Address Book.
“Storing location” (page 6-42)
The icons can be changed according
to your preferences.
Speed limit indicator (if equipped):
Displays the speed limit of the road
which the vehicle is on.
When the vehicle speed exceeds the
limit, the indicator flashes.
When the speed limit indicator is not
displayed in the unit selected in the
Unit settings screen, a speed limit in
the selected unit may be displayed
below the speed limit indicator.
“Units settings” (page 2-28)
The settings for the speed limit indicator can be changed.
“Navigation settings” (page 6-50)
[
]:
Touch to display the Map Menu.
“Map Menu screen” (page 6-16)
Recommended lane indicator:
When a route is set, the arrow and the
recommended driving lane may be
displayed depending on the road.
Blue: First recommendation
White: Secondary recommendation
Gray: Not recommended
Remaining distance to the destination:
Traffic information reception status
indicator (if equipped):
Indicates the approximate remaining
distance to the destination or the
waypoint. This indicator will appear
when a destination is set and route
guidance is started.
This indicator is displayed in a condition where traffic information can be
received.
Remaining time/Time of arrival:
Indicates the remaining time to the
destination/waypoint, or it can be set
to display the estimated arrival time.
This indicator will appear when a
destination is set and the route
guidance is started.
The remaining time or arrival time
display can be selected to your preference.
“Route Preference” (page 6-33)
Touch to display the traffic information screen.
“Viewing traffic events from list”
(page 6-40)
[PREMIUM TRAFFIC]:
Displayed when [Use Premium Traffic]
is turned on and the traffic information is available.
“Traffic information settings”
(page 6-42)
[TMC] (for Europe):
Suggested route:
Appears in bold blue during route
guidance.
Displayed when [Use Premium Traffic]
is turned off and the traffic information is available.
“Traffic information settings”
(page 6-42)
Street name:
Displays the name of the street that
the vehicle is currently driving on.
[ ]:
Indicates the directional setting of
the map.
Vehicle icon:
Indicates the current vehicle location
and the direction that the vehicle is
heading.
Touch to change the map view and
the map orientation.
“Changing map view and map
orientation” (page 6-10)
Scale indicator:
Indicates the scale of the map.
Navigation (if equipped)
6-5
Stored location:
2D map (forGUID-6195AF2E-E3F1-4B35-A541-FFCD4075A511
the Middle East)
The 2D map displays the map in a two-dimensional environment similar to a road map.
Displays the locations that are stored
in the Address Book.
“Storing location” (page 6-42)
The icons can be changed according
to your preferences.
Speed limit indicator:
Displays the speed limit of the road
which the vehicle is on.
When the vehicle speed exceeds the
limit, the indicator flashes.
The settings for the speed limit indicator can be changed.
“Navigation settings” (page 6-50)
Example
PBB0001X
Next street name:
The location of the displayed icons and
information may vary depending on modDisplays the next street name during
els and specifications.
the route guidance.
Screen information:
GEN5-N-120906-EB91730C-D0C7-441C-9028-C9C6F27A417B
Arrow and distance:
Indicates the distance to the next
guide point and the turning direction
at that guide point.
If the current vehicle position is off
the road, an arrow indicating the
direction to the nearest road may be
displayed instead of displaying the
next turn arrow/distance.
6-6 Navigation (if equipped)
Waypoint:
Displays the location of the waypoint
that the vehicle will stop by before
heading to the final destination. A
maximum of 20 waypoints can be set.
Destination:
Indicates the location of the final
destination.
[ ]:
Touch to display the compass mode
display.
“Compass mode display (for the
Middle East)” (page 6-8)
[
]:
Touch to display the Map Menu.
“Map Menu screen” (page 6-16)
Recommended lane indicator:
When a route is set, the arrow and the
recommended driving lane may be
displayed depending on the road.
Blue: First recommendation
White: Secondary recommendation
Gray: Not recommended
Remaining distance to the destination:
Traffic information reception status
indicator:
Indicates the approximate remaining
distance to the destination or the
waypoint. This indicator will appear
when a destination is set and route
guidance is started.
This indicator is displayed in a condition where traffic information can be
received.
Remaining time/Time of arrival:
Indicates the remaining time to the
destination/waypoint, or it can be set
to display the estimated arrival time.
This indicator will appear when a
destination is set and the route
guidance is started.
The remaining time or arrival time
display can be selected to your preference.
“Route Preference” (page 6-33)
Suggested route:
Appears in bold blue during route
guidance.
Street name:
Displays the name of the street that
the vehicle is currently driving on.
Touch to display the traffic information screen.
“Viewing traffic events from list”
(page 6-40)
3D map
AV0NJA1-C63CE7A8-5F3A-43AB-9739-240E40D6FC71
The 3D map displays the map from an
elevated perspective. In 3D map, it is easy
to recognize an image of the route
because it provides a panoramic view
over a long distance.
[PREMIUM TRAFFIC]:
Displayed when [Use Premium Traffic]
is turned on and the traffic information is available.
“Traffic information settings”
(page 6-42)
[
]:
Indicates the directional setting of
the map.
Touch to change the map view and
the map orientation.
“Changing map view and map
orientation” (page 6-10)
5GB0764X
INFO:
The 3D map always appears with the
current forward direction facing up.
Building AV0NJA1-D52D68EF-B8E2-45F4-A665-3D4F393E1605
graphics
Building graphics are stored in the map
data for certain areas, and can be displayed when the map is zoomed in.
Vehicle icon:
Indicates the current vehicle location
and the direction that the vehicle is
heading.
Scale indicator:
Indicates the scale of the map.
5GB0765X
2D building graphics
Navigation (if equipped)
6-7
Compass mode display (for the Middle East)
GUID-4184597B-FE28-4BEB-890D-BDA3118AB6FD
5GB0831X
3D building graphics (if equipped)
INFO:
In an area where the building graphics
are not stored in the map data, the
normal map is displayed even when the
map is zoomed in.
The compass mode can be useful in areas
such as deserts where there are no roads
or where the area information is not
included in the map data. This mode
helps the driver to get to the destination
by showing the current vehicle location at
the center of the map.
Touch [ ] on the map screen to switch to
the compass mode screen.
Latitude/longitude of current location
Current vehicle location and the
diPBB0002X
rection to waypoint/destination
If no destination has been set, only the
latitude and longitude of the current
location are displayed.
INFO:
.
When the compass mode is active,
route guidance will not be provided.
.
Touch [Delete] to delete the information of waypoint/destination. Once
deleted, the deleted information cannot be displayed again.
.
Details of this function are subject to
change.
Estimated time of arrival and distance
to waypoint/destination
Latitude/longitude of waypoint/destination
Direction and straight distance to the
destination
Estimated time of arrival at the destination
6-8 Navigation (if equipped)
ROAD COLOR
AV0NJA1-16035A1E-B7A3-449E-857D-82CE718C0B3B
CHANGING
SCALE OF MAP
AV0NJA1-9DD1AE71-61BA-4F81-A0EB-6A8BF290FBF9
Touch:
The road types are differentiated by color.
Except for Mexico:
Color
Road type
Yellow and red
outline
Motorway
Red or orange
Main road
Yellow or white
Narrow street
For Mexico:
Color
Road type
Dark red
Freeway
Light brown
Major road
Light green
Secondary road
White
Local road
MOVING AV0NJA1-7786F4B5-D56C-4754-9A7C-B9979A7906F1
MAP
The map can be scrolled by the touch
panel operations. Map scrolling operations may be limited while driving.
5GB0707X
When a point on the map is touched, the
cross pointer is displayed and the position touched is moved to the center of
the screen.
After moving the map, touch [
] on the
map screen or push to display the
current location map screen.
Long touch:
Touch the direction to move to. The map
continues to scroll while the screen is
touched.
Drag:
Drag the screen to scroll the map.
Swipe/flick:
Swipe or flick the screen to scroll the map
screen quickly.
5GB0767X
To change the map scale, touch [Zoom
Out] or [Zoom In] on the Launch Bar.
Other operations:
. While the cross pointer is displayed,
the scale bar can be displayed by
touching the scale indicator on the
map.
Touching [ ] or [ ] on the scale bar
can change the map scale while the
scale bar is displayed.
.
/SOUND>/
Rotating <
<
/OK> (if equipped) can
also change the map scale.
Free Zoom:
Depending on the setting, rotating
<
/SOUND>/<
/OK> (if
equipped) to change the map scale may
adjust the scale normally, or it may
engage the free zoom (finer scale
adjustment in smaller steps).
“Map settings” (page 6-12)
Navigation (if equipped)
6-9
Changing map scale while moving map AV0NJA1-69E6D5AB-95AC-4FEB-BF8F-EAC51A8D9351
The map scale can also be changed by
directly touching the map. Touch the map
to display the cross pointer before performing the scale change.
Pinch-in
5GB0246X
To view a wider area, pinch-in the map
screen.
Pinch-out
5GB0243X
To view the map in detail, pinch-out the
map screen.
6-10
Navigation (if equipped)
INFO:
INFO:
While driving, pinch-in and pinch-out
operations may be disabled.
Map scale
AV0NJA1-254B822A-980F-405F-9359-0273C1E3FD89
Map scale (map coverage) between 500
km (300 miles) and 25 m (1/64 mile) can
be selected.
Metric Units
US Units
500 km
300 mi
200 km
125 mi
100 km
60 mi
50 km
30 mi
25 km
15 mi
12.5 km
7.5 mi
6 km
4 mi
3 km
2 mi
1500 m
1 mi
750 m
1/2 mi
400 m
1/4 mi
200 m
1/8 mi
100 m
1/16 mi
50 m
1/32 mi
25 m
1/64 mi
25 m
1/64 mi
Depending on the map scale, traffic
information icons (if equipped) cannot
be displayed on the map screen.
“Traffic information on map” (page 641)
CHANGING
MAP
AV0NJA1-EE435B0C-944B-44A6-A02B-44DFEE72CD3F
Changing map view and map
orientation
AV0NJA1-35401E88-4D28-4449-AE8A-C5939593E4EA
The map view and the map orientation
can be changed by touching [ ] on the
map screen.
The screen will change to North Up,
Heading Up and 3D each time [ ] is
touched.
5GB0768X
North Up
Setting split
screen
AV0NJA1-59764D97-54A7-4CDA-A1FE-D6101B420713
Two different maps can be displayed at
once on a screen with the split screen
setting.
5GB0769X
Heading Up
5GB0770X
1.
2.
3.
5GB0764X
4.
Touch [ ] on the map screen.
Touch [Map Settings].
Touch [Dual Map View].
Select [Split: 2D Map] or [Split: 3D Map].
3D
INFO:
INFO:
.
You can also change the map view
from the map view settings screen.
“Map settings” (page 6-12)
.
A long range map is available that
displays a wider area in the direction
the vehicle is moving to in the Heading
Up view.
“Map settings” (page 6-12)
The settings on the left split map can be
changed from the navigation settings
menu.
“Map settings” (page 6-12)
Navigation (if equipped)
6-11
MAP SETTINGS
AV0NJA1-1F6AA0DC-5FB8-4E2E-9C33-C843D820D840
The setup for the map view is performed from the Map Menu on the touch screen display.
1. Touch [ ] on the current location map screen.
2. Touch [Map Settings].
INFO:
[Map Settings] can also be accessed from [Settings] on the Launch Bar.
“Navigation settings” (page 6-50)
Available setting items may vary depending on models and specifications.
Menu item
[Dual Map View]
[Left Side Info]
Action
[2D Map]
Displays 2D map.
[3D Map]
Displays 3D map.
[Split: 2D Map]
Displays 2D map on both left and right side of the split screen. You
can see the different scale and settings of 2D maps at the same
time.
[Split: 3D Map]
Displays 2D map on the left side and 3D map on the right side of
the split screen.
[Intersection]
Displays the enlarged view of the next intersection on the left side
of the screen during route guidance.
“Route guidance screens” (page 6-28)
[Turn List]
Displays the turn list on the left side of the screen when a route is
set.
“Route guidance screens” (page 6-28)
[Drive Report]
Displays your eco drive report on the left side of the screen.
Touch [History] to view the drive report history. Touch [Reset] to
clear the past records.
Touch [000] to switch to the full eco drive report screen.
Push to switch to the full map screen.
[Full Map]
Displays full map screen.
6-12 Navigation (if equipped)
Menu item
Action
[Map Icons]
Select the categories of POI icons to display on the map screen.
“Displaying map icons” (page 6-15)
[More Settings]
[Map Orientation]
The map orientation can be selected from [North Up] or [Heading
Up]. [Map Orientation] is available only when 2D map is displayed.
[Long Range]
The position of the vehicle icon is located slightly lower than the
center of the screen to view a wider area in the traveling direction.
Long Range is available only when the map view is in [Heading Up]
mode.
[Left Split Map Settings]
[Map Orientation]
The map orientation for the left side of split screen can be
selected from [North Up] or [Heading Up].
[Long Range]
With this item turned on, the vehicle position icon on the left
screen will be located slightly lower than the center of the screen
so that a wider area in the traveling direction can be viewed.
Long Range Map View is available only when the left side of split
screen is in [Heading Up] mode.
[Map Scale]
Sets the map scale of the left screen.
[Audio Display on Map]
Turns on/off the audio information displayed at the top of the
map screen.
[Map Colour]
Sets map color from [Standard], [Emphasise Roads], [Emphasise
Text] and [Emphasise Traffic].
[Map Text Size]
[Large]
Sets the font size of the text displayed on the map screen.
[Medium]
[Small]
[Select Text to Display [Place Names]
on Map]
Allows place, facility and road names to be displayed on the map
screen.
[Facility Names]
[Road Names]
Navigation (if equipped)
6-13
Menu item
Action
[Map Scrolling Information]
Information about the location, on which the center of the cross
pointer is placed by scrolling on the map, can be set to be
displayed.
“Displaying map scrolling information” (page 6-15)
[Tracking Dots Displayed on Map]
[Record & Show Tracking Dots on Map]
Turns the route tracking dots display on/off.
[Tracking Dot Distance]
Select the interval between tracking dots.
[Delete Track to Current Deletes the route tracking dots up to the current location.
Location]
[Small Step Zoom with Dial]
Sets the free zoom function on/off. When this setting is on, it is
possible to adjust the scale in smaller steps than with normal
scale adjustment.
[Show all M-way Exits on Route]
Turns on/off the motorway exit information display.
[Auto. Show Turn List on M-way]
The turn list can be displayed automatically while driving on a
motorway.
“Turn list” (page 6-28)
[North Up when Zoomed Out]
When this setting is turned on, the orientation of the map is
automatically changed to [North Up] when the widest map scale
is selected.
[Back to Map]
6-14 Navigation (if equipped)
Back to the current location map.
SETTING AV0NJA1-571EE76C-6CCB-4E21-8682-A57D3A386B15
INFORMATION ON MAP
Some information on the map can be
displayed or hidden.
Displaying map scrolling information AV0NJA1-7E953B13-E5EF-41C1-88FC-C5E9ABF8FE53
INFO:
.
When the settings are turned on,
placing the cross pointer on the icons
will display the information in a PopUp window. The latitude/longitude of
any point on the map where the cross
pointer is located will be displayed on
the bottom left corner of the map
screen.
.
When the [ ] is displayed on the PopUp window, the destination can be set
by touching it.
Touching [ ] will display the place
information screen.
On the place information screen,
touch [Call] to call the selected place
if the key is available.
Touch [Go Here] to set the selected
location as the destination.
.
Touch [<] or [>] to scroll to the next or
previous page.
Displaying
map icons
AV0NJA1-AA72987D-2743-4761-9338-7DED04C38996
Displays map icons of certain points of
interest (such as restaurants, parking lots,
etc.) on the map.
1. Touch [Settings] on the Launch Bar.
2. Touch [Navigation].
3. Touch [Map Settings].
4. Touch [Map Icons].
5. Touch the preferred icon. The indicator of the selected icon illuminates.
INFO:
.
[Map Icons] can also be accessed from
[ ] on the Map screen.
.
If brand icons are registered in the
map data, the brand icons will be
displayed on the map instead of the
general map icons.
5GB0711X
Information about the location on which
the center of the cross pointer is placed
can be set to be displayed.
1. Touch [Settings] on the Launch Bar.
2. Touch [Navigation] and touch [Map
Settings].
3. Touch [More Settings].
4. Touch [Map Scrolling Information].
5. Touch the preferred information item.
The following information items are
available.
. [Address Book Icons]
.
[Traffic Icons]
.
[Destination/Waypoint Icons]
.
[Show Pop-Up for POIs]
.
[Latitude/Longitude Info]
TRAFFIC INFORMATION ON MAP (if
equipped)GUID-87AF72D4-C186-446D-B6EC-79ABDA088A25
Traffic information can be displayed on
the map.
“Traffic information on map” (page 641)
Navigation (if equipped)
6-15
MAP MENU
SCREEN
AV0NJA1-0929BEAC-F11F-4396-A760-B4D3410181E5
Touch [ ] while the current location map
screen or a scrolled map screen is displayed to display the menu corresponding to that screen.
This menu can be used to quickly access
helpful functions, such as setting a destination or searching for points of interest
nearby.
.
[Map Settings]:
Map view settings can be changed.
“Map settings” (page 6-12)
.
[Map Icons]:
The map icons can be displayed or
hidden by type.
“Displaying map icons” (page 615)
.
.
Current location
map screen
AV0NJA1-EA83CF78-70AB-4C26-AB1F-C95D1370CA59
5GB0712X
If [ ] is touched while the current location map screen is displayed, the following options are available.
. [Save Location]:
Saves the current vehicle location in
the Address Book.
“Storing location by moving map”
(page 6-43)
.
[Points of Interest]:
Searches for the Points of Interest and
set as destinations.
“Finding points of interest” (page
6-21)
6-16
Navigation (if equipped)
“Setting point on map” (page 625)
.
[Add to Route]:
Adds the map location pointed at by
the cross pointer as a destination or a
waypoint to the route already set.
“Setting destination or waypoint”
(page 6-36)
[Traffic Info Settings] (if equipped):
Set the various functions of the traffic
information.
“Traffic information settings”
(page 6-42)
.
[Nearby POIs]:
Searches for points of interest near
the current vehicle location.
“Finding points of interest” (page
6-21)
[Cancel Route]:
Delete current destination and waypoints.
“Canceling Route” (page 6-32)
.
[Save Location]:
Saves the map location pointed at by
the cross pointer in the Address Book.
“Storing location by moving map”
(page 6-43)
.
[Delete]:
Deletes a saved location or destination (waypoint) when the cross pointer is placed over an icon.
“Deleting individual item on map”
(page 6-49)
Scrolled location
map screen
AV0NJA1-A63AF447-9FDA-4980-AA8F-A277E7E58E1F
5GB0806X
If [ ] is touched while the map is scrolled,
the following options are available.
. [New Dest.]:
Sets the map location pointed at by
the cross pointer as a new destination.
SETTING DESTINATION
AV0NJA1-501A39C4-2FAD-451F-B110-26D6B2F785A4
The system can provide route guidance
once a destination is set.
BASIC OPERATIONS
AV0NJA1-F50ACAED-A068-494D-AA64-CD603677AFC9
Displaying destination setting
menu AV0NJA1-B2EBC8BC-3B61-48B8-A7CB-A84B9994A079
There are several methods that can be
used to set a destination. Select a preferred method for finding and setting a
destination.
5GB0807X
Example
Push and then touch [Destination]
on the Launch Bar.
Availability of the destination setting
methods varies depending on the models
and specifications. Items displayed on the
screen may not function depending on
various conditions.
Available destination setting methods:
Setting item
Action
[Enter POI / Address]
Searches for a destination by inputting the address or POI names.
“Free text search” (page 6-20)
[Go Home]
Searches for a route from the current location to the previously stored home location.
“Setting home or work location as destination” (page 6-20)
Navigation (if equipped)
6-17
[Street Address]
Searches for a destination by address.
“Finding address (except for Mexico)” (page 6-21)
“Finding address (for Mexico)” (page 6-21)
[Points of Interest]
Searches for a destination from various categories.
“Finding points of interest” (page 6-21)
[Previous Destinations]
Searches for the destination from the previous destinations and a previous start point.
“Searching from previous destinations” (page 6-23)
[Go to Work]
Searches for a route from the current location to the previously stored work location.
“Setting home or work location as destination” (page 6-20)
[Address Book]
Searches for a destination from the vehicle Address Book.
“Searching from address book” (page 6-23)
[City Center]
Sets the center of a city as the destination.
“Setting city center (for Mexico)” (page 6-24)
[Intersection]
Sets an intersection as a destination.
“Setting intersection (for Mexico)” (page 6-24)
[Phone Number]
Searches for a point of interest by a phone number.
“Setting by phone number” (page 6-24)
[Saved Routes]
Sets a route from the saved route data.
“Setting from saved routes” (page 6-25)
[By Map]
Searches for a destination by map.
“Setting point on map” (page 6-25)
[SXM Travel Link]
This function cannot be used outside the USA and Canada.
[Latitude/Longitude]
Sets a destination from latitude and longitude.
“Setting with latitude/longitude” (page 6-25)
[Door-to-Door Navigation]
Turns on/off Door-to-Door Navigation.
“Using Door-to-Door Navigation” (page 6-26)
6-18
Navigation (if equipped)
INFO:
.
.
After setting a destination, the location of the destination can be adjusted and the location can be stored in the Address Book, etc.
“Options before starting the route guidance” (page 6-27)
The destination can be deleted.
“Canceling Route” (page 6-32)
Navigation (if equipped)
6-19
FREE TEXT
SEARCH
AV0NJA1-E261FFFD-3EE1-4472-A545-8EB5D1BB81FF
A location or facility can be searched by
inputting POI name or Address.
1. Push .
2. Touch [Destination] on the Launch
Bar.
3. Touch [Enter POI / Address].
4. Enter the POI name or address. After
finishing the entry, touch [List]. The
search results are displayed in list.
INFO:
.
To display the search results of POI
names, touch [ ].
To display the search results of
addresses, touch [ ].
.
While entering the facility name, the
expected selections are displayed
on the input screen. The list can be
scrolled by touching [<] or [>].
.
Touch [Option] to sort or narrow
down the results.
5. Touch the preferred destination from
the list.
6. The entire route is displayed. Touch
[Start] to start route guidance.
6-20
Navigation (if equipped)
Online Search
(if equipped)
AV0NJA1-D2AAA169-87A7-4617-8B83-C6A9C126CE91
When your vehicle is connecting to a Wi-Fi
network, Online Search can search the
location considering the latest information via the on-line network.
1. Push .
2. Touch [Destination] on the Launch
Bar.
3. Touch [Enter POI / Address].
4. Enter the POI name or address. After
finishing the entry, touch [List]. The
search results are displayed in list.
5. Touch [Option].
6. Touch [Online]. The indicator will illuminate.
7. The system connects to the on-line
network.
8. The updated search result is displayed.
INFO:
You can also use the Online Search when
a Door-to-Door Navigation (if equipped)
enabled smartphone is connected to the
vehicle. It may be charged separately
when Door-to-Door Navigation is used.
“Using Door-to-Door Navigation”
(page 6-26)
SETTING HOME OR WORK LOCATION ASAV0NJA1-EFD628DF-FD10-4DDD-BDF4-340E595F2B4E
DESTINATION
The home or work location can be quickly
set as the destination if the location is
stored in advance.
1. Push .
2. Touch [Destination] on the Launch
Bar.
3. Touch [Go Home] or [Go to Work].
INFO:
If the home or work location is not
stored yet, the system will display a
message asking if you wish to store a
home or work location. Touch [Yes] to
store the home or working place
location.
“Storing home or work location”
(page 6-42)
4. The entire route is displayed. Touch
[Start] to start route guidance.
INFO:
[Go Home] can also be accessed from the
Launch Bar.
FINDING ADDRESS (except for
Mexico) AV0NJA1-E974693C-B055-4844-9B8F-849E0623EC34
The system supports searching for a
destination by address.
1. Push .
2. Touch [Destination] on the Launch
Bar.
3. Touch [Street Address].
.
Touch [Intersection] to enter the
intersection.
INFO:
.
While entering the data, the expected words are displayed on the
input screen. The list can be
scrolled by touching [<] or [>].
.
Touch [Last 5 Cities] to display the
last 5 cities set as destinations.
5. After entering the address, touch [OK].
6. The entire route is displayed. Touch
[Start] to start route guidance.
.
Touch [State/Province] to enter the
state or province name.
.
Touch [House No. & Street] to enter
the house number and the street
name. If the house number is not
available, touch [No House #].
After finishing the entry, touch
[List]. A list of streets is displayed.
.
Touch [City] to enter the city name.
INFO:
.
While entering the data, the expected words are displayed on the
input screen. The list can be
scrolled by touching [<] or [>].
.
Touch [Last 5 Cities] to display the
last 5 cities set as destinations.
FINDING ADDRESS
(for Mexico)
GUID-6B7CBBA8-C7E7-44DF-9AE0-FC7050B3DBC7
5GB0773X
4. Input the street address.
. Touch [Country] to select the country name.
.
.
.
Touch [Postcode or City] to enter a
postal code or city name. If the city
name is not available, touch [All
Cities].
The system supports searching for a
destination by address.
1. Push .
2. Touch [Destination] on the Launch
Bar.
3. Touch [Street Address].
FINDINGAV0NJA1-E537C75F-F389-4D0C-BDC4-80E087FFBD4F
POINTS OF INTEREST
This allows you to find a facility by name
or by category. Specify the region and city
of the destination to find it more quickly.
Touch [Street] to enter the street
name.
After finishing the entry, touch
[List]. A list of streets is displayed.
Touch [House Number] to enter the
house number. If the house number is not available, touch [No
House #].
5. The entire route is displayed. Touch
[Start] to start route guidance.
NOTE:
4. Input the street address.
Locations and business hours of facilities are subject to change, which may
not be reflected in the map data.
5GB0717X
Double-check this information before
you go to an emergency facility to
ensure that you can receive the proper
support. Otherwise, you may not re-
Navigation (if equipped)
6-21
ceive emergency help when you arrive
at the destination.
A confirmation message also appears
on the navigation screen. Follow the
displayed instructions and check the
items required.
Searching for a Points of Interest
by nameAV0NJA1-42622348-4B68-4A78-9240-986407C6723B
1. Push .
2. Touch [POI] on the Launch Bar.
3. Touch [Spell Name]. A character input
screen is displayed.
equipped), using an available Wi-Fi
network.
“Online Search” (page 6-20)
The following optional functions are
available by touching [Option] on the
list.
. [Along Route]:
If a route is already set, the system
displays only the facilities located
along the route.
.
[Near Destination]:
When a route is set, up to 100 POIs
are listed in the order of distance
from the destination.
.
[Select a City]:
Narrow down the list by specifying
the city.
.
[Near Current Location]:
When a route is set, up to 100 POIs
are listed in the order of distance
from the current location.
.
[Sort]:
The list can be sorted by [By
Distance] or [By Name].
INFO:
When a route is set, touch [Destination] on the Launch Bar and select
[Points of Interest] to select [Spell
Name].
4. Enter the name of the destination
facility. After finishing the entry, touch
[List]. A list screen is displayed.
INFO:
.
.
While entering the facility name, the
expected selections are displayed
on the input screen. The list can be
scrolled by touching [<] or [>].
To search for a POI with two or
more words, touch [Space] to enter
a space between each word.
The latest information can be obtained by touching [Online] (if
6-22 Navigation (if equipped)
5. Touch the preferred destination facility from the list.
6. The entire route is displayed. Touch
[Start] to start route guidance.
INFO:
After setting a destination, the location of
the destination can be adjusted and the
location can be saved in the saved location, etc.
“Options before starting the route
guidance” (page 6-27)
Searching Points of Interest by
categoryAV0NJA1-351BE659-0AB9-473A-AC1A-38ABCADA93D6
1.
2.
3.
4.
Push .
Touch [POI] on the Launch Bar.
Touch [All Categories].
Touch the preferred category. The
facility list is displayed.
5GB0775X
INFO:
If the selected category has subcategories, a list will be displayed. Select
the preferred subcategory.
The POI categories to be used frequently can be registered in the Points
of Interest menu.
“Customizing POIs” (page 6-23)
5. Touch [Option] to narrow down, sort
or refresh the list.
“Searching for a Points of Interest
by name” (page 6-22)
The latest information can be obtained by touching [Online] (if
equipped), using an available Wi-Fi
network.
“Online Search” (page 6-20)
6. Touch the preferred destination facility from the list.
7. The entire route is displayed. Touch
[Start] to start route guidance.
Customizing
POIs
AV0NJA1-E1E635F3-5CB1-44EF-9341-C498E461FE2C
The POI categories displayed in the Points
of Interest menu can be customized.
1. Push .
2. Touch [POI] on the Launch Bar.
3. Touch [Customise POIs].
4. Touch the item number to be modified.
5. Touch the preferred POI category. The
selected POI category is displayed in
the Points of Interest menu.
oldest one is automatically deleted and
the new destination is added.
1. Push .
2. Touch [Destination] on the Launch
Bar.
3. Touch [Previous Destinations]. A list
screen is displayed.
4. Touch the previous destination or a
previous start point from the list.
5. The entire route is displayed. Touch
[Start] to start route guidance.
SEARCHING FROM ADDRESS
BOOK AV0NJA1-4C7DF925-9404-4CBE-A2DD-E3DD6D9BAF0B
Locations frequently visited can be stored
in the Address Book and reused to set
destinations.
“Storing location” (page 6-42)
1. Push .
2. Touch [Destination] on the Launch
Bar.
3. Touch [Address Book].
SEARCHING FROM PREVIOUS
DESTINATIONS
AV0NJA1-CCA4B30F-6D42-498B-97B8-C74AE29C5414
A previous destination or a previous start
point can be set as the destination.
Up to 100 previous destinations will be
automatically stored. If the number of
previous destinations exceeds 100, the
INFO:
.
Touch [Add New] to add a new
location.
.
Touch [ ] to edit the saved route.
“Editing stored location” (page
6-45)
Selecting [Sort] displays a list of
various sort functions.
— [Sort by Number]:
The Address Book entries are displayed in ascending numerical order.
.
— [Sort by Name]:
The Address Book entries are displayed in alphabetic order.
— [Sort by Icon]:
By selecting a particular icon, a list
that contains only the Address
Book entries associated with that
icon is displayed.
— [Sort by Group]:
By selecting a particular group
(family, friends, leisure, etc.), the
selected group is displayed at the
top of the list.
5. The entire route is displayed. Touch
[Start] to start route guidance.
5GB0720X
4. Touch the preferred location from the
list.
Navigation (if equipped)
6-23
SETTING CITY CENTER (for Mexico)
GUID-F66ED4F3-E5FB-43C5-B22B-9E20CA4D77D7
SETTING INTERSECTION (for Mexico)
GUID-242C55C6-B2B1-4B33-874C-6A2EF236EBF2
screen is displayed. Select the desired street name.
It is possible to set the center of a
specified city as a destination.
1. Push .
2. Touch [Destination] on the Launch
Bar.
3. Touch [City Center]. A character input
screen is displayed.
4. Enter the name of the city and touch
[List]. A list screen is displayed.
It is possible to set an intersection of any
two streets as the destination and have
the system calculate a route.
1. Push .
2. Touch [Destination] on the Launch
Bar.
3. Touch [Intersection]. The Intersection
screen is displayed.
5. Touch [OK].
6. The entire route is displayed. Touch
[Start] to start route guidance.
SETTING BY PHONE NUMBER (if
equipped)GUID-245E24DC-6C7B-4772-A3CC-7322C00EE9BC
If the phone number of a facility is
registered in the map data, it is possible
to search for a facility by entering the
phone number.
INFO:
.
While entering the data, the expected words are displayed on the
input screen. The list can be
scrolled by touching [<] or [>].
.
Touch [Last 5 Cities] to display the
last 5 cities recently set as destinations.
5. Touch the preferred destination from
the list.
6. The entire route is displayed. Touch
[Start] to start route guidance.
6-24 Navigation (if equipped)
INFO:
.
If the area code of the specified phone
number does not exist in the map
data, the system cannot search for
the location.
.
Only the locations included in the
database in the map data can be
searched for by phone number. Residential phone numbers cannot be
used to search for a location.
5GB0721X
4. Input the Intersection.
. Touch [State/Province] to enter the
state or province name if necessary.
.
Touch [City] to enter the city name.
.
Touch [1st Street] to enter the first
street name. After finishing the
entry, touch [List]. A list screen is
displayed. Select the desired street
name.
.
After the first street information is
entered, touch [2nd Street] to enter
the second street name. After finishing the entry, touch [List]. A list
1. Push .
2. Touch [Destination] on the Launch
Bar.
3. Touch [Phone Number]. The phone
number input screen is displayed.
4. Enter the phone number including the
area code. After finishing entry, touch
[OK].
5. The entire route is displayed. Touch
[Start] to start route guidance.
INFO:
If there are more than one location
registered for the phone number, a list
screen is displayed. Touch an item on the
list to select a preferred location.
INFO:
.
Touch [ ] to edit the saved route.
“Editing stored route” (page 6-48)
.
The saved route only includes locations (destination and waypoints) and
route calculation conditions, not the
route itself. Therefore, when the destination is set using a saved route, a
different route may be suggested if
the current vehicle location is different
from the one when the route was
saved.
.
To save the current route, touch [Save
Current Route]. A route can be saved
only when it includes one or more
waypoints.
“Storing route” (page 6-43)
SETTING FROM
SAVED ROUTES
AV0NJA1-174315DE-CFE8-4311-94E7-67FE9F3D0C92
It is possible to select a preferred route
from the saved routes.
1. Push .
2. Touch [Destination] on the Launch
Bar.
3. Touch [Saved Routes]. A list screen is
displayed.
4. Touch the preferred route from the
list.
SETTINGAV0NJA1-1CECA297-8DF7-4E58-9746-C408EB3A9FBD
POINT ON MAP
It is possible to set a location scrolled to
on the map as the destination and have
the system calculate a route.
1. Push .
2. Touch [Destination] on the Launch
Bar.
3. Touch [By Map].
5GB0808X 4. Scroll the map, place the cross pointer
over the preferred location, and touch
5. The entire route is displayed. Touch
[OK].
[Start] to start route guidance.
INFO:
The point on the highlighted road
where the center of the cross pointer
is located can be set as a destination.
5. The entire route is displayed. Touch
[Start] to start route guidance.
Other settings
1. Scroll the map, place the cross pointer
over the preferred location, and touch
[ ].
2. Touch [New Dest.].
3. The entire route is displayed. Touch
[Start] to start route guidance.
SETTING WITH LATITUDE/LONGITUDE AV0NJA1-7434D3F5-2BF7-4F5E-8F39-AD8A6A3A84C1
A destination can be set by specifying the
latitude and longitude of the location.
5GB0789X
1. Push .
2. Touch [Destination] on the Launch
Bar.
3. Touch [Latitude/Longitude]. A number
input screen is displayed.
Navigation (if equipped)
6-25
4. Enter latitude and longitude of the
location to be set as a destination and
touch [OK].
5. The location is displayed at the center
of the map. Touch [OK].
6. The entire route is displayed. Touch
[Start] to start route guidance.
INFO:
.
To switch between entering latitude
and longitude, move the cursor by
touching [<] and [>].
.
Touch [Change] to switch the format
of the latitude and longitude.
.
Touch [West] or [East] to set the
appropriate longitude.
.
Touch [North] or [South] to set the
appropriate latitude.
.
A message will appear if the selected
location is not included in the map
area.
USING DOOR-TO-DOOR NAVIGATION (if equipped)
GUID-3F5A0265-A63D-4F7B-BE34-15FD35E1D2DF
The destination can be set using a
companion smartphone application and
transferred to the vehicle. For detailed
information, see the manual in the Doorto-Door Navigation app.
6-26
Navigation (if equipped)
INFO:
.
The Door-to-Door Navigation app can
be downloaded from the iTunes App
Store or Google Play.
.
A user account is required before
logging-in at the first use of the
application.
1. Push .
2. Touch [Destination] on the Launch
Bar.
3. Touch [Door-to-Door Navigation] and
check that [Sync with Door-to-Door
Navigation] is turned on.
INFO:
[Sync with Door-to-Door Navigation]
can also be turned on from the
navigation settings screen.
“Navigation settings” (page 6-50)
4. Activate the Door-to-Door Navigation
app on your smartphone.
5. Connect the smartphone to the vehicle via Bluetooth®.
“Setting Bluetooth®” (page 2-23)
INFO:
When using Door-to-Door Navigation,
turn on the Bluetooth® connection for
both audio and hands-free phone on
the Connections settings screen.
“Connecting cellular phone/audio
device” (page 2-23)
6. Select a destination using the Doorto-Door Navigation app on your
smartphone.
Transfer the destination from the
smartphone to the vehicle.
INFO:
If the destination cannot be transferred to the vehicle, turn off and then
on the Bluetooth® connection.
“Bluetooth® settings” (page 2-24)
7. A confirmation screen will be displayed. Touch [Go Here] and the position of the transferred location is
displayed in the preview on the touch
screen display.
INFO:
.
Touch [Store] to register the destination in the address book.
.
Touch [Ignore] to cancel the transfer of the destination.
8. The entire route is displayed. Touch
[Start] to start route guidance.
ROUTE GUIDANCE
AV0NJA1-FD38A9D2-BD38-4915-90E1-EFF73D4DAEA9
OPTIONS BEFORE STARTING THE
ROUTE GUIDANCE
AV0NJA1-E83C964B-BC32-48FB-AF85-60942AFE2170
Before starting the route guidance, select
menus for route details to modify the
route, preview the turn list, or store the
route.
INFO:
Touch [1 Type] to display alternative
routes calculated with a route search
condition selected on the [Basic Route
Type] setting screen.
“Route Preference” (page 6-33)
Touch [3 Types] to display alternative
routes calculated in all three route search
conditions ([Fastest], [ECO] and [Shortest]).
.
5GB0825X
.
[Start]:
Starts route guidance to the selected
destination.
.
[Add to Route]:
Adds a location to the route previously
set.
.
[More Routes]:
Suggests alternative routes.
— [Fastest]
Selects a route that is fastest in
time.
— [ECO]
Selects a route for the energy
saving.
— [Shortest]
Selects a route that is the shortest
in distance.
[Turn List]:
Displays a detailed turn list. The map
can be displayed and the turn can be
avoided by touching a turning point.
“Displaying Turn List ” (page 6-32)
.
[Move Location]:
Displays a map screen and allows the
location of the destination to be
adjusted.
.
[More Options]:
— [Place Info]:
Displays detailed information of the
destination. Touch [Go Here] to set
the destination. Touch [Call] (when
available) to make a phone call to
the facility set as a destination.
— [Save Location]:
Saves the location to the Address
Book.
— [Save Route]:
Store the route for later use.
ABOUT ROUTE
GUIDANCE
AV0NJA1-FD5538DC-DAD3-4D25-9388-EEEB98B01107
After setting the route, select [Start] to
start the route guidance.
During route guidance, the system navigates you through the guide points using
visual and voice guidance.
WARNING:
.
The navigation system’s visual and
voice guidance is for reference purposes only. The contents of the
guidance may be inappropriate depending on the situation.
.
Follow all traffic regulations when
driving along the suggested route
(e.g., one-way traffic).
“Route guidance” (page 6-57)
Voice guidance during route guidance AV0NJA1-B9542D5E-9818-4B43-8BA0-4E1F33E37BDB
Basics of voice guidance:
GEN5-N-120906-EB91730C-D0C7-441C-9028-C9C6F27A417B
Voice guidance announces which direction to turn when approaching an intersection for which a turn is necessary.
INFO:
.
There may be some cases in which
voice guidance and actual road conditions do not correspond. This may
occur because of discrepancies between the actual road and the infor-
Navigation (if equipped) 6-27
mation on the map data, or may also
be due to the vehicle speed.
.
In case voice guidance does not
correspond to the actual road conditions, follow the information obtained
from traffic signs or notices on the
road.
.
When approaching a guide point (intersection or corner) or destination/
waypoint during route guidance, voice
guidance announces the remaining
distance and/or turning direction.
Push and hold to repeat
voice guidance.
Route guidance
screens
AV0NJA1-1EC15C97-38ED-4C88-9336-8B6A6573F8DE
Various guidance screens are displayed
on the touch screen display during route
guidance.
The settings of the guidance screens can
be changed.
“Map settings” (page 6-12)
Route guidance on map screen:
GEN5-N-120906-EB91730C-D0C7-441C-9028-C9C6F27A417B
turn arrow and the distance to the next
guide point are displayed in the upper left
corner of the map screen. This arrow
indicates the turning direction at the next
guide point (corner or intersection). When
approaching a guide an point, enlarged
intersection view is displayed. Also, there
may be cases where next street names
are announced.
Enlarged intersection view:
Junction guidance:
GEN5-N-120906-EB91730C-D0C7-441C-9028-C9C6F27A417B
5GB0778X
GEN5-N-120906-EB91730C-D0C7-441C-9028-C9C6F27A417B
While driving on a motorway, when the
vehicle approaches a junction, the system
automatically switches to the split screen
view and displays an enlarged view of the
junction on the left side of the screen.
After the vehicle passes the junction, the
system automatically returns to the full
screen mode. To switch to the full map
5GB0777X screen while the enlarged junction view is
displayed, push .
When approaching a guide point, the
system automatically changes to the split
Turn list:
GEN5-N-120906-EB91730C-D0C7-441C-9028-C9C6F27A417B
screen view and shows an enlarged view
of the intersection on the left side of the
screen. To switch to the full map screen
while the enlarged intersection view is
displayed, push . The distance to
the guide point and the name of the next
street to drive on are displayed at the top
of the screen.
5GB0779X
5GB0776X
When route guidance starts, the small
6-28
Navigation (if equipped)
When [Turn List] in the map settings
menu is turned on, a turn list can be
displayed on the left side of the screen.
“Map settings” (page 6-12)
To switch to the full map screen, push
.
The left screen automatically switches to
an enlarged view of the intersection when
approaching a guide point.
With [Auto. Show Turn List on M-way]
turned on, the turn list will appear automatically when driving on motorways.
“Map settings” (page 6-12)
Selecting a waypoint from the exit
information list:
When exit information is displayed on the
turn list, a waypoint to a facility located
near the motorway exit can be set as a
waypoint. The facility categories that are
not shown with an icon on the turn list
cannot be selected.
4. The destination or waypoint is set, and
the route search is performed.
“Options before starting the
route guidance” (page 6-27)
5. Touch [Start] to start the route guidance.
ROUTE MENU
AV0NJA1-A1C01E8A-570A-408B-B0D8-CEBD91E269C3
WARNING:
Always stop the vehicle in a safe location before modifying the route conditions. Modifying the route conditions
while driving may cause an accident.
During route guidance, the route conditions can be modified and the route
information can be confirmed. Set route
conditions according to your personal
preference.
5GB0790X
1.
Touch the exit where the exit information icon is displayed. The category list
screen is displayed.
2. Touch the POI category. A list of
facilities located near the motorway
exit is displayed.
3. Touch the preferred facility for the
destination or waypoint.
5GB0830X
Push when a destination is set,
and then touch [Route] on the Launch
Bar.
The route menu screen is displayed.
Navigation (if equipped)
6-29
Available settings
Menu item
Result
[Cancel Route]
Cancels the current route guidance.
“Canceling Route” (page 6-32)
[Turn List]
Displays the details of the suggested route.
“Displaying Turn List ” (page 6-32)
[Detour]
A detour of a specified distance can be calculated.
“Setting detour route” (page 6-32)
[Route Preference]
Set the route search conditions.
“Route Preference” (page 6-33)
[Recalculate]
Manually search for the route again after changing the search
conditions, etc. and have the system calculate a route.
“Recalculating route” (page 6-36)
[Show Destination]
[Move Location]
Displays a map screen and allows the location of the destination to be
adjusted.
[Nearby POIs]
Search for points of interest near the destination, such as restaurants
and gas stations, etc. The location can be set as a destination or a
waypoint.
[Save Location]
Save the destination in the Address Book.
[Edit/Add to Route]
A destination or waypoint can be edited/added to a route that has
already been set.
“Editing route” (page 6-36)
[Guidance Settings]
Various guidance settings can be customized.
“Guidance settings” (page 6-39)
[Save Route]
The current route (a destination and waypoints) can be saved. A
maximum of 10 routes can be saved. The saved routes can easily be
recalled for future use. Saved route includes only the location
information, not the route itself. Route may vary depending on the
traffic information (if equipped) or other conditions.
6-30 Navigation (if equipped)
[Map Scroll]
Displays the current map screen which can be scrolled to confirm the
location of the destination, waypoints, route, etc.
[Simulation]
Simulates the route guidance. This function provides a detailed image
of the route with voice guidance.
The following operations are available:
[
]: Pauses the simulation.
]: Resumes the simulation.
[
[
]: Ends the simulation.
[ ]: Increases the play speed. 4 levels of speed adjustment are
available.
[
]: Decrease the play speed. 4 levels of speed adjustment are
available.
Navigation (if equipped)
6-31
CANCELING
ROUTE
AV0NJA1-8DC58B15-9628-42A9-83C4-AE2C6B35D56B
It is possible to delete a destination and
all waypoints that have already been set.
1. Push and then touch [Route]
on the Launch Bar.
2. Touch [Cancel Route].
3. A confirmation message is displayed.
Touch [Yes] to delete the currently set
destinations and waypoints.
INFO:
.
.
Touching [Cancel] on the Launch Bar
can also delete the destination and
waypoints.
The deleted destination and waypoints cannot be reactivated.
DISPLAYING
TURN LIST
AV0NJA1-30EC4F85-30D3-4792-8E7F-3027E110DC66
Displays the details of the suggested
route.
1.
2. Touch [Turn List].
.
5.0 km (3.0 mi)
Setting avoid
road
AV0NJA1-0206ED89-2F7C-41C6-8531-0E0C2FD3B109
.
10.0 km (5.0 mi)
The detour to avoid a road is available by
touching the road name on the Turn List
display.
1. Touch the road on the list you prefer
to avoid. The position of the selected
intersection is displayed.
2. Touch [Avoid This Road].
INFO:
Touching [Show Map] can confirm the
entire route.
3. Display returns to the turn list. Touch
[Recalculate]. The route is recalculated.
Touch [Cancel] to cancel the avoid
setting.
SETTING AV0NJA1-69587962-3FE9-4EAB-B845-77B0F01E889C
DETOUR ROUTE
To detour from the suggested route, a
detour distance can be specified.
1. Push and then touch [Route]
on the Launch Bar.
2. Touch [Detour].
3. Touch a detour distance.
Available setting items:
5GB0780X
. 200 m (1/4 mi)
Push and then touch [Route]
. 500 m (1/2 mi)
on the Launch Bar.
. 1.0 km (1.0 mi)
6-32
Navigation (if equipped)
After calculating the detour, the system displays the detour route on the
map.
INFO:
.
The detour setting can be canceled by
touching [Cancel Detour].
.
When the vehicle has deviated from
the suggested route, [Detour] cannot
be selected.
.
If the system cannot calculate a
detour with the specified conditions,
the previous suggested route is displayed.
.
If the vehicle is traveling very fast, the
detour route may start from a location
that the vehicle has already passed.
ROUTE PREFERENCE
AV0NJA1-126160A4-D2D4-4B8A-8C2C-7E583DEBCA04
It is possible to set the conditions of the route search.
1. Touch [Settings] on the Launch Bar.
2. Touch [Navigation] and touch [Route Preference].
3. Touch the item you would like to set.
Available items may vary depending on models and specifications.
Setting Item
[Basic Route Type]
[Other Routing
Choices]
Action
[Fastest Route]
Prioritizes the use of fastest route.
[Eco]
Prioritizes a route which uses less energy.
[Shortest Distance]
Prioritizes the shortest route.
The route may not be the shortest because the system
prioritizes roads that are easy to drive on for safety
reasons.
[Minimise Motorways]
Minimizes the use of motorways.
[Minimise Toll Roads]
Minimizes the use of toll roads.
[Time Restricted
Roads]
[Seasonal Restricted
Roads]
[Use Restriction Info]
Calculates route taking time restriction information into
consideration.
[Do Not Use Restriction Info]
Calculates route without taking time restriction information into consideration.
[Avoid]
Calculates route avoiding the use of time restricted roads.
[Use Restriction Info]
Calculates route taking seasonal restriction information
into consideration.
[Do Not Use Restriction Info]
Calculates route without taking seasonal restriction
information into consideration.
[Avoid]
Calculates route avoiding the use of seasonal restricted
roads.
Navigation (if equipped) 6-33
[Use Traffic Information]
[Customise More
Routes]
[Estimated Time]
[Time Shown on
Map]
6-34
[Auto]
Calculates the route automatically taking traffic information into consideration.
[Accept]
If a traffic jam or incident occurs, a confirmation screen
will appear before calculation.
[OFF]
Calculates the route without taking traffic information
into consideration.
[Use Avoid Area Settings]
When enabled, the system avoids the previously defined
avoid areas.
[Use Ferries]
Includes the use of ferries.
[Use Car-Carrying Trains]
Includes the use of car-carrying trains.
[Use Unpaved Roads]
Includes the use of unpaved roads.
[Use HOV Lanes]
This function cannot be used outside the USA and
Canada.
[3 Types]
Calculates 3 types of route when confirming other routes.
[1 Type]
Calculates routes with a route search condition selected
on the [Basic Route Type] setting screen.
“Route Preference” (page 6-33)
[Destination]
Displays the estimated time of arrival or remaining time to
the destination during route guidance.
[Waypoint]
Displays the estimated time of arrival or remaining time to
the waypoint during the route guidance.
[ETA]
Displays the estimated time of arrival.
[Remaining]
Displays the remaining time to arrival.
Navigation (if equipped)
INFO:
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
[Route Preference] can also be accessed from route menu screen.
If the vehicle greatly deviates from the suggested route, the system calculates a new route.
Traffic jam information (if equipped) displayed on the map screen is not statistical traffic information.
If [Do Not Use Restriction Info] is selected for [Time Restricted Roads] setting, the system calculates a route without any
consideration of the regulations concerning the time or day of the week. Therefore, the suggested route may include a road
subject to traffic regulations concerning the time or day of the week. When driving along the route, always follow all traffic
regulations regardless of whether [Time Restricted Roads] is set to be considered or not.
In the area where traffic information is not broadcast, [Use Traffic Information] setting is disabled.
The system calculates to reduce the time required for the entire route from the start to the destination. If there are no
appropriate routes, the system may lead to a route where a traffic jam occurs instead of leading to a detour.
The system may not lead to a detour if the traffic closure or a traffic jam occurs far from the present location.
Navigation (if equipped)
6-35
RECALCULATING
ROUTE
AV0NJA1-338AF520-F4FD-419B-8060-6AF4890C9F43
A route can be manually searched again
after changing the search conditions, etc.
1. Push and then touch [Route]
on the Launch Bar.
2. Touch [Recalculate]. A message is
displayed and the route is recalculated.
3. Touch [Start] or conduct other operations as necessary.
“Options before starting the
route guidance” (page 6-27)
INFO:
.
.
When a waypoint has been set on the
route, the system will search for only
one route, even if route recalculation
is performed.
When the vehicle deviates from the
suggested route, the route from the
current location to the destination is
automatically searched again by the
Auto Reroute function.
EDITING AV0NJA1-0CFA5674-26DB-4DBD-94B4-07D1D137A60E
ROUTE
(page 6-36)
Current waypoint:
Touch to edit or delete the waypoint.
“Editing/deleting destination or
waypoint” (page 6-37)
[Calculate]:
5GB0791X
1.
Push and then touch [Route]
on the Launch Bar.
2. Touch [Edit/Add to Route].
3. Edit the following settings and touch
[Calculate].
Available settings
[Add Destination]:
Touch to add a new destination.
Current destination:
Touch to edit or delete the destination.
“Editing/deleting destination or
waypoint” (page 6-37)
After editing the route, touch to
recalculate a route with new conditions.
Setting destination
or waypoint
AV0NJA1-0BB2FCA4-907D-47E4-BFE0-38F304C36A5C
A destination or waypoint can be added
to a route that has already been set. Up to
20 waypoints besides one destination
can be set.
1. Push and then touch [Route]
on the Launch Bar.
2. Touch [Edit/Add to Route].
Criteria for calculating a route to the
destination/waypoint:
Touch to change the conditions for
route calculation.
“Changing route calculation conditions” (page 6-37)
[Add Waypoint]:
Touch to add a waypoint.
“Setting destination or waypoint”
6-36 Navigation (if equipped)
5GB0781X
3. Touch [Add Destination] or [Add Waypoint].
INFO:
4.
5.
6.
7.
If [Add Destination] is selected, the
current destination changes to a waypoint.
Set a destination or waypoint. The
method of searching for a waypoint
is the same as the one for a destination.
“Setting destination” (page 6-17)
Touch [Add to Route] to add the
location to the route.
The route information with the selected location added to the route is
displayed. Adjust the route calculation
conditions as necessary.
“Changing route calculation conditions” (page 6-37)
Touch [Calculate] to confirm the route
change. The route will be recalculated.
INFO:
.
The prior route will be deleted automatically.
.
Destinations or waypoints can also be
added from the Map Menu.
“Scrolled location map screen”
(page 6-16)
Editing/deleting destination or
waypointAV0NJA1-CD749FF6-3A0C-4C28-9B11-71083532CB3D
A destination or waypoint that has already been set can be modified or
deleted.
1. Push and then touch [Route]
on the Launch Bar.
2. Touch [Edit/Add to Route].
3. Touch a destination or waypoint that
is already set.
ing the cross pointer across the
map on the touch screen display.
5. Touch [Calculate] to apply the change.
INFO:
If the destination is deleted, the route
guidance will be canceled.
Changing route calculation conditions AV0NJA1-2CFF4089-B7EE-40B4-A210-DBBEF76EF02B
Each section of the route between waypoints can have different route calculation conditions.
5GB0809X
4. Touch to edit the following settings:
Available settings
. [Delete]:
A selected destination or waypoint
that has already been set can be
deleted.
.
[Change Order]:
The order of a destination and
waypoints that are already set can
be changed.
.
[Move Destination]:
The location of the destination or
waypoint can be adjusted by mov-
5GB0826X
1.
Push and then touch [Route]
on the Launch Bar.
2. Touch [Edit/Add to Route].
3. Touch the route condition shown on
the preferred section of the route to
the destination or waypoint.
4. Touch the preferred condition.
“Route Preference” (page 6-33)
The conditions are changed and the
display returns to the edit route
screen.
Navigation (if equipped)
6-37
5. Touch [Calculate] to apply the change.
INFO:
The recalculated route may not be the
shortest route because the system prioritizes roads that are easy to drive on for
safety reasons.
Changing order of destination
and waypoints
AV0NJA1-A503E69F-4403-4F87-813B-70DF8CB10CE1
The order of a destination and waypoints
that are already set can be changed.
5GB0802X
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Push and then touch [Route]
on the Launch Bar.
Touch [Edit/Add to Route].
Touch a destination or waypoint that
is already set.
Touch [Change Order].
Touch a preferred destination or waypoint to replace the previously selected destination or waypoint.
Touch [Calculate] to apply the change.
6-38 Navigation (if equipped)
GUIDANCE SETTINGS
AV0NJA1-7A6444E0-AFEC-465E-93B2-F84FA292326B
Various settings are available to customize the guidance information provided by the system.
1. Touch [Settings] on the Launch Bar.
2. Touch [Navigation] and touch [Guidance Settings].
3. Touch an item you would like to set.
Available items may vary depending on models and specifications.
Setting item
Action
[Guidance Volume]
Adjusts the volume level of voice guidance.
[Guidance Voice]
Activates or deactivates voice guidance.
[Traffic Announcement]
Activates or deactivates the traffic announcement.
When this item is activated, the system provides an announcement of traffic
information or events on the route. The indicator illuminates if traffic announcement is activated.
[Toll Booth Guide]
Activates or deactivates the function to notify that the vehicle is approaching a toll
booth.
INFO:
.
.
.
[Guidance Settings] can also be accessed from the route menu screen.
“Route menu” (page 6-29)
Even when [Traffic Announcement] is turned on, the traffic information is not announced in the area were where traffic
information is not broadcast.
The guidance volume can also be adjusted by turning /, pushing <
> (if equipped) on the steering
> (if equipped) on the steering column from behind while voice guidance is being announced.
wheel or pushing <
Navigation (if equipped) 6-39
VIEWING TRAFFIC INFORMATION
(if equipped)
GUID-039CE058-6C48-4C4E-95E8-EDB8FF933161
Two types of traffic information are available on this system, RDS-TMC (Radio Data
System - Traffic Message Channel) (for
Europe) and Premium Traffic information.
To activate RDS-TMC (for Europe), set
[Use Premium Traffic] off.
To activate Premium Traffic information,
set [Use Premium Traffic] on.
“Traffic information settings” (page
6-42)
RDS-TMC FEATURE
(for Europe)
GUID-36302FA8-10E0-4C1A-93B5-BE1F49E04B1A
smartphone through Wi-Fi.
“Traffic information settings” (page
6-42)
INFO:
You can also use Premium Traffic information when a Door-to-Door Navigation
(if equipped) enabled smartphone is connected to the vehicle.
“Using Door-to-Door Navigation”
(page 6-26)
The navigation system receives traffic
information from the best available
sources and enables the RDS-TMC to
broadcast this information for the best
possible guidance. The RDS-TMC broadcast is fed by a dedicated FM tuner so
that you can still listen to the radio while
Traffic Information is being broadcast.
Traffic information can be displayed only
in areas where RDS-TMC is broadcast.
Traffic information is not available in
some areas.
VIEWING AVAILABLE TRAFFIC INFORMATION
GUID-CB6D80C5-98DB-49A0-BF35-97D8C5F30828
PREMIUM TRAFFIC
INFORMATION
GUID-982FA42B-6223-43E7-98DC-29C9EBF9EFAE
[Show
Displays a list of traffic inforTraffic on mation found on the route
the Route] from the current vehicle location to the destination. Available only when a route is set.
Real-time traffic information can also be
obtained from Premium Traffic information with more street coverage.
The types of event displayed on the
screen are the same as RDS-TMC Information (for Europe).
Premium Traffic information is available
by turning [Use Premium Traffic] on and
connecting a Wi-Fi device or connecting a
6-40
Navigation (if equipped)
Viewing traffic
events from list
GUID-24AE91E6-4D6B-4541-8A95-1461B29FDB23
1.
Push and then touch [Info]
on the Launch Bar.
2. Touch [Traffic Information] or [Premium Traffic]. A list of available types
of information is displayed.
Available
items
[Nearby
Traffic
Info]
Function
Displays a list of available
traffic information around the
current vehicle location.
INFO:
[Traffic Information] or [Premium Traffic] is available only when the traffic
information is received.
3. Touch the preferred item. A list of
available events are displayed.
5GB0811X
4. Touch an event from the list to check
the detailed information and the map.
Touch [Avoid] to search for an alternate route.
Displaying urgent traffic information
GUID-7CB08F24-DBA3-4FC5-B86D-6DF8C5F5AA79
When an urgent event is found around
the current vehicle location, a message
pops up automatically on the touch
screen display with a voice announcement.
The message includes the icon, event
type, event information and the direct
distance from the current location to the
event.
INFO:
.
.
When there are multiple urgent
events, the event with the shortest
direct distance from the current location is displayed.
If the urgent event is on the recommended route, and if a detour is
found, the detour route notification
screen is displayed when the vehicle
approaches the detour point.
Traffic information
on map
GUID-57A00EAA-8EDD-48CE-B052-7E087DB4BDAE
Traffic information is displayed on both
2D and 3D map screens.
Screen information
Free Flow
Green
Slow traffic
Yellow
Traffic jam
Heavy traffic
Red
Slow traffic
Road closed and
Orange and white
section affected by stripes
serious traffic event
Traffic flowing freely
Queuing traffic
Accident
Orange (Premium
Traffic information
only)
Traffic information icon:
If a route is not already set, all of the
traffic information icons on the map
screen are displayed in gray. When a
route is already set, the icons on the
route are displayed in color, and the
icons outside the route are displayed
in gray.
Except for Mexico:
Stationary traffic
Slow traffic
Free flowing traffic
5GB0795X
Example
Road conditions:
For Mexico:
Stretch is closed
Accident
Roadworks
Narrow lanes
Road closed
Road work
Narrow lanes
All other events
Remaining distance and time:
Remaining distance and time calculated with consideration of traffic
information on route.
Whether to display the remaining
time to the destination or estimated
arrival time at the destination can be
selected.
“Route Preference” (page 6-33)
Traffic indicator:
TMC (for Europe)
Displayed when there is available
RDS-TMC received.
PREMIUM TRAFFIC
Displayed when there is available
Premium Traffic information received.
All other events
Navigation (if equipped) 6-41
STORING A LOCATION/ROUTE
AV0NJA1-D56E2757-E480-448D-84DE-0D0260214C62
INFO:
.
Traffic icons are displayed in the scale
level of 15 m (1/64 miles) - 12.5 km (7.5
miles) range. Some traffic icons are displayed only on the map at higher detail
levels.
INFO:
.
TRAFFIC INFORMATION
SETTINGS
GUID-931C4428-463C-4F2C-81ED-35BE26E35550
Settings for traffic information related
functions can be changed.
.
5GB0812X
1.
2.
3.
4.
Touch [Settings] on the Launch Bar.
Touch [Navigation].
Touch [Traffic Info Settings].
Touch the preferred setting. The indicator for the selected setting illuminates.
Available setting items
. [Use Premium Traffic]:
Turns Premium Traffic information
on/off.
.
[Filter Traffic Icons]:
Selects which types of traffic incidents
(e.g., accident) will be displayed on the
map screen.
6-42 Navigation (if equipped)
[Premium Traffic Update Settings]:
Sets the update timing of Premium
Traffic information.
[Traffic Info Settings] can also be
accessed from current location map
screen.
“Current location map screen”
(page 6-16)
STORINGAV0NJA1-544965B9-F333-49EA-BE90-4D6BE51EE5F0
LOCATION
Often visited locations can be stored in
the Address Book. The stored addresses
can be easily retrieved to set them as a
destination or waypoint. The Address
Book can store up to 200 locations.
Storing home
or work location
AV0NJA1-18F9446E-22F6-4B69-B465-63E96AFC7E1D
A home or work location can be stored in
the system.
Even when [Traffic Announcement] is
set to off, the route guidance will not
be affected. Also, the announcement
of emergency information will not be
turned off.
“Guidance settings” (page 6-39)
5GB0785X
1. Touch [Settings] on the Launch Bar.
2. Touch [Navigation] and touch [Address Book].
3. Touch [Add Home Location] or [Add
Work Location].
4. Touch an appropriate method to set a
location. Refer to the search methods
used for destination setting.
“Setting destination” (page 6-17)
5. Touch [OK].
6. A message is displayed, and the address of the location is stored in the
Address Book.
7. Adjust and edit the contents of the
stored item as necessary. Touch [OK]
to confirm.
“Editing stored location” (page 645)
INFO:
If you touch [Go Home (Save Location)] or
[Go to Work (Save Location)] on the
destination screen while the home or
work location is not stored yet, the
system will display a message asking if
you wish to store a home or work
location. Touch [Yes] to store the home
or work location.
5. Touch [Add New].
6. Touch an appropriate method to set a
location. Refer to the search methods
used for destination setting.
“Setting destination” (page 6-17)
7. Touch [OK].
8. A message is displayed, and the address of the location is stored in the
Address Book.
9. Adjust and edit the contents of the
stored item as necessary. Touch [OK]
to confirm.
“Editing stored location” (page 645)
INFO:
Storing location
by searching
AV0NJA1-6B0517E8-1830-49EB-812C-0BAA64EC0CEA
It is possible to store a location by
searching in various ways.
.
.
5GB0792X
1.
2.
3.
4.
Touch
Touch
Touch
Touch
[Settings] on the Launch Bar.
[Navigation].
[Address Book].
[Saved Locations].
When the location is stored in the
[Saved Locations], [Address Book] can
be used to search for the location.
“Searching from address book”
(page 6-23)
When 200 locations are already
stored, a new location cannot be
stored until a currently stored location
is deleted.
Storing location
by moving map
AV0NJA1-F725F4DF-5CDD-4070-ADB6-D4BF2474895F
1.
Move to the preferred location on the
map and touch [ ] on the touch
screen display.
5GB0745X
2. Touch [Save Location]. A message is
displayed.
3. The icon representing the stored location is displayed on the map. Push
to return to the current
location map screen.
STORINGAV0NJA1-B3907DCE-924F-48C0-BAC8-A06712252587
ROUTE
A maximum of 10 calculated routes can
be stored. Stored routes can be easily
retrieved and set as the suggested route.
A route requires at least one waypoint in
order to be stored.
1. Push and then touch [Route]
on the Launch Bar.
2. Touch [Save Route]. A confirmation
message is displayed. If asked, touch
[Yes] to store the current route.
Navigation (if equipped)
6-43
Other settings
A route can also be stored using the
following procedure.
1. Touch [Settings] on the Launch Bar.
2. Touch [Navigation].
3. Touch [Address Book].
4. Touch [Saved Routes].
5. Touch [Save Current Route]. A confirmation message is displayed. If
asked, touch [Yes] to store the current
route.
STORINGAV0NJA1-495A7589-BA25-41EF-82F6-33DEBDE7742E
AVOID AREA
An Avoid Area can be stored. The Avoid
Area is an area that can be excluded from
a route, such as a road that is always
congested. Once Avoid Areas are stored,
the system avoids those areas when
calculating a route. Up to 10 Avoid Areas
can be stored.
1. Touch [Settings] on the Launch Bar.
2. Touch [Navigation].
3. Touch [Address Book].
4. Touch [Avoid Area].
INFO:
.
At least 1 waypoint must be set for the
route to be stored.
.
A stored route includes only locations
(destination and waypoints) and route
calculation conditions, not the route
itself.
.
The route is stored in the first available position number in the stored
routes list.
.
When 10 routes are already stored in
the address book, a new route cannot
be stored until a route is deleted.
“Deleting stored item” (page 6-48)
6-44 Navigation (if equipped)
5GB0746X
5. Touch [Add New].
Touch an appropriate method to
search for a location.
“Setting destination” (page 6-17)
6. Touch [OK].
7. Adjust the information of the Avoid
Area as necessary.
“Editing avoid area” (page 6-48)
8. Touch [OK] to store the avoid area
information.
INFO:
A maximum of 10 Avoid Areas can be
stored. When 10 Avoid Areas are already
stored, a new Avoid Area cannot be
stored until a currently stored Avoid Area
is deleted.
“Deleting stored item” (page 6-48)
EDITING STORED
INFORMATION
AV0NJA1-39CF1CB1-4830-4B51-BE7E-70154B58A89C
Items stored in the system can be edited.
Editing stored location
AV0NJA1-D9E4FAC6-0EAD-4C1E-9D3C-A1EBC19926E1
1. Touch [Settings] on the Launch Bar.
2. Touch [Navigation] and touch [Address Book].
Available items may vary depending on models and specifications.
Setting item
[Home Location]*
[Work Location]*
Action
[Edit]
[Show Icon on Map]
Displays the home icon on the map.
[Icon]
Selects a home icon of a preferred design.
[Sound]
Sets the type of the alarm that sounds when the
vehicle approaches home.
[Direction]
Sets the alarm to sound when approaching from a
specific direction.
[Distance]
Sets the alarm to sound when reaching a specific
distance to home.
[Phone Number]
Stores the home phone number.
[Move Location]
Adjusts the stored home location.
[Delete]
Deletes the stored home location.
[OK]
Confirms and saves the edited home information.
[Edit]
[Show Icon on Map]
Displays the work icon on the map.
[Icon]
Selects a work icon of a preferred design.
[Sound]
Sets the type of the alarm that sounds when the
vehicle approaches work.
[Direction]
Sets the alarm to sound when approaching from a
specific direction.
[Distance]
Sets the alarm to sound when reaching a specific
distance to work.
Navigation (if equipped)
6-45
[Phone Number]
[Saved Locations]
Stores the work phone number.
[Move Location]
Adjusts the stored work location.
[Delete]
Deletes the stored work location.
[OK]
Confirms and saves the edited work information.
[Sort]
[Sort by Number]
Sorts the saved locations.
“Searching from address book” (page 6-23)
[Sort by Name]
[Sort by Icon]
[Sort by Group]
[Add New]
Saved Location
List
6-46
Navigation (if equipped)
Adds a new location.
“Storing location by searching” (page 6-43)
[Edit]
[Show Icon on Map]
Displays the icon of a stored location on the map.
[Name]
Registers a name of the entry.
[Voice Tag]
Registers a voice tag for the entry which allows the
entry to be used with the Voice Recognition System.
[Icon]
Selects an icon for the entry.
[Sound]
Sets the type of the alarm that sounds when the
vehicle approaches the location.
[Direction]
Sets the alarm to sound when approaching from a
specific direction.
[Distance]
Sets the alarm to sound when reaching a specific
distance to the location.
[Phone Number]
Registers a phone number for the location.
[Group]
Registers a group of the entry.
[Entry Numbers]
Registers an entry number for the location.
[Move Location]
Adjusts the stored location information.
[Delete]
Deletes the stored location information.
[OK]
Confirms and saves the edited stored location
information.
*: When home or work location has not been stored, [Add Home Location] or [Add Work Location] is displayed and a home or work
location can be stored from the menu.
Navigation (if equipped) 6-47
Editing stored
route
AV0NJA1-FA819EB7-2462-4CCA-9FCA-6945BF4DA07F
Setting item
Action
1. Touch [Settings] on the Launch Bar.
2. Touch [Navigation] and touch [Address Book].
3. Touch [Saved Routes].
4. Touch the preferred saved route from
the list. Saved Routes settings screen
will be displayed.
[Rename]
Changes the name of an
Avoid Area.
[Move Location]
Adjusts the Avoid Area location.
[Resize Area]
Adjusts the size of the
Avoid Area.
[Motorway]
Sets the Avoid Area to include or not include motorways.
The color of the Avoid Area
changes depending on the
setting.
Motorway ON: Green
Motorway OFF: Blue
[Delete]
Deletes an Avoid Area.
[OK]
Applies the edited setting.
Setting item
Action
[Rename]
Changes the saved route
name.
[Replace]
Overwrites the saved route
with the current route.
[Delete]
Deletes the saved route.
[OK]
Applies the edited settings.
Editing avoid
area
AV0NJA1-7741D32C-748E-4BE2-9BE8-E72FF75E70C6
1.
Touch [Settings] on the Launch Bar
and touch [Navigation].
2. Touch [Address Book] and then touch
[Avoid Area].
3. Touch a preferred Avoid Area from the
list. Avoid Area settings screen will be
displayed.
6-48
Navigation (if equipped)
DELETING
STORED ITEM
AV0NJA1-A49F7444-AEBA-437D-B1BF-DA7457A3F577
The locations and routes in the Address
Book can be deleted. Deleting an individual item and deleting all stored items are
available.
INFO:
Deleted items cannot be restored. Before
deleting an item, always make sure that
the item is no longer needed.
Deleting stored item individually
Deleting AV0NJA1-62D39B7F-7242-4DA7-8F88-21A769ADE3F7
individual item on map
AV0NJA1-B68C2A81-E5C0-4DB2-A740-FC904C09AB2A
1. Touch [Settings] on the Launch Bar.
2. Touch [Navigation] and touch [Address Book].
3. Touch [Delete Saved Items].
Select the preferred item and touch [Yes] to confirm deletion.
Step 1
Step 2
Deletes home location.
[Delete Work Location]
Deletes work location.
[Delete Address Book]
Deletes all stored locations.
5GB0747X
[Delete One]
[Delete Saved [Delete All]
Routes]
[Delete Avoid
Areas]
[Delete Previous Destinations]
Align the cross pointer over the stored
location to be deleted by moving on
the map, and then touch [ ].
Action
[Delete Home Location]
[Delete All]
1.
Deletes a selected stored location.
Deletes all stored routes.
[Delete One]
Deletes a selected stored route.
[Delete All]
Deletes all Avoid Areas.
[Delete One]
Deletes a selected Avoid Area.
[Delete All Previous Destinations]
Deletes all of the previous destinations.
[Delete One Previous Destination]
Deletes a selected previous destination.
2. Touch [Delete].
3. A confirmation message is displayed.
Confirm the contents of the message
and touch [Yes].
The stored item is deleted from the
Address Book.
[Delete Previous Starting Point] Deletes the previous starting point.
Navigation (if equipped)
6-49
NAVIGATION SETTINGS
AV0NJA1-9D8690FE-57C7-4383-A650-C4EAEDB9B2D7
The navigation system can be customized according to the user’s preference.
1. Touch [Settings] on the Launch Bar.
2. Touch [Navigation].
3. Touch the item you would like to set.
Available setting items may vary depending on models and specifications.
Available items :
. [Map Settings]
Sets the display method and direction of the map.
“Map settings” (page 6-12)
. [Guidance Settings]
Sets the various functions for route guidance.
“Guidance settings” (page 6-39)
. [Route Preference]
Changes the routing preferences.
“Route Preference” (page 6-33)
. [Traffic Info Settings]
Sets the various functions of the Traffic information feature.
“Traffic information settings” (page 6-42)
. [Safety Guide Settings]
Setting item
Action
[Speed Limit Indication on Map]
When this item is turned on, the speed limit indicator will appear on the right side of
the map screen when there is a speed limit on the road the vehicle is driving on.
“2D map (except for the Middle East)” (page 6-4)
“2D map (for the Middle East)” (page 6-6)
[Speed Limit Warning]
When this item is turned on, the speed limit indicator will blink and warn the driver
when the vehicle speed exceeds the speed limit.
“2D map (except for the Middle East)” (page 6-4)
“2D map (for the Middle East)” (page 6-6)
[Speed Limit Sens.]
Adjusts the speed limit sensitivity for [Speed Limit Warning].
6-50
Navigation (if equipped)
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
[Speed Limit Indication on Map]
When this item is turned on, the speed limit indicator will appear on the right side of the map screen when there is a speed limit on
the road the vehicle is driving on.
“2D map (except for the Middle East)” (page 6-4)
[Speed Limit Warning]
When this item is turned on, the speed limit indicator will blink and warn the driver when the vehicle speed exceeds the speed
limit.
“2D map (except for the Middle East)” (page 6-4)
[Speed Limit Sens.]
Adjusts the speed limit sensitivity for [Speed Limit Warning].
[Address Book]
Stores locations and routes. Stored items can be edited or deleted.
“Storing a location/route” (page 6-42)
[Customise POIs]
Sets the POI categories to be displayed on the Points of Interest screen.
“Customizing POIs” (page 6-23)
[Adjust Current Location]
If the vehicle icon indicating the current vehicle location is not in the correct position, the location of the vehicle icon on the map
screen can be adjusted.
[Delete Saved Items]
Deletes a saved location or route.
“Deleting stored item individually” (page 6-49)
[Delete Previous Destinations]
Deletes all or one of the previous destinations or the previous start point.
“Deleting stored item individually” (page 6-49)
[Sync with Door-to-Door Navigation]
Turns on/off Door-to-Door Navigation.
“Using Door-to-Door Navigation” (page 6-26)
Navigation (if equipped)
6-51
.
[Reset All Navigation Settings to Default]
This resets various settings (display, volume level, etc.) to the default settings.
6-52 Navigation (if equipped)
GENERAL INFORMATION FOR
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
AV0NJA1-53E79F5D-9AE6-4984-955E-CB2A39EB4D66
CURRENTAV0NJA1-3DB2B298-7959-42E7-A529-EBC2E6E1A510
VEHICLE LOCATION
Display of
current vehicle location
AV0NJA1-AC334D4E-00C5-4F0B-889E-D50DC5D61202
This navigation system combines the
data obtained from the vehicle (by gyro
sensor) and from Global Navigation Satellite System (GNSS) to calculate the
current location of the vehicle. This position is then displayed throughout route
guidance to a destination.
What is Global Navigation Satellite
System (GNSS)?
AV0NJA1-A33AD639-F86B-4DA8-B59E-2726CD899634
NAI0422
*
Inside tunnels or parking garages
NAI0424
*
Under multi-layered highways
GNSS is a general term for positioning
systems that use signals from satellites.
This navigation system receives radio
signals from three or more different
satellites, and detect the position of the
vehicle by utilizing the principle of triangulation.
Positioning adjustment:
GEN5-N-120906-EB91730C-D0C7-441C-9028-C9C6F27A417B
When the system judges that the vehicle
position is not accurate based on vehicle
speed and gyro sensor data calculations,
the system will automatically adjust the
position of the vehicle icon using GNSS
signals.
NAI0423
*
In areas with numerous tall buildings
NAI0425
*
Areas with numerous tall trees
Receiving signals from GNSS satellites:
GEN5-N-120906-EB91730C-D0C7-441C-9028-C9C6F27A417B
The reception of GNSS signals can be
weak, depending on the environment.
Vehicles in the following areas/environments may not receive GNSS signals.
Navigation (if equipped)
6-53
Incorrect display of vehicle position
AV0NJA1-B4EC1A08-66C4-4494-8E5E-6CB5C47F02B9
The following cases may affect the display accuracy of the vehicle’s position or
traveling direction. The accuracy will return to normal if the driving conditions
return to normal.
NAI0713
*
NAI0428
In canyons
*
When the vehicle is passing through a
large Y-shaped intersection/junction.
INFO:
The GNSS antenna is located on the
instrument panel inside the vehicle. Do
not place any objects, especially cellular
phones or transceivers, on the instrument
panel. Because the strength of the GNSS
signal is weak, phones and transceivers
will affect or may totally disrupt the
signal.
NAI0426
*
When there is a similar road nearby.
NAI0429
*
NAI0427
*
6-54 Navigation (if equipped)
When the vehicle is traveling in an
area with a grid pattern road system.
When the vehicle is traveling on a
continuous, slowly curving road.
NAI0430
*
When the vehicle is traveling on a
road with repeating S-shaped curves.
*
NAI0431
*
When the vehicle is on a loop bridge.
NAI0434
NAI0432
When the vehicle is on a snowcovered or unpaved road.
*
When the vehicle is rotated on a
parking lot turntable while the ignition switch placed in the OFF position.
NAI0433
*
When repeatedly turning left or right,
or driving in zigzags.
NAI0435
*
When driving on a road not displayed
on the map screen or a road that has
been changed due to additional construction or other reasons.
Navigation (if equipped)
6-55
Detailed Map Coverage Areas
(MCA) forAV0NJA1-A7515219-FB6B-4303-A8B1-B6FF7C9DABCD
navigation system
*
.
.
.
.
.
This system is designed to help guiding to
the destination, and it also performs
other functions as outlined in this manual.
However, the system must be used safely
and properly. Information concerning
road conditions, traffic signs and the
availability of services may not always
be up-to-date. The system is not a subNAI0436
stitute for safe, proper and legal driving.
Map data covers select metropolitan
When the GNSS positioning accuracy
areas.
is low.
Map data includes two types of areas:
“Detailed coverage areas” providing all
INFO:
detailed road data and other areas showThe vehicle icon may be misaligned
ing “Main roads only”.
when starting the vehicle just after
starting the engine.
INFO:
The vehicle icon may also be misaDetailed map data is not available in
ligned if different sized tires or tire
many areas and is generally limited to
chains are installed.
select major metropolitan areas.
The system has a function that autoROUTE CALCULATION
matically corrects the vehicle icon
GUID-983B6490-022A-46D3-96FA-0F22CB58F824
. The suggested route may not be the
position when it is misaligned from
shortest, nor are other circumstances
the actual position.
such as traffic jams considered.
Vehicle position correction by GNSS
. Because of the inevitable difference in
may not function when the vehicle is
road conditions and circumstances
stopped.
between the time you use this system
If the vehicle icon position does not
and the time the information was
return to normal even after driving for
produced for the map data, there
a while, correct the vehicle icon posimay be discrepancies in roads and
tion manually.
regulations. In such cases, actual road
6-56 Navigation (if equipped)
conditions and regulations take precedence over map data information.
.
During route calculation, the map will
not scroll, however the vehicle icon
will move according to the actual
vehicle’s movement.
.
During route calculation, buttons such
as and will be
disabled.
.
In some cases, after the calculation is
complete, the calculated route may
not be immediately displayed.
.
Waypoints that have been passed will
be disregarded by rerouting calculation.
.
If you scroll the map while the suggested route is being drawn, it may
take more time to finish drawing.
.
Route calculation may not be completed in the following cases.
— If there is no main road within a
range of 2.5 km (1.5 miles) from the
vehicle, a message saying so will
appear on the screen. Try recalculating when the vehicle is closer to
a main road.
— If there is no main road within a
range of 2.5 km (1.5 miles) from the
destination or waypoint, a message
saying so will appear on the screen.
Try setting the location closer to a
main road.
— If the vehicle is too close to the
destination or if there are no roads
to the destination, a message saying so will appear on the screen.
— If it is impossible to reach the
destination or waypoints because
of traffic regulations, etc.
— If the only route to reach the
destination or waypoints is extremely complicated.
.
The following may occur when the
route is displayed.
— If you calculate a route on a main
road, the starting point of the route
may not exactly match the current
vehicle location.
— The endpoint of the route may not
exactly match the destination.
— If you calculate a route on a main
road, the system may display a
route from another main road. This
may be because the position of the
vehicle icon is not accurate. In this
case, park the vehicle in a safe
location and reset the vehicle icon,
or continue driving to see if the
position of the vehicle icon is automatically adjusted before recalculating the route.
— There are cases in which the system shows an indirect route to
reach the destination or waypoints,
if you set them from stored or
facility information. In order to correct this, you must be careful about
the traffic direction, especially
when lanes with different travel
directions are shown separately,
such as interchanges and service
areas.
— This system makes no distinction
between limited traffic control and
total control (blockage). It may
show an indirect route even if the
road is usable.
— Even if the ferry preference is set to
OFF, a route that uses a ferry line
may be suggested.
ROUTE GUIDANCE
AV0NJA1-D4460D59-8C4D-4A28-8361-F3C3C250F896
INFO:
Notes onAV0NJA1-D97CC207-69BB-4213-9710-6F7BC47DE9D0
voice guidance
.
Voice guidance in this system should
be regarded as a supplementary function. When driving the vehicle, check
the route on the map and follow the
actual roads and traffic regulations.
.
Voice guidance is activated only for
intersections with certain conditions.
There may be cases where the vehicle
has to turn, but voice guidance is not
provided.
.
Voice guidance contents may vary,
depending on the direction of the turn
and the type of intersection.
.
The voice guidance timing will vary
depending on the situation.
.
When the vehicle has deviated from
the suggested route, voice guidance is
not available. The system will not
announce this. Refer to the map and
recalculate the route.
“Recalculating route” (page 6-36)
.
Voice guidance may not accurately
correspond with road numbers and
directions at motorway junctions.
.
The displayed street names may
sometimes differ from the actual
names.
.
Voice guidance is not available when
[Guidance Voice] is turned off.
“Volume and Beeps settings”
(page 2-25)
The system will announce street names
when the system language is set to
English.
Repeating
voice guidance
AV0NJA1-43C350DF-CAB4-4E5D-8440-651D34A03D54
This function is available throughout
route guidance, from the time after the
route calculation is completed until the
vehicle arrives at the destination. Push
and hold . Voice guidance will be
repeated.
Navigation (if equipped)
6-57
.
.
Voice guidance will start when the
vehicle enters the suggested route.
Refer to the map for directions to the
starting point of the route.
When approaching a waypoint, the
voice guidance will announce and
inform the driver that the vehicle has
reached a waypoint. Voice guidance
will switch to the next section of the
route. When voice guidance is not
available, refer to the map for directions.
.
In some cases, voice guidance ends
before arrival at the destination. Refer
to the destination icon on the map to
reach the destination.
.
Voice guidance may be partially operational or inoperative due to the
angle of roads at an intersection.
.
.
Motorway exit information may differ
from the information on the actual
exit signs.
Because it is not possible to consider
data concerning roads that are seasonally available or unavailable, a
route may be displayed that does
not match the actual traffic restrictions. Be sure to follow the actual
traffic restrictions while driving.
6-58 Navigation (if equipped)
HOW TO AV0NJA1-12B14EED-F217-4681-BB6D-9C3DAFF9250C
UPDATE MAP DATA
WARNING:
.
Stop your vehicle in a safe location
during the map update operation.
.
During the update process, your
vehicle should be kept in a well
ventilated area to avoid the exposure to carbon monoxide. Do not
breathe exhaust gases; they contain
colorless and odorless carbon monoxide. Carbon monoxide is dangerous. It can cause unconsciousness
or death.
Map data can be updated via USB or Wi-Fi.
Updating
with USB memory
AV0NJA1-038C70A5-969B-4B9E-9A5C-CBEDCE8A4B9B
The navigation map data can be updated
with the latest information by downloading a new map database to a USB
memory device and installing it in the
vehicle.
For map update, use the USB memory
with the following specifications:
Supported media: USB2.0
Supported file system: FAT32
1. Push .
2. Touch [Info] on the Launch Bar and
then touch [System Information].
3. Touch [Map Update].
4. Touch [Update via USB Device].
5. Touch [Save Map Information to USB
Device].
6. Insert blank USB memory device into
the USB connection port.
“USB (Universal Serial Bus) connection port and AUX (auxiliary)
input jack” (page 2-14)
INFO:
If data is in the USB memory, it may be
deleted.
7. Touch [Start].
8. Touch [OK] after saving the map
information to USB.
9. Access to the website (https://apps.
nissan.navshop.com/) with your personal computer. Download and install
the map update tool in your personal
computer.
INFO:
.
Initially the URL will jump to http://
apps.nissan.navshop.com/en_gb. In
case you change the language/
country on the portal from the flag
icon on top right of the portal page,
this will be remembered and applied at the next time you access
the portal.
.
From the second time onward, this
operation is not necessary.
10. Download the updated data and store
it in the USB memory with the map
update tool.
11. Push .
12. Touch [Info] on the Launch Bar and
then touch [System Information].
13. Touch [Map Update].
14. Touch [Update via USB Device].
15. Touch [Install Map Update from USB
Device].
16. Insert the USB memory into the USB
connection port.
A confirmation message is displayed.
Confirm the contents of the message
and touch [Yes].
17. Touch [OK] after completing the update.
INFO:
.
The update can be canceled while
updating by touching [Cancel].
.
The navigation system cannot be
operated while the map updates.
.
.
Map data should be updated while
the engine is running to prevent
discharge of the vehicle battery.
Depending on the models, the same
operation can be performed by
touching [Settings] on the Launch
Bar and then touching [System
Update].
Updating using wireless LAN (WiFi)
AV0NJA1-EB00AB89-06ED-4BB7-8B78-FF5B1995B4F2
The map data can be updated using the
vehicle Wi-Fi connection. Wi-Fi communications can be made by using a Wi-Fi
network, smartphone, etc.
“Wi-Fi Setting” (page 2-24)
1. Connect the vehicle to an available WiFi network.
2. Push .
3. Touch [Info] on the Launch Bar and
then touch [System Information].
4. Touch [Map Update].
5. Touch [Update via Wi-Fi].
A confirmation message is displayed.
6. Touch [Select Area] , select the area to
be updated, and Touch [OK].
7. Touch [Yes] to update the selected
area.
8. Touch [OK] after completing the update.
INFO:
.
The update can be canceled while
updating by touching [Cancel].
.
The navigation system cannot be
operated while the map updates.
.
Do not turn off the power source of
the smartphone while updating.
.
Map data should be updated while
the engine is running to prevent
discharge of the vehicle battery.
.
The Wi-Fi hotspot communication is
not available on this system.
.
The download data size of map
update for one country or one
regional zone can vary between
100 MB to 1 GB. Data size in case
of updating multiple countries or
regional zones can be over 1 GB.
Use of Wi-Fi hotspot functionality of
your smartphone for map updates
may incur additional data charges
from your cellular provider. Please
connect to your home Wi-Fi network to avoid additional phone
data charges.
.
Depending on the models, the same
operation can be performed by
touching [Settings] on the Launch
Bar and then touching [System
Update].
Automotive products End User
License Provisions
AV0NJA1-3C4B9E94-98F5-4838-9BCF-83365CD53FFB
The following terms and conditions apply
to any use by you of any services
provided by TomTom (the “TomTom Services”). The services are deemed to be
provided by TomTom Global Content BV.
You should not use the TomTom Services
if you cannot agree to the below.
Navigation (if equipped)
6-59
1.
GRANT OF LICENSE: The TomTom
Services are provided to you on a
non-exclusive basis and you may only
use the TomTom Services for your
personal use and solely in combination with the hardware device which is
incorporated into your vehicle. The
license granted is nontransferable. If
any software is provided as part of the
TomTom services the you are only
entitled to use the binary form of such
software and have no right to receive
the source code. If upgrades, updates
or supplements to the TomTom Services are obtained or made available
to you, the use of such upgrades,
updates or supplements are subject
to the foregoing unless other terms
accompany such upgrades, updates
or supplements in which case those
terms apply. All other rights not specifically granted under this paragraph
are reserved by TomTom.
2. SAFETY: The TomTom Services are
intended to be used for providing
information and navigation services
related to your journey only and are
not intended to be used as a safety
related tool and cannot warn you
about all dangers and hazards with
respect to the road you are driving.
Therefore, it remains your duty to
drive in a careful and safe manner
(paying all due care and attention to
the road) as well as observing all
applicable traffic regulations and
6-60 Navigation (if equipped)
3.
4.
5.
6.
rules. It is your responsibility not to
use the TomTom Services in a manner
that would distract you from driving
safely.
UPDATES AND CHANGES TO THE SERVICES AND THESE TERMS: TomTom
reserves the right, with or without
notice, to discontinue, update, modify,
upgrade and supplement the TomTom Services and to modify these
terms.
RESTRICTIONS: You are prohibited
from renting, lending, public presentation, performance or broadcasting or
any other kind of distribution of the
TomTom Services. Other than as permitted by applicable legislation, you
will not, and you will not allow any
person to, copy or modify the TomTom Services or any part thereof or to
reverse engineer, decompile or disassemble the TomTom Services. You
may not use the Services in connection with any illegal, fraudulent, dishonest or unethical activity or
behaviour.
OWNERSHIP: All intellectual property
rights related to the TomTom Services
are owned by TomTom and/or its
suppliers.
LIMITED WARRANTY:
. YOU ACKNOWLEDGE THAT THE
TOMTOM SERVICES HAVE NOT
BEEN DEVELOPED TO MEET YOUR
INDIVIDUAL REQUIREMENTS AND
THAT IT IS THEREFORE YOUR RESPONSIBILITY TO ENSURE THAT
THE FACILITIES AND FUNCTIONS
OF THE TOMTOM SERVICES MEET
YOUR REQUIREMENTS. TOMTOM
DOES NOT AND CANNOT WARRANT
THAT THE TOMTOM ERVICES OPERATE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERRORFREE. YOU SHOULD BE PARTICULARLY AWARE OF THE FACT THAT
CALCULATION ERRORS MAY OCCUR
WHEN USING SOFTWARE IN A NAVIGATION SYSTEM WHICH MAY, FOR
EXAMPLE, BE CAUSED BY LOCAL
ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
AND/OR INCOMPLETE DATA. TOMTOM DOES NOT WARRANT THAT
THE TOMTOM SERVICES ARE CAPABLE OF INTEROPERATING WITH
ANY OTHER SYSTEM, DEVICE OR
PRODUCT (E.G. SOFTWARE OR
HARDWARE).
.
WITHOUT LIMITING CLAUSE 6.1
ABOVE, THE TOMTOM SERVICES,
AND ANY RESULTS GENERATED BY
THE SERVICES ARE PROVIDED ON
AN “AS IS” AND WITH ALL FAULTS
BASIS” AND TOMTOM EXPRESSLY
DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY,
SATISFACTORY QUALITY, ACCURACY, TITLE AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
.
THE PROVISIONS OF THIS CLAUSE
DO NOT AFFECT ANY OF YOUR
LEGAL RIGHTS UNDER APPLICABLE
MANDATORY NATIONAL LEGISLATION, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED
TO ANY MANDATORY STATUTORY
WARRANTIES. IF ANY PART OF THIS
LIMITED WARRANTY IS HELD TO BE
INVALID OR UNENFORCEABLE, THE
REMAINDER OF THE LIMITED WARRANTY SHALL NONETHELESS REMAIN IN FULL FORCE AND EFFECT.
7. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY:
. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW,
NEITHER TOMTOM NOR ITS SUPPLIERS, OFFICERS, DIRECTORS OR EMPLOYEES SHALL BE LIABLE TO YOU
OR TO ANY THIRD PARTY FOR ANY
DAMAGES, WHETHER DIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, INDIRECT OR
CONSEQUENTIAL (INCLUDING BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, DAMAGES FOR
THE INABILITY TO USE OR ACCESS
THE SERVICES, LOSS OF DATA, LOSS
OF BUSINESS, LOSS OF PROFITS,
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION OR THE
LIKE) ARISING OUT OF OR RELATED
TO THE USE OF, THE INABILITY TO
USE OR ACCESS, OR OTHERWISE
THE PERFORMANCE OF THE SERVICES, EVEN IF TOMTOM HAS BEEN
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
SUCH DAMAGES.
.
TO THE EXTENT TOMTOM IS NOT
PERMITTED UNDER APPLICABLE
LAW TO EXCLUDE ITS LIABILITY
PURSUANT TO CLAUSE 7.1 ABOVE,
TOMTOM’S TOTAL AGGREGATE LIABILITY TO YOU SHALL BE LIMITED
TO THE AMOUNT OF US $100.00.
.
THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY UNDER THIS CLAUSE 7 DO NOT:
(I) AFFECT YOUR RIGHTS UNDER
ANY APPLICABLE MANDATORY NATIONAL LEGISLATION; (II) EXCLUDE
OR LIMIT ANY LIABILITY THAT CANNOT BE EXCLUDED OR LIMITED
UNDER APPLICABLE LAW.
fraudulent manner.
9. TERMINATION AND DIRECT ENFORCEMENT: Without prejudice to any other
rights, TomTom may immediately terminate this EULA if you fail to comply
with any of its terms and conditions.
The provisions of this Agreement,
which by their nature are intended to
survive termination, will remain in
effect after termination of this EULA.
Furthermore, you agree that TomTom
may directly enforce these terms
against you.
8. LINKS TO THIRD PARTY SITES: TomTom is not responsible for the contents of any third-party sites or
services, any links contained in thirdparty sites or services, or any changes
or updates to third-party sites or
services which are delivered by the
TomTom Services or otherwise. TomTom is providing these links and
access to third-party sites and services to you only as a convenience,
and the inclusion of any link or access
does not imply an endorsement by
TomTom or any Third Parties of the
third-party site or service. Any use by
you of such links or third party sites
and the manner in which you use such
third party sites and links shall be your
responsibility and at your risk and you
shall not use them in any illegal or
Navigation (if equipped)
6-61
MEMO
6-62
Navigation (if equipped)
7 Voice recognition (if equipped)
Voice recognition .........................................................................
...
7-2
Using Voice Recognition System .............................
...
7-2
Before starting ........................................................................
...
7-2
Giving voice commands ................................................
...
7-2
System Voice settings .................................................
...
7-11
VOICE RECOGNITION
AV0NJA1-FAF38580-C669-4F26-B8D0-7EC58692FC6D
USING VOICE RECOGNITION SYSTEM
AV0NJA1-1C8F749E-4AF3-47FE-9FE0-7B0B8B8AF458
Initialization
AV0NJA1-60C8EC21-9C96-4FBC-A946-5937BAB414EC
When the ignition switch is in the ACC or
ON position, voice recognition is initialized. When the initialization is complete,
the system is ready to accept voice
commands. If <
> (if equipped) on the
steering wheel or <
/
/ > (if
equipped) on the steering column is
operated before the initialization
completes, the display will show a
message to wait until the system is ready.
.
The system cannot recognize voice
commands spoken from passenger
seats.
GIVING VOICE
COMMANDS
AV0NJA1-B79272C7-32FE-481D-B7B3-A50FF427C81A
1.
Push <
> (if equipped) on the
steering wheel or push and hold
<
/
/ > (if equipped) on the
steering column.
BEFORE STARTING
AV0NJA1-17B90F0D-2C92-4147-8CBB-60019E6215D6
To get the best recognition performance
from voice recognition, observe the following items.
. The interior of the vehicle should be as
quiet as possible. Close the windows
to eliminate the surrounding noises
(traffic noise, vibration sounds, etc.)
and turn down the fan speed level of
the heater/air conditioner to lower
the noise which may prevent the
system from correctly recognizing
the voice commands.
.
Wait until the tone sounds before
speaking a command.
.
Speak in a natural conversational
voice without pausing between
words.
7-2 Voice recognition (if equipped)
.
After executing the category command, only the commands related
to the selected category can be
recognized.
“Command list” (page 7-6)
3. After the tone sounds and the icon on
the screen changes from
to
,
speak a command. You can also select
a command by directly touching the
s c r e e n ,
u s i n g
<
>/<
>/<
/
> (if equipped)
on the steering wheel or using
/
/<
/SOUND>/<
/OK> (if
equipped) on the control panel.
5GE0063X
Example
2. A list of commands appears on the
screen, and the system provides the
voice menu prompt.
Available category commands are displayed on the left side of the screen.
Speak or touch a category command
from the category command list.
INFO:
.
Some of the commands for each
category are shown on the right
side of the screen and they can also
be spoken without selecting a category.
INFO:
The Voice Recognition System will
pause its operation when no command is given after a few prompts. To
resume the operation, push <
> (if
equipped) on the steering wheel or
push and hold <
/
/ > (if
equipped) on the steering column.
4. Continue to follow the voice menu
prompts and speak the voice commands after the tone sounds until the
preferred operation is executed.
INFO:
Voice Prompt Interrupt:
GEN5-N-120906-EB91730C-D0C7-441C-9028-C9C6F27A417B
.
.
To exit the Voice Recognition System,
push and hold <
> (if equipped)/
<
> (if equipped) on the steering
wheel.
Touching [
] on the touch screen or
> on the control
pushing /<
panel repeatedly can also end the
voice recognition session.
Operating
tips
AV0NJA1-5EBE1C81-7EAE-4A5C-8323-F92B58DC3259
.
Speak a command after the tone.
.
If the command is not recognized, the
system will prompt you to speak the
command again. Repeat the command in a clear voice.
.
] on the touch screen or
Touch [
push <
> (if equipped) on the
steering wheel to return to the
previous screen.
.
To adjust the volume of the system
feedback, push <
> (if equipped) on
the steering wheel, push <
> (if
equipped) on the steering column
from behind or turn / while the
system is making an announcement.
In most cases, you can interrupt the voice
feedback to speak the next command by
pushing <
> (if equipped) on the
steering wheel or pushing and holding
<
/ / > (if equipped) on the steering
column. After interrupting the system,
wait for a tone before speaking your
command.
for further command is displayed.
4. Follow the prompts to complete the
commands.
Voice command screens:
GEN5-N-120906-EB91730C-D0C7-441C-9028-C9C6F27A417B
One Shot Call:
GEN5-N-120906-EB91730C-D0C7-441C-9028-C9C6F27A417B
To use the system faster when making a
call, you may speak the second level
command skipping speaking the first
level command. For example, push
<
> (if equipped) on the steering
wheel or push and hold <
/ / > (if
equipped) on the steering column and
say “Redial” after the tone without first
saying “Phone”.
How to see voice command
screen AV0NJA1-DA7924C7-AD6F-4EBB-A519-06BD7EFD97EA
1.
Push <
> (if equipped) on the
steering wheel or push and hold
<
/
/ > (if equipped) on the
steering column to display the first
screen of the voice command list.
2. Speak a command or select an item
on the voice command list. The Second screen is displayed.
3. Speak a command or select an item
on the voice command list. The command is executed or the next screen
5GE0062X
Example
Shows a list of available categories.
Speak a category command or touch
the key of the corresponding category.
Touch [Settings] or say "Settings" to
display the system voice settings.
Shows a list of available commands
for the selected category. Speak a
preferred command.
Touch [Help] or say “Help” to hear help
announcements on how to use the
system.
Voice recognition (if equipped)
7-3
INFO:
Voice command
examples
AV0NJA1-4B0CA941-EB10-42BC-9DAB-3B5E138B4ADC
As examples, some additional basic operations that can be performed by voice
commands are described here.
Push <
> (if equipped) on the steering
/ / > (if
wheel or push and hold <
equipped) on the steering column to stop
the help announcements.
Example 1 Placing call by speaking a
phone number:
GEN5-N-120906-EB91730C-D0C7-441C-9028-C9C6F27A417B
1.
Push <
> (if equipped) on the
steering wheel or push and hold
<
/
/ > (if equipped) on the
5GE0064X
steering column.
2. Wait for the indicator to change to
Speak a number from 1 to 5 or touch
. Speak “Phone”.
an item on the list screen to select
the item.
5GE0072X
Example
Previously selected command
Command list
You can speak a command from the
list or touch the corresponding key.
Preferred words can be spoken for
the part of the command enclosed in
< >.
[Previous]/[Next]
Say as a command or touch to go to
the previous/next screen.
How to speak
numbers
AV0NJA1-71FDCB5E-F8C6-44F6-B150-DA7EA47CDF74
The Voice Recognition System requires
the user to speak numbers in a certain
way when giving voice commands.
General rule:
5GE0073X
GEN5-N-120906-EB91730C-D0C7-441C-9028-C9C6F27A417B
Only single digits “0” (zero) to “9” can be
used. (For example, for the number “600”,
speaking “six zero zero” can be recognized by the system, but “six hundred”
cannot be recognized.)
Example
3. Speak “Dial ”.
INFO:
For the best recognition, speak “zero” for
the number “0”, and “oh” for the letter “o”.
5GE0065X
Example
7-4 Voice recognition (if equipped)
4. The phone number recognized by the
system is displayed on the screen. If
the number is correct, say “Dial”.
5. The system will make a phone call to
the spoken phone number.
Example 2 Tuning station of FM:
GEN5-N-120906-EB91730C-D0C7-441C-9028-C9C6F27A417B
1.
Push <
> (if equipped) on the
steering wheel or push and hold
<
/
/ > (if equipped) on the
steering column.
2. Wait for the indicator to change to
. Speak “Audio”.
3. Speak “Tune FM”. The
system will tune to the FM radio
station and the audio screen will be
displayed.
Voice recognition (if equipped)
7-5
Command list
AV0NJA1-F2834C42-3B75-40B0-98AA-9D1DBE4701C9
To use the voice recognition function, you can speak commands in the order of 1st command, 2nd command and 3rd command. You
can also operate the system by directly speaking the 2nd or 3rd command.
Variable numbers or words such as names can be applied in < > when speaking a command.
Some of the commands are not available depending on the language setting.
General Command
Command
Action
Help
Announces how to use voice guidance.
Next
Skip to the next page.
Previous
Skip to the previous page.
Settings
Displays the system voice settings.
Phone Command
Command
Action
Call
Makes a call to a contact that is stored in the Quick Dial or phonebook.
Dial
Makes a call to a spoken phone number.
Read Text
You can listen to recent text messages received.
Send Text
You can select a text message from a list and send it to a contact
name.
Recent Calls
Makes a call from the call history.
Quick Dial
Makes a call to a contact that is stored in the Quick Dial.
Select Phone
Use this command to select a phone from a list of the registered
devices.
Redial
Makes a call to the last outgoing phone number.
Call Mobile
Makes a call to a contact that is stored in the phonebook of the cellular
phone.
7-6 Voice recognition (if equipped)
Command
Action
Call Work
Makes a call to a contact that is stored in the phonebook selecting
from work.
Call Home
Makes a call to a contact that is stored in the phonebook selecting
from home.
Call Other
Makes a call to a contact that is stored in the phonebook selecting
from other.
Call
Makes a call to a contact that is stored in the Quick Dial selecting from
relationship.
Call
Makes a call to the phone number of a spoken Quick Dial name.
Siri (if equipped)
Activates Siri Eyes Free.
Voice Assistant (if equipped)
Activates Talk to Google.
Operating tips for phone command operation:
. After the command “Call”, a name registered in the phonebook can be spoken for recognition, while a phone number can be
spoken after the command “Dial”. Names from the phonebook cannot be spoken after the command “Dial”.
. The system has the function to read the text messages out loud, but misreading may occur in some cases.
. Even if nicknames such as “Mom” or “Dad” are registered in the cellular phone, the Voice Recognition System recognizes only
names. To have the system recognize the nicknames, register the entries in the [Quick Dial] from the Phone menu.
“Quick Dial” (page 4-12)
Navigation command (if equipped)
Command
Action
Street Address
Used to search for a street address.
Navigate to
Speak a POI name to search for as a destination.
Nearby
Speak a POI category to search for a nearby facility.
Go Home
Sets a route to your home location.
Address Book
Use this command to display the locations registered in the Address
Book for destination search.
Voice recognition (if equipped)
7-7
Command
Action
City Center
Sets a route to a city center.
POI by Category
Use this command to display a list of POI categories.
Intersection
Sets a route to an intersection.
Previous Destinations
Sets a route to a previously entered destination.
Cancel Route
Cancels route and deletes the destination/waypoints.
Navigate to
Speak a POI name and city to search for as a destination.
Nearby
Speak a POI brand/chain name to search for a nearby facility.
Work
Sets a route to your work location.
Recalculate Route
Recalculates the route.
Zoom In <1-13>
Increases the magnification of the map by the number of steps
specified.
Zoom out <1-13>
Decreases the magnification of the map by the number of steps
specified.
Zoom to Street Level
Change to the street map.
Show North Up
Sets the 2D full map to North Up.
Show Heading Up
Sets the 2D full map to Heading Up.
Show Full Map
Displays a full map.
Show Split Map
Displays a split map.
Show 2D Map
Change the current map to a 2D map.
Show 3D Map
Change the current map to a 3D map.
Repeat Instruction
Speaks the current navigation guidance.
Voice Guidance On
Turns the navigation guidance on.
Voice Guidance Off
Turns the navigation guidance off.
7-8 Voice recognition (if equipped)
Command
Action
Show POI Icons
Selects a category of the POI icon you wish to display on the map.
Selected POI icons will be displayed on the map screen.
Remove POI Icons
Select a category of the POI icon you wish to delete from the map.
Selected POI icons will be deleted from the map screen.
Operating tips for navigation command operation:
. Depending on the language setting and the area where the vehicle is located, the system may not recognize the general
navigation commands.
. Points Of Interest:
— The POI commands searches for Points of Interest registered in the navigation system.
— Not all POI main categories can be used for “Navigate to” searches with voice command operations while all registered
categories can be recognized as “Nearby” search.
. Street Address:
— Alphabet letters cannot be included when speaking a house number. When a specified house number cannot be found, a
location representing the address will be displayed.
— Speak in a natural conversational speed without pausing between words for better recognition.
— When the system recognizes the command incorrectly, correct the search conditions using commands such as “Change City”,
“Change Street” or “Change House Number”.
Audio Command
Command
Action
Tune FM
Tunes to the FM band, selecting the station of the preferred frequency.
Play Artist
Plays the music by selecting the artist.
Play
Plays the preferred music source.
Tune AM
Tunes to the AM band, selecting the station of the preferred frequency.
Play Song
Plays the music by selecting the track.
Play Album
Plays the music by selecting the album.
Playlist
Plays the music by selecting the playlist.
Voice recognition (if equipped)
7-9
Command
Action
Play Genre
Plays the music by selecting the genre.
Play All Songs
Plays all the tracks.
Show Music List
Displays the music list.
Tune FM (if equipped)
Tunes to the FM band, selecting the station name.
Tune AM (if equipped)
Tunes to the AM band, selecting the station name.
FM Preset <1-12>
Plays the spoken FM preset station.
AM Preset <1-6>
Plays the spoken AM preset station.
Tune DAB (if equipped)
Tunes to the DAB band, selecting the station name.
DAB Preset <1-12> (if equipped)
Plays the spoken DAB preset station.
CD Track (if equipped)
Plays the selected track of the CD.
Operating tips for audio command operation:
. An audio device connected via Bluetooth® cannot be operated with the Voice Recognition System. Source change is only
available for Bluetooth® audio.
. The Voice Recognition System may not function when the song information is too long (artist names, album titles, song titles and
play lists, etc.).
. When playing USB files with the Voice Recognition System, do not pronounce the extension attached to the file name (such as “.
mp3”).
. Song titles registered in ID3 tags cannot be pronounced for voice recognition operation.
. Some audio command may not be recognized when an Android phone is connected and used as a USB audio device.
Information Command (if equipped)
Command
Action
Where am I?
Displays information of the current position.
7-10
Voice recognition (if equipped)
SYSTEM VOICE
SETTINGS
AV0NJA1-67D614E7-55A6-4EA8-BDE1-5FF2EFEB3D40
The system voice settings can be changed.
1. Touch [Setting] on the Launch Bar.
2. Touch [System Voice].
3. Touch the item you would like to set.
Available item
Action
[Initial Voice Prompt]
When this item is turned on, voice prompts are announced.
[Short Voice Prompts]
When this item is turned on, short and minimized voice feedback will be
provided.
[Best Match Lists]
[Phonebook]
[Music Commands]
When these items are turned on, the voice recognition results are displayed
on the list in the order of reliable recognition.
[Voice Preference]
Guidance voice setting can be selected from a male or female voice.
Depending on the language setting, the guidance voice setting cannot be
changed.
[Speech Rate]
Adjusts the speech rate of prompt.
Voice recognition (if equipped) 7-11
MEMO
7-12 Voice recognition (if equipped)
8 Troubleshooting guide
System unit .......................................................................................
...
8-2
Liquid crystal display ..........................................................
...
8-2
Audio system ..................................................................................
...
8-3
AM radio .......................................................................................
...
8-3
DAB radio (for Europe) ......................................................
...
8-4
HD Radio technology (if equipped) .........................
...
8-6
Compact Disc (CD) player (if equipped) ..............
...
8-8
iPod player ...............................................................................
...
8-10
USB memory device .........................................................
...
8-12
Bluetooth® audio ................................................................
...
8-13
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System ...................
...
8-15
Apple CarPlay (if equipped) ..............................................
...
Android Auto (if equipped) ...............................................
...
Siri Eyes Free (if equipped) ...............................................
...
Navigation (if equipped) .....................................................
...
Basic operations ...............................................................
...
Vehicle icon ..........................................................................
...
Route calculation and visual guidance ..........
...
Voice guidance ..................................................................
...
Traffic information (if equipped) .........................
...
Voice recognition (if equipped) .....................................
...
8-18
8-19
8-21
8-22
8-22
8-23
8-25
8-27
8-28
8-29
SYSTEM UNIT
AV0NJA1-31400E7C-F4D3-4689-A9F6-88A5A28E5475
LIQUID CRYSTAL
DISPLAY
AV0NJA1-EAA5698F-0334-4DAC-A1E3-D24F8C3455F2
Symptom
The screen is too dark.
Possible cause
Possible solution
The cabin temperature is too low.
Wait until the cabin temperature becomes
moderate.
Screen brightness is set to the maximum
darkness.
Adjust the brightness setting of the screen.
“Display settings” (page 2-28)
The screen is too bright.
Screen brightness is set to the maximum
brightness.
Adjust the brightness setting of the screen.
“Display settings” (page 2-28)
A small black spot or a small bright spot
appears on the screen.
This is a typical phenomenon for liquid
crystal displays.
This is not a malfunction.
A dot or stripe pattern appears on the screen. Electromagnetic waves that are generated
from neon billboards, high voltage electric
power cables, ham radios or other radio
devices equipped to other vehicles may
adversely affect the screen.
This is not a malfunction.
Image lag appears on the screen.
This is a typical phenomenon for liquid
crystal displays.
This is not a malfunction.
Image motion displayed on the screen is
slow.
The cabin temperature is less than 10°C
(50°F).
Wait until the cabin temperature rises to
within 10°C (50°F) and 50°C (122°F).
When looking at the screen from an angle,
the screen lightens or darkens.
This is a typical phenomenon for liquid
crystal displays.
Adjust the brightness setting of the screen.
“Display settings” (page 2-28)
The screen turns blue or an error message is A system malfunction has occurred.
displayed on the touch screen display.
8-2
Troubleshooting guide
It is recommended that you contact a NISSAN
dealer for an inspection.
AUDIO SYSTEM
AV0NJA1-A966E4C8-AA58-414B-9A6A-500CC260D786
AM RADIO GUID-03098BF6-A35B-4E27-82A2-F350BEF4EA49
Symptom
AM reception deteriorates at night.
Possible cause
Possible solution
AM stations are required to lower their power This is not a malfunction.
at night.
Troubleshooting guide 8-3
DAB RADIO
(for Europe)
GUID-3E85F202-D429-4C15-BCE7-D6D54269DFAD
Symptom
Possible cause
Possible solution
The sound skips, stutters or echoes.
The radio station has not properly aligned
digital and analog audio.
Verify correct operation on another station.
Report the station with poor performance.
The volume level is unstable.
Level alignment is inappropriate.
Verify correct operation on another station
and check the station availability in the area.
Report the station with poor alignment.
The sound fades in/out.
DAB-FM is taking place.
Verify transition performance on several stations in the area. Report stations with poor
alignment.
Excessive DAB-FM takes place.
The vehicle is located near the edge of the
DAB coverage area.
Verify the radio station coverage in your area.
The sound quality of DAB is no better than
that of FM/AM.
Audio processing on the digital audio by the Verify correct operation on another station.
station can potentially decrease digital audio Report the station with poor performance.
sound quality.
Local stations keep being lost.
Digital coverage is slightly smaller than
analog signal coverage.
Verify correct operation on another station.
Shadowing (Urban/Terrain) can cause reduced digital coverage.
Verify correct operation on another station.
Some data fields are blank.
Text information is sent at the broadcaster’s Verify correct operation on another station.
discretion.
Report the station issue.
Text information is truncated.
The display is limited to a fixed number of
This is not a malfunction.
characters and more data is being sent than
can be displayed.
The DAB-FM setting is turned on but an
alternative station does not play and the
signal does not appear on the display.
The tuner is waiting for the original signal to Wait for the signal to return or for the tuner to
recover and is seeking an available alterna- pick up an alternative signal.
tive signal.
A message indicating that service is not
available is displayed on the screen.
The selected service or ensemble is not in
service.
8-4
Troubleshooting guide
Select a different service or ensemble.
INFO:
.
.
When station presetting is performed while a secondary service is playing, the parent primary service will be registered.
Secondary services do not appear on the station list.
Troubleshooting guide
8-5
HD RADIO TECHNOLOGY (if equipped)
GUID-6AF1F476-6032-4BF5-9F61-125F4F133716
Sound
GUID-D9C621C8-3D5B-4730-8BE7-7CF51ED18E4A
Symptom
Possible cause
Possible solution
Delay in digital audio on HD Radio broadcasts.
The radio acquires an analog station first and This is not a malfunction.
blends to an digital signal.
Audio skips, stutters, or echoes.
The radio station has not properly aligned
the digital and analog audio.
Verify correct operation on another station.
Report any station with poor performance.
Volume changing up/down.
The radio station has not properly aligned
digital and analog audio level.
Verify correct operation on another station
and check www.hdradio.com for stations in
the area. Report any station with poor
performance.
Sound fading in and out.
The transition between analog and digital is Verify transition performance on several stataking place (blending).
tions in the area. Report any stations with
poor alignment.
Excessive blending (transition between ana- The vehicle is located near the edge of the
log and digital).
digital coverage area.
Refer to www.hdradio.com to verify radio
stations in your coverage area.
Digital audio is no better than analog audio. Audio processing on the digital audio at a
station can potentially decrease the digital
audio sound quality.
Verify correct operation on another station.
Report any station with poor performance.
8-6 Troubleshooting guide
Functional GUID-042387CA-E6EC-4116-9DD4-E5212EEDA673
Symptom
Keep losing my local stations.
Some data fields are blank.
Possible cause
Possible solution
The digital coverage is slightly less than the
analog signal coverage.
Verify correct operation on another station.
This is an expected behavior.
Shadowing (urban/terrain) can cause reduced digital coverage.
Verify correct operation on another station.
This is an expected behavior.
Text information is sent at the broadcaster’s Verify correct operation on another station.
discretion.
Report station issues.
Text information is truncated / there appears The display is limited to a fixed number of
This is an intended behavior.
to be more available.
characters and more data is being sent than
can be shown.
AM reception changes at night.
AM stations are required to lower their power This is not a malfunction.
at night.
Troubleshooting guide
8-7
COMPACT DISC (CD) PLAYER (if equipped)
GUID-67CDDA5C-7AC6-48AF-AB76-567880027C07
Symptom
Music cannot be played back.
Possible cause
The disc is inserted upside down.
Possible solution
Insert a CD with the label side facing up.
Moisture condensation occurs inside the unit. Wait until the moisture evaporates (approximately 1 hour).
The cabin temperature is too high.
Wait until the cabin temperature becomes
moderate.
The disc is scratched or dirty. A disc is not
always playable if it is scratched.
Wipe off any dirt from the disc.
Depending on the condition in which they are
stored, discs may become unreadable due to
deterioration (for example, keeping the discs
in the passenger compartment, etc.).
Change the disc with a deterioration-free
disc. Do not use a deteriorated disc. The label
surface of the disc may crack or chip, and the
layer of the label surface may eventually peel
off.
The compressed audio files cannot be played If both music CD files (CD-DA data) and
back.
compressed audio files (MP3 data, etc.) are
mixed on one disc, the audio compression
files cannot be played back.
Prepare a disc that includes compressed
audio files only.
The files are not named using characters that Use the character codes and the number of
are compliant with the specifications.
characters that are compliant with the specifications for folder names and file names. In
addition, always use “.MP3”, “.WMA”, “.mp3” or “.
wma” for file extensions.
It takes a long time before the music starts
playing.
The disc contains a large amount of data.
Some time may be required to check the files.
It is recommended that unnecessary folders
or any files other than compressed audio files
should not be recorded in a disc.
The sound quality is poor.
The disc is dirty.
Wipe off any dirt from the disc.
8-8 Troubleshooting guide
Symptom
Possible cause
Possible solution
No sounds are played though the CD play
time is displayed.
The system plays back the first track of the Play back music data that is recorded on a
mix mode disc. (Mix mode is a format in which track other than the first track.
data except music is recorded on the first
track and music data is recorded on one
other than the first track in a session.)
Music cuts off or skips.
The combination of writing software and
Create a disc using different writing speed
hardware might not match; or the writing
settings, etc.
speed, writing depth, writing width, etc. might
not match the specifications.
The system skips the selected track and
moves to the next track.
A non-MP3/WMA file is given an extension of Prepare MP3/WMA files.
“.MP3”, “.WMA”, “.mp3” or “.wma”.
The system plays back a file that is prohibited Prepare playable files.
due to copyright protection.
The tracks do not play back in the desired
order.
The folder locations in the disc are changed Check the settings of the writing software,
by the writing software while the files are
and create a new disc.
written in the disc.
The CD cannot be ejected.
The ignition switch is not placed in the ACC
or ON position.
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
position.
Troubleshooting guide 8-9
iPod PLAYER
AV0NJA1-4D70A092-9EC2-4F72-A4BF-D040AE970C29
Symptom
The system does not recognize an iPod.
Possible cause
Possible solution
A connector cable is not correctly connected, Connect the connector cable again. If the
or the iPod does not correctly operate.
system does not recognize the iPod after
performing this procedure above, reset the
iPod.
The iPod that is to be connected is not
compatible with the system.
Check the iPod model and firmware versions
available for the system.
The connected USB extension cable is not
compatible with the system.
Replace the USB extension cable if the
system still does not recognize the iPod after
reconnecting the cable properly a number of
times.
The cable is rapidly connected to or discon- Slowly connect or disconnect the USB cable.
nected from the USB connection port.
An iPod cannot be operated.
An iPod does not respond.
Music cannot be played back.
8-10
Troubleshooting guide
The iPod is connected to the in-vehicle audio Remove all equipment from the iPod after
system while headsets, etc. are connected to disconnecting the iPod from the system, and
the iPod.
then connect it to the system again.
The iPod is not operating normally.
Disconnect the iPod from the in-vehicle audio
system, and then connect it to the system
again.
The system plays back an album/file that
includes a particular album art.
Disconnect the iPod from the in-vehicle audio
system, and then reset the iPod. Disable the
album art, and then connect the iPod to the
system.
“iPod Menu” (page 3-31)
There are too many files in a category.
Decrease the number of files in a category
(less than 65500 files).
The shuffle function is turned on.
Turn off the shuffle function if many files are
stored on the iPod.
A connector is not connected to the iPod.
Firmly connect the connector to the iPod.
Symptom
Possible cause
Possible solution
Playback cuts out.
The sound cuts due to vibration resulting
from an unstable location of the iPod.
Place the iPod on a stable location where it
does not roll over.
Battery charge of an iPod takes longer.
Battery charge of the iPod may take longer
while an iPod is playing back.
If the iPod needs to be charged, it is
recommended to stop playing the music.
Battery charge of an iPod is unavailable.
The cable that is connected to the iPod may Check the cable currently in use.
be damaged or improperly connected.
Functions cannot be operated using an iPod
that is connected to the in-vehicle audio
system.
Sound skips.
-
The operation of an iPod must be performed
using the in-vehicle audio system after the
iPod is connected to the system.
Surrounding circumstances (noise, etc.) may This does not indicate a malfunction.
cause the sound to skip.
A USB extension cable is used.
Do not use a USB extension cable.
Troubleshooting guide
8-11
USB MEMORY
DEVICE
AV0NJA1-9B58E82E-0419-4E45-A82E-F6C87CFB97F2
Symptom
Possible cause
The system does not recognize a USB device. A USB extension cable is used.
A USB hub is used.
Possible solution
Do not use a USB extension cable.
Do not use a USB hub.
A USB device is rapidly connected to or
Slowly connect or disconnect the USB device.
disconnected from the USB connection port.
8-12 Troubleshooting guide
BLUETOOTH®
AUDIO
AV0NJA1-31B3F814-D7EA-4A60-B53A-A05CC7472680
Symptom
Registration cannot be performed.
Possible cause
Possible solution
The Bluetooth® audio device is not compatible with the in-vehicle audio system.
Check the Bluetooth® audio device Owner’s
Manual.
Bluetooth® is disabled on device.
Check that the Bluetooth® function is enabled
on device.
The PIN code is incorrect.
Check the PIN code for the Bluetooth® audio
device that is to be registered.
Check that the PIN code for the Bluetooth®
audio device is consistent with that for the invehicle audio system.
Music cannot be played back.
Playback stops.
Another Bluetooth® device is used in the
vehicle.
Turn off the other Bluetooth® device until the
registration is completed.
The Bluetooth® audio device is not compatible with the in-vehicle audio system.
Check the Bluetooth® audio device Owner’s
Manual.
The system is not set to the Bluetooth®
audio mode.
Push and select the Bluetooth®
audio mode.
“Selecting audio source” (page 3-16)
A Bluetooth® adapter is turned off.
Turn on a Bluetooth® adapter when it is used
for a Bluetooth® audio device.
The Bluetooth® audio device is not compatible with the in-vehicle audio system.
Use a device compatible with the system. Ask
a NISSAN dealer for information regarding
model compatibility.
A cellular call is active.
This is not a malfunction.
Sound may cut out when a Bluetooth® audio Push and select the Bluetooth®
device is operated.
audio mode, and then operate a function on
the touch screen display of the in-vehicle
system instead of conducting the operation
on the Bluetooth® audio device.
Troubleshooting guide
8-13
Symptom
Audio operation cannot be performed.
Possible cause
A Bluetooth® audio device that does not
support audio operations is in use.
Possible solution
Use a device compatible with the system. Ask
a NISSAN dealer for information regarding
model compatibility.
An error occurs when connecting to a Blue- Turn the power source of the Bluetooth®
tooth® audio profile.
audio player off and on, and then resume
connection with the system.
8-14 Troubleshooting guide
BLUETOOTH® HANDS-FREE
PHONE SYSTEM
AV0NJA1-BC6BB4C1-95BF-4792-A967-D8DDE888D56D
Symptom
A cellular phone cannot be registered.
Possible cause
Possible solution
The cellular phone is not compatible with the Use a cellular phone compatible with the system.
in-vehicle hands-free phone system.
Ask a NISSAN dealer for information regarding
model compatibility.
Registration of the cellular phone has been
performed incorrectly.
Check the registration procedure, and then register the cellular phone again.
A cellular phone cannot be connected or The Bluetooth® setting of the in-vehicle
Turn on the Bluetooth® setting of the system.
is disconnected after the registration is hands-free phone system is turned off.
completed.
The Bluetooth® setting of the cellular phone Turn on the Bluetooth® setting of the cellular
is turned off.
phone.
The remaining battery level of the cellular
phone is low.
Charge the battery of the cellular phone.
The wireless Bluetooth® connection may be
disrupted depending on the location of the
cellular phone.
Do not place the cellular phone in an area
surrounded by metal or far away from the invehicle hands-free phone system. Do not place
the cellular phone close to the seats or your body.
Registration of the cellular phone is not
completed.
Perform registration of the cellular phone.
A call to a particular phone number fails. If the system tries to make a call several
Turn off the cellular phone and turn it on again to
times to the same phone number (for exreset the connection.
ample: the party does not respond to the call,
the party is out of the service area, or the call
is abandoned before the party responds), the
system may reject a request to make a call to
the phone number.
Troubleshooting guide
8-15
Symptom
Possible cause
Possible solution
The system does not recognize the
The cellular phone is not compatible with the Use a cellular phone compatible with the system.
connection of a cellular phone. The
in-vehicle hands-free phone system.
Ask a NISSAN dealer for information regarding
system does not receive or make a call.
model compatibility.
The cellular phone is not connected.
Check the registration procedure, and then register the cellular phone again.
The phone operation is limited by the func- Remove any settings that are limiting use of the
tions (such as dial lock, etc.) of the registered cellular phone, and then perform registration
cellular phone.
again.
The other party cannot hear your voice. Mute function is enabled.
The other party can hear your voice, but
The cellular phone is not connected.
it cracks or cuts out.
Verify mute function is disabled.
Check the registration procedure, and then register the cellular phone again.
The fan speed of the heater/air conditioner is Decrease the fan speed of the heater/air conditoo fast.
tioner.
The ambient noise level is excessive. (For
Close the windows to shut out ambient noise.
example: heavy rain, construction sites, inside
a tunnel, oncoming vehicles, etc.)
The noise generated by driving the vehicle is Reduce the vehicle speed.
too loud.
The incoming voice volume is too loud/soft.
Adjust the volume using or <
>.
The outgoing voice volume is too loud/soft.
Adjust the volume from volume adjustment
screen.
“Volume and Beeps settings” (page 2-25)
The voice is cut out or noise is heard
during a call.
The wireless Bluetooth® connection may be
disrupted depending on the location of the
cellular phone.
Do not place the cellular phone in an area
surrounded by metal or far away from the invehicle hands-free phone system. Do not place a
cellular phone close to the seats or your body.
When a cellular phone is operated to
make a call, the hands-free function
becomes unavailable.
Some models of a cellular phone do not
switch to the hands-free mode when they
are operated to make a call.
This is not a malfunction. Make another call using
the hands-free function.
8-16
Troubleshooting guide
>/ (if equipped) on the
Siri setting is not enabled on the phone. Turn on Siri on your phone.
Models with Voice Recognition System:
Check that you are pushing and holding <
> (if equipped) instead of just
pushing the switch to initiate Siri operation.
8-18
Troubleshooting guide
Android Auto (if equipped)
AV0NJA1-6A75FEAF-7FAF-487C-9FFB-E2C40B65CC39
Symptom
Cause and Countermeasure
Cannot start Android Auto though it is connected to the The USB cable is not connected to the USB connection port. Properly connect the
vehicle.
USB cable to the USB connection port.
“USB (Universal Serial Bus) connection port and AUX (auxiliary) input jack”
(page 2-14)
[Enable after USB Connection:] is set to [Never]. Change the setting to [Always] or
[Ask].
“Android Auto settings” (page 5-12)
To activate Android Auto, touch [ ] on the Launch Bar or touch [Apps] on the
information screen and then touch [Android Auto].
“Selecting menu from Launch Bar” (page 2-15)
“Information menu” (page 5-2)
The connected device is not compatible with Android Auto. Check the compatibility requirements.
Your Android phone may not be recognized if its battery is low. Charge your
Android phone then try again.
Android Auto performance decreases. For example, slow
connectivity or slow application functionality.
or
An error message appears when trying to access
features of Android Auto. A blank screen appears when
trying to access maps.
Confirm you have a compatible Android phone, a cellular connection and an
active data plan.
Use the Android phone OEM cable to connect your phone to the USB connection
port.
Phone’s performance or cellular connection. Disconnect and reconnect your
phone.
Phone’s performance or cellular connection. Close all apps and restart them.
Phone’s performance or cellular connection. Cycle phone power off/on to restart.
Troubleshooting guide
8-19
Symptom
Cannot start voice operation using <
on the steering wheel.
Cause and Countermeasure
> (if equipped)
The USB cable may not be properly connected. Disconnect and reconnect the
USB cable.
Voice operation can not be performed while driving. Turn on appropriate settings
on your Android phone.
Models with Voice Recognition System:
Check that you are pushing and holding <
> (if equipped) instead of just
pushing the switch to initiate voice operation.
8-20
Troubleshooting guide
Siri Eyes Free (if equipped)
AV0NJA1-C0A3173E-939B-470C-AAED-0CAF1B795D9E
Symptom
Cannot access Siri Eyes Free using
<
> (if equipped) on the steering
wheel.
Cause and Countermeasure
Check if a Bluetooth® connection is established between the iPhone and the system.
Check if Siri is enabled on the device. On your phone, go to Siri setting.
Check that Siri can be accessed from the device lock screen. This can be set in the settings menu
of your phone.
Audio source does not change automatically to iPod or Bluetooth® Audio
mode.
For best results, use the native music app. Performance of music control function while using
Podcasts, Audiobook or other third party music apps may vary.
For best results, play media already stored on your device. Streaming music or playback from
cloud storage may degrade performance.
Switch the source manually.
“Selecting audio source” (page 3-16)
Play, pause, next track, previous track or For best results, use the native music app. Performance of music control function while using
play timer does not work.
Podcasts, Audiobook or other third party music apps may vary and is controlled by the device.
Cannot hear any music/audio being
played back from a connected iPhone.
Check that the audio source is set to Bluetooth® Audio or iPod mode. A USB connection is required
for iPod mode.
Models with navigation system:
Check that the audio source is set to Bluetooth® Audio or iPod mode. A USB connection is required
Cannot hear map turn-by-turn direcfor iPod mode.
tion guidance from a connected iPhone.
Cannot receive text message notifications on the vehicle audio system.
Check if notification setting is enabled on your phone.
Cannot reply to text message notifications using Siri Eyes Free.
After receiving an incoming text message, follow the on-screen guidance. Push and hold <
> (if
equipped) on the steering wheel for Siri Eyes Free operation. After Siri Eyes Free starts, speak an
appropriate command to reply to the message using Siri Eyes Free.
Troubleshooting guide 8-21
NAVIGATION (if equipped)
AV0NJA1-9CDB1CD7-F25C-4AF6-97FF-6E29E3C9EB64
BASIC OPERATIONS
AV0NJA1-63D868E1-81BC-4C67-BECA-983902BED4C1
Symptom
No image is displayed.
Possible cause
The brightness is at the lowest setting.
The display is turned off.
Possible solution
Adjust the brightness of the display.
“Display settings” (page 2-28)
Push <
> to turn on the display.
The volume of the voice guidance is too high The volume is not set correctly, or the voice
or too low.
guidance setting is turned off.
Adjust the volume of the voice guidance or
turn on the voice guidance setting.
“Volume and Beeps settings” (page 2-25)
No map is displayed on the screen.
Touch [Map] on the Launch Bar or push
.
A screen other than a map screen is displayed.
The screen is too dim. The movement is slow. The temperature in the interior of the vehicle Wait until the interior of the vehicle has
is low.
warmed up.
Some pixels in the display are darker or
brighter than others.
This condition is an inherent characteristic of This is not a malfunction.
liquid crystal displays.
Some menu items cannot be selected.
Some menu items become unavailable while Park the vehicle in a safe location, and then
the vehicle is driven.
operate the navigation system.
8-22 Troubleshooting guide
VEHICLE AV0NJA1-C0C1C898-A889-456C-A1BE-60ABF2162EC7
ICON
Symptom
Possible cause
Possible solution
Names of roads and locations differ
between 2D and 3D view.
This is because the quantity of the displayed informa- This is not a malfunction.
tion is reduced so that the screen does not become too
cluttered. There is also a chance that names of the
roads or locations may be displayed multiple times, and
the names appearing on the screen may be different
because of a processing procedure.
The location of the vehicle icon is
misaligned from the actual position.
The vehicle was transported after the ignition switch Drive the vehicle for a period of time on a
was placed in the OFF position, for example, by a ferry road where Global Navigation Satellite
or car transporter.
System (GNSS) signals can be received.
The position and direction of the vehicle icon may be
incorrect depending on the driving environments and
the levels of positioning accuracy of the navigation
system.
This is not a malfunction. Drive the vehicle
for a period of time to automatically
correct the position and direction of the
vehicle icon.
“Current vehicle location” (page 6-53)
Driving with tire chains or tires that have been replaced Drive the vehicle for a period of time (at
may result in an incorrect vehicle location display due approximately 30 km/h (19 MPH) for about
to miscalculation by the speed sensor.
30 minutes) to automatically correct the
vehicle icon position.
If this does not correct the vehicle icon
position, it is recommended you contact a
NISSAN dealer.
The map data has a mistake or is incomplete (the
vehicle icon position is always misaligned in the same
area).
Updated road information will be included
in the next version of the map data.
“How to update map data” (page 658)
When the vehicle is traveling on a new Because the new road is not stored in the map data, Updated road information will be included
road, the vehicle icon is located on
the system automatically places the vehicle icon on the in the next version of the map data.
another road nearby.
nearest road available.
“How to update map data” (page 658)
Troubleshooting guide
8-23
Symptom
Possible cause
Possible solution
The screen does not switch to the
The daytime screen was set the last time the headnight screen even after turning on the lights were turned on.
headlights.
Set the screen to the night screen mode
using <
> when turning on the
headlights.
“Display settings” (page 2-28)
The map does not scroll even when
the vehicle is moving.
The current location map screen is not displayed.
Touch [Map] on the Launch Bar or push
.
The vehicle icon is not displayed.
The current location map screen is not displayed.
Touch [Map] on the Launch Bar or push
.
8-24 Troubleshooting guide
ROUTE CALCULATION AND VISUAL GUIDANCE
AV0NJA1-1302203A-3BB3-4E27-A68F-EB2EC58942E3
Symptom
Possible cause
Possible solution
Waypoints are not included in
the auto reroute calculation.
Waypoints that have been already passed are not
included in the auto reroute calculation.
To go to that waypoint again, edit the route.
Route information is not displayed.
Route calculation has not yet been performed.
Set the destination and perform route calculation.
The vehicle is not on the suggested route.
Drive on the suggested route.
Route guidance is turned off.
Turn on route guidance.
Route information is not provided for certain types of
roads.
This is not a malfunction.
The auto reroute calculation (or Route calculations took priority conditions into considdetour calculation) suggests the eration, but the same route was calculated.
same route as the one previously suggested.
A waypoint cannot be added.
This is not a malfunction.
Twenty waypoints are already set on the route, including A maximum of 20 waypoints can be set on
ones that the vehicle has already passed.
the route. To go to 21 or more waypoints,
perform route calculations multiple times as
necessary.
The suggested route is not dis- Roads near the destination cannot be calculated.
played.
Reset the destination to a main or ordinary
road, and recalculate the route.
The starting point and destination are too close.
Set a more distant destination.
The starting point and destination are too far away.
Divide the trip by selecting one or two
intermediate destinations, and perform route
calculations multiple times.
There are time restricted roads (by the day of the week, by Select [Do Not Use Restriction Info] in the
time) near the current vehicle location or destination.
[Time Restricted Roads] setting.
“Route Preference” (page 6-33)
A part of the route is not
displayed.
The suggested route includes narrow streets.
This is not a malfunction.
Troubleshooting guide 8-25
Symptom
Possible cause
Possible solution
The part of the route that the
vehicle has already passed is
deleted.
A route is managed by sections between waypoints. If the This is not a malfunction.
vehicle passed the first waypoint, the section between the
starting point and the waypoint is deleted (it may not be
deleted depending on the area).
An indirect route is suggested.
If there are restrictions (such as one-way streets) on roads Adjust the location of the starting point or
close to the starting point or destination, the system may destination.
suggest an indirect route.
The system may suggest an indirect route because route Reset the destination to a main or ordinary
calculation does not take into consideration some areas road, and recalculate the route.
such as narrow streets.
The landmark information does This may be caused by insufficient or incorrect map data. Updated information will be included in the
not correspond to the actual
next version of the map data.
information.
“How to update map data” (page 6-58)
The suggested route does not There is no data for route calculation closer to these
exactly connect to the starting locations.
point, waypoints or destination.
8-26
Troubleshooting guide
Set the starting point, waypoints and destination on a main road, and perform route
calculation.
VOICE GUIDANCE
AV0NJA1-A3BC94B6-484D-4996-8E51-9B1AA5530FE5
Symptom
Voice guidance is not available.
Possible cause
The vehicle has deviated from the suggested route.
Possible solution
Go back to the suggested route or
request route calculation again.
Voice guidance is turned off.
Turn on voice guidance.
Route guidance is turned off.
Turn on route guidance.
The guidance content does not
The content of voice guidance may vary, depending on the Follow all traffic rules and regulations.
correspond to the actual road con- types of intersections at which turns are made.
ditions.
Troubleshooting guide 8-27
TRAFFIC INFORMATION (if equipped)
GUID-0B084932-0313-4955-88B5-DB5356637E4B
Symptom
Possible cause
Traffic information is not displayed. The traffic information setting is turned off.
Possible solution
Turn on the traffic information setting.
“Traffic information settings” (page 6-42)
The vehicle is in an area where traffic information Scroll to an area where traffic information is
is not available.
available.
The map scale is set at a level where the icons
cannot be displayed.
Check that the map scale is set at a level at which
the icons can be displayed.
“Traffic information on map” (page 6-41)
The automatic detour route search A faster route was not found, based on the road
setting is turned on, but the sugnetwork and traffic information available.
gested detour route does not avoid
congested areas.
The automatic detour search is not intended for
avoiding traffic jams. It searches for the fastest
route taking conditions such as traffic jams into
consideration. Follow the suggested route.
“Viewing traffic information” (page 6-40)
The route does not avoid a road
section with traffic information
stating that it is closed due to road
construction.
Observe the actual road conditions and follow the
instructions on the road to make a detour when
necessary. If the road is closed, use the detour
function and set the detour distance to avoid the
road section that is closed.
8-28
Troubleshooting guide
The navigation system does not avoid roads
under construction if the day and time of the
actual roadwork differs from the one that was
declared.
VOICE RECOGNITION (if equipped)
AV0NJA1-A8BC0EA8-7703-45A1-ACE6-B63B09F42786
Symptom
The system does not operate or fails to
interpret the command correctly.
Possible cause
The interior of the vehicle is too noisy.
Possible solution
Close the windows or have the other occupants be quiet.
The fan speed of the heater/air conditioner is Decrease the fan speed of the heater/air
too fast.
conditioner.
The noise generated by driving the vehicle is Reduce the vehicle speed.
too loud.
The voice command is spoken in a low voice. Speak the command in a louder voice.
The system prompts to repeat a command.
The timing of speaking a command is too
early.
Speak the command after confirming the
following: a voice guidance is announced, a
tone sounds, and an icon on the screen
changes from gray to orange.
The command is spoken too slowly.
Speak in a natural voice without pausing
between words.
Pronunciation is unclear.
Speak clearly.
The command is spoken too late after the
tone.
Speak the command within 5 seconds after
confirming the following: a voice guidance is
announced, a tone sounds, and an icon on
the screen changes from gray to orange.
An improper command is spoken.
Speak the command or a number that is
displayed on the screen.
Speak a command that is shown in the
command list.
The system does not correctly recognize a
number spoken.
Too many numbers are spoken at once.
Place a pause between the appropriate digits
for correct recognition by the system. When
speaking a phone number, place a pause
between area codes, dial codes, etc.
USB memory device cannot be operated with Depending on the device, iPhone or iPod may This is not malfunction
voice commands.
be recognized as a USB memory device.
The USB/iPod operation screen is grayed out. The audio device is not connected.
Connect an audio device to the system.
Troubleshooting guide
8-29
Symptom
Possible cause
Possible solution
An error message is displayed when trying to The track information is being processed for Song information will be loaded into the
select a track and operate USB/iPod.
registration by the system.
system when a new audio device is registered for the first time or when the song
information in the pre-registered device has
been changed. Please wait for the loading to
complete which may take a few minutes to
up to an hour.
8-30 Troubleshooting guide
A number of songs exceeding the amount
the device can contain are stored in the
connected audio device.
Decrease the number of songs stored in the
audio device.
No song is stored in the audio device.
Store songs in the connected audio device.
Storing songs with information such as artist
name, album name, song name, playlist, etc.,
will make voice recognition song search
available.
9 Index
Number
2D map ..........................................................
...
6-4, 6-6
3D map .....................................................................
...
6-7
A
About route guidance ................................
...
6-27
Adjusting settings ..........................................
...
2-18
Android Auto ........................................................
...
5-9
Apple CarPlay .......................................................
...
5-5
Audio main
buttons .......
... 3-10, 3-11, 3-12, 3-13, 3-14
Audio operation precautions ..................
...
3-2
Audio operations ............................................
...
3-16
AUX (auxiliary) input jack .........................
...
2-14
Auxiliary (AUX) devices ...............................
...
3-34
B
Bluetooth® audio ................................
...
3-9, 3-31
Bluetooth® Hands-Free
Phone System ......................................................
...
4-2
Building graphics ..............................................
...
6-7
C
Canceling route ...............................................
...
6-32
CD/USB memory device care
and cleaning ......................................................
...
3-37
Changing map .................................................
...
6-10
Changing order of destination
and waypoints ..................................................
...
6-38
Changing scale of map ................................
...
6-9
Clock settings ...................................................
...
2-26
Command list ......................................................
...
7-6
Compact Disc (CD) player ...........
...
3-3, 3-23
Compass mode display ...............................
...
6-8
Compressed audio
files (MP3/WMA/AAC) .....................................
...
3-5
Connecting Bluetooth®
Hands-Free Phone ...........................................
...
4-4
Connectings settings ..................................
...
2-23
Control buttons and touch
screen display ......................................................
...
2-2
Control panel .........
...
2-2, 2-4, 2-5, 2-6, 2-8
Current location map screen ...............
...
6-16
Current vehicle location ...........................
...
6-53
Functions disabled while driving .......
... 2-20
D
Launch Bar ..........................................................
...
2-15
Licenses ....................................................................
...
1-5
Liquid crystal display ......................................
...
2-9
Deleting stored item ....................................
...
6-48
Destination setting menu .......................
...
6-17
Displaying navigation screen ..................
...
6-3
During a call ..........................................................
...
4-5
G
Giving voice commands ..............................
...
7-2
H
Hands-free text
messaging assistant ......................................
...
4-6
How to see voice command screen ....... 7-3
I
Information menu ............................................
...
5-2
iPod player ...........................................................
...
3-28
L
M
Editing route ......................................................
...
6-36
Editing stored information .....................
...
6-44
Making a call .........................................................
...
4-4
Map Menu screen ..........................................
...
6-16
Map types ...............................................................
...
6-4
Map view settings .........................................
...
6-12
Moving map ..........................................................
...
6-9
F
N
Finding address ...............................................
...
6-21
Finding points of interest ........................
...
6-21
Navigation screen .............................................
...
6-3
Navigation settings ......................................
...
6-50
E
Number input screen ..................................
...
2-19
O
One Shot Call .......................................................
...
7-3
Online Search ....................................................
...
6-20
Options before starting the
route guidance ................................................
...
6-27
P
Phone .........................................................................
...
4-4
Phone operation ...........................................
...
5-11
Phone selection ..................................................
...
4-4
Phone settings ....................................................
...
4-9
Q
Quick Dial .............................................................
...
4-12
R
Radio ............................................................
...
3-2, 3-18
Recalculating route ......................................
...
6-36
Receiving a call ...................................................
...
4-4
Route calculation ...........................................
...
6-56
Route guidance ................................
...
6-27, 6-57
Route menu ........................................................
...
6-29
S
Safety information ................................
...
1-3, 6-3
Scrolled location map screen ..............
...
6-16
Searching from address book .............
...
6-23
Searching from
previous destinations .................................
...
6-23
Setting by phone number ......................
...
6-24
Setting city center .........................................
...
6-24
9-2
Index
Setting detour route ...................................
...
6-32
Setting from stored routes ....................
...
6-25
Setting home as destination ................
...
6-20
Setting information on map .................
...
6-15
Setting intersection ......................................
...
6-24
Setting point on map .................................
...
6-25
Setting work location
as destination ...................................................
...
6-20
Settings menu ..................................................
...
2-21
Siri Eyes Free .....................................................
...
5-13
Siri operation ........................................................
...
5-6
Split screen .........................................................
...
6-11
Starting system ...............................................
...
2-15
Start-up screen ...............................................
...
2-15
Steering wheel controls
for audio .................................................
...
3-14, 3-15
Steering wheel switches ...........
...
2-10, 2-12
Storing a location/route ..........................
...
6-42
Storing avoid area .........................................
...
6-44
Storing home location ...............................
...
6-42
Storing location ...............................................
...
6-42
Storing route .....................................................
...
6-43
System settings ...............................................
...
2-21
System voice settings ................................
...
7-11
T
Text message settings .................................
...
4-9
Touch panel operation ..............................
...
2-16
Trademarks ...........................................................
...
1-4
Traffic information settings ...................
...
6-42
Turn list ..................................................................
...
6-28
U
USB (Universal Serial Bus)
connection port ..................................
...
2-14, 3-4
USB memory device player ....................
...
3-25
V
Viewing traffic information ....................
...
6-40
Voice Prompt Interrupt ................................
...
7-3
Voice recognition ..............................................
...
7-2
Volume settings ..............................................
...
2-25